Diagnostic Manual

Trailer and Rail Edition

SR-3 Control System
Single Temperature Units
SL-400e, SLX Series, SLXe Series, SLXi Series

Revision D

July 2020 TK 56487-2-OD-EN

Introduction
This manual is published for informational purposes only. Thermo King® makes no representations warranties express
or implied, with respect to the information recommendations and descriptions contained herein. Information provided
should not be regarded as all-inclusive or covering all contingencies. If further information is required, Thermo King
Corporation Service Department should be consulted.
Thermo King’s warranty shall not apply to any equipment which has been “so installed, maintained, repaired
or altered as, in the manufacturer’s judgment, to affect its integrity.”
Manufacturer shall have no liability to any person or entity for any personal injury, property damage or any
other direct, indirect, special, or consequential damages whatsoever, arising out of the use of this manual or
any information, recommendations or descriptions contained herein. The procedures described herein should
only be undertaken by suitably qualified personnel. Failure to implement these procedures correctly may cause
damage to the Thermo King unit or other property or personal injury.

Software License
The product includes software that is licensed under a non-exclusive, non-sublicensable, terminable and limited license
to use the software as installed on the product for its intended purpose. Any removal, reproduction, reverse
engineering, or other unauthorized use of the software is strictly prohibited. Hacking the product or installing
unapproved software may void the warranty. The owner or operator shall not reverse engineer, decompile, or
disassemble the software, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation. The product may include third party software separately licensed as specified in any
documentation accompanying the product or in an about screen on a mobile application or website that interfaces with
the product.

Recover Refrigerant
N o t e : In the USA, EPA Section 609 Certification is required to work on motor vehicle air conditioning systems (MVAC).
At Thermo King®, we recognize the need to preserve the environment and limit the potential harm to the ozone layer
that can result from allowing refrigerant to escape into the atmosphere.
We strictly adhere to a policy that promotes the recovery and limits the loss of refrigerant into the atmosphere.
When working on transport temperature control systems, a recovery process that prevents or minimizes refrigerant
loss to the atmosphere is required by law. In addition, service personnel must be aware of the appropriate European
Union, National, Federal, State, and/or Local regulations governing the use of refrigerants and certification of
technicians. For additional information on regulations and technician programs, contact your local THERMO KING
dealer.
S e r v i c e T o o l s - Use the proper service tools. Gauge manifold sets should include appropriate shutoff valves or
disconnects near the end of each service line.
R e c o v e r y E q u i p m e n t - Recovery equipment must be used. Proper recovering, storing and recycling of refrigerants is
an important part of all service work.
S e r v i c e P r o c e d u r e s - Recommended procedures must be used to minimize refrigerant loss.
C o m p o n e n t s m a y b e i s o l a t e d by closing service valves and performing system pump-downs.
C o m p o n e n t s u n a b l e t o b e i s o l a t e d for service must be repaired only after refrigerant is properly recovered.

©2020 Trane Technologies TK 56487-2-OD-EN

 Introduction

Revision History
Revision A (Aug 2017) New manual due to software split. Add SLXi-DRC information.

Revision B (Mar 2018) Update software revision (DA12/7B12) information throughout manual, general updates throughout manual.
Section 3: added Limited Clutch Slip Alarm Clear to Programmable Features, delete REB Type Configured. Section 6: add
Service Procedure E01A.

Revision C (Jan 2019) Update software revision (DA20/7x20) information throughout manual, general updates throughout manual.
Section 4: add Recover HMI from Failed Flashload information. Section 5: update Alarm Code 30, 31, 33, 36, 48, 204.

Revision D (Jul 2020) Update software revision (DA25/7x25) information throughout manual, general updates throughout manual,
remove Specifications from manual (Specifications are located in applicable maintenance manual), add SLXi Local
information. Section 3: add Pharma Defrost. Section 5: update Alarm Code 29.

How To Use This Manual

Because not everyone is familiar with microprocessor based control systems, please take a few minutes to read this
page. It explains the content and structure of this manual. This will make it easier for you to find the information you
need.
Section 1 - Safety Information
This section contains the safety information for the SR-3 control system. Read this material carefully before working on
the unit.
Section 2 - Hardware Description
This section describes the SR-3 control system hardware. It identifies and locates controllers, relays, LEDs, fuses, and
other components and provides connector maps for all connectors.
Section 3 - Software Description
This section discusses the operation of the SR-3 control system software and programmable features. Each menu and
feature is discussed individually to illustrate how they are used.
Section 4 - Operation
This section explains how to operate the SR-3 control system . This information is referenced by material in Section 5
Diagnostics.
Section 5 - Diagnostics
This section explains how to diagnose units equipped with the SR-3 control system. It includes both Alarm Code
Diagnostics and Other Symptom Diagnostics. This section will reference material in Section 4 Operation and Section 6
Service Procedures.
Section 6 - Service Procedures
This section includes Service Procedures to assist the technician when servicing units equipped with the SR-3 control
system. These procedures are referenced by the diagnostic routines in Section 5 Diagnostics.
Section 7 - Service Information
This section offers service information on the basic component parts of the SR-3 control system. It includes hardware
and software history as well as interchangeability information.
Section 8 - Diagrams
This section provides a diagram index of the schematic and wiring diagrams associated with this manual and where to
locate them.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 3
Introduction

Control System Notes

The following procedures must be followed when working on units equipped with microprocessor based control
systems.
• Never use testers consisting of a battery and a light bulb to test circuits on any microprocessor based equipment.
• The unit must be turned off before connecting or disconnecting the battery.
• Any time a graded sensor is replaced, it must be calibrated in accordance with Service Procedure A15A
Temperature Sensor Grade Calibration.
• Any time the Base Controller is replaced, the following Service Procedures must be used:
– A02A Recording Existing Programmable Feature Settings
– A03A Replacement of the Base Controller
– A04A Programmable Feature Setup
• Any time welding is to be done on the unit or vehicle, Service Procedure A26A Welding on Units Equipped with
Microprocessors must be followed.

Hardware and Software

This manual covers the following hardware versions and software revisions:
• SR-3 Base Controller with Software Revision DA25 and earlier
• HMI Control Panel with Software Revision 7x25 and earlier
Availability:
The Base Controller and HMI Control Panel Software revisions are available through the Dealer Portal. Go to: https://
portal.mythermoking.com
When Base Controller and/or HMI Control Panel flash load files are downloaded from the Thermo King iService website,
the flash load files are downloaded as a *.ZIP file. When flash load files for these SR-3 applications are unzipped, there
will be three flash load files instead of the usual two.
• The traditional *.mXX and *.cXX files will be unzipped. These two files are for use when flash loading an SR-3 unit
in the traditional manner by using a data cable to connect the SR-3 unit to a computer loaded with WinTrac™
software.
N o t e : Both the *.mXX and *.cXX files must be present in order to perform a flash load using a data cable, even
though only one of them is shown by WinTrac.
• A *.FLA file will also be unzipped. This file is for use when flash loading a unit using a WinTrac configured USB
Flash Drive.
The Flashload Directory on the configured USB Flash Drive contains sub-directories for HMI and SR-3 flash load
*.FLA files. The *.FLA files must be placed in the correct directory on the flash drive using either the WinTrac
Upload > Manage Flashload Files feature or Windows Explorer.
Notes:
1. An SR-3 software controller release may have two FLA files included. This is because changes
implemented between D007 and D010 require different FLA files. For units with D007 or earlier, a FLA V1
file is needed. For units with D010 or later, a FLA V2 file is needed.
2. Trying to flashload the incorrect version FLA file to the controller will produce the following error on the
HMI: 'FILE ERROR: CORRUPT FILE'.
Installation:
• DA25 Software - Choose iService Login.
– After logging in, choose EMEA Info Central and select Home > Software Updates > Microprocessors > SR3 >
Single-Temp. The file name for the *.ZIP file containing both the traditional .mXX and .cXX files and the *.FLA
file is “DA25”.
• 7x25 Software - Choose iService Login.
– After logging in, choose EMEA Info Central and select Home > Software Updates > Microprocessors > HMI >
(8Mb > 7Bxx/7Cxx/7Dxx) or (4Mb > 7Exx). The file name for the *.ZIP file containing both the traditional .mXX
and .cXX files and the *.FLA file is “7x25”.

4 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Introduction

Flash Loading:
For additional information on flash loading software using a computer, WinTrac, and a data cable, refer to Service
Procedure A46A and A46B.
SR-3 trailer units can also flash load HMI Control Panel and Base Controller software using a WinTrac configured USB
Flash Drive. Refer to USB Flash Drive in Section 4 for details.
WinTrac Requirements:
SR-3 trailer applications require WinTrac 6.2 or later in order to access all available configurable features.
N o t e : WinTrac 5.7.1 can still be used to diagnose CargoWatch and ServiceWatch downloads from units with 7x25 and
DA25 installed.

Customer Satisfaction Survey

Let your voice be heard!
Your feedback will help improve our manuals. The survey is accessible through any internet-connected device with a
web browser.
Scan the Quick Response (QR) code or click or type the web address https://tranetechnologies.iad1.qualtrics.com/jfe/
form/SV_2octfSHoUJxsk6x?Q_CHL=qr&Q_JFE=qdg to complete the survey.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 5
Table of Contents
Section 1 - Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Danger, Warning, Caution, and Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
General Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Auto Start/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Electrical Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
High Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Other Electrical Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Controller Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Units Equipped With Telematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Remote Control Warning Nameplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Refrigerant Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Refrigerant Oil Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
First Aid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Section 2 - Hardware Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
SR-3 Control System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Control Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Microprocessor On/Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Over-Current Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
SR-3 HMI Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
HMI Control Panel Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Real Time Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
CargoWatch™ Data Logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Display Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
SR-3 HMI Control Panel Connector Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
SR-3 Base Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Base Controller Hardware Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Base Controller Software Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Real Time Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
ServiceWatch Data Logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Base Controller Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Relay Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Base Controller Fuse Size & Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Fuse F10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Fuse F15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

6 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Table of Contents

Smart FET Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

LED Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Connector Locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Connector Usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
SR-3 Base Controller Connector Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Complete SR-3 Control System with REB Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Unit Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Air Temperature Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Graded and Un-graded Air Temperature Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Dual Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Control and Display Return Air Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Return Air Sensor Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Control and Display Discharge Air Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Coil Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Ambient Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Spare 1 Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
CargoWatch™ Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Refrigeration Control Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
High Pressure Cutout Switch (HPCO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Pilot Solenoid (PS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Electronic Throttling Valve (ETV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Hot Gas Bypass Solenoid (HGB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Damper Solenoid (DS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Damper Motor (DM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Fresh Air Exchange Solenoid Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Engine Control Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Coolant Temperature Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Coolant Level Sensor (CLS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Oil Pressure Switch (LOPS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Oil Level Switch (OLS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Flywheel Sensor (FW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Intake Air Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Starter Motor (SM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Fuel Solenoid (FSH, FSP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
High Speed Solenoid (HS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Alternator Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Communication Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
CargoWatch Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
ServiceWatch Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Printer Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 7
Table of Contents

Optional Electric Standby. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Model 50 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
High Voltage Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Optional Remote Mount Power Receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Standby Power Disconnect Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Diesel/Electric Relay K5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Heater Contactor HC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Phase Detect Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
SLX Unit Electric Standby Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
TK BlueBox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Section 3 - Software Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Software Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Software Separation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
HMI Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
TemperatureWatch™ Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Maintenance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Guarded Access Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Operator Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
TemperatureWatch™ Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Main Menu Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Flash Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Language. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Data Logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Hourmeters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Pretrip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Electric Standby (Model 50 units only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Diesel Mode (Model 50 units only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Adjust Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Maintenance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Maintenance Menu Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Accessing the Maintenance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Hourmeters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

8 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Table of Contents

Telematics Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Service Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Interface Board Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Display Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Evacuation Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Software Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Set Time and Date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Refrigerant Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Unit Serial Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
NRMM Speed Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Guarded Access Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Guarded Access Menu Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Security Code Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Accessing the Guarded Access Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Leaving the Guarded Access Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Programmable Features Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Temperature Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Pressure Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Restart Unit After Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Setpoint High Limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Setpoint Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Fuel Saver II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
High Speed Pulldown. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Fresh Frozen Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Door Open Forces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Door Open Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Door Timeout Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Sleep Mode After Pretrip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Rail Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Rail Alternate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Blocked Air Chute Detect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Blocked Air Chute Temperature Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Blocked Air Chute Time to Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Blocked Air Chute Door Open Override. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Discharge Pressure Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Water Temperature Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Limited Alarm Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Remote Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
HMI Control Panel COM 1 Default Baud Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
HMI Control Panel COM 2 Default Baud Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
HMI Control Panel COM 3 Default Baud Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
High Temperature Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Local Authorization of OptiSet™ Plus Upload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Local Authorization of Flashload. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
ServiceWatch™ Logging Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Water Temp Sleep Mode Engine Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Null Restart Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 9
Table of Contents

High Ambient Discharge Pressure Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Decimal Degree Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Limited Clutch Slip Alarm Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Pharma Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Main Menu Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Add Keypad Lockout to Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Add Sleep to Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Configure Soft Key 2 on Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Configure Soft Key 3 on Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Add Temperature Units to Mode Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Keypad Lock PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Alarm Display Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Hourmeter Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Program Hourmeter Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Total Run Time Reminder # 1 Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Total Run Time Reminder # 2 Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Controller Power On Hours. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Pretrip Reminder Hours. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Engine Run Time Reminder # 1 Hours. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Engine Run Time Reminder # 2 Hours. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Electric Run Time Reminder # 1 Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Electric Run Time Reminder # 2 Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Viewable Hourmeter Setup Sub-Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Total Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Total Run Time Hours (If Model 50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Total Engine Run Hours. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Electric Run Hours (If Model 50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Total Run Time Reminder #1 Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Total Run Time Reminder #2 Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Controller On Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Pretrip Reminder Hours. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Engine Run Time Reminder #1 Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Engine Run Time Reminder #2 Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Electric Run Time Reminder #1 Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Electric Run Time Reminder #2 Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Programmable Service Due Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Service Due Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Sensor Calibration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Sensor Wire Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Control Return Air Sensor Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Control Discharge Air Sensor Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Display Return Air Sensor Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Display Discharge Air Sensor Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Spare 1 Sensor Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Cycle Sentry Setup Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

10 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Table of Contents

Cycle Sentry Amps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Cycle Sentry Battery Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Check Battery Condition Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Low Battery Voltage Timeout in Minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
CS Null Duration Timeout in Minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Defrost Setup Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Defrost Interval In Range with Fresh Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Defrost Interval Not In Range with Fresh Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Defrost Interval In Range with Frozen Setpoint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Defrost Interval Not In Range with Frozen Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Maximum Defrost Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Language Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Enable Language. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Access Code Setup Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Enter Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
OptiSet™ Plus Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
OptiSet Plus Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Temperature Profile Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
OptiSet Plus Continuous Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
High Speed Pulldown. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Fuel Saver II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Minimum Discharge Air Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Low Speed Cool to Low Speed Cool FS II Switch Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
OptiSet Plus Continuous Modulation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Controlling Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
PMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Freeze Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
High Ambient Temperature Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Low Ambient Temperature Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Floor Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
High Speed Modulation Ceiling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
High Speed Modulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
OptiSet Plus Cycle Sentry Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
MNTL Max Null Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
MOTL Min Off Timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
High Speed Pulldown. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Fuel Saver II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Minimum Ambient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Maximum Ambient. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Null Restart Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Minimum Run Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
OptiSet Plus Cycle Sentry Modulation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
MNTL Max Null Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
MOTL Min Off Timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Minimum Run Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 11
Table of Contents

Null Restart Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Floor Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Minimum Ambient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Maximum Ambient. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Sensor Configuration Menu - CargoWatch™ Data Logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
CargoWatch Sensor Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Logging Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Log Sensor for CargoWatch sensor 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Independent Sensor Name for CargoWatch sensor 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Out of Range Checking (for current sensor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Italian Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Sensor Averaging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Digital Input Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Digital In for CargoWatch digital input 1, 2, or 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Door Open Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Digital Input Name for CargoWatch digital input 1, 2, or 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Countdown Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Conservative Log Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
SOT on Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Automatic SOT at Midnight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Hardware Configuration Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Unit Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Engine Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Compressor Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
ETV Configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Electric Standby Equipped? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Electric Heat Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Electric Motor Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Diesel to Electric Auto Switch Enabled? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Electric to Diesel Auto Switch Enabled? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Unit Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
High Capacity Unit? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
High Capacity Fresh? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Defrost Motor Equipped? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Fuel Sensor Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Rear Remote Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Rear Remote Control Panel Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Pretrip/Sleep Switch Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
3rd Party Device Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Low Fuel Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Fresh Air Exchange. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
TK Telematics Fuel Level Sensor Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
TK Telematics Door Switch Enabled? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
CargoLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Refrigerant Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Section 4 - Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

12 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Table of Contents

HMI Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Control Panel Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Display Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Hard Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Display Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Turning Unit On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
If a Flash Drive is Connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
If a Language is Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Turning The Unit Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
The Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
The TemperatureWatch™ Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Changing The Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Numerical Setpoints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Named Products - OptiSet Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Both Numerical Setpoints and Named Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Changing the Setpoint - Numerical Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Changing the Setpoint - Named Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Changing the Setpoint - Both Numerical Setpoint and Named Product Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Starting the Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Starting the Electric Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Switching from Diesel to Electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Switching from Electric to Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Initiating a Manual Defrost Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Terminating a Defrost Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Selecting Cycle Sentry or Continuous Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Using the Gauges Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Gauges Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Using the Sensors Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Sensors Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Using the Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Main Menu Choices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
USB Flash Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Inserting a USB Flash Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Accessing the Flash Drive Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Downloading the ServiceWatch or CargoWatch Data Loggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Flash Loading the Base Controller or HMI Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Recover HMI from Failed Flashload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Sending OptiSet Plus Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Retrieving OptiSet Plus Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Removing a USB Flash Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Languages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Log Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 13
Table of Contents

Check Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Prevent Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Shutdown Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Pretrip Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Low Battery Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Alarm Codes When Switching Between Diesel and Electric. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Clearing Alarm Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Displaying and Clearing Alarm Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Important Alarm Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Data Logger (CargoWatch™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Hourmeters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Turn Cycle Sentry On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Select Temperature Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Fresh Air Exchange Open or Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Keypad Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Start Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Pretrip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Pretrip Test Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Conditions Where Pretrip Tests are Not Allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Pretrip Test Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Pretrip Test Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Performing a Pretrip Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Diesel/Electric Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Switching from Diesel to Electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Switching from Electric to Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Adjust Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Using the Maintenance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Entering the Maintenance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Maintenance Menu Choices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Hourmeters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Telematics Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Service Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Service Test Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Interface Board Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Interface Board Test Modes and Current Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Display Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Evacuation Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Software Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Set Time and Date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Refrigerant Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Unit Serial Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Using the Guarded Access Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Entering the Guarded Access Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

14 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Table of Contents

Rear Remote Control Panel (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Rear Remote Control Panel Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Rear Remote Control Action Set to Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Rear Remote Control Action Set to Stand By. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Reading a Typical Remote Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Remote Control Panel Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Turning the Unit On or Off (Configured for STAND BY operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Turning the Unit On and Off (Configured for RUN operation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Changing the Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Selecting Cycle Sentry or Continuous Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Displaying the Discharge Air Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Viewing and Clearing Alarm Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Starting a Manual Defrost Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Sending a Start of Trip Marker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Running a Pretrip Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Section 5 - Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
SR-3 Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Electrostatic Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Physical Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Corrective Actions As A Result Of Alarm Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
General 0-200 Series Alarm Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
00 NO ALARMS EXIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
02 EVAPORATOR COIL SENSOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
03 RETURN CONTROL AIR SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
04 DISCHARGE AIR CONTROL SENSOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
05 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
06 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
07 ENGINE RPM SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
09 HIGH EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
10 HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
11 UNIT OR ZONE CONTROLLING ON ALTERNATE SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
12 SENSOR SHUTDOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
13 SENSOR CALIBRATION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
15 CHECK INTAKE AIR HEATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
17 ENGINE FAILED TO CRANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
18 HIGH ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
19 LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
20 ENGINE FAILED TO START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
21 COOLING CYCLE CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
22 HEATING CYCLE CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
23 COOLING CYCLE FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
24 HEATING CYCLE FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
25 ALTERNATOR CHECK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
26 CHECK REFRIGERATION CAPACITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 15
Table of Contents

28 PRETRIP OR SELF CHECK ABORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

29 DEFROST DAMPER CIRCUIT CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
30 DEFROST DAMPER STUCK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
31 CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
32 REFRIGERATION CAPACITY LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
33 CHECK ENGINE RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
35 CHECK RUN RELAY CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
36 ELECTRIC MOTOR FAILED TO RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
37 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
38 ELECTRIC PHASE REVERSED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
39 CHECK WATER VALVE CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
40 CHECK HIGH SPEED CIRCUIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
41 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
42 UNIT FORCED TO LOW SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
43 UNIT FORCED TO LOW SPEED MODULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
44 CHECK FUEL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
45 CHECK HOT GAS BYPASS CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
46 CHECK AIR FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
48 CHECK BELTS OR CLUTCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
50 RESET CLOCK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
52 CHECK HEAT CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
54 TEST MODE TIMEOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
61 LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
62 AMMETER OUT OF CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
63 ENGINE STOPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
64 PRETRIP REMINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
65 ABNORMAL TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
66 LOW ENGINE OIL LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
67 CHECK LIQUID LINE SOLENOID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
68 INTERNAL CONTROLLER FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
70 HOURMETER FAILURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
74 CONTROLLER RESET TO DEFAULTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
79 INTERNAL DATA LOGGER OVERFLOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
84 RESTART NULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
85 FORCED UNIT OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
86 CHECK DISCHARGE PRESSURE SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
87 CHECK SUCTION PRESSURE SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
89 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLING VALVE CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
90 ELECTRIC OVERLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
91 CHECK ELECTRIC READY INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
92 SENSOR GRADES NOT SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
94 CHECK LOADER #1 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
95 CHECK LOADER #2 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
96 LOW FUEL LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
98 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
108 DOOR OPEN TIMEOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
111 UNIT NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
113 CHECK ELECTRIC HEAT CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

16 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Table of Contents

114 MULTIPLE ALARMS - CAN NOT RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

117 AUTO OR MANUAL SWITCH FROM DIESEL TO ELECTRIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
118 AUTO OR MANUAL SWITCH FROM ELECTRIC TO DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
120 CHECK ALTERNATOR EXCITE CIRCUIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
121 CHECK PWM/LIQUID INJECTION CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
122 CHECK DIESEL/ELECTRIC CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
127 SETPOINT NOT ENTERED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
128 ENGINE RUN TIME MAINTENANCE REMINDER #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
129 ENGINE RUN TIME MAINTENANCE REMINDER #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
130 ELECTRIC RUN TIME MAINTENANCE REMINDER #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
131 ELECTRIC RUN TIME MAINTENANCE REMINDER #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
132 TOTAL UNIT RUN TIME MAINTENANCE REMINDER #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
133 TOTAL UNIT RUN TIME MAINTENANCE REMINDER #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
134 CONTROLLER POWER ON HOURS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
135 CHECK SPARE DIGITAL INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
136 CHECK SPARE DIGITAL OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
137 DAMPER GEAR MOTOR HEATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
141 AUTO-SWITCH DIESEL TO ELECTRIC DISABLED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
145 LOSS OF CONTROLLER “ON” FEEDBACK SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
146 SOFTWARE VERSION MISMATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
148 AUTO-SWITCH ELECTRIC TO DIESEL DISABLED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
149 ALARM NOT IDENTIFIED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
150 OUT OF RANGE LOW (HMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
151 OUT OF RANGE HIGH (HMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
157 OPTISET FILE MISMATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
OptiSet File Mismatch - A Long String of Numbers is Present in Lieu of Named Products but Alarm
Code 157 is Not Present. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
158 PRIMARY (NEW) SOFTWARE FAILED TO LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
159 CHECK BATTERY CONDITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
203 CHECK DISPLAY RETURN AIR SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
204 CHECK DISPLAY DISCHARGE AIR SENSOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
252 AUTO FRESH AIR EXCHANGE DOOR (AFAED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Section 6 - Service Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
A01A - Base Controller Functional Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
A01A-1 - Base Controller Automated Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
A01B - HMI Control Panel Automated Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
A01C - HMI Control Panel Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
A02A - Recording Existing Programmable Feature Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Setup Sheet - XXxx Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
A03A - Base Controller Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
A03B - HMI Control Panel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
A04A - Programmable Feature Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
A07A - Performing a Base Controller Cold Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
A07B - Performing an HMI Control Panel Cold Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 17
Table of Contents

A15A - Setting Unit Temperature Sensor Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

A26A - Welding on Units Equipped with Base Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
A28A - Setting Unit Running Time Hourmeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
A46A - Flash Loading Base Controller Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
A46B - Flash Loading HMI Control Panel Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
A47B - Retrieving and Sending OptiSet Plus Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
A48A - Phase Detect Module Operation and Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
A49A - CargoWatch Data Logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
A50A - ServiceWatch Data Logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
D01A - Temperature Sensor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
D03A - Pressure Transducer Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
E01A - Low Voltage Disconnect Switch Operation and Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
F01A - Oil Level Switch Check and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
F05A - Oil Pressure Switch Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
F07B - Magnetic Coolant Level Sensor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
F08A - Coolant Temperature Sensor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
F09A - RPM Sensor Test and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
G03A - Electronic Throttling Valve (ETV) Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
G04A - Electronic Throttling Valve (ETV) Mechanical Operation Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
H04A - Wiring Harness Continuity Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Section 7 - Service Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
SR-3 Base Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Hardware Versions and Service Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Label Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Software Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
SR-3 HMI Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Hardware Versions and Service Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Label Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Software Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
SR-2/SR-3 Diagnostic Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
SR-3 Power On/Off Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
HMI Control Panel - Unit Not Turned On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
HMI Control Panel - Turning The Unit On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
HMI Control Panel - Turning The Unit On From A Remote Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
HMI Control Panel - Turning The Unit Off From A Remote Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
HMI Control Panel Messages/Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

18 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Table of Contents

SR-3 HMI Power Up and Power Down Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Base Controller Software Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
HMI Control Panel Software Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Section 8 - Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Diagram Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 19
Section 1 - Safety Information
Danger, Warning, Caution, and Notice
Thermo King® recommends that all service be performed by a Thermo King dealer and to be aware of several general
safety practices.
Safety advisories appear throughout this manual as required (refer to examples below). Your personal safety and the
proper operation of this unit depend upon the strict observance of these precautions.

DANGER
Example!
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
Example!
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION
Example!
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury and
unsafe practices.

NOTICE
Example!
Indicates a situation that could result in equipment or property-damage only accidents.

General Practices
DANGER
Hazard of Explosion!
Never apply heat to a sealed refrigeration system or container. Heat increases internal pressure, which might
cause an explosion resulting in death or serious injury.

DANGER
Hazardous Gases!
Refrigerant in the presence of an open flame, spark, or electrical short produces toxic gases that are severe
respiratory irritants which can cause serious injury or possible death.

DANGER
Risk of Injury!
Keep your hands, clothing, and tools clear of fans and/or belts when working on a unit that is running or when
opening or closing compressor service valves. Loose clothing might entangle moving pulleys or belts, causing
serious injury or possible death.

DANGER
Refrigerant Vapor Hazard!
Do not inhale refrigerant. Use caution when working with refrigerant or a refrigeration system in any confined
area with a limited air supply. Refrigerant displaces air and can cause oxygen depletion, resulting in
suffocation and possible death.

20 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 1 - Safety Information

DANGER
Confined Space Hazards!
Avoid engine operation in confined spaces and areas or circumstances where fumes from the engine could
become trapped and cause serious injury or death.

WARNING
Hazard of Explosion!
Never close the compressor discharge service valve when the unit is operating. Never operate the unit with
the discharge valve closed (front seated). This condition increases internal pressure, which can cause an
explosion.

WARNING
Proper Equipment Condition!
Gauge manifold hoses m ust be in good condition before using them. Never let them come in contact with
moving belts, fans, pulleys or hot surfaces. Defective gauge equipment can damage components or cause
serious injury.

WARNING
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) Required!
Always wear goggles or safety glasses when working on a unit. Refrigerant liquid, oil, and battery acid can
permanently damage your eyes. See “First Aid”.

WARNING
Equipment Damage and Risk of Injury!
Never drill holes into the unit unless instructed by Thermo King. Holes drilled into high voltage cables could
cause an electrical fire, severe personal injury, or even death.

WARNING
Risk of Injury!
When using ladders to install or service refrigeration systems, always observe the ladder manufacturer’s
safety labels and warnings. A work platform or scaffolding is the recommended method for installations and
servicing.

CAUTION
Sharp Edges!
Exposed coil fins can cause lacerations. Service work on the evaporator or condenser coils is best left to a
certified Thermo King technician.

NOTICE
Equipment Damage!
All mounting bolts must be the correct length for their applications and torqued to specification. Incorrect bolt
lengths and improper torque specifications can damage equipment.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 21
Section 1 - Safety Information

Auto Start/Stop
CAUTION
Risk of Injury!
The unit can start and run automatically any time the unit is turned on. Units start automatically in both Cycle
Sentry mode and Continuous mode. Turn the unit Microprocessor On/Off switch Off before doing inspections
or working on any part of the unit.

CAUTION
Risk of Injury!
Thermo King units may have options that allow for remote starting from a fully off state. Turn the unit
Microprocessor On/Off Switch Off before doing inspections or working on any part of the unit.

CAUTION
Risk of Injury!
Some electronic components are connected directly to un-switched battery power. All connections and
circuits labeled with a “2” prefix are directly connected to battery power. Always disconnect the unit starting
battery before servicing the unit.

Electrical Hazards
High Voltage
I m p o r t a n t : Do not move the vehicle if the power cable or the electric standby icon is illuminated.

DANGER
Hazardous Voltage!
Lethal amounts of voltage are present in some electrical circuits. Use extreme care when working on an
operating refrigeration unit.

WARNING
Hazardous Voltage!
Treat all wires and connections as if they were high voltage until a meter and wiring diagram indicate
otherwise. Only use tools with insulated handles. Never hold uninsulated metal tools near exposed, energized
conductors.

WARNING
Hazardous Voltage!
Never work alone on high voltage circuits in the refrigeration unit. Another person should be nearby to shut
off the unit and provide aid in the event of an accident.

WARNING
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) Required!
Safety glasses, rubber-insulated gloves, and cable cutters should be near your work area in the event of an
electrical accident.

WARNING
Risk of Injury!
Do not make rapid moves when working on high voltage circuits in refrigeration units. Do not grab for falling
tools because you might accidentally touch a high voltage source.

22 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 1 - Safety Information

WARNING
Hazardous Voltage w/Capacitors!
Be careful when working with electrical circuits that contain capacitors. Some capacitors hold a significant
electrical charge that might cause burns or shocks if accidentally discharged. Capacitors must be discharged
before working on electrical circuits.

Low Voltage
WARNING
Live Electrical Components!
Control circuits used in refrigeration units are low voltage (12 to 24 volts dc). However, the large amount of
amperage available can cause severe burns if accidentally shorted to ground with metal objects, such as tools.
Do not wear jewelry, watches, or rings because they increase the risk of shorting out electrical circuits and
damaging equipment or causing severe burns.

Other Electrical Considerations

Controller Service
Precautions must be taken to prevent electrostatic discharge when servicing the Controller and related components. A
potential difference less than that required to create a small spark between a finger and a doorknob can cause severe
damage to solid state components.

NOTICE
Equipment Damage!
When working with electrical circuits that contain microprocessors, always wear an ESD wrist strap and
connect the opposite end to the chassis ground or CH terminal. This precaution will prevent electrostatic
discharge from damaging circuits.

Battery
Always disconnect the negative battery terminal (-) first when removing a battery. Connect the positive terminal (+) first
when installing a battery. This is important because the frame is grounded to the negative battery terminal. If the
negative terminal is still connected, a complete circuit exists from the positive terminal of the battery to the frame.
Metal objects contacting the positive side and the frame simultaneously will cause sparks or arcing. If there are
sufficient hydrogen gases emitted from the battery, an explosion might occur, causing equipment damage, serious
injury, even death.
Always cover battery terminals to prevent them from making contact with metal components.

Welding
Precautions must be taken before welding on the unit. Refer to Service Procedure A26A Welding on Units Equipped
with Microprocessors in Section 6 for additional information.

Units Equipped With Telematics

WARNING
Risk of Injury!
Thermo King units equipped with optional 2 way communications can be turned on and off from remote
locations at any time via satellite or cellular phone. Once turned on, the units can start and run automatically
at any time.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 23
Section 1 - Safety Information

CAUTION
Risk of Injury!
Thermo King units may have options that allow for remote starting from a fully off state. Turn the unit
Microprocessor On/Off Switch Off before doing inspections or working on any part of the unit.

Some Thermo King units may be equipped with Telematics options. These options may feature 2 way communications
that include the ability to start and stop the unit from a remote location via satellite or cellular phone.

Remote Control Warning Nameplate

Units equipped with 2 way communications will feature a Warning Nameplate located next to the unit’s lower door
release.
Figure 1. Warning Nameplate on Units Equipped with 2 Way Communications

Refrigerant Hazards
DANGER
Hazardous Pressures!
Always store refrigerant in proper containers, out of direct sunlight and away from intense heat. Heat
increases pressure inside storage containers, which can cause them to burst and could result in severe
personal injury.

DANGER
Combustible Hazard!
Do not use oxygen (O2 ) or compressed air for leak testing. Oxygen mixed with refrigerant is combustible.

WARNING
Hazardous Gases!
Do not use a Halide torch. When a flame comes in contact with refrigerant, toxic gases are produced. These
gases can cause suffocation, even death.

WARNING
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) Required!
Refrigerant in a liquid state evaporates rapidly when exposed to the atmosphere, freezing anything it contacts.
Wear butyl lined gloves and other clothing and eye wear when handling refrigerant to help prevent frostbite.

NOTICE
Equipment Damage!
When being transferred, refrigerant must be in liquid state to avoid possible equipment damage.

24 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 1 - Safety Information

Refrigerant Oil Hazards

WARNING
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) Required!
Protect your eyes from contact with refrigerant oil. The oil can cause serious eye injuries. Protect skin and
clothing from prolonged or repeated contact with refrigerant oil. To prevent irritation, wash your hands and
clothing thoroughly after handling the oil. Rubber gloves are recommended.

NOTICE
Equipment Damage!
Use the correct oil in Thermo King systems to avoid damaging equipment and nullifying its warranty.

NOTICE
Equipment Damage!
Do not mix refrigerant oils. Mixing incompatible oils will damage the system .

NOTICE
Equipment Damage!
Use dedicated refrigeration equipment to prevent contaminating refrigeration systems with the wrong type of
oil or refrigerant.

NOTICE
System Contamination!
Do not expose the refrigerant oil to the air any longer than necessary. Store refrigerant oil in an approved
sealed container to avoid moisture contamination. The oil will absorb moisture, which results in much longer
evacuation times and possible system contamination.

NOTICE
Material Damage!
Wipe up spills immediately. Refrigerant oil can damage paints and rubber materials.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 25
Section 1 - Safety Information

First Aid
REFRIGERANT
• E y e s : For contact with liquid, immediately flush eyes with large amounts of water and get prompt medical
attention.
• S k i n : Flush area with large amounts of warm water. Do not apply heat. Remove contaminated clothing and shoes.
Wrap burns with dry, sterile, bulky dressing to protect from infection. Get prompt medical attention. Wash
contaminated clothing before reuse.
• I n h a l a t i o n : Move victim to fresh air and use Cardio Pulmonary Resuscitation (CPR) or mouth-to-mouth
resuscitation to restore breathing, if necessary. Stay with victim until emergency personnel arrive.
• F r o s t B i t e : In the event of frost bite , the objectives of First Aid are to protect the frozen area from further injury,
warm the affected area rapidly, and to maintain respiration.
REFRIGERANT OIL
• E y e s : Immediately flush with large amounts of water for at least 15 minutes. Get prompt medical attention.
• S k i n : Remove contaminated clothing. Wash thoroughly with soap and water. Get medical attention if irritation
persists.
• I n h a l a t i o n : Move victim to fresh air and use Cardio Pulmonary Resuscitation (CPR) or mouth-to-mouth
resuscitation to restore breathing, if necessary. Stay with victim until emergency personnel arrive.
• I n g e s t i o n : Do not induce vomiting. Immediately contact local poison control center or physician.
ENGINE COOLANT
• E y e s : Immediately flush with large amounts of water for at least 15 minutes. Get prompt medical attention.
• S k i n : Remove contaminated clothing. Wash thoroughly with soap and water. Get medical attention if irritation
persists.
• I n g e s t i o n : Do not induce vomiting. Immediately contact local poison control center or physician.
BATTERY ACID
• E y e s : Immediately flush with large amounts of water for at least 15 minutes. Get prompt medical attention. Wash
skin with soap and water.
ELECTRICAL SHOCK
Take IMMEDIATE action after a person has received an electrical shock. Get quick medical assistance, if possible.
The source of the shock must be quickly stopped, by either shutting off the power or removing the victim. If the power
cannot be shut off, the wire should be cut with an non-conductive tool, such as a wood-handle axe or thickly insulated
cable cutters. Rescuers should wear insulated gloves and safety glasses, and avoid looking at wires being cut. The
ensuing flash can cause burns and blindness.
If the victim must be removed from a live circuit, pull the victim away with a non-conductive material. Use wood, rope,
a belt or coat to pull or push the victim away from the current. DO NOT TOUCH the victim. You will receive a shock from
current flowing through the victim’s body. After separating the victim from power source, immediately check for signs
of a pulse and respiration. If no pulse is present, start Cardio Pulmonary Resuscitation (CPR). If a pulse is present,
respiration might be restored by using mouth-to-mouth resuscitation. Call for emergency medical assistance.
ASPHYXIATION
Move victim to fresh air and use Cardio Pulmonary Resuscitation (CPR) or mouth-to-mouth resuscitation to restore
breathing, if necessary. Stay with victim until emergency personnel arrive.

26 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
Section 2 - Hardware Description
General Description
DANGER
Hazardous Voltage!
Dangerous three phase AC electric power is present whenever the unit is operating in either Diesel Mode or
Electric Mode and whenever the unit is connected to a source of external standby power. Voltages of this
magnitude can be lethal. Exercise extreme caution when working on the unit.

The SR-3 control system is a self-contained temperature control unit designed for truck and trailer applications. Model
30 units are powered by a diesel engine and Model 50 units are powered by either a diesel engine or an electric motor
powered from an external electric standby power source. The unit mounts on the nose of the trailer. Defrost is by
means of hot gas.

Control System
The SR-3 Base Controller Control System consists of the following main components:
• Base Controller On/Off Switch
• Human Machine Interface (HMI) Control Panel
• SR-3 Base Controller
• Unit Sensors and Transducers
• Refrigeration Control Components
• Communication Ports
• Optional Electric Standby

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 27
Section 2 - Hardware Description

SR-3 Control System Overview

Figure 2. Control System Overview

28 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 2 - Hardware Description

Control Components
SR-3 Base Controller
The heart of the integrated SR-3 control system is the Base Controller. The SR-3 Base Controller consists of a combined
microprocessor and interface board. The SR-3 Base Controller is mounted on a molded plastic mounting base that is
secured to the back of the control box.
The SR-3 Base Controller is compatible with and may be used to replace the combined SR-2 Base Controller and
Interface Board assembly. The SR-3 Base Controller mounting base uses the same mounting hole pattern as does the
SR-2 Base Controller. The connectors on the SR-3 Base Controller are located in approximately the same positions as
they are on an SR-2 Interface Board. However, when replacing an SR-2 Base Controller/Interface Board with an SR-3
Base Controller, the wiring harness may need to be relocated slightly to reach the some of the connectors.
It is critical that the correct software be used. Single temperature applications with SR-3 Base Controllers must use Base
Controller Software Revision D0xx/DAxx.
Refer to Section 7 of this manual for additional hardware and software details and requirements.
SR-3 HMI Control Panel
System conditions are displayed and operator instructions are sent using the SR-3 HMI Control Panel. The HMI Control
Panel communicates with the Base Controller via CAN bus.
The SR-3 Control System uses essentially the same HMI Control Panel as does the SR-2 Control System. However, SR-3
HMI Control Panels feature 8 MB of memory and are marked Smart Reefer 3 on the lower front panel.
The SR-2 HMI Control Panel features 4 MB of memory. Other than memory, the SR-3 HMI Control Panel is compatible
with and may be used to replace the SR-2 HMI Control Panel.
N o t e : If the SR-2 HMI Control Panel is replaced with an SR-3 HMI Control Panel, 65xx, 66xx, 67xx, 68xx series software
must be used.
• SR-2 HMI requires 65xx, 66xx, 67xx, 68/7Exx series software.
• SR-3 HMI requires 65xx, 75/7Bxx, 76/7Cxx, 77/7Dxx, 68/7Exx series software.
• SR-3 HMI Control Panels used on SR-3 applications without USB capability must use HMI Control Panel Software
Revision 6550 or later.
• SR-3 HMI Control Panels used on SR-3 applications with USB capability must use HMI Control Panel Software
Revision 6560 or later.
Refer to Section 7 of this manual for additional hardware and software details and requirements.

1 CargoWatch Download Port

2 ServiceWatch Download Port (SLX/SLXe

Series) or USB Port (SLXi Series)

3 HMI Control Panel

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 29
Section 2 - Hardware Description

Microprocessor On/Off Switch

WARNING
Risk of Injury!
The unit can start at any time without warning. Press the OFF key on the HMI control panel and place the
microprocessor On/Off switch in the Off position before inspecting or servicing any part of the unit.

The Microprocessor On/Off Switch applies 12 volts DC control power to the Base Controller (SR-3)/Interface Board (SR-
2) at connector J4. Main power to the controls is supplied by 15 amp fuse F2.
I m p o r t a n t : Always turn the Microprocessor On/Off switch off before inspecting or working on any part of the unit.
N o t e : The Microprocessor On/Off switch disconnects power to the controller and most controller outputs. It does not
disconnect the HMI Control Panel supply power. The HMI Control Panel is directly connected to the unit starting
battery.
On SLX/SLXe/SLXi Series units, the Microprocessor On/Off switch is located on a bracket just above the diesel engine. It
can be reached by opening the engine compartment doors.
Figure 3. Microprocessor On/Off Switch

Over-Current Protection
Over-current protection is provided by a fusible link located in the positive battery cable. A 15 amp main power fuse F2
is located in the “2A/2AB” circuit.
Outputs are protected by either a fuse or Smart FET (Field Effect Transistor). All fuses are located on the Base Controller
(SR-3). Smart FETs halt current flow if an over-current condition exists and generate an alarm. The Smart FET will
resume normal operation when the alarm is cleared and current flow is within limits. Smart FETs are not field
repairable.
A polyswitch provides over-current protection for the On/Off relay. It is located just above Relay K8 (SR-3). The
polyswitch will reset automatically and is not field repairable.

SR-3 HMI Control Panel

WARNING
Risk of Injury!
The unit can start at any time without warning. Press the OFF key on the HMI control panel and place the
microprocessor On/Off switch in the Off position before inspecting or servicing any part of the unit.

The Human Machine Interface (HMI) Control Panel consists of an LCD graphics display screen and eight touch sensitive
keys.
• The four keys on the sides of the display screen are used to turn the unit on and off, initiate a manual defrost cycle,
and select the desired operating mode. These keys are designated “Hard” keys as their function is always the same.
• The function of the four keys located below the display screen change as required by the current menu. The current
function of the key is controlled by software and is displayed directly above the key. These keys are known as
software controlled keys or “Soft” keys.
• The same HMI Control Panel is used for single temperature and multi-temperature applications.

30 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 2 - Hardware Description

Figure 4. HMI Control Panel

HMI Control Panel Operation

The HMI contains a microprocessor and dedicated software. The HMI is a message center and does not directly control
the unit operation. It communicates with the Base Controller via a controller area network (CAN) connection. The HMI
displays system operating data and sends operating requests to the controller.
The display screen is used by the Base Controller to provide visual prompts and information to the operator, such as
operating mode, setpoint temperatures, gauges, hourmeter readings, and operating conditions of the diesel engine or
electric motor. The HMI also contains the CargoWatch™ Data Logger. The HMI and Base Controller communicate via a
Controller Area Network (CAN) connection.
Information can be displayed in 24 possible languages. A single HMI Control Panel software revision can display a
maximum of 11 languages. For this reason, there are a total of 4 HMI software revisions. Other than languages
supported, these software revisions are identical. The table below shows the 4 HMI Software Revisions and the
languages supported by each.

HMI Control Panel Software Languages Supported

Revision

65xx/75xx/7Bxx English, Spanish, French, German, Italian, Dutch, Portuguese, Greek, Turkish, Hebrew, Arabic

66xx/76xx/7Cxx English, Danish, Russian, Norwegian, Swedish, Finnish, Polish, Hungarian, Romanian, Bulgarian,
Czech

67xx/77xx/7Dxx English, Japanese, Chinese

68xx/7Exx Set up using Wintrac™. Suitable for use on 4Mb and 8Mb versions. Mix and Match Languages

If the HMI Control Panel is disconnected from the unit while the unit is running, the unit will shut down. When the HMI
Control Panel is reconnected the unit will not restart until the On key is pressed.
N o t e : If necessary, the HMI Control Panel can be bypassed using fuse F10. Refer to Section 2 Fuse F10.

Real Time Clock

The real time clock is located in the HMI Control Panel. The time is supplied to the Base Controller each time the unit is
turned on.
• Clock Power
The HMI Control Panel features a capacitor to provide backup power to the real time clock. This capacitor is
capable of maintaining the clock for approximately two weeks with no power connected to the unit. The
capacitor is recharged any time the HMI Control Panel is installed in the unit and a properly functioning starting
battery is connected.
If the unit starting battery is disconnected for an extended period the clock setting should be checked when the
unit is returned to service. If the HMI Control Panel is changed the clock setting should also be verified.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 31
Section 2 - Hardware Description

™ Data Logger
CargoWatch™
N o t e : For SLX/SLXe/SLXi Series Units: Two CargoWatch Data Logger sensors are included with the unit. One
CargoWatch Sensor is factory mounted in the return air inlet. The other sensor is included in the unit installation
kit and is intended to be installed in the discharge air outlet or discharge air chute. Refer to the unit Installation
Manual for additional information.
The HMI Control Panel contains the CargoWatch Data Logger. The CargoWatch Data Logger is a fully independent
temperature logger. Up to six temperature sensors and 3 digital inputs can be connected to the CargoWatch Data
Logger. The optional CargoWatch temperature sensors are separate sensors installed as required by each user. The
CargoWatch Data Logger records CargoWatch temperature sensors, unit setpoint, unit operating condition, and alarm
codes.
The Countdown and Conservative features allow the CargoWatch Data Logger to continue to log after the unit is turned
off. Refer to CargoWatch Sensor Configuration in Section 3 for details of operation.

Programmable Features
The settings of all programmable features are held in non-volatile memory in the Base Controller. The settings are
supplied to the HMI Control Panel each time the unit is turned on. If the HMI Control Panel is changed, the current
programmable feature settings will be supplied to the HMI Control Panel when the unit is turned on.

Display Heater
The HMI Control Panel is equipped with a display heater. This heater is necessary to make the display quickly visible in
cold ambient temperatures.
The HMI has its own internal temperature sensor for the display heater. The display heater is energized when the unit is
turned on and the temperature sensed by the internal sensor is below -2°C (29°F). The display heater turns off when the
temperature sensed by the internal sensor rises above 3°C (37°F). The display heater draws from 1.4 to 1.7 amps when
energized.
The colder the ambient temperature the longer it will take for the heater to make the display visible on a cold startup. It
may take 10-15 seconds for the display to appear with very cold ambient temperatures.

32 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 2 - Hardware Description

SR-3 HMI Control Panel Connector Map

HMI Control Panel Connector (arranged by pin location) HMI Control Panel Connector (arranged by use)

Pin # Wire # Description Pin # Wire # Description

1 S6P-01 CargoWatch Sensor 6 positive 22 CANH-RED1-01 HMI Control Panel CAN Bus

2 S5P-01 CargoWatch Sensor 5 positive 10 CANL-BLK1-01 HMI Control Panel CAN Bus

3 S3P-01 CargoWatch Sensor 3 positive 33 OFF HMI Control Panel Off Line

4 S1P-01 CargoWatch Sensor 1 positive 34 ON-RED2-01 HMI Control Panel On Line

6 8XP-BLK3-01 8F Power 6 8XP-BLK3-01 8F Power

7 DPD3 Data Pak Detect 3 12 BLK2-02 2P power (Note 2)

9 DPDI-01 CargoWatch Data Pak Detect 35 CH-RED3-01 HMI Control Panel chassis ground

10 CANL-BLK1-01 HMI Control Panel CAN Bus 23 SHLD HMI Control Panel shield

12 BLK2-02 2P power (Note 2) 21 RXD1-01 CargoWatch receive

12 (2P) BLK2-02 Printer port printer power (Note 2) 32 TXD1-01 CargoWatch transmit

13 S5N-01 CargoWatch Sensor 5 negative 19 COM-01 CargoWatch/Printer Port Chassis

Ground (Note 1)

14 S3N-01 CargoWatch Sensor 3 negative 9 DPDI-01 CargoWatch Data Pak Detect

15 S2N-01 CargoWatch Sensor 2 negative 20 RXD2-01 Printer port receive

16 S1N-01 CargoWatch Sensor 1 negative 31 TXD2-01 Printer port transmit

18 RXD3 Receive 3 19 COM2-01 CargoWatch/Printer Port Chassis

Ground (Note 1)

19 COM-01 CargoWatch/Printer Port Chassis Ground 29 D14-01 Printer port print

(Note 1)

19 COM2-01 CargoWatch/Printer Port Chassis Ground 12 (2P) BLK2-02 Printer port printer power (Note 2)
(Note 1)

20 RXD2–01 Printer port receive 18 RXD3 Receive 3

21 RXD1-01 CargoWatch receive 30 TXD3 Transmit 3

22 CANH-RED1-01 HMI Control Panel CAN Bus 7 DPD3 Data Pak Detect 3

23 SHLD HMI Control Panel Shield 4 S1P-01 CargoWatch sensor 1 positive

24 S6N-01 CargoWatch Sensor 6 negative 16 S1N-01 CargoWatch sensor 1 negative

25 S4N-01 CargoWatch Sensor 4 negative 27 S2P-01 CargoWatch sensor 2 positive

26 S4P-01 CargoWatch Sensor 4 positive 15 S2N-01 CargoWatch sensor 2 negative

27 S2P-01 CargoWatch Sensor 2 positive 3 S3P-01 CargoWatch sensor 3 positive

29 D14–01 Printer port print 14 S3N-01 CargoWatch sensor 3 negative

30 TXD3 Transmit 3 26 S4P-01 CargoWatch sensor 4 positive

31 TXD2-01 Printer port transmit 25 S4N-01 CargoWatch sensor 4 negative

32 TXD1-01 CargoWatch transmit 2 S5P-01 CargoWatch sensor 5 positive

33 OFF HMI Control Panel Off Line 13 S5N-01 CargoWatch sensor 5 negative

34 ON-RED2-01 HMI Control Panel On Line 1 S6P-01 CargoWatch sensor 6 positive

35 CH-RED3-01 HMI Control Panel chassis ground 24 S6N-01 CargoWatch sensor 6 negative

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 33
Section 2 - Hardware Description

Notes:
1. COM1-01 ground and COM2-01 ground are connected by a splice in the harness.
2. 2PA-01 power and 2-BLK2-01 power are connected by a splice in the harness.
Figure 5. HMI Control Panel Connector (shown from pin side)

SR-3 Base Controller

WARNING
Risk of Injury!
The unit can start at any time without warning. Press the OFF key on the HMI control panel and place the
microprocessor On/Off switch in the Off position before inspecting or servicing any part of the unit.

The heart of the integrated SR-3 control system is the Base Controller. The SR-3 Base Controller is mounted on a
molded plastic mounting base that is secured to the back of the control box and located on the rear panel of the control
box.

Base Controller Hardware Versions

For complete details of Base Controller hardware versions and software requirements, refer to Section 7.

Base Controller Software Revisions

For complete details of Base Controller software revisions and hardware requirements, refer to Section 7.

Real Time Clock

The real time clock is located in the HMI Control Panel. The system time is supplied to the Base Controller each time the
unit is turned on. If the Base Controller is changed, the clock setting will be automatically supplied to the Base
Controller when the unit is turned on. If the HMI Control Panel is changed, the clock setting must be verified.

ServiceWatch Data Logger

The Base Controller contains the ServiceWatch Data Logger. The ServiceWatch Data Logger is a diagnostic data logger.
This data logger records unit temperature sensors, unit setpoint, unit operating conditions, alarms and conditions that
exist when an alarm is set.
When diagnosing alarm codes always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac™ Service Tool.
Review the data to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are
recorded when the alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.

Programmable Features
The settings of all programmable features are held in non-volatile memory in the Base Controller. The settings are
supplied to the HMI Control Panel each time the unit is turned on. If the Base Controller is changed, all programmable
features must be reprogrammed. If the HMI Control Panel is changed, the current programmable feature settings will be
supplied to the new HMI Control Panel when the unit is turned on. Refer to Section 3 of this manual for programmable
feature details.

Base Controller Operation

The Base Controller consists of an integrated microprocessor and interface board, software, memory, inputs, and
outputs. The Base Controller also provides the interface between the controller inputs and outputs and the unit control
components. The inputs are used to supply power and system information to the Base Controller. The Base Controller

34 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 2 - Hardware Description

and software examine the status of the inputs and turn the outputs to the solenoids, valves and motor contactors on
and off as required to control the operation of the unit. The Base Controller also provides over-current and short circuit
protection for the control circuits.
The only user serviceable components on the Base Controller are the fuses and the Cold Start jumper.
The Base Controller controls the operation of the unit using control relays or Smart FETs. The relays control power to
the high amperage loads . The Smart FETs control power to the lower amperage loads such as solenoids and valves.
Each relay is individually fuse protected. The Smart FETs are self-protecting. An LED next to each relay or Smart FET is
illuminated when the relay or FET is energized by the Base Controller. With relays, the LED illuminates only when the
relay coil is energized and the relay contacts have transferred to the energized position.
Figure 6. SR-3 Base Controller

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 35
Section 2 - Hardware Description

Relay Functions
I m p o r t a n t : Do not attempt to remove the relays from the Base Controller. They are soldered in place.

Relay Function

K1 Run Relay

K2 Pre-Heat Relay

K3 High Speed Relay

K4 Damper Relay

K5 Diesel/Electric Relay

K6 Fuel Solenoid Pull-In Relay

K7 Starter Solenoid Relay

K8 Fresh Air Exchange Relay (Optional)

K9 On/Off Relay

Base Controller Fuse Size & Function

Fuse Size Function

F2 15A Power to On/Off Switch

F3 40A Power to Fuel Sol Pull-In/Starter Solenoid

F4 None No fuse

F5 60A Preheat Circuit (See Note)

F6 15A Power to Damper and High Speed Solenoids

F7 2A Switch On Power to CAN Bus

F8 5A 2A power to CAN Connector J12

F9 5A 2A power to CAN Connector J14

F10 10A Power to On Relay (Right Position)

Bypass HMI Control of Power (Left Position)

F11 10A Power to Auto Fresh Air Solenoid

F12 5A 2A power to CAN Connector J13

F13 2A Power to Remote Lights

F15 P/S On/Off Relay (See Note)

F20 2A Power to Alternator Sense

F25 7.5A Power to HPCO

F26 5A Power to REB Board (Not used on T-90 Series units)

Notes:
1. The F5 preheat fuse is a “slow blow” type fuse. It is designed for use with
the engine air pre-heater. Always replace the fuse with the TK specified
fuse. Service Parts Base Controllers are shipped without the F5 fuse.
2. The device identified as F15 is a polyswitch. This polyswitch provides over-
current protection for the On/Off relay. The polyswitch will reset
automatically and is not field repairable.

Fuse F10
There are three in-line fuse clips that allow for two configurations of the F10 fuse. The right position is the normal
position. This position has a white bar below it on the circuit board. When fuse F10 is installed in the right position,

36 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 2 - Hardware Description

control power is routed to the K9 On/Off Relay contacts. The On/Off keys on the HMI Control Panel energize and de-
energize the K9 On/Off Relay. When the K9 On/Off Relay is energized, power is supplied through the normally open K9
contacts to turn the unit on.
When fuse F10 is installed in the left position, power bypasses the K9 On/Off relay contacts and the unit will start and
run without the HMI Control Panel connected. T h i s f u s e p o s i t i o n i s f o r e m e r g e n c y b y p a s s o p e r a t i o n o n l y . Do not
operate the unit with the F10 fuse installed in the left position unless absolutely necessary.
I m p o r t a n t : If fuse F10 is installed in the left position, the unit may start and run. If the HMI Control Panel is connected
and functional, the On and Off keys will still work. The Off key will turn the unit off if fuse F10 is in the left
position, but the Base Controller will remain powered up.
I m p o r t a n t : If fuse F10 is installed in the left position and the unit is turned off using the Off key, the unit will shut down
but the Base Controller will remain powered up. Leaving the unit turned off in this manner for an extended
period may result in a dead battery.

Fuse F15
The device identified as F15 is a poly switch. This over-current device resets automatically and is not replaceable.

Smart FET Outputs

A Smart FET is a self protecting output device used for the functions shown in the table. Smart FETs halt current flow if
an over-current condition exists and generate an alarm. The Smart FET will resume normal operation when the alarm is
cleared and current flow is within limits. Smart FETs are not field repairable. A fuse is not required.

Output Function

EVA, EVB, EVC, EVD ETV Outputs

26/PS Pilot Solenoid

HG/HGS Hot Gas/Hot Gas Bypass Solenoid

LV1 Not Used

LV3 Not Used

EXC Alternator Excitation

LQI Liquid Injection Valve

LLS Not Used

GM1, GM2 Damper Gear Motor (See Note)

CIS Not Used

RTPS Not Used

PV Not Used

Note: Gear motor circuitry not present on all Base

Controllers.

LED Functions
The LED is illuminated when the associated circuit output is energized. Not all output LEDs shown are used on single
temperature trailer applications.

LED # Function LED # Function

LED 3 K2 Preheat LED 19 Liquid Injection Valve (Not Used)

LED 4 K4 Damper Solenoid LED 20 Loader Valve 3 (Not Used)

LED 5 K3 High Speed Solenoid LED 21 Heartbeat (Note 1)

LED 6 K1 Run Relay LED 22 K8 Auto Fresh Air Solenoid (Optional)

LED 7 K5 Diesel/Electric Relay LED 23 K9 On/Off Relay

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 37
Section 2 - Hardware Description

LED # Function LED # Function

LED 8 Pilot Solenoid or Condenser Inlet Solenoid LED 24 K6 Fuel Solenoid Pull-In

LED 9 Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoid/Liquid Line Solenoid LED 25 K7 Starter Relay

LED 10 Hot Gas Bypass/Loader Valve 2 LED 27 ETV-D (Note 2)

LED 11 Purge Valve (Not Used) LED 28 ETV-B (Note 2)

LED 17 Loader Valve 1 (Not Used) LED 29 ETV-A (Note 2)

LED 18 Alternator Excite LED 30 ETV-C (Note 2)

Notes:
1. The Status LED flashes once per second when the Base Controller is powered and operating normally. The Status LED flashes
several times per second during a flash load. The Status LED is on without flashing during reboot and when the Base Controller is
under test. The Status LED flashes twice within one second followed by one second off if a CAN communication error is present.
2. ETV LEDs are illuminated when the respective ETV output is energized. On applications without ETV, the LEDs may be illuminated.

Board Jumpers
Three sets of jumper pins are located on the Base Controller. Each set consists of a jumper and three pins. A white bar
next to each set of pins on the circuit board shows the usual jumper placement. For normal operation, the jumpers
must be installed as shown.
The J101 jumper is used to perform a Base Controller Cold Start. For details, refer to Service Procedure A07A. The J102
and J27 jumpers should not be moved.

J101 Cold Start Jumper and J102 Jumper J27 CAN Bus Terminator Jumper

Table 1. Jumper Functions

J27 CAN Bus Terminator – Do Not Move

J101 Cold Start Jumper

J102 Not Used – Do Not Move

38 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 2 - Hardware Description

Connector Locations

N o t e : Refer to Connector Usage for item number information.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 39
Section 2 - Hardware Description

Connector Usage
Number Connector Circuit

1 J12 CAN connection

2 J13 CAN Connection. 2P Power, Chassis Ground, and On Line are used for the optional Remote Control Panel, if
installed. Can H and Can L are not currently used.

3 J14 CAN connection to HMI Control Panel

4 J15 Connections to unit engine and damper (and defrost gear motor – if so equipped)

5 J24 “2” circuit to fuse link

6 J4 Connections to Base Controller On/Off Switch

7 J25 “2A” circuit to alternator

8 J26 “H” circuit to air intake heater

9 J3 Connections to unit Sensor Harness

10 J7 Connections to unit Main Harness

11 J23 “CH” chassis ground to unit ground plate

12 J31 USB Connector to USB Connector on Front Panel

13 J6 Connections to optional Electric Standby

14 J8 Connections to optional Remote Status Light

15 J10 RS-232 Serial Port 2 connection to optional Remote Control Panel

16 J9 RS-232 Serial Port 1 connection to ServiceWatch connector

17 J98 CAN connector for REB Connection

N o t e : Refer to the following pages for individual connector maps.

40 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 2 - Hardware Description

SR-3 Base Controller Connector Maps

Table 2. J3 - Base Controller Sensor Harness Connector - Arranged by Pin Number

Pin # Wire # Description

1 RTP-01 Control return air temperature sensor positive (blue sensor wire)

2 RTN-01 Control return air temperature sensor negative (brown sensor wire)

3 ATP-01 Ambient temperature sensor positive (blue sensor wire)

4 ATN-01 Ambient temperature sensor negative (brown sensor wire)

9 DPI-01 Signal from discharge pressure transducer (white wire) (DPT)

10 SPI-01 Signal from suction pressure transducer (white wire) (SPT)

12 2PL-01 Optional solid state fuel level sensor

13 DTN-01 Control discharge air temperature sensor negative (brown sensor wire)

14 CTN-01 Coil temperature sensor negative (brown sensor wire)

15 WTN-01 Water temperature sensor negative (brown sensor wire)

16 ST1N-01 Spare 1 temperature sensor negative (brown sensor wire)

21 RTRP-01 Display return air temperature sensor positive (blue sensor wire)

22 DTRP-01 Display discharge air temperature sensor positive (blue sensor wire)

23 FLL-01 Optional fuel level sensor

24 DTP-01 Control discharge air temperature sensor positive (blue sensor wire)

25 CTP-01 Coil temperature sensor positive (blue sensor wire)

26 WTP-01 Water temperature sensor positive (blue sensor wire)

27 ST1P-01 Spare 1 temperature sensor positive (blue sensor wire)

32 RTRN-01 Display return air temperature sensor negative (brown sensor wire)

33 DTRN-01 Display discharge air temperature sensor negative (brown sensor wire)

35 FUELN-01 Optional fuel level sensor

Figure 7. 35 Pin Sensor Harness Connector (shown from pin side)

Table 3. J7 - Base Controller to Main Harness Connector

Pin # Wire # Description

2 2-01 Power to the alternator sense circuit

3 26-01 Power to energize pilot solenoid (PS)

5 HG-01 Power to energize hot gas solenoid (HG)

11 EVC-01 To electronic throttling valve (ETV)

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 41
Section 2 - Hardware Description

Table 3. J7 - Base Controller to Main Harness Connector (continued)

Pin # Wire # Description

12 EVD-01 To electronic throttling valve (ETV)

13 SPP-02 Power to suction pressure transducer (red wire) (SPT)

14 DPP-02 Power to discharge pressure transducer (red wire) (DPT)

15 CLP-01 Power to coolant level sensor (red wire) (CLS)

16 CLS-01 Signal from coolant level sensor (white wire) (CLS)

17 PHPCO-01 Power from high pressure cutout switch (HPCO)

18 HPCO-01 Power to high pressure cutout switch (HPCO)

20 DSP-01 Power to the optional door switch (red wire) (DS)

21 DS-01 Signal from the optional door switch (white wire) (DS)

23 EVB-01 To electronic throttling valve (ETV)

24 EVA-01 To electronic throttling valve (ETV)

25 SPN-02 Ground to suction pressure transducer (black wire) (SPT)

26 DPN-02 Ground to discharge pressure transducer (black wire) (DPT)

28 20B-01 To engine low oil pressure switch (LOPS)

29 OLS-01 To engine low oil level switch (OLS)

33 EXC-01 Power to the alternator excite circuit

34 W-04 To the alternator “W” circuit

35 FS1-01 To flywheel sensor (FW)

36 FS2-01 To flywheel sensor (FW)

Figure 8. J7 Base Controller Harness Connector (shown from pin side)

Table 4. J6 - Electric Connector - Arranged by Pin Number

Pin # Wire # Description

1 7E-01 To 7EA terminal on phase select module (PSM)

2 EOL-01 To normally closed contact pin 95 on overload relay (OLR)

3 8-01 To 8 terminal on phase select module (PSM)

4 CHHV To chassis ground

5 ER-01 To ER terminal on phase select module (PSM)

6 26E-01 Power to heater contactor (HC)

42 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 2 - Hardware Description

Table 5. J8 - Remote Status Light Connector - Arranged by Pin Number

Pin # Wire # Description

1 ALM-01 To white wire on remote light option

2 8FC-01 To red wire on remote light option

3 ALPC-01 To black wire on remote light option

4 8FC-01 Option Power

Table 6. J9 - ServiceWatch Download Connector - Arranged by Pin Number

Pin # Wire # Description

1 RXD-RED1-08 To J52 controller download connector pin A

2 TXD-BLK2-06 To J52 controller download connector pin B

3 COM-BLK1-09 To J52 controller download connector pin C

4 DPD-RED2-05 To J52 controller download connector pin E

Table 7. J10 - Remote Controller Connector - Arranged by Pin Number

Pin # Wire # Description

1 RXD-BLK To Remote Controller Panel Pin 7

2 TXD-RED To Remote Controller Panel Pin 8

4 REM-ON-BRN To Remote Controller Panel Pin 6

Table 8. J12 - CAN 1 - Arranged by Pin Number

Pin # Wire # Description

1 CANL To iBOX Option

2 CANH To iBOX Option

3 SHLD To iBOX Option

4 ON To iBOX Option

5 2P To iBOX Option

6 8XP To iBOX Option

7 OFF To iBOX Option

8 CH Chassis ground to iBOX Option

Table 9. J13 - CAN 2 - Remote Controller Connector - Arranged by Pin Number

Pin # Wire # Description

1 CANL Not Used

2 CANH Not Used

3 SHLD Not Used

4 ON-ORN To Remote Controller Panel Pin 6

5 2-BLU To Remote Controller Panel Pin 3

6 8XP Not Used

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 43
Section 2 - Hardware Description

Table 9. J13 - CAN 2 - Remote Controller Connector - Arranged by Pin Number (continued)

Pin # Wire # Description

7 None Not Used

8 DRAIN/CH/GRN To Remote Controller Panel Chassis Ground Pin 7

Table 10. J14 - CAN 3 - HMI Connector - Arranged by Pin Number

Pin # Wire # Description

1 CANL-BLK1-01 To HMI Control Panel Pin 10

2 CANH-RED1-01 To HMI Control Panel Pin 22

3 SHLD To HMI Control Panel Pin 23

4 ON-RED2-01 To HMI Control Panel Pin 34

5 2-BLK2-01 To HMI Control Panel Pin 12

6 8XP-BLK3-01 To HMI Control Panel Pin 6

7 OFF To HMI Control Panel Pin 33

8 CH-RED3-01 To HMI Control Panel Pin 35

Table 11. J4 - Power Switch Connector - Arranged by Pin Number

Pin # Wire # Description

1 2AB-01 2AB Power

2 8-02 8 Power

Table 12. J5 - Power Switch Connector - Arranged by Pin Number

Pin # Wire # Description

1 8-02 8 Power

2 2AB-01 2AB Power

Table 13. J15 - Engine Connector - Arranged by Pin Number

Pin # Wire # Description

8DP-01 Power to energize fuel solenoid pull-in coil (white wire) (FSP)

8S-01 Power to energize starter solenoid (SS)

8DF Power to optional electric fuel heater

7D-01 Power to energize high speed solenoid (HS)

8D-01 Power to energize fuel solenoid hold coil (red wire) (FSH)

GM2 Power to Damper Gear Motor

GM1 Power to Damper Gear Motor

29-01 Power to energize damper solenoid (DS)

Table 14. Screw Terminal Power Connections

Terminal Wire # Description
#

J24 (2) RED From fusible link (battery power)

J25 (2A) 2A From alternator

44 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 2 - Hardware Description

Table 14. Screw Terminal Power Connections (continued)

Terminal Wire # Description
#

J26 (H) H To air intake heater or glow plugs

J23 (CH) CH Chassis Ground

Table 15. J31 - USB Connector - Arranged by Pin Number

Pin # Wire # Description

1 RED To Front Panel USB Connector

2 WHITE To Front Panel USB Connector

3 GREEN To Front Panel USB Connector

6 BLACK To Front Panel USB Connector

Figure 9. Mini Mate-N-Lok Harness 4/6/8 Pin Connectors (shown from pin side of harness connector)

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 45
Section 2 - Hardware Description

Complete SR-3 Control System with REB Installed

Unit Sensors
The sensors monitor air temperatures at various points in the system, as well as the engine oil pressure, engine oil
level, engine coolant level, engine coolant temperature, engine speed, alternator frequency, and fuel level. Refrigerant
pressures are also monitored on ETV units. Sensors are connected to the Base Controller via the J3 Sensor Connector.

Air Temperature Sensors

Graded and Un-graded Air Temperature Sensors
The dual Return Air and Discharge Air sensors are graded sensors. Sensor grading allows maximum accuracy without
the need for ice water calibration. The sensor grade (from 1L through 9H) is stamped on the sensor and must be entered
into the Base Controller when a sensor is changed, in order to properly calibrate the sensor for accurate temperature
readings. If the grade is not changed from the factory setting of 5H, Alarm Code 92 Sensor Grades Not Set will occur.
Always update the sensor grade nameplate when graded sensors are changed. The nameplate is mounted on the side
of the control box.

46 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 2 - Hardware Description

Un-graded sensors are used to measure the evaporator coil temperature and ambient temperature, since these
temperatures are not as critical as the return and discharge air temperatures.
Do not replace a graded sensor with an un-graded sensor.
Figure 10. New Style Graded Sensor

Figure 11. New Style Un-graded Sensor with Yellow Shrink Tube Marker

Dual Sensors
Dual temperature sensors are provided for both return air temperature and discharge air temperature. The sensors are
located next to each other to insure common readings. One sensor is the control sensor and the other sensor is the
display sensor. The return and discharge control sensors are used for unit control. The return and discharge display
sensors are used by the HMI Control Panel to display the temperature.

Control and Display Return Air Sensors

These sensors monitor the temperature of the air returning to the evaporator coil. The sensors are located in the return
air flow and are connected directly to the Base Controller connector J3. These sensors are graded and must be replaced
with graded sensors. The Base Controller must be calibrated to the respective grade of the installed sensor in order to
operate properly. The Control Return Air Sensor is connected to the Base Controller via the RTP and RTN wires. The
Display Return Air Sensor is connected to the Base Controller via the RTRP and RTRN wires.

Return Air Sensor Clamp

A brass clamp should be installed between the two return air sensors. This clamp increases the thermal coupling
between the sensors to provide more accurate temperature readings when the temperature is changing rapidly. Rapid
temperature changes may occur during pulldown or when the door has been opened. This clamp is not required on the
discharge air sensors.

Control and Display Discharge Air Sensors

These sensors monitor the temperature of the air leaving the evaporator coil. The sensors are located in the evaporator
discharge air path and are connected directly to the Base Controller via connector J3. These sensors are graded and
must be replaced with graded sensors. The Base Controller must be calibrated to the respective grade of the installed
sensor, in order to operate properly. The Control Discharge Air Sensor is connected to the Base Controller via the DTP
and DTN wires. The Display Discharge Air Sensor is connected to the Base Controller via the DTRP and DTRN wires.

Coil Temperature Sensor

This sensor monitors the temperature of the evaporator coil. The sensor is located on the evaporator coil header plate
and is connected directly to the Base Controller via connector J3. This is an un-graded sensor. It is connected to the
Base Controller via the CTP and CTN wires.

Ambient Temperature Sensor

This sensor monitors the ambient air temperature and is an un-graded sensor. The sensor is located in the main unit
adjacent to the roadside condenser coil and is connected directly to the Base Controller via connector J3. It is connected
to the Base Controller via the ATP and ATN wires.

Spare 1 Temperature Sensor

This optional sensor monitors a temperature as selected by the customer. This optional sensor must be installed as
required by the customer. This is a graded sensor. It is connected to the Base Controller via the STIP and STIN wires.
Alarm Code 92 Sensor Grades Not Set is not set if spare sensor grade is not set. Use a calibrated sensor as a spare and
also program the grade in the controller.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 47
Section 2 - Hardware Description

™ Sensors
CargoWatch™
The CargoWatch Data Logger is part of the HMI Control Panel. The CargoWatch Data Logger conforms to European
standard EN12830. The Data Logger supports up to six temperature sensors and four digital inputs.
The sensors used for the CargoWatch Data Logger are RTD thermistor-type sensors that differ from the sensors used
for unit control. The CargoWatch sensors are connected directly to the HMI Control Panel.
I m p o r t a n t : The CargoWatch sensors ARE NOT interchangeable with the unit temperature sensors.
CargoWatch sensors can be identified by:
• No shrink tubing over sensor barrel
• Shorter sensor barrel than unit sensors
• No sensor grades
• The sensor is not polarity sensitive
• Both wires are black
Figure 12. CargoWatch Sensor - No Shrink Tubing

CargoWatch thermistor type sensors change resistance as the temperature changes. Resistance values can be
measured using a high quality ohmmeter and are shown in the table below.
N o t e : These resistance values only apply to CargoWatch sensors.
Table 16. CargoWatch Sensor Resistance vs Temperature

°F °C Ohms °F °C Ohms °F °C Ohms

-40°F -40°C 336,487 20°F -7°C 47,070 70°F 21°C 11,944

-30°F -34°C 227,636 30°F -1°C 34,374 80°F 27°C 9,166

-20°F -29°C 166,356 32°F 0°C 32,650 90°F 32°C 7,402

-10°F -23°C 115,757 40°F 4°C 26,688 100°F 38°C 5,775

0°F -18°C 86,501 50°F 10°C 19,904

10°F -12°C 61,737 60°F 16°C 15,002

Diagnostic Procedure
1. Disconnect the sensor to be tested from the sensor harness at the 12 pin Deutsch connector in the evaporator
compartment.
2. Using a high quality meter, check the sensor resistance.
a. The sensor resistance is dependant on the sensor temperature as shown (Table 16, p. 48). The measured sensor
resistance should approximate the value shown for the current sensor temperature.
b. If the sensor resistance does not match (Table 16, p. 48), the sensor must be replaced.
3. If the resistance measured in the previous step is correct, proceed to Step 4. If the resistance measured is not
correct, replace the sensor.
4. Using a high quality meter, check the voltage at the sensor harness wires at the 12 pin Deutsch connector in the
evaporator compartment.
a. The voltage from the HMI Control Panel should be 2.5 Vdc with the sensor disconnected.
5. If the voltage measured in the previous step is correct, proceed to Step 7. If the voltage measured is not correct,
proceed to Step 6.
6. If the voltage measured in Step 4 is incorrect, unplug the 35 pin connector at the HMI Control Panel and check the
harness for shorts and open wires.
a. Perform a wiring harness continuity test and repair as required.

48 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 2 - Hardware Description

7. If the harness passes inspection, check the HMI Control Panel.

a. If the HMI Control Panel fails the test, it must be replaced.

Refrigeration Control Components

The following components are used by the Base Controller to sense conditions or control operation of the refrigeration
system. The Base Controller determines the necessary requirements by considering the setpoint, the software, the
programmable feature and OptiSet™ settings, and the information supplied by the sensors.

Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT)

This transducer supplies the compressor discharge pressure to the Base Controller. The sense wire is connected to the
Base Controller at J3 via the DPI wire. The DPP and DPN wires supply power to the sensor. This sensor is installed on
ETV equipped units only.

Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT)

This transducer supplies the compressor suction pressure to the Base Controller. The sense wire is connected to the
Base Controller at J3 via the SPI wire. The SPP and SPN wires supply power to the sensor. This sensor is installed on
ETV equipped units only.

High Pressure Cutout Switch (HPCO)

The high pressure cutout switch is located on the discharge manifold of four cylinder compressors. The switch is closed
with normal pressures and opens with excessive pressures to shut the unit down and prevent damage.

Pilot Solenoid (PS)

The Base Controller energizes (opens) the Pilot Solenoid to shift the three way valve to the heat position during heat or
defrost mode operation. The normally closed Pilot Solenoid is located near the three way valve. The pilot solenoid is
energized and LED 8 is illuminated when the Base Controller energizes the Pilot Solenoid Smart FET. This supplies
power via the 26 wire to the pilot solenoid. The circuit is protected by the Smart FET.

Electronic Throttling Valve (ETV)

The Electronic Throttling Valve is capable of opening and closing incrementally and is installed between the evaporator
and the compressor.
The ETV is controlled directly by the Base Controller Smart FET outputs. As the temperature approaches setpoint, the
ETV begins to close, throttling the suction gas returning to the compressor and thus reducing capacity. As the box
temperature approaches setpoint, the ETV becomes more nearly closed. This feature provides very smooth and steady
temperature control. The circuit is protected by the ETV Smart FETs.

Hot Gas Bypass Solenoid (HGB)

The normally closed hot gas bypass solenoid is opened during modulated cool when the temperature is very close to
setpoint. This diverts hot gas from the compressor discharge line, through the open hot gas solenoid to the evaporator
distributor, to further reduce cooling capacity. The valve also opens if the suction pressure is too low. This valve is
supplied on ETV equipped units only. The hot gas solenoid is energized and LED 10 is illuminated when the Base
Controller energizes the Hot Gas Solenoid Smart FET. This supplies power via the HGB wire to the hot gas solenoid.
The circuit is protected by the Smart FET.

Damper Solenoid (DS)

A damper solenoid is used to open and close the defrost damper doors. Damper solenoids are used on most US
domestic units. The Base Controller for units with damper solenoids is different than the one used with defrost damper
motors. Refer to Section 7 for more information.
The damper solenoid is energized and LED 4 is illuminated when the Base Controller energizes the K4 Damper Relay.
The K4 Damper Relay normally open contacts supply power via the 29 wire to the damper solenoid. The circuit is
protected by the 15 amp fuse F6.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 49
Section 2 - Hardware Description

Damper Motor (DM)

European SLX units use hermetically sealed defrost damper gear motors to open and close the defrost damper door.
The Base Controller for units with damper solenoids is different than the one used with defrost damper motors. Refer to
Section 7 for more information.

Fresh Air Exchange Solenoid Option

N o t e : SB units only. Applicable to HMI software revision 7576 and 7590 and later, and Base Controller software revision
D006, D026, and D040 and later.
An optional Fresh Air Exchange Feature is available. This allows fresh outside air to be drawn into the trailer and the
interior air to be exhausted. This feature is beneficial when hauling loads that release gas as they ripen, such as
potatoes.
The Fresh Air Exchange feature should be used exactly as specified by the customer and with fresh loads only. Using
the Fresh Air Exchange feature with frozen loads will result in poor refrigeration performance, excessive defrost cycles
and may set refrigeration capacity Alarm Codes.
A solenoid is used to open and close the Fresh Air Exchange Door. The Fresh Air Exchange door will only be open when
the unit engine is running, as it is held in the open position by the Fresh Air Exchange Solenoid. The door will close
when the engine shuts down to preserve unit battery life. The setting of the Fresh Air Exchange door will survive power
off / power on cycles - if the door is set “Open” by the operator, it will continue to open any time the engine is running
until it is set “Close” by the operator.
If installed and enabled, the Fresh Air Exchange is opened and closed from the Mode Menu. Refer to Fresh Air
Exchange in Section 4 for details.

Engine Control Components

The following components are used by the Base Controller to sense conditions and control operation of the diesel
engine (or electric motor, if present).

Coolant Temperature Sensor

This sensor monitors the temperature of the coolant in the diesel engine. It is located on the diesel engine thermostat
housing and is connected to the Base Controller via the J3 connector WTP and WTN wires.

Coolant Level Sensor (CLS)

This sensor monitors the engine coolant level. It is located on the radiator expansion tank. The magnetic reed switch
consists of a press-in miniature reed switch and a captive magnetic float inside the radiator expansion tank. If the
coolant level is low for a specified period of time, a low coolant condition is assumed to exist. The switch is connected
to the Base Controller connector J3 via the CLS and CLP wire. The switch is closed with adequate coolant level and
open with low coolant level.

Oil Pressure Switch (LOPS)

The normally closed low oil pressure switch monitors the oil pressure of the diesel engine. It is located on the engine
side of the unit frame. It is connected to the Base Controller via J3 connector 20B and CH wires. The switch is open
when the oil pressure is adequate.

Oil Level Switch (OLS)

The normally open oil level switch monitors the oil level in the diesel engine. It is located above the oil pan on the door
side of the engine. It supplies information on the oil level to the Base Controller via the J3 connector OLS wire. The
switch is closed when the oil level is low.

Flywheel Sensor (FW)

This sensor monitors the RPM of the diesel engine. The flywheel sensor is located on the door side of the engine just
under the starter. It supplies engine speed information to the Base Controller connector J3 via the FS1 and FS2 wires.

Intake Air Heater

The intake air heater is located at the inlet to the intake manifold of the diesel engine. The intake air heater is energized
and LED 3 is illuminated when the Base Controller energizes the K2 Preheat Relay. The K2 Preheat Relay normally open

50 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 2 - Hardware Description

contacts supply power via the H wire to the intake air heater to preheat the engine before starting. The circuit is
protected by the 60 amp fuse F5.

Starter Motor (SM)

The starter motor is located on the door side of the engine. The starter motor is energized and LED 25 is illuminated
when the Base Controller energizes the K7 Starter Relay. The K7 Starter Relay normally open contacts supply power via
the 8S wire to the starter solenoid to crank the engine. The circuit is protected by the 40 amp fuse F3.

Fuel Solenoid (FSH, FSP)

The fuel solenoid is located at the rear of the injector pump and is used to start and stop the flow of fuel to the diesel
engine during diesel mode operation. The fuel solenoid features two coils, a pull-in coil and a hold coil. The pull-in coil
transfers the fuel solenoid to the open position. The hold coil maintains the fuel solenoid in the open position.
• The hold coil is energized in Diesel Mode when the Base Controller energizes the K1 Run Relay. LED 6 is illuminated
when the Run Relay is energized and the contacts have transferred. The K1 Run Relay normally open contacts
supply power from the 8 wire thru the normally closed Diesel/Electric relay to the 8D wire to energize the fuel
solenoid hold coil. The circuit is protected by the 7.5 amp fuse F25.
• The pull-in coil is momentarily energized and LED 24 is momentarily illuminated in Diesel Mode when the Base
Controller energizes the K6 Fuel Solenoid Pull-in Relay for two seconds. The K6 Fuel Solenoid Pull-in Relay normally
open contacts supply power via the 8DP wire to the fuel solenoid pull-in coil to positively open the fuel solenoid.
The circuit is protected by the 40 amp fuse F3.

High Speed Solenoid (HS)

The high speed (throttle) solenoid is located behind the fuel injection pump. The high speed solenoid is energized and
LED 5 is illuminated when the Base Controller energizes the K3 High Speed Relay. The K3 High Speed Relay contacts
supply power to the 7D wire to the high speed solenoid to enable high speed operation. The circuit is protected by the
15 amp fuse F6.

Alternator Frequency
Alternator frequency is monitored by the microprocessor via the “W” wire. When a unit equipped with optional Electric
Standby is running in Diesel Mode, the ratio between the engine RPM and alternator frequency is monitored. If these
values are not in the proper ratio, it is an indication that drive belt slippage is occurring. If this occurs, Alarm Code 48 is
set as a Shutdown Alarm.

Communication Ports
The SR-3 features communication ports. On SL/SLX/SLXe Series units, the CargoWatch port is located on the control
panel and the ServiceWatch port is located inside the control box. On SLXi Series units, the CargoWatch port is located
on the control panel and the ServiceWatch port is located inside the engine bay above the engine. The port inside the
control box may be swapped with one of the ports on the control panel if required by the end user.

CargoWatch Port
The CargoWatch port is used to download the CargoWatch Data Logger and to flash load software to the HMI Control
Panel. It is located on the Control Panel.

USB Port
A Universal Serial Bus (USB) port is provided on certain units. If installed, it is located on the unit control panel for SLXi
Series units and inside the engine bay above the engine for SLX/SLXe Series units. If a USB Flash Drive is connected to
the Control Panel USB connector, this menu item allows the operator to select the desired Flash Drive function.
I m p o r t a n t : The Flash Drive must be properly configured and the desired features must be enabled using the Wintrac
Service Tool.
Using a properly configured and enabled flash drive, the following functions may be available:
• Download the ServiceWatch Data Logger
• Download the CargoWatch Data Logger
• Flash load Base Controller Software

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 51
Section 2 - Hardware Description

• Flash load HMI Control Panel Software

• Send OptiSet Plus Files
• Retrieve OptiSet Plus Files

ServiceWatch Port
The ServiceWatch port is used to download the ServiceWatch data logger and to flash load software to the Base
Controller.

Printer Port
This port is used to print trip records from the CargoWatch Data Logger.

Optional Electric Standby

N o t e : Model 50 units only.
The Electric Standby option allows the unit to be operated on either the diesel engine or external electric power. The
units are supplied to operate on 230 or 400 Vac three phase power. Units to be operated on 400 Vac are equipped with a
step-down transformer to reduce the voltage from 400 Vac to 230 Vac. The 230 Vac is used to run the blowers while in
electric mode.
N o t e : 200 Vac option also available.

Model 50 Features
DANGER
Hazardous Voltage!
Dangerous three phase AC electric power is present whenever the unit is operating in either Diesel Mode or
Electric Mode and whenever the unit is connected to a source of external standby power. Voltages of this
magnitude can be lethal. Exercise extreme caution when working on the unit.

The following features are standard equipment on units equipped with Electric Standby:
• A u t o m a t i c D i e s e l / E l e c t r i c S e l e c t i o n - The unit can be programmed to automatically switch to electric operation
when a power cord is connected and the standby power is switched on. The unit can also be programmed to
automatically switch back to diesel power if the standby power is switched off or fails. The HMI Control Panel will
prompt for electric or diesel switchover if the respective auto-switch feature is not enabled.
N o t e : Auto-switch from electric to diesel is not recommended when the unit is running in electric mode indoors or
when below deck on a ferry.
N o t e : The unit will automatically switch to Cycle Sentry when the unit is manually switched or auto-switched to
electric mode.
• A u t o m a t i c O v e r l o a d R e s e t - The overload relay resets automatically after the motor cools. When the overload
trips, it interrupts power to the motor contactor coil.
• E l e c t r i c H e a t - Both hot gas and electric heat is utilized on model 50 units. The electric heaters are also used during
defrost.
• A u t o m a t i c P h a s e C o r r e c t i o n - The control system features two motor contactors. One of the contactors is
energized by the phase detection module to verify correct motor rotation, regardless of phase rotation of the
incoming power. The motor contactors are also mechanically interlocked.
• L o w V o l t a g e D e t e c t i o n - The phase detection modulation will not allow the unit to run if the supply voltage is too
low.
• S i n g l e P h a s e P r o t e c t i o n - The phase detection modulation will not allow the unit to run if it detects a single phase
condition.

High Voltage Components

The high voltage enclosure or tray contains the motor contactors, overload relay, heater contactor, and phase select
module used to operate the drive motor on units equipped with Electric Standby. The contactors are controlled by +12
volt dc control signals from the Base Controller. The units utilize a high voltage tray located inside the unit control box.

52 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 2 - Hardware Description

Optional Remote Mount Power Receptacle

An optional Remote Power Receptacle is available. This Remote Power Receptacle is located and installed as specified
by the customer. If an Optional Remote Power Receptacle is installed, a Standby Power Disconnect Switch is required in
the high voltage enclosure for safety reasons.

Standby Power Disconnect Switch

A Standby Power Disconnect Switch is installed on all Electric Standby equipped units featuring the Remote Mount
Power Receptacle. The Standby Power Disconnect Switch is located in the high voltage enclosure.

Diesel/Electric Relay K5
The Diesel/Electric Relay K5 is present on all units. If the Electric Standby option is not present or if the unit is running in
Diesel Mode, control power is routed through the Diesel/Electric Relay normally closed contacts.
The Diesel/Electric Relay is energized and LED 7 is illuminated when the Base Controller requests Electric Mode
operation. The K5 Diesel/Electric Relay normally open contacts supply power to the 7E circuit to enable Electric Mode
operation.

Heater Contactor HC
The heater contactor is used to supply standby power to the electric heaters during heat and defrost mode electric
operation. The heater contactor is energized and LED 5 is illuminated when the Base Controller energizes the K3 High
Speed Relay during electric mode operation. The K3 High Speed Relay Smart FET supplies chassis ground via the 26E
wire to the heater contactor. The circuit is protected by the Smart FET.

Phase Detect Module

The phase detect module is designed to monitor three phase voltages from 160 volts AC to 510 volts AC. The phase
detect module detects missing phases, automatically corrects phase rotation, and provides low voltage protection.
Refer to Service Procedure A48A in Section 6 for operation and diagnostics.

SLX Unit Electric Standby Components

These components are located near the top of the unit control box.

SR-2 SR-3

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 53
Section 2 - Hardware Description

TK BlueBox
The TK BlueBox communication device is available as standard on new SLXi Series units and as an option on certain
other units. If present, it will offer real-time information and two-way communication.
A Maintenance Menu feature called Telematics Status is available that allows the user to check for possible telematics
status alarms. Telematics status alarms differ from standard unit alarms; they do not appear as alarms on the HMI main
screen if there is an issue with the TK BlueBox. The user is required to access the Maintenance Menu and select
Telematics Status to determine if status alarms are activated.
The status alarms are listed below. Refer to the TK BlueBox Diagnostic Manual (TK 56391) for complete information and
diagnostic procedures.

T1 SIM Not Inserted T6 Check GPS Antenna T11 iBox System Issue

T2 Check SIM PIN T7 No GPS Fix T12 Check Backup Battery

T3 Check APN Configuration T8 Data Delayed to TracKing™ TT99 Telematics System Issue

T4 Check GSM Antenna T9 CAN Communication Issue

T5 No GSM Coverage T10 Check iBox™ Third Party

54 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
Section 3 - Software Description
Software Operation
The software is a very complex set of instructions used by the Base Controller and HMI Control Panel to control the
refrigeration system and interface with the operator. The Base Controller and HMI Control Panel microprocessors
examine the conditions of all the inputs and compare them to the instructions contained in the software. The outputs
are then energized as specified by the software instructions.
There is no way to determine from the schematic or wiring diagrams what conditions will cause the unit to operate in a
particular mode. This decision is made by the software after examining all the input conditions and setpoint. However,
operating mode can generally be deduced from the existing conditions. As an example, if a 2°C (35°F) setpoint is
selected and the box temperature, as indicated by the return air sensor is 16°C (60°F), the unit should operate in Cool
mode when turned on.
N o t e : For the most accurate software information, refer to the applicable software related Service Bulletin.
The SR-3 system utilizes the following software:
• Base Controller software D0xx/DAxx.
• HMI Control Panel software 65/75/7Bxx, 66/76/7Cxx, 67/77/7Dxx, 68/7Exx.
Base Controller and HMI Control Panel software updates are flash loaded using the Wintrac™ Service Tool. To check
the Base Controller or HMI Control Panel software revisions, refer to Section 4. For software revision details, refer to
Section 7.

Software Separation
Due to the difficulty in managing the increasing number of unit configurations and diverging platforms, Thermo King
has decided to separate the software between SB Series and SLX/SLXe/SLXi Series trailer platforms. This will help to
reduce the development timelines and software scopes for future trailer units.
DA00 and 7B00 are the first software revisions with this separation. They are based on D091 and 75C2 software
revisions but with additional changes/features.
Figure 13. Trailer Software Split (Example)

HMI Menu Structure

The basic HMI Control Panel menu structure consists of the Standard Display, TemperatureWatch™ Display, Main
Menu, Maintenance Menu, and Guarded Access Menu. See the following for a general description of each menu and
feature. Refer to Section 4 for complete operating instructions.

Standard Display
The Standard Display shows the zone return air temperature and setpoint. The Standard Display or the
TemperatureWatch Display is shown when the unit is operating normally. All other menus are accessed from the
Standard Display.
• The box temperature is usually return air temperature, but can be discharge air temperature if some features are
enabled.
• The setpoint for each zone can be changed and Zone 2 and Zone 3 can be turned on and off using the soft key
located below each zone display.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 55
Section 3 - Software Description

• If a zone is turned off, the display for that zone will show OFF instead of the setpoint for that zone.
• The readings of the unit gauges and temperature sensors can be shown from the Standard Display using the
GAUGES and SENSORS soft keys unless these keys have been assigned different functions from the Guarded
Access > Main Menu.
• If a USB Flash Drive or a computer is connected to the unit via a USB Port, a USB Icon will appear in the display.

™ Display
TemperatureWatch™
The TemperatureWatch Display shows the return air temperature and setpoint using large numbers that allow unit
conditions to be checked from a distance. If there are no alarms other than Log Alarms present, the TemperatureWatch
Display will appear 2½ minutes after the last key is pressed. Press any soft key to return to the Standard Display.

Main Menu
The Main Menu consists of informational and operational functions intended for the unit operator. The Main Menu is
directly accessible from the Standard Display using the MENU Soft Key. The Menu Soft Key is at the bottom right of the
Standard Display.

Maintenance Menu
The Maintenance Menu consists of informational, operational, control, and diagnostic functions used to help the
service technician maintain and diagnose the unit. The Maintenance Menu is indirectly accessible from the Main Menu.

Guarded Access Menu

The Guarded Access Menu consists of programmable features that configure the unit, set sensor grades, enable
options, and allow the customer to tailor unit operation to their particular requirements. The CargoWatch data logger is
configured from this menu. The Guarded Access Menu is indirectly accessible from the Maintenance Menu.

Operator Features
The Thermo King SR-3 control system features many special operator functions. These functions are available from the
Standard Display. A brief explanation of each menu is included here. For complete details, refer to Section 4.

Standard Display
The Standard Display is the default display that appears if no other display function is selected. The Standard Display
shows the box temperature and setpoint. The box temperature is usually return air temperature, but can be discharge
air temperature if some features are enabled. The Standard Display soft keys provide direct operator access to change
the setpoint and to select the Gauges Menu, Sensors Menu, or Main Menu. The Gauges and Sensors Soft Keys may be
assigned different functions at the user’s discretion. If a USB Flash Drive or a computer is connected to the unit via a
USB Port, a USB Icon will appear in the display.

• Setpoint Change
The setpoint menu can be directly accessed from the Standard Display using the Setpoint soft key.
• Gauges
The unit Gauges Menu can be directly accessed using the Gauges Soft Key from the Standard Display. If desired
this key can be assigned a different function from the Guarded Access > Main Menu. If the Gauges Key is
reassigned, the Gauges Menu is available from the Main Menu. For a list of gauges available, refer to Section 4.
• Sensors
The unit Sensors Menu can be directly accessed using the Sensors Soft Key from the Standard Display. If
desired this key can be assigned a different function from the Guarded Access > Main Menu. If the Sensors Key
is reassigned, the Sensors Menu is available from the Main Menu. For a list of sensors available, refer to Section
4.
• Main Menu
The unit Main Menu can be directly accessed using a soft key from the Standard Display. For a list of Main Menu
functions, refer to Section 4.

56 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 3 - Software Description

™ Display
TemperatureWatch™
The TemperatureWatch display will not appear if any Check, Prevent, or Shutdown Alarms are present or if the
CargoWatch -15°C Alarm is active. If the TemperatureWatch display is active and any of these alarm conditions occur,
the display will return to the Standard Display. If a Shutdown Alarm is present, the display will flash. This provides a
quick method to check for units that may have an alarm set.
If a USB Flash Drive or a computer is connected to the unit via a USB Port, a USB Icon will appear in the display.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 57
Section 3 - Software Description

Main Menu
Figure 14. Main Menu Overview and Features

58 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 3 - Software Description

Main Menu Features

The Main menu allows the operator to check other unit conditions, change operating modes, and perform other
operator functions. The Main Menu is accessed from the Standard Display by means of the Menu soft key. The sub-
menus shown below may be available. For additional details, refer to Section 4.

Flash Drive
If a USB Flash Drive is connected to the Control Panel USB Flash Drive Port (if present), this menu item allows the
operator to select the desired Flash Drive function.
I m p o r t a n t : The Flash Drive must be properly configured and the desired features must be enabled using the WinTrac™
Service Tool.
Using a properly configured and enabled Flash Drive, the following functions may be available:
• Download the ServiceWatch Data Logger
• Download the CargoWatch Data Logger
• Flash load Base Controller Software
• Flash load HMI Control Panel Software
• Send OptiSet Plus Files
• Retrieve OptiSet Plus Files
N o t e : For Flash Drive details, refer to the WinTrac Service Tool Help Menu.

Language
If more than one language is enabled, this menu item allows the operator to select a language from a list of up to 11
languages at one time. All subsequent displays are shown in the selected language. Four different language packages
with a total of 24 languages are available. English is the default language and is provided in each of the packages. For
additional details, refer to Section 4.

Alarms
The Alarms display allows the operator to display any existing alarms. The operator can also clear most alarms from
this menu.
A list of Alarm Codes including diagnostic procedures for each code is presented in Section 5.
N o t e : Some alarms are clearable in Guarded Access only. Alarms with this feature will not provide a soft key “Clear”
function. Refer to Section 4 for additional details.

Gauges
The Gauges Menu allows the operator to display operating information such as coolant level and temperature, engine
RPM, battery amps, battery volts, and suction and discharge pressure. The I/O selection under Gauges indicates the
named outputs as either On or Off. Gauges can also be viewed from the Service Test Mode and Interface Board Test
Mode displays. For additional details, refer to Section 4.
N o t e : This menu contains the same information as the Standard Display Gauge Soft Key Menu.

Sensors
The Sensors Menu allows the operator to display the reading of all unit temperature sensors as well as the calculated
temperature differential. CargoWatch Data Logger sensors can also be displayed. For additional details, refer to Section
4.
N o t e : This menu contains the same information as the Standard Display Sensors Soft Key Menu.

Data Logger
This menu allows the operator to send a Start of Trip marker to the ServiceWatch and CargoWatch Data Loggers. It can
also be used to print the contents of the CargoWatch Data Logger.
The unit can also be programmed such that every time the setpoint is changed a Start of Trip Marker is sent to the
ServiceWatch and CargoWatch Data Loggers.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 59
Section 3 - Software Description

ServiceWatch and CargoWatch information can be downloaded and viewed by connecting a computer loaded with the
WinTrac Service Tool software.
ServiceWatch and CargoWatch information can also be downloaded by connecting a properly configured and enabled
Universal Flash Drive to the USB Flash Drive Port (if present) on the unit Control Panel. The Flash Drive is connected to
a computer loaded with the WinTrac Service Tool software to save and view the information. For Flash Drive details,
refer to the WinTrac Service Tool Help Menu.

Hourmeters
The Hourmeters menu allows the operator to view the unit hourmeters that have the view feature enabled in the
Guarded Access Menu. If the view feature for a particular hourmeter is not enabled, that hourmeter cannot be viewed
from the Main Menu. For additional details, refer to Section 4.
N o t e : All active hourmeters are available for viewing in the Maintenance Menu.

Mode
The Mode Menu allows the operator to change the unit operating modes if allowed. Not all modes may appear
depending on the settings selected from the Guarded Access Menu. For additional details, refer to Section 4.
• Turn Off Cycle Sentry Mode/Turn On Cycle Sentry Mode - If Cycle Sentry Mode is turned Off, the unit runs in
Continuous Mode.
• Select temperature displays in either degrees Fahrenheit or degrees Celsius (if enabled).
• Open or close the optional Fresh Air Exchange vents (if feature is installed and enabled)
• Allow Keypad Lockout to be selected (if enabled).
• Start Sleep Mode (if enabled).

Pretrip
A Pretrip Test is used to confirm unit operation. This menu allows a Pretrip Test to be initiated by the operator. If the
test is started with the engine or motor off, a full test including the non-running amp checks and the running
performance tests are performed. If the test is started with the engine or motor running, only the running tests are
performed. Test results are reported as PASS, CHECK, or FAIL. For additional details, refer to Section 4.

Electric Standby (Model 50 units only)

If the Electric Standby option is present and the Diesel to Electric Auto-switch feature is set NO, this feature allows the
operator to manually select electric mode operation. This feature does not appear if the unit does not have the optional
Electric Standby or if the Diesel to Electric Auto-switch feature is set YES. For additional details, refer to Section 4.

Diesel Mode (Model 50 units only)

If a unit equipped with electric standby is running in electric mode and the Electric to Diesel Auto-switch feature is set
NO, this feature allows the operator to manually select diesel mode operation. This feature does not appear if the unit
does not have optional Electric Standby or if the Electric to Diesel Auto-switch feature is set YES. For additional details,
refer to Section 4.
N o t e : Auto-switch from electric to diesel is not recommended when the unit is running in electric mode indoors or
when below deck on a ferry.

Adjust Brightness
This menu allows the operator to adjust the HMI Control Panel display backlight intensity as required by local
conditions. If desired, the backlight can also be turned off. For additional details, refer to Section 4.

Time
This menu allows the operator to view the unit time and date. The time and date cannot be changed from this menu.
The time and date is loaded from the HMI Control Panel to the Base Controller each time the unit is turned on. For
additional details, refer to Section 4.

60 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 3 - Software Description

Maintenance Menu
Table 17. Maintenance Menu Features (7B20/DA20)
Maintenance Menu Maintenance Menu
1 of 3 2 of 3

Hourmeters - View and Reset Time Sensors

Total Hours Control Return Air Temperature
Total Run Time Hours Display Return Air Temperature
Engine Hours Control Discharge Air Temperature
Electric Run Hours Display Discharge Air Temperature
Total Run Time Reminder #1 Hours Temperature Differential
Total Run Time Reminder #2 Hours Evaporator Coil Temperature
Controller Power On Hours Ambient Air Temperature
Pretrip Reminder Hours Spare 1 Temperature
Engine Run Time Reminder #1 Hours Log Sensor 1
Engine Run Time Reminder #2 Hours Log Sensor 2
Electric Run Time Reminder #1 Hours Datalogger Sensor 3 Temperature
Electric Run Time Reminder #2 Hours Datalogger Sensor 4 Temperature
Datalogger Sensor 5 Temperature
Gauges Datalogger Sensor 6 Temperature
Coolant Temperature Board Temperature Sensor
Coolant Level
Oil Pressure Alarms
Oil Level Display all alarms
Amps Clear most alarms
Battery Voltage
Engine RPM Telematic Status
Fuel Level Sensor Display all Alerts
Discharge Pressure Help
Suction Pressure Telematics Mode
ETV Position GSM Registration Status
I/O (Input/Output State) GPRS/Data Registration Status
High Speed Relay GPRS/Data Attached Status
Run Relay Signal Strength
Run Relay Feedback Telematics SIM Number
Alternator Excite Output Telematics Serial Number
Defrost Damper Telematics Firmware Version
Heat Output
Alternator Frequency Service Test
Fresh Air Exchange Output Test with Unit Running?
Diesel/Electric Relay (50 only) Off
Electric Ready Input (50 Only) Null
Electric Overload (50 only) High Speed Cool
Hot Gas Bypass (ETV only) Low Speed Cool
Door Open Timeout (OFF) Low Speed Heat
High Speed Heat
Defrost
Cool Bypass
Mod Cool /HGB
Modulation Cool
Modulation Heat

Not all menu features may appear 7B20/DA20 SR-3 Trailer S\T

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 61
Section 3 - Software Description

Table 18. Maintenance Menu Features (7B20/DA20)

Maintenance Menu
3 of 3

Interface Board Test

Preheat Relay
Buzzer
Run Relay
Alternator Excite Output
Heat Output
Damper Output
Indicator Light
Alarm Light
Diesel/Electric Relay
Electric Heat (optional)
High Speed Relay
Hot Gas Bypass Valve

Display Self Test

LCD Test
Keypad Test
Backlight Test
Brightness Test
Buzzer Test
Heater Output
Serial E2
Datalog Flash
RTC Update

Evacuation Test
Connect Battery Charger

Software Revision
Display Software Rev
Controller Software Rev
Supervisor Software Revision

Set Time and Date

Hour
Minutes
Date
Month
Year

Unit Serial Number (SLXi only)

(GLWxxxxxxx)

Refrigerant Type (SLX/SLXi only)

Not Set

NRMM Speed Calibration (SLXi NRMM only)

Not all menu features may appear

7B20/DA20 SR-3 Trailer S\T

Maintenance Menu Features

The Thermo King control system features many special technician functions. These functions are available from the
Maintenance Menu. A brief explanation of each menu is included here.
N o t e : For complete details, refer to Section 4.

Accessing the Maintenance Menu

The Maintenance Menu is accessible from the Main Menu. From the Standard Display press the MENU key. From the
first Main Menu display (either Alarms or Language) press and hold both the EXIT key and the key with no label above it
for five seconds. After five seconds, the HMI will display the Maintenance Menu.

62 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 3 - Software Description

Hourmeters
This menu allows the technician to view all the active unit hourmeters, even if the Main Menu view has been disabled.
The Maintenance Menu Hourmeter Display also allows the technician to reset the time on hourmeters with a
programmed time limit.

Gauges
The Gauges Menu allows the technician to display operating information such as coolant level and temperature, engine
RPM, battery amps, battery volts, suction and discharge pressure. The I/O selection under Gauges indicates the named
outputs as either On or Off. Some Gauges can also be viewed from the Service Test Mode and Interface Board Test
Mode displays.
N o t e : This menu contains the same information as the Standard Display Soft Key Menu and Main Menu > Gauges
Menu.

Sensors
The Sensors Menu allows the technician to display the reading of all unit temperature sensors as well as the calculated
temperature differential. CargoWatch Data Logger sensors can also be displayed.
N o t e : This menu contains the same information as the Standard Display Soft Key Menu and Main Menu > Sensors
Menu.

Alarms
The Alarms display allows the technician to display any existing alarms. The technician can also clear most alarms from
this menu.
A complete list of Alarm Codes including diagnostic procedures for each code is presented in Section 5.
N o t e : Some alarms are clearable in Guarded Access only. These alarms will not provide a Clear Soft Key if displayed
from the Main Menu or Maintenance Menu. Refer to Section 4 for additional details.

Telematics Status
The Telematics Status Menu allows the technician to view any existing status messages from the TK BlueBox. Up to
three messages will be displayed in order of severity. The messages will self-clear after the TK BlueBox detects the
problem has been corrected. Refer to Section 4 for details.

Service Test Mode

The Service Test Mode Menu allows the unit to be forced to a known set of operating conditions in diesel or electric
mode, regardless of setpoint or temperature sensor inputs. Service personnel can use this mode to troubleshoot the
system under defined operating conditions. Service Test Mode can be used with the unit running or non-running. Any
Shutdown Alarms that are present must be cleared before Service Test Mode is available. Refer to Section 4 for
complete details.

Interface Board Test

Interface Board Test Mode allows individual relays or outputs to be energized. This permits service personnel to
troubleshoot individual circuits under known conditions. Interface Board Test Mode can only be used with the unit in a
non-running condition. If Interface Board Test Mode is entered with the diesel engine or electric motor running, the
engine or motor will be shut down. Any Shutdown Alarms that are present must be cleared before Interface Board Test
Mode is available. Refer to Section 4 for complete details.

Display Self Test

This menu allows the technician to perform a series of built in tests on the HMI Control Panel.

Evacuation Test
The Evacuation Test allows a full system evacuation to be performed. All normally closed valves are opened to allow
the entire system to be completely evacuated before charging with refrigerant. If present, the ETV will be fully opened.
If the battery voltage falls below acceptable limits, the operator is prompted to connect a battery charger to maintain
sufficient battery voltage to hold all necessary valves open during the procedure. If the voltage from the battery charger

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 63
Section 3 - Software Description

rises above acceptable limits, the controller will be turned off to prevent damage to the electronics and/or system
components.

Software Revision
The Software Revision Menu shows the software revision of the HMI Control Panel software, Base Controller software,
and the Supervisor software.

Set Time and Date

The Set Time and Date Menu allows the system time and date to be checked and changed as required. The time and
date is loaded from the HMI Control Panel to the Base Controller each time the unit is turned on.

Refrigerant Type
The Refrigerant Type feature allows the user to configure the unit refrigerant type so that it can be displayed in the
Maintenance Menu. Unit Model must be configured as SLX or SLXi.

Unit Serial Number

N o t e : SLXi unit models only.
The Unit Serial Number can be set for display in the Maintenance Menu using WinTrac 6.0 or later.

NRMM Speed Calibration

N o t e : SLXi unit models only.
To support the calibration of engine speed settings on SLXi unit models with the next generation NRMM engine
(engine type TK486VMGS5), a new maintenance menu mode has been created (Refer to SB 1217). NRMM Speed
Calibration mode shall appear in the maintenance menu for any SLXi unit model configured with TK486VMGS5 engine.

64 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 3 - Software Description

Guarded Access Menu

Table 19. Guarded Access Menu Features (7B25/DA25)
Guarded Access Menu Guarded Access Menu
1 of 4 2 of 4

Security Code (if enabled) Alarms

Enter Access Code Display all alarms
Clear most alarms
Programmable Features
Temperature Units (F/C) Hourmeter Setup
Pressure Units (PSIG) Program Hourmeter
Restart Unit After Shutdown (Enabled) Total Run Time Reminder #1 Hours (Off)
Setpoint High Limit (80°F/27°C) Total Run Time Reminder #2 Hours (Off)
Setpoint Low Limit (-20°F/-29°C) Controller Power On Hours (Off)
Fuel Saver II (Enabled) Pretrip Reminder Hours (Off)
High Speed Pulldown (Enabled) Engine Run Time Reminder #1 Hours (Off)
Fresh Frozen Range (15°F/-9°C) Engine Run Time Reminder #2 Hours (Off)
Door Open Forces (Log Only) Electric Run Time Reminder #1 Hours (Off)
Door Open Timeout (1:00) Electric Run Time Reminder #2 Hours (Off)
Door Timeout Alarm (Disabled) Viewable Hourmeter Setup
Sleep Mode After Pretrip (Disabled) Total Hours (Disabled)
Rail Option (Disabled) Total Run Time Hours (Enabled)
Rail Alternate (Disabled) Engine Hours (Enabled)
Blocked Air Chute Detect (Disabled) Electric Run Hours (Enabled)
Temperature Differential (5.0°F/2.8°C) Total Run Time Reminder #1 Hours (Disabled)
Time to Alarm (0:30) Total Run Time Reminder #2 Hours (Disabled)
Door Open Override (Disabled) Controller Power On Hours (Disabled)
Discharge Pressure Setpoint (415 PSI) Pretrip Reminder Hours (Disabled)
Water Temperature Setpoint (210°F/99°C) Engine Run Time Rem #1 Hours (Disabled)
Limited Alarm Restarts (Disabled) Engine Run Time Rem #2 Hours (Disabled)
Remote Device (Disabled) Electric Run Time Rem #1 Hours (Disabled)
COM 1 Default Baud Rate (1200) Electric Run Time Rem #2 Hours (Disabled)
COM 2 Default Baud Rate (9600) Program Service Due Date
COM 3 Default Baud Rate (9600) Engine Run Time Service Due Date (Disabled)
High Temperature Defrost (Disabled)
Local Authorization of OS+ Upload (Enabled) Sensor Calibration
Local Authorization of Flash Load (Enabled) Control Return Air Sensor Grade (5H)
ServiceWatch Logging Intervals (1 Minute) Control Discharge Air Sensor Grade (5H)
Water Temp Sleep Mode Engine Start (30°F/-1°C) Display Return Air Sensor Grade (5H)
Fresh Null Restart Temperature (5°F/2.8°C) (SLXi only) Display Discharge Air Sensor Grade (5H)
Frozen Null Restart Temperature (5°F/2.8°C) (SLXi only) Spare 1 Sensor Grade (5H)
High Ambient Discharge Pressure Control (disabled) (SLX & SLXi only)
Decimal Degree Setpoint (No) (SLXi only) Cycle Sentry Setup
Limited Clutch Slip Alarm Clear (Enabled) Cycle Sentry Amps Level (2)
Limited Clutch Slip Alarm Clear Occurrences (3) Battery Sentry Voltage Level (12.6)
Pharma Defrost (Disabled) Check Battery Condition Alarm (Enabled)
Low Battery Voltage Timeout in Minutes (30)
Main Menu Configuration CS Null Duration Timeout in Minutes (5)
Add Keypad Lockout to Mode Menu (Disabled)
Add Sleep to Mode Menu (Disabled) Defrost Setup
Config Soft Key 2 on Standard Display (Gauges) Defrost Interval In Range w Fresh Setpoint (6)
Config Soft Key 3 on Standard Display (Sensors) Defrost Interval Not In Range w Fresh Setpoint (4)
Add Temperature Units to Mode Menu (Disabled) Defrost Interval In Range w Frozen Setpoint (6)
Keypad Lock PIN (No Code) Defrost Interval Not In Range w Frozen Setpoint (4)
Maximum Defrost Duration (45)

Not all menu features may appear 7B25/DA25 SR-3 Trailer S\T

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 65
Section 3 - Software Description

Table 20. Guarded Access Menu Features (7B25/DA25)

Guarded Access Menu Guarded Access Menu
3 of 4 4 of 4

Language Setup Unit Configuration

HMI Rev 7Bxx HMI Rev 7Cxx HMI Rev 7Dxx Engine Type (Yanmar 2.1/TK486VMGS5)
English English English Compressor Type (Recip)
Spanish Danish Japanese ETV Configured (Yes)
French Russian Chinese Electric Standby Equipped? (Yes)
German Norwegian Electric Heat Option (Yes)
Italian Swedish HMI Rev 7Exx Electric Motor Type (14 HP Type, 24 HP Type)
Dutch Finnish Mix and Match Diesel to Electric Autoswitch Enabled? (No)
Portuguese Polish Languages Electric to Diesel Autoswitch Enabled? (No)
Greek Hungarian Hybrid Unit? (No)
Turkish Romanian Unit Model (SL-400, SLX-100, SLX-200, SLX-300, SLX-400, SLX-LDB,
Hebrew Bulgarian SLX-FERRY, SLX-WHISPER PRO, SLXi-100, SLXi-200, SLXi-300, SLXi-
Arabic Czech 400, SLXi-300 WHISPER PRO, SLXi-DRC, SLXi Local)
High Capacity Unit? (No)
High Capacity Fresh? (No)
Access Code Setup Defrost Motor Equipped? (No)
Enter Access Code Fuel Sensor Type (None)
Rear Remote Control (None)
OptiSet Plus Rear Remote Control Action (Stand By)
OptiSet Plus Reset Pretrip/Sleep Switch Options (Disabled)
Temperature Profile Selection (Numeric Setpoint) 3rd Party Device Control (None, COM 1, COM 2)
Low Fuel Shutdown (Disabled)
Sensor Configuration (CargoWatch) Fresh Air Exchange (Disabled)
Logging Interval (15 Minutes) TK Telematics Fuel Level Sensor Enabled? (Disabled)
Log Sensor 1 (On) TK Telematics Door Switch Enabled? (Disabled)
Independent Sensor #1 Name (Log Sensor 1) Cargo Link (Disabled)
Out of Range Checking (Off) Refrigerant Type (Not Set) (SLX & SLXi only)
Low (-10.8°F/-6°C)
High (10.8°F/6°C)
Italian Option - Available with Sensor 1 only (Off)
Sensor Averaging (Off)
Log Sensor 2 (On)
Independent Sensor #1 Name (Log Sensor 2)
Out of Range Checking (Off)
Low (-10.8°F/-6°C)
High (10.8°F/6°C)
Sensor Averaging (Off)
Log Sensor 3 (Off) Same features as Sensor 2 if On
Log Sensor 4 (Off) Same features as Sensor 2 if On
Log Sensor 5 (Off) Same features as Sensor 2 if On
Log Sensor 6 (Off) Same features as Sensor 2 if On
Digital In 1 (On)
Door Open Logging (On)
Digital Input #1 Name (Digital Input #1)
Digital In 2 (Off) Same as Digital Input 1 if On
Digital In 3 (Off) Same as Digital Input 1 if On
Countdown Timer (Off)
Conservative Log Count (Off)
SOT on Setpoint (Disabled)
Automatic SOT at Midnight (Disabled) Not all menu features may appear

7B25/DA25 SR-3 Trailer S\T

Guarded Access Menu Features

N o t e : The Guarded Access Menu allows the programmable unit features to be configured to user requirements.
The features presented in this section contain the following information:
• Control Rev: The controller software release in which the feature was first implemented.
• HMI Rev: The HMI software release in which the feature was first implemented.
• Choices: The selections that are available for the feature.
• Factory Set: Default setting from factory.
• Exceptions: Special considerations for use of the feature.
• Description: A brief description of the feature and its use.

66 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 3 - Software Description

For complete details, refer to Section 4 of this manual.

Security Code Protection

A security code can be set to restrict access to the Guarded Access Menu. If a security code is set, the technician will be
prompted to enter the correct code when accessing the Guarded Access Menu. The security code is defaulted to No
Code.

Accessing the Guarded Access Menu

From the Standard Display press the MENU key. The controller will display the Main Menu. From the first Main Menu
display (either Language or Alarms) press and hold both the EXIT key and the key with no label above it for five
seconds.
After five seconds, the controller will display the Maintenance Menu. Press the NEXT key until the Set Time and Date
Menu appears. From the Set Time and Date Menu, press and hold both the EXIT key and the key with no label above it
for five seconds.
The controller may display a Security Code challenge. If a Security Code has been set, the operator is prompted to enter
the correct code using the “+” and “-” keys. When the correct code is set, press the YES key to enter the Guarded
Access Menu. If the correct Security Code is not entered, access to the Guarded Access Menu will be denied.
If no Security Code has been set, the controller will enter the Guarded Access Menu directly.
Bypassing the Security Code
If a Security Code is set and the Guarded Access Menu must be accessed, the Security Code can be bypassed by
entering “4444”.

Leaving the Guarded Access Menu

When leaving the Guarded Access Menu, the Base Controller will automatically turn off and restart to configure the
changes that may have been made. This power cycle is termed a controller “warm restart”.

Programmable Features Menu

The Programmable Features Menu allows overall unit operation to be configured to specific end user requirements.
These features are set to factory defaults when shipped, but can easily be changed to suit the end user’s needs.
Programmable features are designed to allow the user to customize some unit operating parameters without using
OptiSet™ Plus.
I m p o r t a n t : If a feature has been programmed in OptiSet Plus, the HMI will display “Programmed in OptiSet Plus” and
cannot be updated from this menu.

Temperature Units
Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices FAHRENHEIT or CELSIUS

Factory Set SB Units: FAHRENHEIT

SLX Units: CELSIUS

Exceptions The setting selected is used for all ranges.

Description The controller can be set to display temperatures in either degrees FAHRENHEIT or degrees CELSIUS.

Pressure Units
Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices PSIG, KPa, or BARS

Factory Set PSIG

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 67
Section 3 - Software Description

Exceptions

Description The controller can be set to display system refrigerant pressures in PSIG, kPa, or BARS.

Restart Unit After Shutdown

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ENABLED, DISABLED, or CONTINUOUS

Factory Set ENABLED

Exceptions Use the CONTINUOUS option for rail applications only.

Description Standard restart alarms become permanent shutdown alarms after several attempts to start and run. The CONTINUOUS
feature is designed for rail applications where the unit runs unattended or is inaccessible for service. It allows unlimited
restart attempts to be made if the following restart alarms occur:
• Alarm Code 10 High Discharge Pressure
• Alarm Code 18 High Engine Coolant Temp
• Alarm Code 63 Engine Stopped
• Alarm Code 82 High Compressor Temp
If restarts are disabled, the unit will shut down on the first alarm event. The following differences exist between a Standard
Restart and a Continuous Restart alarm:
• Standard Restart alarms force a permanent shutdown if the alarm occurs a pre-determined number of times (usually
three). Continuous Restart alarms allow an unlimited number of restarts for the four alarm codes listed above.
• Standard Restart alarms typically use a 15 minute timer before a restart is allowed. Continuous Restart alarms use a 1-
hour timer before a restart is allowed.
• With Continuous Restart alarms ETV Head Pressure Setpoint is lowered based on the alarm type and number of
occurrences.

Setpoint High Limit

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices Maximum is 32°C (90°F) Minimum is Setpoint Low Limit

Factory Set 27°C (80°F)

Exceptions If OptiSet Plus is active, the HMI Control Panel will display [Programmed in OptiSet Plus] and this feature cannot be changed
from the Guarded Access Menu. The Setpoint High Limit setting selected is used for all ranges.

Description Setpoint High Limit allows the upper setpoint limit to be set to a maximum of 32°C (90°F) in one degree increments. The
minimum setting is determined by the setting of Setpoint Low Limit. If the driver attempts to select a setpoint higher than
the Setpoint High Limit, the display will show Setpoint Limit, indicating that the selected Setpoint High Limit has been
reached. Setting Setpoint High Limit and Setpoint Low Limit to the same temperature results in a single setpoint
temperature available.

Setpoint Low Limit

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices Minimum is -34°C (-30°F) Maximum is Setpoint High Limit

Factory Set -29°C (-20°F)

Exceptions If OptiSet Plus is active, the HMI Control Panel will display [Programmed in OptiSet Plus] and this feature cannot be changed
from the Guarded Access Menu. The Setpoint Low Limit setting selected is used for all ranges.

Description Setpoint Low Limit allows the lower setpoint limit to be set to a minimum of -34°C (-30°F) in one degree increments. The
maximum setting is determined by the setting of Setpoint High Limit. If the driver attempts to select a setpoint lower than
the Setpoint Low Limit, the display will show Setpoint Limit, indicating that the selected Setpoint Low Limit has been
reached. Setting Setpoint High Limit and Setpoint Low Limit to the same temperature results in a single setpoint
temperature available.
Setpoint temperatures lower than -32°C (-25°F) should only be used when absolutely required by the load.

68 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 3 - Software Description

Fuel Saver II
Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set ENABLED

Exceptions If OptiSet Plus is active the HMI Control Panel will display [Programmed in OptiSet Plus] and this feature cannot be changed
from the Guarded Access Menu.

Description If Fuel Saver II is ENABLED, and the box temperature changes a predetermined amount from setpoint in Cycle Sentry Mode
operation, or if the box temperature indicates a need for high speed in Continuous Mode operation, the unit will first run in
low speed. An 8-minute timer is started and the control sensor air temperature is monitored. As long as the temperature
falls (in cool mode operation) or rises (in heat mode operation) a specified amount before the timer expires, the 8-minute
timer is reset and low speed operation continues. If the temperature has not changed the pre-determined amount when the
timer times out, high speed operation is resumed if allowed. This provides fuel savings by delaying high speed operation, yet
assures that the temperature continues to fall or rise as required to reach setpoint.
If the unit switches to high speed from FS-II, the unit will run in high speed until setpoint is reached. If FS-II is DISABLED,
high speed cool and high speed heat are allowed with no delay.
The FS-II feature does not apply to modulation operation.

High Speed Pulldown

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set ENABLED

Exceptions If OptiSet Plus is active, the HMI Control Panel will display [Programmed in OptiSet Plus] and this feature cannot be changed
from the Guarded Access Menu.

Description This feature allows High Speed Pull Down to be ENABLED or DISABLED. If High Speed Pull Down is ENABLED, the unit will run
in high speed on initial start until setpoint is reached in both cool and heat mode. If High Speed Pull Down is DISABLED, the
unit will switch to low speed cool when the return air temperature is below low speed switch point value plus setpoint.
Note: There is a two minute delay on initial startup before high speed operation is allowed.
If Fuel Saver II is ENABLED, there may be a delay before high speed operation is allowed.
This feature does not apply to modulation operation.

Fresh Frozen Range

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices -4°C (24°F) or -9°C (15°F)

Factory Set -9°C (15°F)

Exceptions If OptiSet Plus is active, the HMI Control Panel will display [Programmed in OptiSet Plus] and this feature cannot be changed
from the Guarded Access Menu. The setting selected is used for all ranges.

Description One set of general control specifications is used when operating in the Fresh range, and another set of general operating
specifications is used when operating in the Frozen range. This feature allows the line between Fresh and Frozen ranges to
be selected as either -9°C (15°F) or -4°C (24°F). All setpoints less than or equal to this value will be treated as frozen
ranges. All setpoints greater than this value will be treated as Fresh ranges.
The Frozen setpoint range is from the limit of the Setpoint Limit Low setting to the Fresh Frozen range setting. The Fresh
setpoint range is from the limit of the Fresh Frozen range +1 degree to the setpoint high limit setting.
When programming OptiSet Plus, no range may include both Frozen and Fresh range setpoints. This value is the high value
of the last frozen range programmed. The next range programmed will start at this value + 1 degree depending on the
selection made above. Changing this feature will reset all OptiSet Plus range values to default.

Door Open Forces

Control Rev D026 and later

HMI Rev 7576 and later

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 69
Section 3 - Software Description

Choices LOG ONLY, UNIT NULL, or HIGH SPEED LOCKOUT

Factory Set LOG ONLY

Exceptions If OptiSet Plus is active, the HMI Control Panel will display [Programmed in OptiSet Plus] and this feature cannot be changed
from the Guarded Access Menu. The optional door switch must be installed.

Description This feature allows the Door Open action to be set. If this feature is set to LOG ONLY, the door opening will be logged after
four seconds but the unit will continue to run. Door openings are logged in both the CargoWatch and ServiceWatch data
loggers. The door switch must be open or closed for four seconds before the event is logged to prevent false readings.
If this feature is set to UNIT NULL, the base controller shuts the unit down and logs the door opening four seconds after the
door is opened. If the unit is in defrost when the door is opened, the defrost cycle will be completed before the unit shuts
down. If the Door Open Timeout feature has been set for a door open time, the unit will restart and run if the time specified
by Door Open Timeout is exceeded. The unit will continue to run even if the door is still open. The event is logged in both the
CargoWatch and ServiceWatch data loggers.
If this feature is set to HIGH SPEED LOCKOUT, high speed operation is locked out and the unit will run in low speed only. If
the Door Open Timeout feature has been set for a door open time, the unit will return to normal operation and run in high
speed if needed when the time specified by Door Open Timeout is exceeded. The event is logged in both the CargoWatch and
ServiceWatch data loggers.

Door Open Timeout

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices 1:00 to 4:00 (Hours) in 10 Min Increments or OFF

Factory Set OFF

Exceptions If OptiSet Plus is active, the HMI Control Panel will display [Programmed in OptiSet Plus] and this feature cannot be changed
from the Guarded Access Menu. The optional door switch must be installed. Only appears if the DOOR OPEN FORCES feature
is set to UNIT NULL or UNIT NULL – NO ALARM.

Description This feature allows the unit to restart if the door open time exceeds the set limit.
Door Open Timeout can be set to OFF or for a time limit from 1 to 4 hours, in 10-minute increments. If set to OFF, the unit will
remain off until the door is closed. If the Door Open Timeout feature has been set for a door open time, the unit will restart
and run and Alarm Code 108 Door Open Timeout will be set as a Check Alarm if the time specified by Door Open Timeout is
exceeded. The unit will continue to run even if the door is still open. The event is logged in both the CargoWatch and
ServiceWatch data loggers.

Door Timeout Alarm

Control Rev D026 and later

HMI Rev 7576 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set DISABLED

Exceptions The optional door switch must be installed and the Door Open Timeout must be set for a door open time.

Description This feature allows the door open timeout alarm (Alarm Code 108) to be enabled or disabled. Alarm Code 108 is a Check
Alarm.
If this feature is set to DISABLED, Alarm Code 108 Door Open Timeout is not set when the door open time exceeds the Door
Open Timeout setting.
If this feature is set to ENABLED, Alarm Code 108 Door Open Timeout is set when the door open time exceeds the Door Open
Timeout setting.

Sleep Mode After Pretrip

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set DISABLED

70 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 3 - Software Description

Exceptions

Description If the feature is set ENABLED, the unit will enter Sleep Mode after a Pretrip Test. If the feature is set DISABLED, the unit will
not enter Sleep Mode after a Pretrip Test.

Rail Option
Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set DISABLED

Exceptions The optional fuel level switch must be installed in order to use the Fuel Conserve Mode feature.

Description If the unit is a rail application, this feature is ENABLED. When the optional customer fuel level switch closes (supplies chassis
ground to the base controller fuel level input), the unit will enter a Fuel Conserve Mode where the unit is forced to low speed
operation only.
If the unit is not a rail application, this feature should be DISABLED.
Important: If RAIL OPTION is ENABLED, the fuel level switch will cause the unit to enter a full conserve mode only. The Low
Fuel Shutdown Feature is not available if RAIL OPTION is ENABLED.

Rail Alternate
Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set DISABLED

Exceptions Only available if RAIL OPTION is ENABLED.

Description This feature changes the alerts criteria, defrost allowed temperature, and defrost termination temperature. It should only be
used when specified by the customer. If rail alternate is enabled, a defrost cycle is allowed with an evaporator coil
temperature less than or equal to 13°C (55°F) and terminates at 21°C (70°F).

Blocked Air Chute Detect

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set DISABLED

Exceptions The optional Spare Sensor 1 must be installed.

Description The Air Chute Detect feature is designed to detect a blocked or improperly installed trailer air chute. Spare sensor 1 is
located at the rear of the trailer and directly in the air flow at the end of the chute. The temperature detected by this sensor is
compared to the temperature detected by the control discharge air temperature sensor. This feature functions only during
cool mode operation.
If this temperature differential exceeds a user defined number of degrees for a user defined period of time, Alarm Code 46
CHECK AIR FLOW is generated as a check alarm. If the trailer is equipped with a door switch and the feature is enabled,
monitoring ceases when the door is opened and is resumed 45 minutes after the door is closed. When the unit enters a
defrost cycle, monitoring ceases and is resumed 45 minutes after the defrost cycle terminates. Should the control discharge
temperature sensor or Spare sensor 1 fail the Air Chute Detect feature is disabled.

Blocked Air Chute Temperature Differential

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices 1°C to 10°C in 0.1°C increments (1°F to 20°F in 0.1°F increments)

Factory Set 5.5°C (9.9°F)

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 71
Section 3 - Software Description

Exceptions Only available if Blocked Air Chute Detect is ENABLED.

Description This feature selects the temperature differential, from the front to the back of the trailer that must be exceeded to cause an
alarm to occur. The temperature differential is calculated using the control discharge air sensor and spare sensor 1. This
temperature differential must exist for the time specified by Blocked Air Chute Time To Alarm in order to set Alarm Code 46
Check Air Flow.

Blocked Air Chute Time to Alarm

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices 5 to 120 minutes in 1-minute increments

Factory Set 30 minutes

Exceptions Only available if Blocked Air Chute Detect is ENABLED.

Description This feature selects the time interval that must be exceeded to cause Alarm Code 46 Check Air Flow to occur. This condition
must exist with a temperature differential, in excess of that specified by Blocked Air Chute Temperature Differential, in order
to set Alarm Code 46 Check Air Flow.

Blocked Air Chute Door Open Override

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set ENABLED

Exceptions Only available if Blocked Air Chute Detect is ENABLED.

Description This feature determines if a door switch should interrupt the operation of the Blocked Air Chute Detect feature. If set
ENABLED, monitoring ceases when the door is opened and is resumed 45 minutes after the door is closed. If set DISABLED,
monitoring is not interrupted when a door opens.

Discharge Pressure Setpoint

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices 380 to 440 PSIG

Factory Set 415 PSIG

Exceptions Only on ETV equipped units.

Description This feature allows the head pressure setpoint to be adjusted. This pressure determines when the base controller will enter a
temporary operating mode to prevent unit shutdown. Do not change this setting unless instructed to do so.

Water Temperature Setpoint

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices 82°C to 99°C (180°F to 210°F)

Factory Set 99°C (210°F)

Exceptions Only on ETV equipped units.

Description This feature allows the water temperature setpoint to be adjusted. This temperature determines when the base controller
will enter a temporary operating mode to prevent unit shutdown. Do not change this setting unless instructed to do so.

72 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 3 - Software Description

Limited Alarm Restart

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set DISABLED

Exceptions Does not appear unless rail is disabled and restarts are enabled.

Description This feature modifies the ability to repeatedly clear certain alarms from the Main Menu or Operators Menu. If these alarms
occur repeatedly, they may indicate a need for service to prevent unit or product damage. These alarms are as follows:
• Alarm Code 23 Cooling Cycle Fault
• Alarm Code 24 Heating Cycle Fault
• Alarm Code 32 Refrigeration Capacity Low
• Alarm Code 82 High Comp Discharge Temp

Setting this feature to ENABLED will allow the above alarms to be cleared conventionally two times in a continuous 12 hour
period. If any of these alarms are cleared more than two times in 12 hours, all subsequent occurrences can only be cleared
from the Guarded Access Menu. This helps ensure that the alarms receive the attention of service personnel. The 12 hour
timer is reset when any of the above alarms is cleared from the Guarded Access Menu. The 12 hour timer is not reset with a
unit or controller power-down.
Setting this feature DISABLED will allow the above alarms to be cleared conventionally an unlimited number of times.

Remote Device
Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set DISABLED

Exceptions Requires optional device - see below.

Description Setting this feature to ENABLED allows an external device, such as TracKing™, to start and stop a properly equipped unit.
Setting this feature to DISABLED prevents this control.
Important: The Remote Device feature should be set DISABLED before working on the unit if the unit is equipped with a
device that allows it to be started and stopped from a remote location.

HMI Control Panel COM 1 Default Baud Rate

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 BPS

Factory Set 1200

Exceptions

Description This feature allows the default baud rate to be selected for the HMI Control Panel COM Port 1.
The setting of this feature should not be changed.

HMI Control Panel COM 2 Default Baud Rate

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 BPS

Factory Set 9600

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 73
Section 3 - Software Description

Exceptions

Description This feature allows the default baud rate to be selected for the HMI Control Panel COM Port 2.
COM Port 2 is used by the CargoWatch printer. If a customer has a mixed fleet with both SR-2/SR-3 and µP-IV M/T controllers
with DAS, the baud rate for COM 2 should be set to 2400. This will allow printing from both the SR-2/SR-3 and µP-IV
controllers without changing the printer baud rate. The printer baud rate must be set to match the baud rate setting of the
Com 2 Port.

HMI Control Panel COM 3 Default Baud Rate

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 BPS

Factory Set 9600

Exceptions

Description This feature allows the default baud rate to be selected for the HMI Control Panel COM Port 3.
COM port 3 is currently used by third party or other Telematics devices. The setting of this feature should not be changed.

High Temperature Defrost

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set DISABLED

Exceptions

Description This feature changes the defrost allowed temperature and defrost termination temperature. It should only be used when
specified by the customer. If High Temperature Defrost is enabled, a defrost cycle is allowed with an evaporator coil
temperature less than or equal to 13°C (55°F) and terminates at 21°C (70°F).
Important: Unlike the Rail Alternate feature, the Low Fuel Shutdown feature is available when High Temperature Defrost is
set ENABLED and a float or solid state fuel level sensor is installed.

™ Plus Upload
Local Authorization of OptiSet™
Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set ENABLED

Exceptions

Description This feature determines if an over the air OptiSet Plus upload requires authorization from the HMI Control Panel. If this
feature is set ENABLED, an authorization request will be shown on the HMI and must be approved before the OptiSet Plus
upload can proceed. If this feature is set DISABLED, no local authorization is required to perform an OptiSet Plus upload.

Local Authorization of Flashload

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set ENABLED

Exceptions

Description This feature determines if an over the air flashload requires authorization from the HMI Control Panel. If this feature is set
ENABLED, an authorization request will be shown on the HMI and must be approved before the flashload can proceed. If this
feature is set DISABLED, no local authorization is required to perform a flashload.

74 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 3 - Software Description

™ Logging Intervals
ServiceWatch™
Control Rev D026 and later

HMI Rev 7576 and later

Choices 1 Minute, 2 Minutes, 5 Minutes, 10 Minutes, 15 Minutes, 30 Minutes, 1 Hour, 2 Hours, or 4 Hours

Factory Set DISABLED

Exceptions

Description This feature allows the user to select the logging interval for the ServiceWatch Data Logger.

Water Temp Sleep Mode Engine Start

Control Rev D026 and later

HMI Rev 7576 and later

Choices -1°C (30°F), -7°C (20°F), -12°C (10°F), -18°C (0°F), or -40°C (-40°F)

Factory Set -1°C (30°F)

Exceptions Only affects unit operation when in Sleep Mode.

Description This feature allows the user to select the water (engine coolant) temperature at which the engine restarts in Sleep Mode.
Otherwise, Sleep Mode functions the same as with earlier software revisions.
Note: The -40°C (-40°F) setting is typically used to effectively disable water temperature restarts in Sleep Mode.
Note: This setting does not affect the water temperature at which the engine restarts in Cycle-Sentry Mode, which is fixed at
-1°C (30°F).

Null Restart Temperature

Control Rev D091 and later

HMI Rev 75C2 and later

Choices SLXi without ETV: 2.7°C to 8.5°C (4.8°F to 15.2°F) for Fresh and Frozen range
SLXi with ETV: Fresh range - 1.5°C to 8.5°C (2.8°F to 15.2°F), Frozen range - 2.0°C to 8.5°C (3.6°F to 15.2°F)

Factory Set 2.8°C (5.0°F)

Exceptions SLXi units only.

Description This feature determines the number of degrees above setpoint that the temperature can rise before the unit restarts in Cycle
Sentry mode. The Null Restart Temperature can be adjusted in increments of 0.1°C (0.2°F).

High Ambient Discharge Pressure Control

Control Rev D070 and later

HMI Rev 75C0 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set DISABLED

Exceptions Unit Type = SLX units except SLX-100

Description When HADPC is set to ENABLED, the unit will control the discharge pressure around a High Discharge Control Setting of 370
PSI when the ambient temperature rises above 40°C (104°F).

Decimal Degree Setpoint

Control Rev D090 and later

HMI Rev 75C2 and later

Choices YES or NO

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 75
Section 3 - Software Description

Factory Set NO

Exceptions SLXi units only.

Description If this feature is set to YES, user should be able to select setpoint with increments and/or decrements of 0.1°C or 0.2°C.
If this feature is set to YES, user should be able to select setpoint with increments and/or decrements of 1.0°C or 1.0°C.

Limited Clutch Slip Alarm Clear

Control Rev DA12 and later

HMI Rev 7B12 and later

Choices 0, 1, 2, or 3 occurrences

Factory Set 3 occurrences

Exceptions

Description When enabled, the limited clutch slip alarm clear limits the number of set/clear cycles from the driver/maintenance menu to
three clear events within eight hours.
Upon clearing a clutch slip alarm, a total of three consecutive occurrences within eight hours, the alarm shall be promoted to
a guarded access alarm, and must be cleared in the alarms menu of guarded access (cannot be cleared in the driver menu).

Pharma Defrost
Control Rev DA25 and later

HMI Rev 7x25 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set DISABLED

Exceptions This feature will not appear if RAIL OPTION is ENABLED.

Description When enabled, the defrost termination temperature is 10°C (50°F) and the defrost pre-cool timer lasts 120 second. That
differs from default defrost settings with defrost termination temperature set to 14.4°C (57.9°F) and defrost pre-cool timer
to 30 seconds.

Main Menu Configuration Menu

The Main Menu Configuration Menu determines if the Keypad Lockout, Sleep Mode, and Single Zone (Multi-Temp)
menus are visible in the Main Menu > Mode Menu. These features are set to factory defaults when shipped, but can
easily be changed to suit the end user’s needs.

Add Keypad Lockout to Mode Menu

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set DISABLED

Exceptions

Description When enabled, Keypad Lockout allows the operator to lock the keypad to prevent tampering.
Pressing any soft key for five seconds will unlock the keypad.
Setting this feature Enabled adds the Keypad Lockout feature to the Mode Menu.
Setting this feature Disabled turns the Keypad Lockout feature off and removes the feature from the Mode Menu.

Add Sleep to Mode Menu

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

76 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 3 - Software Description

Factory Set DISABLED

Exceptions

Description When enabled, Sleep Mode allows the operator to place the unit in Sleep Mode from the Mode Menu.
Setting this feature Enabled adds the Sleep Mode feature to the Mode Menu.
Setting this feature Disabled removes the Sleep Mode feature from the Mode Menu.

Configure Soft Key 2 on Standard Display

Control Rev D007 and later

HMI Rev 7570 and later

Choices Sensors, Gauges, Pretrip, Datalogger, SOT, Hourmeters

Factory Set Gauges

Exceptions For Single Temp Applications Only.

Description This feature allows the function of the 2nd HMI Control Panel Soft Key to be assigned as desired by the end user. The Gauge
function remains available in the Maintenance Menu in the same manner as before. The optional selections work in the same
manner as if they had been selected from the Main Menu.

Configure Soft Key 3 on Standard Display

Control Rev D007 and later

HMI Rev 7570 and later

Choices Sensors, Gauges, Pretrip, Datalogger, SOT, Hourmeters

Factory Set Sensors

Exceptions For Single Temp Applications Only.

Description This feature allows the function of the 3rd HMI Control Panel Soft Key to be assigned as desired by the end user. The Sensor
function remains available in the Maintenance Menu in the same manner as before. The optional selections work in the same
manner as if they had been selected from the Main Menu.

Add Temperature Units to Mode Menu

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set DISABLED

Exceptions

Description When Enabled, Add Temp Units to Mode Menu allows the operator to choose to display temperatures in either degrees
Fahrenheit or degrees Celsius.
Setting this feature Enabled adds the Select Temperature Units feature to the Mode Menu. Setting this feature Disabled
removes the Select Temperature Units feature from the Mode Menu.

Keypad Lock PIN

Control Rev D070 and later

HMI Rev 75C0 and later

Choices NO CODE or any value from 1 to 99999

Factory Set NO CODE

Exceptions

Description If this feature is set NO CODE, a code is not required to unlock the keypad if it has been locked. If a code from 1 to 99999 has
been selected, this code must be entered in order to unlock the HMI keypad. The code should be recorded for future use.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 77
Section 3 - Software Description

Alarm Display Menu

The Alarm Menu allows the technician to display and clear any existing alarms except alarms that auto-clear only. Refer
to Section 4 for operating details. If an alarm condition still exists when the alarm is cleared, the alarm will be set again
as soon as the alarm condition is detected.
A list of alarm codes including diagnostic procedures for each alarm code is presented in Section 5 of this manual.

Hourmeter Setup Menu

The Hourmeter Setup Menu allows the unit hourmeters to be configured to customer requirements. There are three
sub-menus under the Hourmeter Setup Menu:
• Program Hourmeter
• Viewable Hourmeter Setup
• Program Service Due Date

Program Hourmeter Sub-Menu

The hourmeters listed below allow a time limit to be established for each programmable Hourmeter. These time limits
are defined by the customer and are typically used as maintenance reminders. When a hourmeter time is exceeded, a
stored alarm is set as a maintenance reminder. The hourmeter is cleared by means of a CLEAR soft key when viewing
the hourmeters from the Guarded Access Menu. The hour meter elapsed time should be reset to 0. Hourmeters cannot
be cleared from the Main Menu.
With the exception of Controller Power On Hours and Pretrip Reminder Hours, there are two hourmeters for each
feature to allow two different maintenance intervals to be set.
The Program Hourmeter Sub-menu is used to set and clear the adjustable time limits for each Hourmeter, as required
by a customer’s maintenance program. The default time limit for all hourmeters is 100 hours. The hourmeters appear in
the order shown.

Total Run Time Reminder # 1 Hours

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices OFF, 1 to 99,999

Factory Set OFF

Exceptions If a time limit is set and exceeded, Alarm Code 132 will be set as a stored alarm.

Description Total Run Time Reminder #1 Hours is one of two hourmeters that track the total amount of time the unit has run in both
diesel and electric mode. If a time limit is set and exceeded, Alarm Code 132 will be set as a stored alarm.
This feature sets the meter limits for this programmable hourmeter. The default setting is OFF. Time limits start at 100 hours
and can be decreased to 1 and then OFF or increased to a maximum of 99,999 hours.

Total Run Time Reminder # 2 Hours

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices OFF, 1 to 99,999

Factory Set OFF

Exceptions If a time limit is set and exceeded, Alarm Code 133 will be set as a stored alarm.

Description Total Run Time Reminder #2 Hours is one of two hourmeters that track the total amount of time the unit has run in both
diesel and electric mode. If a time limit is set and exceeded, Alarm Code 133 will be set as a stored alarm.
This feature sets the meter limits for this programmable hourmeter. The default setting is OFF. Time limits start at 100 hours
and can be decreased to 1 and then OFF or increased to a maximum of 99,999 hours.

78 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 3 - Software Description

Controller Power On Hours

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices OFF, 1 to 99,999

Factory Set OFF

Exceptions If a time limit is set and exceeded, Alarm Code 134 will be set as a stored alarm.

Description Controller Power On Hours is the total amount of time the controller has been turned on. If a time limit is set and exceeded,
Alarm Code 134 will be set as a stored alarm.
This feature sets the meter limits for this programmable hourmeter. The default setting is OFF. Time limits start at 100 hours
and can be decreased to 1 and then OFF or increased to a maximum of 99,999 hours.

Pretrip Reminder Hours

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices OFF, 1 to 99,999

Factory Set OFF

Exceptions If a time limit is set and exceeded, Alarm Code 64 will be set as a stored alarm.

Description Pretrip Reminder Hours is the total amount of time since the last Pretrip Test was performed. If a time limit is set and
exceeded, Alarm Code 64 will be set as a stored alarm.
This feature sets the meter limits for this programmable hourmeter. The default setting is OFF. Time limits start at 100 hours
and can be decreased to 1 and then OFF or increased to a maximum of 99,999 hours.

Engine Run Time Reminder # 1 Hours

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices OFF, 1 to 99,999

Factory Set OFF

Exceptions If a time limit is set and exceeded, Alarm Code 128 will be set as a stored alarm.

Description Engine Run Time Reminder #1 Hours is one of two hourmeters that track the total amount of time the unit has run in diesel
mode. If a time limit is set and exceeded, Alarm Code 128 will be set as a stored alarm.
This feature sets the meter limits for this programmable hourmeter. The default setting is OFF. Time limits start at 100 hours
and can be decreased to 1 and then OFF or increased to a maximum of 99,999 hours.

Engine Run Time Reminder # 2 Hours

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices OFF, 1 to 99,999

Factory Set OFF

Exceptions If a time limit is set and exceeded, Alarm Code 129 will be set as a stored alarm.

Description Engine Run Time Reminder #2 Hours is one of two hourmeters that track the total amount of time the unit has run in diesel
mode. If a time limit is set and exceeded, Alarm Code 129 will be set as a stored alarm.
This feature sets the meter limits for this programmable hourmeter. The default setting is OFF. Time limits start at 100 hours
and can be decreased to 1 and then OFF or increased to a maximum of 99,999 hours.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 79
Section 3 - Software Description

Electric Run Time Reminder # 1 Hours

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices OFF, 1 to 99,999

Factory Set OFF

Exceptions If a time limit is set and exceeded, Alarm Code 130 will be set as a stored alarm. Only appears if the unit is configured as
being equipped with optional electric standby.

Description Electric Run Time Reminder #1 Hours is one of two hourmeters that track the total amount of time the unit has run in electric
mode. If a time limit is set and exceeded, Alarm Code 130 will be set as a stored alarm.
This feature sets the meter limits for this programmable hourmeter. The default setting is OFF. Time limits start at 100 hours
and can be decreased to 1 and then OFF or increased to a maximum of 99,999 hours.

Electric Run Time Reminder # 2 Hours

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices OFF, 1 to 99,999

Factory Set OFF

Exceptions If a time limit is set and exceeded, Alarm Code 131 will be set as a stored alarm. Only appears if the unit is configured as
being equipped with optional electric standby.

Description Electric Run Time Reminder #2 Hours is one of two hourmeters that track the total amount of time the unit has run in electric
mode. If a time limit is set and exceeded, Alarm Code 131 will be set as a stored alarm.
This feature sets the meter limits for this programmable hourmeter. The default setting is OFF. Time limits start at 100 hours
and can be decreased to 1 and then OFF or increased to a maximum of 99,999 hours.

Viewable Hourmeter Setup Sub-Menu

The hourmeters can be programmed to be visible or hidden from the Main Menu. The hourmeters continue to
accumulate time even if the hourmeter view is hidden.
If an hourmeter view is set Enabled, that hourmeter will appear in the Hourmeter menu in both the Main Menu and
Maintenance Menu. If the hourmeter view is set Disabled, the hourmeter is only viewable from the Maintenance Menu.
For Model 30 units, the default setting for the Engine Hours hourmeter is Enabled. The default setting for all other
hourmeters is Disabled.
For Model 50 units, the default setting for the Total Unit Run Hours, Engine Hours, and Electric Run Hours hourmeters is
Enabled. The default setting for all other hourmeters is Disabled.
The hourmeters appear in the order shown.

Total Hours
Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set DISABLED

Exceptions

Description The setting of this feature determines if the Total Hours hourmeter can be viewed from the Main Menu. If the hourmeter is
Enabled, it can be viewed from the Main Menu. If it is Disabled, it cannot be viewed from the Main Menu but is visible from
the Maintenance Menu.

80 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 3 - Software Description

Total Run Time Hours (If Model 50)

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set ENABLED if Model 50

Exceptions Only appears if the unit is configured as being equipped with optional electric standby.

Description The setting of this feature determines if the Total Run Time Hours hourmeter can be viewed from the Main Menu. If the
hourmeter is Enabled, it can be viewed from the Main Menu. If it is Disabled, it cannot be viewed from the Main Menu but is
visible from the Maintenance Menu.

Total Engine Run Hours

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set ENABLED

Exceptions

Description The setting of this feature determines if the Engine Hours hourmeter can be viewed from the Main Menu. If the hourmeter is
Enabled, it can be viewed from the Main Menu. If it is Disabled, it cannot be viewed from the Main Menu but is visible from
the Maintenance Menu.

Electric Run Hours (If Model 50)

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set ENABLED if Model 50

Exceptions Only appears if the unit is configured as being equipped with optional electric standby.

Description The setting of this feature determines if the Electric Run Hours hourmeter can be viewed from the Main Menu. If the
hourmeter is Enabled, it can be viewed from the Main Menu. If it is Disabled, it cannot be viewed from the Main Menu but is
visible from the Maintenance Menu.

Total Run Time Reminder #1 Hours

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set DISABLED

Exceptions

Description The setting of this feature determines if the Total Run Time Reminder #1 Hours hourmeter can be viewed from the Main
Menu. If the hourmeter is Enabled, it can be viewed from the Main Menu. If it is Disabled, it cannot be viewed from the Main
Menu but is visible from the Maintenance Menu.

Total Run Time Reminder #2 Hours

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set DISABLED

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 81
Section 3 - Software Description

Exceptions

Description The setting of this feature determines if the Total Run Time Reminder #2 Hours hourmeter can be viewed from the Main
Menu. If the hourmeter is Enabled, it can be viewed from the Main Menu. If it is Disabled, it cannot be viewed from the Main
Menu but is visible from the Maintenance Menu.

Controller On Hours
Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set DISABLED

Exceptions

Description The setting of this feature determines if the Controller Power On Hours hourmeter can be viewed from the Main Menu. If the
hourmeter is Enabled, it can be viewed from the Main Menu. If it is Disabled, it cannot be viewed from the Main Menu but is
visible from the Maintenance Menu.

Pretrip Reminder Hours

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set DISABLED

Exceptions

Description The setting of this feature determines if the Pretrip Reminder Hours hourmeter can be viewed from the Main Menu. If the
hourmeter is Enabled, it can be viewed from the Main Menu. If it is Disabled, it cannot be viewed from the Main Menu but is
visible from the Maintenance Menu.

Engine Run Time Reminder #1 Hours

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set DISABLED

Exceptions

Description The setting of this feature determines if the Engine Run Time Reminder #1 Hours hourmeter can be viewed from the Main
Menu. If the hourmeter is Enabled, it can be viewed from the Main Menu. If it is Disabled, it cannot be viewed from the Main
Menu but is visible from the Maintenance Menu.

Engine Run Time Reminder #2 Hours

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set DISABLED

Exceptions

Description The setting of this feature determines if the Engine Run Time Reminder #2 Hours hourmeter can be viewed from the Main
Menu. If the hourmeter is Enabled, it can be viewed from the Main Menu. If it is Disabled, it cannot be viewed from the Main
Menu but is visible from the Maintenance Menu.

82 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 3 - Software Description

Electric Run Time Reminder #1 Hours

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set DISABLED

Exceptions Only appears if the unit is configured as being equipped with optional electric standby.

Description The setting of this feature determines if the Electric Run Time Reminder #1 Hours hourmeter can be viewed from the Main
Menu. If the hourmeter is Enabled, it can be viewed from the Main Menu. If it is Disabled, it cannot be viewed from the Main
Menu but is visible from the Maintenance Menu.

Electric Run Time Reminder #2 Hours

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set DISABLED

Exceptions Only appears if the unit is configured as being equipped with optional electric standby.

Description The setting of this feature determines if the Electric Run Time Reminder #2 Hours hourmeter can be viewed from the Main
Menu. If the hourmeter is Enabled, it can be viewed from the Main Menu. If it is Disabled, it cannot be viewed from the Main
Menu but is visible from the Maintenance Menu.

Programmable Service Due Date

This feature allows a Service Due Date to be programmed. When the selected Service Due Date is reached, Alarm Code
128 Service Due is set.

Service Due Date

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set DISABLED

Exceptions

Description If this feature is set Enabled, prompts appear to set a Service Due Date (Date / Month / Year). When this date is reached,
Alarm Code 128 Service Due is set as a stored alarm.
Alarm Code 128 Service Due can only be cleared from the Guarded Access Menu. When Alarm Code 128 Service Due is
cleared, the Service Due Date feature is reset to Disabled. The feature can again be set Enabled and a new Service Due Date
selected.

Sensor Calibration Menu

The Sensor Calibration Menu allows the operator to select the correct grade for all graded sensors. Sensor grades
range from 1L through 9H. The sensors appear in the order shown.
I m p o r t a n t : Sensor grades cannot be set using OptiSet™ Plus.
N o t e : To verify proper operation, the grades must be properly set to match the actual sensor grades to prevent false
alarm codes. Exercise care to properly identify the sensor grades. The best way to positively identify the sensor
grade is to physically check the sensor grade printed on each graded sensor.
N o t e : Spare Sensor 1 is also a graded sensor but an alarm code is not set if this sensor grade is set to 5H.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 83
Section 3 - Software Description

Sensor Wire Identification

Sensor and Alarm Code Wire #

Control Return Air Sensor RTP

Alarm Code 03 RTN

Control Discharge Air Sensor DTP

Alarm Code 04 DTN

Display Return Air Sensor RTRP

Alarm Code 203 RTRN

Display Discharge Air Sensor DTRP

Alarm Code 204 DTRN

Control Return Air Sensor Grade

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices 1L - 9H

Factory Set 5H

Exceptions Unit Type = Trailer Single Temperature

Description This feature is used to set the sensor grade for the Control Return Air Sensor.
The default setting for a new base controller or after a ServiceWatch base controller cold start is 5H. This serves as a warning
that the sensor grade is not set. The default grade of 5H is not a valid grade and will not be printed on any sensor. If a sensor
grade for a return air or discharge air sensor is set to grade 5H, the alarm code for that sensor and Alarm Code 92 Sensor
Grade Not Set will be set. Alarm Code 92 is not set if a Spare Sensor is set to 5H.
To verify proper operation, the grades must be properly set to match the actual sensor grades to prevent nuisance alarm
codes. Exercise care to properly identify the sensor grades. The best way to positively identify the sensor grade is by
physically checking the sensor grade printed on each graded sensor.

Control Discharge Air Sensor Grade

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices 1L - 9H

Factory Set 5H

Exceptions Unit Type = Trailer Single Temperature

Description This feature is used to set the sensor grade for the Control Discharge Air Sensor.
The default setting for a new base controller or after a ServiceWatch base controller cold start is 5H. This serves as a warning
that the sensor grade is not set. The default grade of 5H is not a valid grade and will not be printed on any sensor. If a sensor
grade for a return air or discharge air sensor is set to grade 5H, the alarm code for that sensor and Alarm Code 92 Sensor
Grade Not Set will occur. Alarm Code 92 is not set if a Spare Sensor is set to 5H.
To verify proper operation, the grades must be properly set to match the actual sensor grades to prevent nuisance alarm
codes. Exercise care to properly identify the sensor grades. The best way to positively identify the sensor grade is by
physically checking the sensor grade printed on each graded sensor.

Display Return Air Sensor Grade

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices 1L - 9H

Factory Set 5H

84 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 3 - Software Description

Exceptions Unit Type = Trailer Single Temperature

Description This feature is used to set the sensor grade for the Display Return Air Sensor.
The default setting for a new base controller or after a ServiceWatch base controller cold start is 5H. This serves as a warning
that the sensor grade is not set. The default grade of 5H is not a valid grade and will not be printed on any sensor. If a sensor
grade for a return air or discharge air sensor is set to grade 5H, the alarm code for that sensor and Alarm Code 92 Sensor
Grade Not Set will occur. Alarm Code 92 is not set if a Spare Sensor is set to 5H.
To verify proper operation, the grades must be properly set to match the actual sensor grades to prevent nuisance alarm
codes. Exercise care to properly identify the sensor grades. The best way to positively identify the sensor grade is by
physically checking the sensor grade printed on each graded sensor.

Display Discharge Air Sensor Grade

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices 1L - 9H

Factory Set 5H

Exceptions Unit Type = Trailer Single Temperature

Description This feature is used to set the sensor grade for the Display Discharge Air Sensor.
The default setting for a new base controller or after a ServiceWatch base controller cold start is 5H. This serves as a warning
that the sensor grade is not set. The default grade of 5H is not a valid grade and will not be printed on any sensor. If a sensor
grade for a return air or discharge air sensor is set to grade 5H, the alarm code for that sensor and Alarm Code 92 Sensor
Grade Not Set will occur. Alarm Code 92 is not set if a Spare Sensor is set to 5H.
To verify proper operation, the grades must be properly set to match the actual sensor grades to prevent nuisance alarm
codes. Exercise care to properly identify the sensor grades. The best way to positively identify the sensor grade is by
physically checking the sensor grade printed on each graded sensor.

Spare 1 Sensor Grade

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices 1L - 9H

Factory Set 5H

Exceptions Unit Type = Trailer Single Temperature. If the optional Spare 1 Sensor is not present, this feature need not be set.

Description This feature is used to set the sensor grade for the Spare 1 Sensor.
The default setting for a new base controller or after a ServiceWatch base controller cold start is 5H. This serves as a warning
that the sensor grade is not set. The default grade of 5H is not a valid grade and will not be printed on any sensor. If a sensor
grade for a return air or discharge air sensor is set to grade 5H, the alarm code for that sensor and Alarm Code 92 Sensor
Grade Not Set will occur. Alarm Code 92 is not set if a Spare Sensor is set to 5H.
To verify proper operation, the grades must be properly set to match the actual sensor grades to prevent nuisance alarm
codes. Exercise care to properly identify the sensor grades. The best way to positively identify the sensor grade is by
physically checking the sensor grade printed on each graded sensor.
Note: Alarm Code 92 Sensor Grades Not Set is not active with spare sensors. However, if the sensor is in use, the sensor
grade should be set to provide maximum sensor accuracy.

Cycle Sentry Setup Menu

The Cycle Sentry Menu allows the unit defaults for Cycle Sentry Null and Sleep Null unit shut down on battery charge
current and unit restart on battery voltage to be modified as desired by the customer.

Cycle Sentry Amps

Control Rev D000/DA00 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices 2A to 8A in 1A increments

Factory Set All Units: 5A (D000-D091)

SLX/SLXe/SLXi Units: 2A (Q1 2017) (DA00 and later)

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 85
Section 3 - Software Description

Exceptions

Description When operating in Cycle Sentry or Sleep Mode, the unit will automatically run to charge the battery until the charging
current falls below this set limit. This occurs even if cooling, heating, or defrosting is not required.

Cycle Sentry Battery Voltage

Control Rev D000/DA00 and later

HMI Rev 6550/7B00 and later

Choices 11.8V to 12.6V in 0.1V increments

Factory Set All Units: 12.2V (D000-D091)

SLX/SLXe/SLXi Units: 12.6V (Q1 2017) (DA00 and later)

Exceptions

Description When operating in Cycle Sentry or Sleep Mode, the controller will monitor battery voltage and restart the unit to charge the
battery, if the battery voltage falls below this set limit. This occurs even if cooling, heating, or defrosting is not required.

Check Battery Condition Alarm

Control Rev D030/DA00 and later

HMI Rev 7580/7B00 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set All Units: DISABLED (D000-D091)

SLX/SLXe/SLXi Units: ENABLED (Q1 2017) (DA00 and later)

Exceptions

Description If Check Battery Condition Alarm is ENABLED, Alarm Code 159 Check Battery Condition will be set if indications exist that the
battery may be about to fail. If this feature is set DISABLED, the battery condition check will be disabled and Alarm Code 159
Check Battery Condition will not be set.

Low Battery Voltage Timeout in Minutes

Control Rev D030 and later

HMI Rev 7580 and later

Choices 1 to 60

Factory Set 30

Exceptions

Description If Check Battery Condition Alarm is ENABLED, this feature becomes available in Cycle Sentry Setup Menu to allow for
adjustment of default Alarm Code 159 timeout settings.

CS Null Duration Timeout in Minutes

Control Rev D030 and later

HMI Rev 7580 and later

Choices 1 to 10

Factory Set 5

Exceptions

Description If Check Battery Condition Alarm is ENABLED, this feature becomes available in Cycle Sentry Setup Menu to allow for
adjustment of default Alarm Code 159 timeout settings.

86 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 3 - Software Description

Defrost Setup Menu

The Defrost Setup Menu allows the defrost operation to be configured for maximum performance.
• The evaporator coil temperature must be 7°C (45°F) or less to allow defrost. Defrost cycles will terminate at 14°C (58°
F) .
• If High Temperature Defrost is enabled, a defrost cycle is allowed with an evaporator coil temperature less than or
equal to 13°C (55°F) and terminates at 21°C (70°F).

Defrost Interval In Range with Fresh Setpoint

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices 2, 4, 6, 8 or 12 Hours

Factory Set 6 Hours

Exceptions

Description This feature selects the timed interval between defrost cycles with Fresh range setpoints when the temperature is in range.

Defrost Interval Not In Range with Fresh Setpoint

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices 2, 4, 6, 8 or 12 Hours

Factory Set 4 Hours

Exceptions

Description This feature selects the timed interval between defrost cycles with Fresh range setpoints when the temperature is not in
range.

Defrost Interval In Range with Frozen Setpoint

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices 2, 4, 6, 8 or 12 Hours

Factory Set 6 Hours

Exceptions

Description This feature selects the timed interval between defrost cycles with Frozen range setpoints when the temperature is in range.

Defrost Interval Not In Range with Frozen Setpoint

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices 2, 4, 6, 8 or 12 Hours

Factory Set 6 Hours

Exceptions

Description This feature selects the timed interval between defrost cycles with Frozen range setpoints when the temperature is not in
range.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 87
Section 3 - Software Description

Maximum Defrost Duration

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices 30 or 45 Minutes

Factory Set 45 Minutes

Exceptions

Description This feature selects the maximum time the unit can remain in a defrost cycle. A defrost cycle normally terminates when the
evaporator coil temperature reaches 14°C (58°F). If Rail Alternate is enabled, a defrost cycle terminates at 21°C (70°F). If
the evaporator temperature does not reach this temperature, the defrost cycle will terminate after the elapsed time selected
here.

Language Setup Menu

This menu allows the display language or languages to be enabled as required. When a language is selected all
subsequent displays are in that language.
There is an Enable Language screen for each language included in the installed HMI software version. English is
included in all language sets and is factory set as Enabled. Only enabled languages will appear in the Main Menu
Language selections. All languages other than English are factory set as Disabled. If only one language is enabled, the
Language selection screen does not appear in the Main Menu.

Enable Language
Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices Dependent on HMI software version

Factory Set English only

Exceptions

Description This feature allows any or all of the included languages to be enabled. Only enabled languages will appear in the operators
Language Menu. All languages other than English are factory set as Disabled. If only one language is enabled, the Language
Selection Menu will not appear in the Main Menu.

Access Code Setup Menu

This menu allows an Access code to be required for entry to the Guarded Access Menu. If a code is selected, an access
code challenge will appear when entering the Guarded Access Menu. If the correct code is not entered, access is
denied.
N o t e : A technician can bypass an unknown Access Code by entering “4444” and pressing the Enter key.

Enter Access Code

The + and – keys are used to enter the desired Access Code. When the desired Access Code is displayed, the Enter Key
is pressed to load the code. The code should be recorded for future use.
If OptiSet Plus is active, this feature is set using the WinTrac Service Tool.

™ Plus Menu
OptiSet™
The OptiSet Plus Temperature Management System allows up to 64 different Named and/or Numeric temperature
profiles to be defined and tailored for maximum operating efficiency as determined by customer load requirements.
The term “OptiSet Plus” refers to both the programmable temperature profiles and the unit operating features that can
be tailored using OptiSet Plus.
Due to the large number of features available in OptiSet Plus, the OptiSet Plus features can no longer be viewed or
changed from the Guarded Access Menu. The only OptiSet Plus features available from the Guarded Access Menu are
OptiSet Plus Reset and Temperature Profile Selection.
• OptiSet Plus Reset is used to reset all OptiSet Plus features to the factory default settings.

88 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 3 - Software Description

• Temperature Profile Selection is used to determine what temperature profiles are available for use by the driver.
I m p o r t a n t : All other OptiSet Plus Features are set using the OptiSet Plus function of the WinTrac Service Tool. For
additional details, refer to the WinTrac User Guide.

OptiSet Plus Reset

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Exceptions Only available if OptiSet Plus features have been previously set using WinTrac.

Description If any OptiSet Plus features have been previously set using Wintrac, an OptiSet Plus Reset is provided at the beginning of the
OptiSet Plus Menu to return all settings to the default values. If this OptiSet Plus Reset feature is used, all OptiSet Plus
settings are returned to factory defaults.

Temperature Profile Selection

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices NUMERIC SETPOINT ONLY, NAMED PRODUCT ONLY, NAMED PROD & NUMERIC SP

Factory Set NUMERIC SETPOINT ONLY

Exceptions

Description This feature determines what profiles are available to the driver.
If NUMERIC SETPOINT ONLY is selected, only numeric setpoints such as 1.6°C (35°F) or -23°C (-10°F) are available to the
driver.
If NAMED PRODUCT ONLY is selected, only the named products such as Potatoes or Squash enabled during OptiSet Plus
setup are available to the driver.
If NAMED PROD & NUMERIC SP is selected, both named products and numeric setpoints are available to the driver.

OptiSet Plus Continuous Mode

The software features shown below are used to custom tailor temperature profiles using OptiSet Plus software. These
software features are accessible only in OptiSet Plus software and are not available in the Guarded Access Menu. They
are shown here for convenience only. When shipped from the factory, the features will be set as shown by Factory Set.

High Speed Pulldown

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ON or OFF

Factory Set ON

Exceptions Not active if modulation is enabled

Description This feature allows High Speed Pull Down for the selected range to be turned On or Off. If High Speed Pull Down is turned On,
the unit will run in high speed on initial start until setpoint is reached in both cool and heat mode. If High Speed Pull Down is
turned Off, the unit will switch to low speed cool when the return air temperature is below the programmed low speed switch
point value plus setpoint.
There is a two-minute delay on initial startup before high speed operation is allowed.
If Fuel Saver II is turned On, there may be a delay before high speed operation is allowed.
This feature does not apply to modulation operation.

Fuel Saver II
Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ON or OFF

Factory Set ON

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 89
Section 3 - Software Description

Exceptions Not active if modulation is enabled

Description This feature allows Fuel Saver II for the selected range to be turned On or Off.
If Fuel Saver II is On, and the box temperature changes a predetermined amount from setpoint in Cycle Sentry mode
operation, or temperature indicates a need for high speed in Continuous mode operation, the unit will first run in low speed.
An 8-minute timer is started and the control sensor air temperature is monitored. As long as the temperature falls (in cool
mode operation) or rises (in heat mode operation) a specified amount before the timer expires, the 8-minute timer is reset
and low speed operation continues. If the temperature has not changed the pre-determined amount when the timer times
out, high speed operation resumes, if allowed. This provides fuel savings by delaying high speed operation.
If the unit switches to high speed from FS-II the unit will run in high speed until setpoint is reached.
If Fuel Saver II is turned Off there is still a two-minute delay on initial startup before high speed operation is allowed. If OFF
high speed cool and high speed heat is allowed with no delay.

Minimum Discharge Air Mode

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ON or OFF

Factory Set OFF

Exceptions Only appears if Cycle Sentry Door Open Forces = Off

Description If set On, this feature limits the temperature of the discharge air to prevent top freeze on units without an Electronic
Throttling Valve (ETV). This feature can impact the unit’s ability to reach setpoint.
If set Off, standard return air control is used.

Low Speed Cool to Low Speed Cool FS II Switch Point

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices 1.9°C (3.5°F) to 5.6°C (10.0°F)

Factory Set 2.8°C (5.0°F)

Exceptions Not active if modulation is enabled. This feature may not be available with all profiles.

Description The Low Speed Cool to Low Speed Cool FS II Switch Point is the Low Speed Cool to High Speed Cool Switch Point -16.9°C
(1.5°F).
If enabled, the Low Speed Cool FS II to High Speed Cool Switch Point will always be the Low Speed Cool to Low Speed Cool
FS II Switch Point 1.9°C (3.5°F).

OptiSet Plus Continuous Modulation Mode

The software features shown below are used to custom tailor temperature profiles using OptiSet Plus software. These
software features are accessible only in OptiSet Plus software and are not available in the Guarded Access Menu. They
are shown here for convenience only. When shipped from the factory, the features will be set as shown by Factory Set.

Controlling Sensor
Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices Return or Discharge

Factory Set Return

Exceptions Continuous Modulation = RETURN

Description Modulation provides very smooth and steady temperature control. Modulation is only operational in Continuous Mode.
This feature determines the controlling sensor used during modulation operation, either the Return Air Temperature Sensor
or Discharge Air Temperature Sensor.
During Return Air Modulation, the discharge air temperature is limited to the programmed floor limit. The floor limit is equal
to setpoint minus the setting of the FreshSet Floor Limit feature. This provides additional protection from freezing for
sensitive loads.
During Discharge Air Modulation, the discharge air temperature is controlled to the setpoint.

90 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 3 - Software Description

PMAX
Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ON or OFF

Factory Set ON

Exceptions Only appears if Controlling Sensor = Return

Description This feature determines the modulation pull down control algorithm used. This feature is only available with return air
temperature control. The floor limit algorithm is always used with discharge air control.
If PMAX is set On, modulation pull down control is governed by the 160°C Minute (300°F Minute) algorithm. During pull
down, the unit is in full cool and the discharge air temperature is allowed to drop below the programmed floor limit for a
defined period of time. This option provides the fastest pull down while minimizing the potential for product top freezing.
MAX pull down example: If the discharge air is 8°C (15°F) below setpoint the unit will operate in full cool for 20 minutes
before entering modulation cool e.g., 8°C x 20 minutes = 160°C Minutes (15°F x 20 minutes = 300°F Minutes).
If PMAX is set Off, modulation pull down control is governed by the Floor Limit pull down algorithm. During Floor Limit pull
down the unit will operate in high speed but will control the discharge air temperature to the programmed Floor Limit. After
the pull down conditions are satisfied the unit will switch to low speed modulation. This option provides a fast pull down while
eliminating the potential for product top freezing with fragile commodities.

Freeze Protection
Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ON or OFF

Factory Set OFF

Exceptions Only available if return air modulation control is enabled

Description The freeze protection mode controls the Discharge Air Temperature to 1.7°C (35°F) minus the programmed limit.
It is a subset of return air modulation control. It is designed for higher temperature setpoints that have a high refrigeration
load or are transported in a lightly insulated trailer.

High Ambient Temperature Override

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices OFF, 29°C to 46°C in 3°C increments (85°F to 115°F in 5°F increments)

Factory Set OFF

Exceptions

Description If a temperature is selected and the ambient temperature is above the selected value, the unit will run in high speed
modulation for 100 minutes. This ensures adequate air flow throughout the trailer to prevent hot or cold spots and provide
more even temperature control. As a result, longer periods of high speed operation may be observed. This is normal
operation when the feature is enabled.
If the feature is set OFF there is no change in unit operation.

Low Ambient Temperature Override

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices OFF, -15°C to 1.7°C in 3°C Increments (5°F to 35°F in 5°F Increments)

Factory Set OFF

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 91
Section 3 - Software Description

Exceptions

Description If a temperature is selected and the ambient temperature is below the selected value, the unit will run in high speed
modulation for 100 minutes. This ensures adequate air flow throughout the trailer to prevent hot or cold spots and provide
more even temperature control. As a result, longer periods of high speed operation may be observed. This is normal
operation when the feature is enabled.
If the feature is set OFF there is no change in unit operation.

Floor Limit
Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices 0.5°C (1.0°F) to 3.5°C (6.0°F)

Factory Set 2.2°C (4.0°F)

Exceptions Only appears if Controlling Sensor = Return

Description This feature allows the minimum discharge air temperature during return air modulation to be programmed. The discharge
air temperature is limited to the programmed limit to provide additional protection from freezing for sensitive loads.
For example, with a 1.7°C (35°F) setpoint and a 1.4°C (2.5°F) Floor Limit, the discharge air temperature is limited to 0.3°C
(32.5°F).
The minimum discharge air temperature is controlled to -1.5°C (29°F) regardless of the programmed floor limit with
setpoints of -1.1°C (30°F) and higher.

High Speed Modulation Ceiling

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices 1.0°C (1.0°F) to 5.5°C (10.1°F)

Factory Set 1.1°C (2.0°F)

Exceptions Only appears if High Speed Modulation Control = On

Description This switch point determines the number of degrees above setpoint the temperature must rise before high speed modulation
is allowed. A lower setting will result in tighter control to setpoint but increases high speed operation time. A higher setting
will result in looser temperature control but reduces high speed operation time for additional fuel savings.
When the temperature rises to the Modulation Ceiling + -17°C (2°F) the unit will run in high speed modulation until the
temperature falls back to the Modulation Ceiling.
For example, if the setpoint is 1.7°C (35°F) and the High Speed Modulation Ceiling is 1.7°C (3°F), the Modulation Ceiling is
3.4°C (38°F). If the temperature reaches 4.4°C (40°F) as determined by a Modulation Ceiling of 3.4°C (38°F) + 1.0°C (2°
F), the unit will switch to high speed modulation. The unit will run in high speed modulation until the Modulation Ceiling of
3.4°C (38°F) is reached. The unit will then switch back to low speed modulation.

High Speed Modulation

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ON or OFF

Factory Set ON

Exceptions Only appears if Modulation Control = On

Description This feature turns High Speed Modulation on or off. High Speed Modulation provides precise modulation control with
increased air-flow and capacity under high cooling load conditions. Air flow is increased by operating the unit in high speed.
The increased air flow reduces the rise in the return air temperature above setpoint under high cooling load conditions. The
discharge air temperature is controlled to the programmed floor limit during high speed operation.
If this feature is On the unit will automatically enter high speed operation under high load conditions. The unit will
automatically switch back to low speed operation when conditions allow. High speed operation only occurs when necessary
to minimize fuel consumption and high speed operating hours.

92 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 3 - Software Description

OptiSet Plus Cycle Sentry Mode

The software features shown below are used to custom tailor temperature profiles using OptiSet Plus software. These
software features are accessible only in OptiSet Plus software and are not available in the Guarded Access Menu. They
are shown here for convenience only. When shipped from the factory, the features will be set as shown by Factory Set.

MNTL Max Null Timer

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices Off, 20 Minutes, 40 Minutes, 60 Minutes, 80 Minutes

Factory Set Off

Exceptions

Description This feature will cause the unit to start independently of box temperature demand, based on a timer that periodically starts
the unit to move air inside of the trailer.

MOTL Min Off Timer

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices Off, 15 Minutes, 30 Minutes, 45 Minutes

Factory Set Off

Exceptions

Description This feature will not allow the unit to restart until a minimum amount of time has passed. Eliminates short cycle restarts and
helps keep the engine off more.

High Speed Pulldown

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ON or OFF

Factory Set ON

Exceptions

Description This feature allows High Speed Pull Down for the selected range to be turned On or Off. If High Speed Pull Down is turned On,
the unit will run in high speed on initial start until setpoint is reached in both cool and heat mode. If High Speed Pull Down is
turned Off, the unit will switch to low speed cool when the return air temperature is below the programmed low speed switch
point value plus setpoint.
There is a two-minute delay on initial startup before high speed operation is allowed.
If Fuel Saver II is turned On, there may be a delay before high speed operation is allowed.
This feature does not apply to modulation operation.

Fuel Saver II
Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ON or OFF

Factory Set ON

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 93
Section 3 - Software Description

Exceptions

Description This feature allows Fuel Saver II for the selected range to be turned On or Off.
If Fuel Saver II is On, and the box temperature changes a predetermined amount from setpoint in Cycle Sentry mode
operation, or temperature indicates a need for high speed in Continuous mode operation, the unit will first run in low speed.
An 8-minute timer is started and the control sensor air temperature is monitored. As long as the temperature falls (in cool
mode operation) or rises (in heat mode operation) a specified amount before the timer expires, the 8-minute timer is reset
and low speed operation continues. If the temperature has not changed the pre-determined amount when the timer times
out, high speed operation resumes, if allowed. This provides fuel savings by delaying high speed operation.
If the unit switches to high speed from FS-II the unit will run in high speed until setpoint is reached.
If Fuel Saver II is turned Off there is still a two-minute delay on initial startup before high speed operation is allowed. If OFF
high speed cool and high speed heat is allowed with no delay.

Minimum Ambient
Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices -45.5°C to -65°C (-50°F to -85°F) in one degree increments.

Factory Set -45.5°C (-50°F)

Exceptions Cannot be set to a value higher than the Cycle Sentry Null Maximum Ambient setting.

Description When ambient temperature is greater than this setting, the unit will be allowed to go into NULL mode.

Maximum Ambient
Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices -6.6°C to 60°C (20°F to 140°F) in one degree increments.

Factory Set 60°C (140°F)

Exceptions Cannot be set to a value lower than the Cycle Sentry Null Minimum Ambient setting.

Description When ambient temperature is lower than this setting, the unit will be allowed to go into NULL mode.

Null Restart Temperature

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices -15°C to -9.4°C (5.0°F to 15.0°F)

Factory Set -15°C (5.0°F)

Exceptions

Description This feature determines the number of degrees above setpoint that the temperature can rise before the unit restarts in Cycle
Sentry Mode. The range of values available is determined by the setting of High Speed Pull Down. If Low Speed Switch Point
is set above 1.9°C (3.5°F), the Null Restart Temperature feature will be changed automatically. It must be at least 0.8°C
(1.5°F) above the setting of High Speed Cool to Low Speed Cool Switch Point.
With frozen range setpoints, the maximum restart limit can be no greater than -1.6°C (29°F). This prevents melt damage
with frozen cargo.
The Null Restart Temperature below setpoint is a fixed value and cannot be changed.

Minimum Run Time

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices 5 to 60 Minutes in 5 minute Increments

Factory Set None

94 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 3 - Software Description

Exceptions This feature is only available as a custom Temperature Profile created using OptiSet Plus.

Description This feature determines the minimum amount of time the unit will run after a Cycle Sentry Modulation restart. It is used to
provide adequate air circulation in the trailer.

OptiSet Plus Cycle Sentry Modulation Mode

The software features shown below are used to custom tailor temperature profiles using OptiSet Plus software. These
software features are accessible only in OptiSet Plus software and are not available in the Guarded Access Menu. They
are shown here for convenience only. If Cycle Sentry Modulation is enabled, the following features can be tailored to
the particular commodity.
I m p o r t a n t : Cycle Sentry Modulation is used at the customer’s discretion and is set up using a customer designed
named or numeric Temperature Profile in OptiSet Plus.
Cycle Sentry Modulation offers a compromise between fuel savings and temperature control when used with fresh
commodities with specific characteristics.
Some fresh commodities with the following characteristics may be candidates for Cycle Sentry Modulation.
• Fresh commodities with low heat of respiration.
• Fresh commodities that do not ripen after harvest.
• Fresh commodities that do not require continuous airflow.

MNTL Max Null Timer

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices Off, 20 Minutes, 40 Minutes, 60 Minutes, 80 Minutes

Factory Set Off

Exceptions

Description This feature will cause the unit to start independently of box temperature demand, based on a timer that periodically starts
the unit to move air inside of the trailer.

MOTL Min Off Timer

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices Off, 15 Minutes, 30 Minutes, 45 Minutes

Factory Set Off

Exceptions

Description This feature will not allow the unit to restart until a minimum amount of time has passed. Eliminates short cycle restarts and
helps keep the engine off more.

Minimum Run Time

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices 5 to 60 Minutes in 5 minute Increments

Factory Set None

Exceptions This feature is only available as a custom Temperature Profile created using OptiSet Plus.

Description This feature determines the minimum amount of time the unit will run after a Cycle Sentry Modulation restart. It is used to
provide adequate air circulation in the trailer.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 95
Section 3 - Software Description

Null Restart Temperature

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices -15°C to -9.4°C (5.0°F to 15.0°F)

Factory Set -15°C (5.0°F)

Exceptions

Description This feature determines the number of degrees above setpoint that the temperature can rise before the unit restarts in Cycle
Sentry Mode. The range of values available is determined by the setting of High Speed Pull Down. If Low Speed Switch Point
is set above 1.9°C (3.5°F), the Null Restart Temperature feature will be changed automatically. It must be at least 0.8°C
(1.5°F) above the setting of High Speed Cool to Low Speed Cool Switch Point.
With frozen range setpoints, the maximum restart limit can be no greater than -1.6°C (29°F). This prevents melt damage
with frozen cargo.
The Null Restart Temperature below setpoint is a fixed value and cannot be changed.

Floor Limit
Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices -14.5°C to -9.5°C (5.9°F to 14.9°F)

Factory Set None

Exceptions This feature is only available as a custom Temperature Profile created using OptiSet Plus.

Description This feature allows the minimum discharge air temperature during modulation to be programmed. The discharge air
temperature will not fall below the programmed limit to provide additional protection from freezing for chill sensitive loads.

Minimum Ambient
Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices -45.5°C to -65°C (-50°F to -85°F) in one degree increments.

Factory Set -45.5°C (-50°F)

Exceptions Cannot be set to a value higher than the Cycle Sentry Null Maximum Ambient setting.

Description When ambient temperature is greater than this setting, the unit will be allowed to go into NULL mode.

Maximum Ambient
Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices -6.6°C to 60°C (20°F to 140°F) in one degree increments.

Factory Set 60°C (140°F)

Exceptions Cannot be set to a value lower than the Cycle Sentry Null Minimum Ambient setting.

Description When ambient temperature is lower than this setting, the unit will be allowed to go into NULL mode.

™ Data Logger
Sensor Configuration Menu - CargoWatch™
The CargoWatch Data Logger is internal to the HMI Control Panel. This Data Logger conforms to European standard
EN12830. The data logger supports up to six temperature sensors and three digital inputs. These sensors are optional
sensors and are not the same as the temperature sensors used to control the unit. The CargoWatch Data Logger
features the ability to customize logging parameters and enable product temperature checking. The CargoWatch Data

96 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 3 - Software Description

Logger does not record unit sensors. Unit sensors and other unit operating data are recorded by the ServiceWatch™
Data Logger. The CargoWatch logger records the unit setpoint, operating mode, and shutdown alarms.
When shipped from the factory, CargoWatch sensors 1 and 2 are turned on to be logged and CargoWatch sensors 3
through 6 are turned off. Also, digital input 1 is turned on to be logged and digital inputs 2 and 3 are turned off. Sensors
and digital inputs can be turned on, off, and configured using the CargoWatch menu in Guarded Access or by using the
WinTrac Service Tool.
Sensor Configuration (CargoWatch)
Logging Interval (15 Minutes)
Log Sensor 1 (On)
Independent Sensor #1 Name (Log Sensor 1)
Out of Range Checking (Off)
Low (-10.8°F or -23.7°C)
High (10.8°F or -11.7°C)
Italian Option - Available with Sensor 1 only (Off)
Sensor Averaging (Off)
Log Sensor 2 (On)
Independent Sensor #1 Name (Log Sensor 2)
Out of Range Checking (Off)
Low (-10.8°F or -23.7°C)
High (10.8°F or -11.7°C)
Sensor Averaging (Off)
Log Sensor 3 (Off) Same features as Sensor 2 if On
Log Sensor 4 (Off) Same features as Sensor 2 if On
Log Sensor 5 (Off) Same features as Sensor 2 if On
Log Sensor 6 (Off) Same features as Sensor 2 if On
Digital In 1 (On)
Door Open Logging (On)
Digital Input #1 Name (Digital Input #1)
Digital In 2 (Off) Same as Digital Input 1 if On
Digital In 3 (Off) Same as Digital Input 1 if On
Countdown Timer (Off)
Conservative Log Count (Off)
SOT on Setpoint (Disabled)
Automatic SOT at Midnight (Disabled)

CargoWatch Sensor Programming

Logging Interval
Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices 1 minute, 2 minutes and 5 to 60 minutes in 5-minute intervals

Factory Set 15 Minutes

Exceptions WinTrac is capable of setting additional intervals as short as one minute.

Description This feature allows the desired logging interval to be set.

Log Sensor for CargoWatch sensor 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ON or OFF

Factory Set Sensors 1-2 ON, sensors 3-6 OFF

Exceptions

Description This feature allows the desired sensors to be logged.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 97
Section 3 - Software Description

Independent Sensor Name for CargoWatch sensor 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices See below

Factory Set Log Sensor 1 through 6

Exceptions

Description This feature allows the desired sensor name to be specified. These names appear only on handheld printer reports. This aids
in reading and understanding data logger printer reports.

Choices Log Sensor 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 Other Spare

Spare Ambient Other
Ambient Spare
Spare Dry Spare USDA 1, 2 or 3
Spare Chilled USDA 1, 2 or 3
Spare Frozen Other Spare Discharge Air
Spare Fresh Spare Discharge Air Zone 1, 2 or 3
Dry Spare Discharge Air
Chilled Other Spare Return Air
Fresh Spare Return Air Zone 1, 2 or 3
Spare Left Side Spare Return Air
Spare Right Side Other Discharge Air
Spare Side Discharge Air Zone 1, 2 or 3
Spare Rear Discharge Air
Spare Front Other Return Air
Left Side Return Air Zone 1, 2 or 3
Right Side Return Air
Side Frozen
Rear Independent Sensor 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6
Front

Out of Range Checking (for current sensor)

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ON or OFF

Factory Set ON

Exceptions

Description This feature allows the Out of Range Checking feature to be turned on or off. If Out of Range Checking is turned on, an alarm
will be set if the temperature, as sensed by the specified sensor, is above or below setpoint by more than the number of
degrees determined by the setting of LOW and HIGH programmable features. The out of range condition must exist for 1
hour before the alarm is set. A visual notification will be provided to the driver on the standard display, as shown below.

Low
Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices From -1.0° to -20.0° in 0.1 degree increments, in either Fahrenheit or Celsius.

Factory Set -6.0°C (-10.8°F)

Exceptions

Description This feature allows the low limit for Out of Range Checking to be set.

High
Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

98 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 3 - Software Description

Choices From 1.0° to 20.0° in 0.1 degree increments, in either Fahrenheit or Celsius.

Factory Set 6.0°C (10.8°F)

Exceptions

Description This feature allows the high limit for Out of Range Checking to be set.

Italian Option
Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ON or OFF

Factory Set OFF

Exceptions This feature is available with Sensor 1 only.

Description If this feature is turned ON, the driver is presented a visual “Out of Range Limit” notification and flashes the backlight if the
box temperature rises above -15°C (5°F). The visual notification appears on the Standard Display as shown below.

Sensor Averaging
Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ON or OFF

Factory Set OFF

Exceptions

Description If this feature is turned OFF, the temperature logged will be the actual instantaneous sensor reading at the time of log. If this
feature is turned ON, the sensor is read once each minute. The sensor readings are averaged dependant on the setting of the
Logging Interval feature selected above.
For example, if the Logging Interval is 15 minutes the previous 15 sensor readings are averaged and logged instead of the
actual instantaneous value. If the Logging Interval is set for 10 minutes, the previous 10 sensor readings are averaged and
logged.

Digital Input Programming

The digital inputs are used to log the door switch status.

Digital In for CargoWatch digital input 1, 2, or 3

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices Digital Input 1, 2, or 3

Factory Set

Exceptions

Description This feature allows the digital input to be programmed and selected.

Door Open Logging

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ON or OFF

Factory Set Input 1 ON, inputs 2-4 OFF

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 99
Section 3 - Software Description

Exceptions

Description This feature allows the desired digital inputs to be logged or ignored.

Digital Input Name for CargoWatch digital input 1, 2, or 3

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices See below

Factory Set Digital Input 1 through 3

Exceptions

Description This feature allows the desired input name to be specified. This aids in reading and understanding data logger downloads. All
digital inputs are connected into the HMI.

Choices Digital Input 1, 2, or 3 Other Side Door

Door Other Left Door
Other Door Other Right Door
Main Door Fresh Door
Back Door Other Fresh Door
Front Door Frozen Door
Side Door Other Frozen Door
Left Door Chilled Door
Right Door Other Chilled Door
Other Back Door Dry Door
Other Front Door Other Dry Door

Countdown Timer
Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices OFF, 1 - 96 Hours

Factory Set OFF

Exceptions The Countdown Timer only affects the CargoWatch Data Logger.

Description The Countdown Mode feature will keep the HMI Control Panel powered up for a user specified time period after the unit is
turned off. Under these conditions the display and backlight are turned off to conserve unit battery power.
Important: The four Hard Keys will remain illuminated when the unit is in Countdown Mode. This is normal operation.
The CargoWatch data logger will continue to record data according to the current CargoWatch interval settings until the user
specified time period expires. This allows data to be recorded during an interval where the unit is turned off.
The programmable time intervals are OFF or from 1 Hour to 96 Hours. The default setting for Countdown Mode is OFF.

Conservative Log Count

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices OFF, 1 – 400 Logs

Factory Set OFF

Exceptions The Conservative Log Count only affects the CargoWatch Data Logger.

Description The Conservative Mode can be utilized by the user after the Countdown Mode interval above has expired. When the
Countdown Mode has expired, Conservative Mode (if programmed) allows the HMI Control Panel to be temporarily powered
up according to the current CargoWatch interval settings to log an additional number of CargoWatch data logs. The HMI
Control Panel will be powered up for approximately 30 seconds to perform each data log, and will then turn back off.
The possible number of additional Conservative Mode CargoWatch data logs is from 1 Log to 400 Logs. The default setting
for Conservative Mode is OFF.

100 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 3 - Software Description

SOT on Setpoint
Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set DISABLED

Exceptions

Description If this feature is set ENABLED, a Start of Trip is sent to the ServiceWatch and CargoWatch Data Loggers after any setpoint
change. If this feature is set DISABLED, a Start of Trip is not sent.

Automatic SOT at Midnight

Control Rev D030 and later

HMI Rev 7580 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set DISABLED

Exceptions

Description This feature allows the user to configure the HMI to automatically set an SOT in the CargoWatch Data Logger when the time
on the clock in the HMI reaches midnight.

Hardware Configuration Setup Menu

The Hardware Configuration Setup Menu is used to specify the actual unit configuration. These features are set at the
factory as required for each unit. The factory settings shown below are for a replacement Base Controller.
Alarm Code 111 Unit Not Configured Correctly
If the Base Controller detects a mismatch between unit connections and configuration selections, Alarm Code 111 will
be set.

Unit Type
Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices TRUCK or TRAILER

Factory Set To match unit as built. A Base Controller cold start will default this feature to TRAILER.

Exceptions If this feature is changed, it is necessary to exit the Guarded Access Menu after making the change. This will reset the unit to
the new setting. Failure to do so will result in the wrong selections to be present in other Guarded Access Menu settings. For
example, if the feature was set to TRAILER and changed to TRUCK, the reset changes the TRAILER default settings to the
TRUCK default settings.

Description This feature allows the Unit Type to be selected.

Engine Type
Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices Yanmar 2.1 and TK486VMGS5 (NRMM)

Factory Set Yanmar 2.1

Exceptions TK486VMGS5 option available only for Control Rev DA15 and later.

Description This feature allows the engine type to be selected.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 101
Section 3 - Software Description

Compressor Type
Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices Recip or Screw

Factory Set Reciprocating

Exceptions

Description This feature allows the compressor type to be selected. The screw option is for a future implementation and should not be
selected.

ETV Configured
Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices YES or NO

Factory Set To match unit as built. A base controller cold start will default this feature to YES.

Exceptions

Description This feature allows the unit to be configured with an Electronic Throttling Valve (ETV). If the unit was built with an ETV, this
feature must be set to YES. All other units set to NO.

Electric Standby Equipped?

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices YES or NO

Factory Set To match unit as built. A base controller cold start will default this feature to YES.

Exceptions This setting will automatically be forced from “NO” to “YES” if the unit detects that electric supply power is connected to the
unit.

Description This feature specifies if the unit is equipped with optional electric standby. If the unit is equipped with electric standby, this
feature should be set to YES. If the unit is not equipped with electric standby, this feature should be set to NO.

Electric Heat Option

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices YES or NO

Factory Set To match unit as built. A Base Controller cold start will default this feature to YES.
Note: Default is NO for SLX/SLXe/SLXi Series units.

Exceptions

Description This feature specifies if the unit is equipped with the electric heat option. If the unit is equipped with electric heat, this
feature should be set YES. If the unit is not equipped with electric heat, this feature should be set NO.

Electric Motor Type

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices 14 HP or optional 24 HP

Factory Set As built. A Base Controller cold start will default this feature to 14 HP.

102 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 3 - Software Description

Exceptions

Description This feature specifies which motor is used on units equipped with the optional Electric Standby. A 14 HP motor is standard on
units equipped with the Electric Standby option. The 24 HP motor is an available option.

Diesel to Electric Auto Switch Enabled?

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices YES or NO

Factory Set NO

Exceptions

Description This feature allows the Auto Switch from Diesel to Electric feature to be enabled or disabled. If this feature is set YES, the
unit will switch automatically to electric mode when standby power is connected. If the feature is set NO, the operator must
manually switch the unit to electric mode using the HMI Control Panel Mode Menu or by following the HMI Control Panel
prompts when standby power is connected.

Electric to Diesel Auto Switch Enabled?

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices YES or NO

Factory Set NO

Exceptions

Description This feature allows the Auto Switch from Electric to Diesel feature to be enabled or disabled. If this feature is set YES, the
unit will switch automatically to diesel mode when standby power is disconnected or fails. If the feature is set NO, the
operator must manually switch the unit to diesel mode using the HMI Control Panel Mode Menu or by following the HMI
Control Panel prompts when standby power is disconnected or fails.
Note: Auto-switch from electric to diesel is not recommended when the unit is running in electric mode indoors or when
below deck on a ferry where engine operation is strictly prohibited.

Unit Model
Control Rev DA05 and later

HMI Rev 7B05 and later

Choices SB, Super II, SL-400, SLX-100, SLX-200, SLX-300, SLX-400, SLX-LDB, SLX-Ferry, SLX-Whisper Pro, SLXi-100, SLXi-200,
SLXi-300, SLXi-400, SLXi-300 Whisper Pro, SLXi-DRC, SLXi Local

Factory Set To match unit as built. A Base Controller cold start will default this feature to SB.

Exceptions For DA00/7B00 and later, SB is default unit due to legacy issue.

Description This feature allows the Unit Model to be selected. Set as appropriate for the unit.

High Capacity Unit?

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices YES or NO

Factory Set To match unit as built. A Base Controller cold start will default this feature to NO.

Exceptions

Description If the unit was built as a high capacity unit this setting must be set to YES (2600 RPM). If the unit was not built as a high
capacity unit this setting must be set to NO (2200 RPM).
Important: Improper setting of this feature may cause Alarm Code 33 Check Engine RPM to be set during a Pretrip Test.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 103
Section 3 - Software Description

High Capacity Fresh?

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices YES or NO

Factory Set NO

Exceptions Available only if the high capacity option is selected.

Description If the unit was built as a high capacity unit, the unit may be changed from the factory setting of NO (1450 RPM) to YES (1720
RPM). This feature should be set to YES if the customer wants to allow the engine to run at 1720 RPM in low speed. This
provides additional airflow when necessary. If this feature is set to NO, the engine will run at 1450 RPM in low speed.

Defrost Motor Equipped?

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices YES or NO

Factory Set To match unit as built. A Base Controller cold start will default this feature to NO.

Exceptions

Description This feature specifies if the unit is equipped with a defrost solenoid or defrost motor. If the unit is equipped with a defrost
motor, this feature should be set to YES. If the unit is not equipped with a defrost motor, this feature should be set to NO. If
OptiSet Plus is active, this feature is set using WinTrac.
Note: All SL and SLX units are equipped with defrost motors and this feature must be set to YES.
Note: A different SR-3 Base Controller is required for units equipped with a damper gear motor. The damper gear motor for
the SR-3 Base Controller has added electronic circuitry to drive the gear motor. Refer to Section 7 for more details.

Fuel Sensor Type

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices NONE, SOLID STATE, FLOAT, or SWITCH

Factory Set NONE

Exceptions

Description This feature is used to select the type of fuel level sensor installed. If no fuel level sensor is installed, this feature should be
set to NONE.

Rear Remote Control Panel

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices NONE, COM 2

Factory Set NONE

Exceptions

Description This feature specifies if the unit is equipped with the optional flush mount Rear Remote Control Panel. If the unit is equipped
with the flush mount Rear Remote Control Panel, this feature should be set to COM 2 and the flush mount Rear Remote
Control Panel should be connected to the COM2 port on the base controller. If the unit is not equipped with a flush mount
Rear Remote Control Panel, this feature should be set NONE.
Refer to Section 4 for more information on using the Rear Remote Control Panel.

104 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 3 - Software Description

Rear Remote Control Panel Action

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices STAND BY, RUN

Factory Set STAND BY

Exceptions Only appears if Rear Remote Control Panel is set for COM 2.

Description If the Action is set to STAND BY, the unit will power up when the Rear Remote Control Panel ON key is pressed. The setpoints
can be changed from the Rear Remote Control Panel but the unit will not start and run. The unit must be started from the
HMI Control Panel on the unit. Pressing the Rear Remote Control Panel OFF key will power down the control system. All Rear
Remote Control Panel functions are present except the engine will not start and a Manual Defrost Cycle or Pretrip Test cannot
be initiated.
If the Action is set to RUN the unit will automatically start and run when the Rear Remote Control Panel ON key is pressed.
Pressing the Rear Remote Control Panel OFF key will power down the control system. All Rear Remote Control Panel
functions are present.
Refer to Section 4 for more information on using the Rear Remote Control Panel.

Pretrip/Sleep Switch Options

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices DISABLE, PRETRIP, SLEEP

Factory Set DISABLE

Exceptions

Description This feature is used to allow an optional Sleep or Pretrip switch to be connected to the base controller. A momentary contact
switch is connected from chassis ground to the Controller Sensor Connecter J7 pin 30. This feature determines the action
resulting when this input is temporarily connected to chassis ground.
DISABLE results in no action. If a switch is not connected, this feature should be set to DISABLE.
PRETRIP will start a Pretrip Test in the same manner as starting the test from the Main/Mode menu.
SLEEP will place the unit in Sleep Mode in the same manner as entering Sleep Mode from the Main/Pretrip menu.

3rd Party Device Control

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices NONE, COM 1, COM 2

Factory Set NONE

Exceptions

Description This feature selects the communications port on the SR-3 Base Controller that will be used by a third party control device
such as satellite communications. If the unit is not equipped with a third party device, this feature should be set to NONE.

Low Fuel Shutdown

Control Rev D000 and later

HMI Rev 6550 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set DISABLED

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 105
Section 3 - Software Description

Exceptions A float or solid state fuel level sensor must be installed and enabled from the Guarded Access / Unit Configuration / Fuel
Sensor Type menu. This feature is not available if the Rail Option feature is enabled.

Description Low Fuel Shutdown allows the low fuel shutdown feature to be enabled or disabled.
If Low Fuel Shutdown is set TO ENABLED, Alarm Code 44 Check Fuel System will be set as a Shutdown Alarm if the fuel level
falls below 5% of tank capacity. When the fuel tank is filled to more than 15% of tank capacity, Alarm Code 44 is
automatically cleared.
Important: If Alarm Code 44 is manually cleared, it is reset as a Check Alarm. The unit can now be restarted but will
continue to run until the fuel supply is exhausted.
If Low Fuel Shutdown is set DISABLED, Alarm Code 44 will not be set and the unit will run until the fuel supply is exhausted.

Fresh Air Exchange

Control Rev D006 Only - see Exceptions

HMI Rev 6561 Only - see Exceptions

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set DISABLED

Exceptions SB Units only. Exists on SLX Units but does not actually change any parameters if configured by user.
Unit Type must be set for Trailer. The Fresh Air Exchange Feature must be installed on the unit.
D006 Base Controller software and 6561 HMI Control Panel software are required for the Fresh Air Exchange feature and will
be installed only in SR-3 SB Rail Ready units equipped with the Fresh Air Exchange option. D006 Base Controller software is
a direct descendent of D007 Base Controller software and has all the same features as the D007 software.

Description The Fresh Air Exchange option allows fresh outside air to be drawn into the trailer and the interior air to be exhausted by
opening the Fresh Air Exchange doors. This feature is beneficial when hauling loads that release gas as they ripen, such as
potatoes.
The Fresh Air Exchange feature is only available with setpoints above 0°C (32°F). The feature is disabled with setpoints of 0°
C (32°F) and below.
A solenoid is used to open and close the Fresh Air Exchange Door. The Fresh Air Exchange door will only be open when the
unit engine is running, as it is held in the open position by the Fresh Air Exchange Solenoid. The door will close when the
engine shuts down to preserve unit battery life. The setting of the Fresh Air Exchange door will survive power off / power on
cycles – if the door is set to “Open” by the operator, it will continue to open any time the engine is running until it is set to
“Close” by the operator.
If Fresh Air Exchange is set to ENABLED, the Fresh Air Exchange Open / Close feature will be shown in the Mode Menu. If
Fresh Air Exchange is set to DISABLED, the Fresh Air Exchange Open / Close feature will not appear in the Mode Menu.
The Fresh Air Exchange feature must be used exactly as specified by the customer.

TK Telematics Fuel Level Sensor Type

Control Rev D030 and later

HMI Rev 7580 and later

Choices ENABLE or DISABLE

Factory Set DISABLE

Exceptions

Description If a dedicated Telematics Fuel Sensor is installed, this feature should be set to match the sensor type. If no dedicated
Telematics Fuel Sensor is installed, this feature should be set NONE.

TK Telematics Door Switch Enabled?

Control Rev D030 and later

HMI Rev 7580 and later

Choices ENABLE or DISABLE

Factory Set DISABLE

Exceptions

Description If a dedicated Telematics Door Switch is installed, this feature should be set ENABLE. If no dedicated Telematics Door Switch
is installed, this feature should be set DISABLE.

106 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 3 - Software Description

CargoLink
Control Rev D060 and later

HMI Rev 75B0 and later

Choices ENABLED or DISABLED

Factory Set DISABLED

Exceptions

Description When ENABLED, this feature will allow the HMI to read the sensor data from the COM ports.

Refrigerant Type
Control Rev D091 and later

HMI Rev 75C2 and later

Choices 0 = NOT SET

1 = R452A
2 = R134A
3 = R404A

Factory Set 0 = NOT SET

Exceptions

Description This feature allows the user to configure the unit refrigerant type so that it can be displayed in the Maintenance menu.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 107
Section 4 - Operation
HMI Control Panel
The Human/Machine Interface (HMI) Control Panel is connected to the Base Controller and is used to operate the unit
and display unit information. The HMI Control Panel communicates with the Base Controller via a controller area
network (CAN) bus. The HMI Control Panel also contains the CargoWatch™ data logger. The HMI Control Panel is
located on the control box door.
The HMI Control Panel consists of a display and 8 touch-sensitive keys. The display is capable of showing both text and
graphics. The keys on the left and right sides of the display are “hard” (dedicated) or single function keys. The four keys
under the display are termed “soft” keys. The functions of these keys change depending on the operation being
performed. If a soft key is active, the current key function is shown in the display directly above the key.

Control Panel Display

The display is used to present information to the operator. This information includes setpoint and temperature, unit
operating information, gauge readings, temperatures and other information as selected by the operator.
The default display is called the Standard Display and is shown below. It is described in detail later in this section.

Control Panel Display and Keys

1 On Key (Hard Key)

2 Off Key (Hard Key)

3 Display

4 Defrost Key (Hard Key)

5 CYCLE-SENTRY/Continuous Mode Key

(Hard Key)

6 Soft Keys

Display Icons
Display symbols or icons are used to present additional unit information.

Down-Pointing Arrow: (At the left side of the display) Shows the unit is cooling. If the arrow were pointing upward the unit
would be heating.

CYCLE SENTRY/Continuous Mode: The unit is running in Cycle Sentry Mode as shown by the Cycle Sentry Icon in the upper
right corner of the display. If the Cycle Sentry icon is not present, the unit is running in Continuous Mode.

USB: The USB Icon in the upper left corner of the display will appear when a USB device is connected to any of the USB Ports
on the Unit Control Panel or inside the unit control box.

108 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 4 - Operation

Hard Keys
The keys on either side of the display are dedicated or hard keys. Their function always remains the same.

On Key: Used to turn the unit on. First the display will briefly show the Thermo King Logo and then the statement “Configuring
System - Please Wait”. When the power-up sequence is complete, the display shows the Standard Display of box temperature
and setpoint. For more information see “Turning the Unit On and Off” later in this section.

Off Key: Used to turn the unit off. First, the display will briefly show “System is Powering Down - Please Wait. Press On to
Resume” and then “Off” will appear momentarily. When the power-down sequence is complete the display will be blank. For
more information see “Turning the Unit On and Off” later in this section.

Defrost Key: Press this key to initiate a Manual Defrost cycle.

CYCLE SENTRY: Used to select Cycle Sentry Mode or Continuous Mode operation if allowed by OptiSet Plus. For more
information see “Selecting Cycle Sentry or Continuous Mode” later in this section.

Soft Keys
The four soft keys under the display are multi-purpose keys. Their function changes depending on the operation being
performed. If a soft key is active the key function is shown in the display directly above the key. The keys are numbered from
left to right, with Key 1 on the far left and Key 4 on the far right.

Typical soft key applications:

MENU + or - HOURMETERS EXIT

NEXT SELECT GAUGES HELP

YES/NO CLEAR BACK SENSORS

Display Heater
The HMI Control Panel is equipped with a display heater. This heater is needed to make the display visible in very cold
ambient temperatures.
The HMI has its own internal temperature sensor for the display heater. The heater is energized when the unit is turned
on and the ambient temperature is below -2°C (29.4°F). The heater turns off when the temperature sensed by the
internal sensor rises above 3°C (37.4°F). The heater draws from 1.4 to 1.7 amps when energized.
The colder the ambient temperature, the longer it will take for the heater to make the display visible on a cold startup. It
may take 10-15 seconds for the display to appear with extremely cold temperatures.

Turning Unit On
The unit is turned on by pressing the ON Key (Figure 15, p. 110) and off by pressing the OFF Key. When the On Key is
pressed, the display briefly shows the THERMO KING Logo as the display initializes.
I m p o r t a n t : The ON Key must be held down until the Thermo King Logo appears. If the ON Key is not held down long
enough (approximately ½ second), the display may flicker but the unit will not start up. If this occurs, hold
the ON Key down until the Thermo King logo appears.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 109
Section 4 - Operation

N o t e : With extremely cold ambient temperatures, it may take up to 15 seconds for the display to appear on initial
startup.
Figure 15. ON Key

The startup screen (Figure 16, p. 110) appears while communications are established and the unit prepares for
operation.
Figure 16. Startup Screen

When the unit is ready to run, the Standard Display appears.

Figure 17. Standard Display

If a Flash Drive is Connected

If a properly configured USB Flash Drive is inserted in the USB Port on the Control Panel when the unit is turned on, the
display will briefly show FLASH DRIVE (Figure 18, p. 110).
Figure 18. Flash Drive

110 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 4 - Operation

The FLASH DRIVE DETECTED and the Flash Drive Menu will appear on the display (Figure 19, p. 111). The display will
be shown for about 30 seconds and then the Standard Display will appear. To go to the Standard Display, immediately
press the EXIT Soft Key.
I m p o r t a n t : The engine start is not delayed by the Flash Drive Menu. The engine start prompt will appear and the engine
will start. After the engine is started, the display will return to the Flash Drive Menu.
N o t e : If a USB Flash Drive is connected to the USB Port on the Control Panel, the USB Icon will appear in the upper left
corner of the display (Figure 20, p. 111).
Figure 19. Flash Drive Menu

Figure 20. USB Icon

If desired, downloads, flash loads and OptiSet Plus send and retrieve functions can be performed.
The Flash Drive Menu will time out about 30 seconds after the engine starts. When the Flash Drive Menu times out, the
Standard Display will appear. To go to the Standard Display immediately press the EXIT Key.

If a Language is Enabled
If more than one language has been enabled from the Guarded Access Language Menu, a prompt will appear to allow
the desired language to be chosen as shown below. Only languages specifically enabled from the Guarded Access
Menu are available. If a different language is desired, press the NO Key as shown (Figure 21, p. 111).
I m p o r t a n t : The engine start is not delayed by the language prompt shown below. The prompt will appear for 10
seconds and then the engine will start. After the engine is started, the display will return to the prompt
shown below.
Figure 21. NO Key

The Language menu will appear as shown (Figure 22, p. 112). Press the + or - Keys to select the desired language.
When the desired language is shown, press the YES Key to confirm the choice.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 111
Section 4 - Operation

Figure 22. + or -, then YES Key

The display will briefly show PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE - PLEASE WAIT in the new language as shown (Figure 23, p.
112).
Figure 23. New Language

The new language is confirmed, and the Standard Display will appear in the new language as shown (Figure 24, p. 112).
The unit is ready to run.
Figure 24. Standard Display with New Language

Turning The Unit Off

Pressing the OFF Key stops unit operation. The unit shuts down immediately and the display briefly shows the power
down message (Figure 25, p. 112).
Figure 25. Power Down Message

The display briefly shows OFF (Figure 26, p. 113) and then goes blank. To start the unit again, press the ON Key.

112 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 4 - Operation

Figure 26. Display Shows OFF

The Standard Display

The Standard Display is the default display that appears if no other display function is selected. The Standard Display
shows the box temperature and setpoint. The box temperature is that measured by the controlling sensor, usually the
return air sensor. The box temperature shown (Figure 27, p. 113) is 35.8°F (2.1°C) with a 35°F (1.7°C) setpoint.
Figure 27. Standard Display

The Cycle Sentry icon in the upper right corner of the display shows that the unit is operating in Cycle Sentry mode. If
the Cycle Sentry icon is not present, the unit is running in Continuous Mode.
The down-pointing arrow indicates that the unit is cooling.
The USB Icon in the upper left corner of the display indicates that a USB Flash Drive is inserted in the USB Port on the
Unit Control Panel.
Pressing the left soft key allows the user to change the SETPOINT, and pressing the right soft key accesses the MAIN
MENU. The other two soft keys access the GAUGES menu and the SENSORS menu.

™ Display
The TemperatureWatch™
The TemperatureWatch Display appears 2 ½ minutes after the Standard Display appears so long as there is no key
activity and no Check, Prevent, or Shutdown Alarms present. The TemperatureWatch Display will remain on until any
key is pressed or a Check, Prevent, or Shutdown Alarm occurs.
The TemperatureWatch Display shows the box temperature and setpoint. The large numbers allow unit conditions to
be checked from a distance. The box temperature is that measured by the controlling sensor, usually the return air
sensor. The box temperature shown (Figure 28, p. 114) is 35.8°F (2.1°C) with a 35°F (1.7°C) setpoint. The Cycle Sentry
icon in the upper right corner of the display shows that the unit is operating in Cycle Sentry mode. If the Cycle Sentry
icon is not present, the unit is running in Continuous Mode. The down-pointing arrow indicates that the unit is cooling.
Pressing any soft key returns the display to the Standard Display. The USB Icon next to the Cycle Sentry Icon in the
upper right corner of the display indicates that a USB Flash Drive is inserted in the USB Port on the Unit Control Panel.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 113
Section 4 - Operation

Figure 28. TemperatureWatch Display

If an alarm condition (other than a log alarm) is present, the TemperatureWatch Display will not appear. If an alarm
condition occurs while the TemperatureWatch Display is present, the display will return to the Standard Display to
indicate that an alarm condition has occurred.
If the Defrost Key or Cycle Sentry Key is pressed, the display will return to the TemperatureWatch Display immediately
after the defrost cycle is initiated or the operating mode is changed.

Changing The Setpoint

The Setpoint is changed from the Standard Display. If the TemperatureWatch display is present, press any key to return
to the Standard Display.
I m p o r t a n t : If OptiSet Plus is in use, there are several possible options when changing the setpoint.

Numerical Setpoints
If OptiSet Plus is not in use or if only Numerical Setpoints are enabled, the Standard Display left soft key will be labeled
SETPOINT (Figure 29, p. 114).
Figure 29. SETPOINT

Named Products - OptiSet Plus

OptiSet Plus allows the use of Named Products such as GRAPEFRUIT or BANANAS in place of a numerical setpoint. If
only named products are enabled, the Standard Display left soft key will be labeled PRODUCT (Figure 30, p. 114).
• A single setpoint temperature may be allowed for the specific named product.
• A numerical setpoint range may be allowed for the specific named product.
Figure 30. PRODUCT

114 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 4 - Operation

Both Numerical Setpoints and Named Products

OptiSet Plus can allow the use of both Numerical Setpoints and Named Products. If both numerical setpoints and
named products are enabled, the Standard Display left soft key will be labeled PRODUCT/SETPOINT (Figure 31, p. 115).
Figure 31. PRODUCT/SETPOINT

Changing the Setpoint - Numerical Setpoint

If the TemperatureWatch display is shown, press any soft key to return to the Standard Display. From the Standard
Display, press the SETPOINT Key (Figure 32, p. 115).
Figure 32. SETPOINT

The setpoint display appears (Figure 33, p. 115).

Figure 33. Setpoint Display

The “-“ and “+” Keys are used to increase or decrease the setpoint until the desired setpoint is shown. The setpoint has
been changed to 40°F using the “+” Key (Figure 34, p. 115).
Figure 34. Setpoint Changed Using “+” Key

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 115
Section 4 - Operation

The YES and NO Keys (Figure 35, p. 116) confirm the setpoint change. When the desired setpoint has been selected
using the “+” and/or “-“ Keys, press the YES Key to confirm and load the new setpoint. If the setpoint is changed using
the “+” or “-“ Keys, the change must be confirmed or rejected by pressing the YES or NO Key within 10 seconds of
changing the setpoint. A warning beep will sound for five seconds as a reminder.
Failure to confirm the new setpoint by pressing Yes or No within 10 seconds of changing the setpoint will result in no
setpoint change. In addition, Alarm Code 127 Setpoint Not Entered is set, to indicate that the setpoint change was not
completed.
Figure 35. Yes and No Keys

After the YES Key has been pressed, the display briefly shows PROGRAMMING NEW SETPOINT - PLEASE WAIT. The
display then confirms the new setpoint for several seconds (Figure 36, p. 116).
Figure 36. New Setpoint

If the NO Key is pressed, the display will briefly show SETPOINT NOT CHANGED and return to the Standard Display.
The Standard Display will show the old setpoint.
The display then returns to the Standard Display showing the new setpoint. Notice that the arrow now points up, to
indicate that the unit is heating (Figure 37, p. 116).
Figure 37. Up Arrow

I m p o r t a n t : If the setpoint is changed using the “+” or “-” Keys, the change must be confirmed or rejected by pressing
the YES or NO Key within 10 seconds of changing the setpoint.
• If the YES Key is pressed, the setpoint change made with the “+” or “-“ Key is accepted, the setpoint changes, and
the display returns to the Standard Display.
• If the NO Key is pressed, the setpoint change made with the “+” or “-“ Key is not accepted, the setpoint is not
changed, and the display returns to the Standard Display.

116 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 4 - Operation

• If the YES or NO Key is not pressed within 10 seconds of making a change with the “+” or “-“ Key, the setpoint is not
changed and the display returns to the Standard Display. The display briefly shows [SETPOINT NOT CHANGED] and
Alarm Code 127 Setpoint Not Entered is set, to indicate that the setpoint change was started but not completed.

Changing the Setpoint - Named Product

If the TemperatureWatch display is shown, press any soft key to return to the Standard Display. From the Standard
Display, press the PRODUCT Key. The PRODUCT is displayed in place of SETPOINT (Figure 38, p. 117).
Figure 38. PRODUCT

The display briefly shows PRODUCT and then the setpoint display appears (Figure 39, p. 117).
Figure 39. Setpoint Display

The “-“ and “+” Keys are used to change the Named Product until the desired product is shown. Here the product has
been changed to Potato, Late Crop (Figure 40, p. 117).
Figure 40. Named Product

The YES and NO Keys confirm the product change (Figure 41, p. 118). When the desired product has been selected
using the “+” and/or “-“ Keys, press the YES Key to confirm and load the new product. If the product is changed using
the “+” or “-“ Keys, the change must be confirmed or rejected by pressing the YES or NO Key within 10 seconds of
changing the product. A warning beep will sound for five seconds as a reminder.
Failure to confirm the new product by pressing Yes or No within 10 seconds of changing the product will result in no
product change. In addition, Alarm Code 127 Setpoint Not Entered is set, to indicate that the product change was not
completed.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 117
Section 4 - Operation

Figure 41. Yes and No Keys

After the YES Key has been pressed, the display briefly shows PROGRAMMING NAMED PRODUCT - PLEASE WAIT. The
display then confirms the new setpoint for several seconds (Figure 42, p. 118).
Figure 42. New Named Product

If the NO Key is pressed, the display will briefly show SETPOINT NOT CHANGED and return to the Standard Display.
The Standard Display will show the old setpoint.
The display then returns to the Standard Display showing the new named product. Notice that the arrow points down,
to indicate that the unit is cooling (Figure 43, p. 118).
Figure 43. Standard Display

I m p o r t a n t : If the named product is changed using the “+” or “-“ Keys, the change must be confirmed or rejected by
pressing the YES or NO Key within 10 seconds of changing the named product.
• If the YES Key is pressed, the product change made with the “+” or “-“ Key is accepted, the product changes, and
the display returns to the Standard Display.
• If the NO Key is pressed, the product change made with the “+” or “-“ Key is not accepted, the product is not
changed, and the display returns to the Standard Display.
• If the YES or NO Key is not pressed within 10 seconds of making a change with the “+” or “-“ Key, the product is not
changed and the display returns to the Standard Display. The display briefly shows [SETPOINT NOT CHANGED] and
Alarm Code 127 Setpoint Not Entered is set, to indicate that the setpoint change was started but not completed.

Changing the Setpoint - Both Numerical Setpoint and Named Product Available
If the TemperatureWatch display is shown, press any soft key to return to the Standard Display. From the Standard
Display, press the SETPOINT Key. Both PRODUCT and SETPOINT are displayed as shown (Figure 44, p. 119).

118 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 4 - Operation

Figure 44. PRODUCT/SETPOINT

The NAMED PRODUCT / NUMERIC SETPOINT appears briefly as shown (Figure 45, p. 119).
Figure 45. NAMED PRODUCT/NUMERIC SETPOINT Prompt

• Press the NAMED Soft Key to proceed with Named Product change as previously shown.
• Press the NUMERIC Soft Key to proceed with Numeric Setpoint change as previously shown.
• Press the EXIT Soft Key to return to the Standard Display.
Figure 46. NAMED PRODUCT/NUMERIC SETPOINT Display

Starting the Diesel Engine

Diesel engine preheats and starts are automatic in both Continuous Mode and Cycle Sentry Mode. The engine will
preheat and start as required when the unit is turned on. The engine preheat and start will be delayed in Cycle Sentry
mode if there is no current need for the engine to run. If any keys are being pressed on the HMI Control Panel, the
engine will not preheat and start until 10 seconds after the last key is pressed.
N o t e : If the unit is equipped with optional Electric Standby there may be some additional prompts before the engine
will start. Refer to “Starting the Electric Motor ”for details.

CAUTION
Risk of Injury!
The engine may start automatically any time the unit is turned on.

NOTICE
Equipment Damage!
Never use starting fluid. Damage to the engine can occur.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 119
Section 4 - Operation

When the engine is preparing to start, the HMI Control Panel will display the engine start screen as shown (Figure 47, p.
120). The preheat buzzer sounds during the engine preheat and crank sequence.
Figure 47. Engine Start Screen

After the engine is started, the display returns to the Standard Display of temperature and setpoint.

Starting the Electric Motor

N o t e : Units equipped with the Electric Standby option only.

CAUTION
Risk of Injury!
The motor may start automatically any time the unit is turned on.

Electric motor starting is automatic in both Continuous Mode and Cycle Sentry Mode. The motor will start as required
when the unit is turned on. If any keys are being pressed on the HMI Control Panel prior to the motor start, the motor
start will be delayed until 10 seconds after the last key is pressed.
When the motor is preparing to start the HMI Control Panel will display the motor start screen (Figure 48, p. 120). The
preheat buzzer sounds for 20 seconds before the electric motor starts.
Figure 48. Motor Start Screen

After the motor is started, the display returns to the Standard Display of temperature and setpoint.

Switching from Diesel to Electric

N o t e : Units equipped with the Electric Standby option only.
If the Diesel to Electric Auto-Switch Enabled feature in Guarded Access is set YES, the unit will automatically switch to
Electric Mode operation when standby power is connected and available.
If the Diesel to Electric Auto-Switch Enabled feature in Guarded Access is set NO, the prompt screen (Figure 49, p. 121)
will appear when standby power is connected and available.

120 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 4 - Operation

Figure 49. Standby Power Connected

If NO is selected, the unit will continue to operate in Diesel Mode. If YES is selected, the display will briefly show the
screen (Figure 50, p. 121).
Figure 50. YES Selected

Electric Mode operation will briefly be confirmed. If unit operation is required the electric motor will start as shown
previously under STARTING THE ELECTRIC MOTOR.
If the Diesel to Electric Auto-Switch Enabled feature in Guarded Access is set NO, the unit can also be switched from
Diesel mode to Electric mode operation using the Electric Standby Selection from the Main Menu as shown later in this
section.

Switching from Electric to Diesel

N o t e : Units equipped with the Electric Standby option only.
If the Electric to Diesel Autoswitch Enabled feature in Guarded Access is set to YES, the unit will automatically switch to
Diesel Mode operation when standby power is turned off or is no longer available.
If the Electric to Diesel Autoswitch Enabled feature in Guarded Access is set to NO and standby power is disconnected
or fails, the unit will not automatically switch to Diesel mode. This is primarily designed to prevent unauthorized diesel
engine starts where engine operation is strictly prohibited. If the Electric to Diesel Autoswitch Enabled feature in
Guarded Access is set to NO, the prompt screen shown (Figure 51, p. 121) will appear when standby power is turned off
or is no longer available.
Figure 51. Standby Power is Off

If YES is selected, the display will briefly show the screen (Figure 52, p. 122).

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 121
Section 4 - Operation

Figure 52. YES Selected

Diesel Mode operation will briefly be confirmed. If unit operation is required, the diesel engine will start as shown
previously in STARTING THE DIESEL ENGINE.
If the Electric to Diesel Autoswitch Enabled feature in Guarded Access is set to NO, the unit can also be switched from
Diesel mode to Electric mode operation using the Diesel Selection from the Main Menu as shown later in this section.

Initiating a Manual Defrost Cycle

Defrost cycles are usually initiated automatically based on time or demand. Manual defrost is also available.
Manual defrost is available if the unit is running and the evaporator coil temperature is less than or equal to 45°F (7°C).
N o t e : If Rail Alternate is set to YES, defrost is allowed with an evaporator coil temperature less than or equal to 55°F
(13°C).
Other features such as door switch settings may not allow manual defrost under some conditions. To initiate a manual
defrost cycle, press the Defrost Key (Figure 53, p. 122).
Figure 53. Press Defrost Key

The display briefly shows [DEFROST], [PROGRAMMING DEFROST - PLEASE WAIT] and then [DEFROST STARTED]
(Figure 54, p. 122).
Figure 54. Defrost Started

The display then shows the Defrost display. The bar indicator shows approximately how much time remains to
complete the defrost cycle. The bar indicator shows that the defrost cycle is about 25% complete (Figure 55, p. 123).

122 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 4 - Operation

Figure 55. Bar Indicator

Terminating a Defrost Cycle

The defrost cycle terminates automatically when the coil temperature is greater than or equal to 14°C (58°F) or the
defrost timer expires. Defrost can also be terminated by turning the unit off and back on.
N o t e : If Rail Alternate is set YES, the defrost cycle terminates at 21°C (70°F) or if the defrost timer expires.

Selecting Cycle Sentry or Continuous Mode

When Cycle Sentry Mode is selected, the unit will start and stop automatically to maintain setpoint, keep the engine
warm, and the battery charged. When Continuous Mode is selected, the unit starts automatically and runs continuously
to maintain setpoint and provide constant airflow.
I m p o r t a n t : Cycle Sentry or Continuous may not be selectable if OptiSet Plus is in use.
If the unit is operating in Cycle Sentry Mode, the Cycle Sentry Icon will be present in the upper right corner of the
display as shown (Figure 56, p. 123). If the Cycle Sentry Icon is not present, the unit is operating in Continuous Mode.
Figure 56. Cycle Sentry Icon

If allowed by OptiSet Plus, Cycle Sentry Mode or Continuous Mode is selected by pressing the Cycle Sentry/Continuous
Key as shown (Figure 57, p. 123).
N o t e : Cycle Sentry Mode or Continuous Mode can also be selected using the Main Menu > Mode Submenu.
Figure 57. Cycle Sentry/Continuous Key

If the unit is in Cycle Sentry Mode, pressing the Cycle Sentry/Continuous Key changes the mode from Cycle Sentry to
Continuous. The display confirms the change (Figure 58, p. 124).

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 123
Section 4 - Operation

Figure 58. Continuous Mode

The new mode is confirmed for three seconds (Figure 59, p. 124).
Figure 59. New Mode Confirmed

The display then returns to the Standard Display. In the example shown (Figure 60, p. 124), the absence of the Cycle
Sentry Icon indicates that the unit is running in Continuous Mode.
Figure 60. Cycle Sentry Icon Not Shown = Continuous Mode

Pressing the Cycle Sentry/Continuous Key again allows the operator to change back to Cycle Sentry Mode operation.
I m p o r t a n t : If the unit is in Cycle Sentry null and the mode is switched to Continuous Mode, the unit will start
automatically.
I m p o r t a n t : Cycle Sentry or Continuous may not be selectable if OptiSet Plus is in use.

Using the Gauges Key

The GAUGES Key allows the operator to view the unit gauges. To access the GAUGES Menu, press the GAUGES Key
(Figure 61, p. 124).
Figure 61. Gauges Key

124 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 4 - Operation

The first gauge display will appear. Press the NEXT and BACK Keys to scroll through the gauges. Pressing the LOCK
Key will lock the current gauge on the display (Figure 62, p. 125).
Figure 62. Gauge Display Locked

The gauges and I/O conditions available are shown below. Not all gauges or I/O conditions may appear depending on
unit configuration and software revision.
To return to the Standard Display, press the EXIT Key.

Gauges Available
C o o l a n t T e m p e r a t u r e : Displays the temperature of the engine coolant.
C o o l a n t L e v e l : Displays the coolant level in the overflow tank.
E n g i n e O i l P r e s s u r e : Displays the engine oil pressure as OK or LOW.
E n g i n e O i l L e v e l S w i t c h : Displays the engine oil level as OK or LOW.
A m p s : Displays the current flow in amps flowing to or from the unit battery.
B a t t e r y V o l t a g e : Displays the voltage of the unit battery.
E n g i n e R P M : Displays the engine speed in RPMs.
F u e l L e v e l S e n s o r : Displays the fuel level if a fuel level sensor is installed.
D i s c h a r g e P r e s s u r e : Displays the unit discharge pressure. ETV units only.
S u c t i o n P r e s s u r e : Displays the unit suction pressure. ETV units only.
E T V P o s i t i o n : Displays the current position of the ETV valve. ETV units only.
F r e s h A i r E x c h a n g e : Displays the current position of the optional Fresh Air Exchange Door.
I / O ( I n p u t / O u t p u t S t a t e ) : Displays the current state of the input/output devices listed here:

High Speed Relay/Electric Heat Alternator Frequency

Run Relay Optional Fresh Air Exchange Output

Run Relay Feedback Diesel/Electric Relay (Model 50 units only)

Alternator Excite Output Electric Ready Input (Model 50 units only)

Defrost Damper Electric overload (Model 50 units only)

Heat Output Hot Gas Bypass (ETV units only)

Using the Sensors Key

The SENSORS Key allows the operator to view the temperatures read by the unit temperature sensors. To access the
SENSORS Menu, press the SENSORS Key (Figure 63, p. 126).

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 125
Section 4 - Operation

Figure 63. Sensors Key

The first sensor display will appear. Press the NEXT and BACK Keys to scroll through the sensors. Pressing the LOCK
Key will lock the current sensor on the display (Figure 64, p. 126).
Figure 64. Sensor Display Locked

The sensors available are shown below. To return to the Standard Display, press the EXIT Key.

Sensors Available
C o n t r o l R e t u r n A i r T e m p e r a t u r e : Displays the temperature of the control return air sensor.
D i s p l a y R e t u r n A i r T e m p e r a t u r e : Displays the temperature of the display return air sensor.
C o n t r o l D i s c h a r g e A i r T e m p e r a t u r e : Displays the temperature of the control discharge air sensor.
D i s p l a y D i s c h a r g e A i r T e m p e r a t u r e : Displays the temperature of the display discharge air sensor.
T e m p e r a t u r e D i f f e r e n t i a l : Displays the calculated difference between the control return air sensor and the control
discharge air sensor.
E v a p o r a t o r C o i l T e m p e r a t u r e : Displays the temperature of the evaporator coil sensor.
A m b i e n t A i r T e m p e r a t u r e : Displays the temperature of the ambient air sensor.
S p a r e 1 T e m p e r a t u r e : Displays the temperature of the spare 1 temperature sensor.
L o g S e n s o r 1 : Displays the temperature of the CargoWatch Data Logger temperature sensor 1.
L o g S e n s o r 2 : Displays the temperature of the CargoWatch Data Logger temperature sensor 2.
D a t a l o g g e r S e n s o r 3 T e m p e r a t u r e : Displays the temperature of the CargoWatch Data Logger temperature sensor 3.
D a t a l o g g e r S e n s o r 4 T e m p e r a t u r e : Displays the temperature of the CargoWatch Data Logger temperature sensor 4.
D a t a l o g g e r S e n s o r 5 T e m p e r a t u r e : Displays the temperature of the CargoWatch Data Logger temperature sensor 5.
D a t a l o g g e r S e n s o r 6 T e m p e r a t u r e : Displays the temperature of the CargoWatch Data Logger temperature sensor 6.
B o a r d T e m p e r a t u r e S e n s o r : Displays the internal temperature of the HMI Control Panel pc board.

Using the Main Menu

The Main Menu contains several additional submenus that allow the operator to view information and modify unit
operation. To access the Main Menu press the MENU Key (Figure 65, p. 127).

126 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 4 - Operation

Figure 65. Menu Key

The first Main Menu choice will appear. Press the NEXT and BACK Keys to scroll through the menu choices. When the
desired selection is shown on the display, press the SELECT Key to access it. The Pretrip submenu is shown (Figure 66,
p. 127). To return to the Standard Display, press the EXIT Key.
Figure 66. Pretrip Submenu

Main Menu Choices

Each of these Main Menu choices will be explained later in this section:
F l a s h D r i v e : If a properly configured USB Flash Drive is currently connected to the USB Port on the unit Control Panel,
the Flash Drive Menu will appear as a Main Menu selection.
L a n g u a g e s : If more than one language is enabled from the Guarded Access > Language Menu, this menu item will
appear.
A l a r m s : The Alarm Menu allows the operator to view any active alarms, and allows most alarms to be cleared.
D a t a L o g g e r : Allows the operator to set a Start of Trip marker to the CargoWatch and ServiceWatch data loggers and
print the contents of the CargoWatch data logger.
H o u r m e t e r s : The Hourmeters Menu allows the operator to view the unit hourmeters that have the view feature
enabled in the Guarded Access Menu.
M o d e : The Mode Menu allows the operator to change the unit operating modes that have been enabled in Guarded
Access.
P r e t r i p : Allows the operator to start a Pretrip Test. If an alarm is active, the Pretrip Test is not allowed and the operator
is prompted to clear the alarm(s).
E l e c t r i c S t a n d b y O p t i o n : The Diesel/Electric Standby selection from the Main Menu allows the operator to manually
select diesel or electric mode operation on units equipped with the electric standby option.
D i e s e l M o d e : If a unit equipped with electric standby is running in electric mode and the Electric to Diesel Auto-Switch
feature is set NO, this feature allows the operator to manually select diesel mode operation. This feature does not
appear if the unit does not feature optional Electric Standby or if the Electric to Diesel Auto-Switch feature is set YES.
A d j u s t B r i g h t n e s s : The brightness of the HMI Control Panel display can be adjusted to allow for changing ambient
light conditions.
T i m e : The Time and Date held by the HMI Control Panel can be checked. Time and Date cannot be changed from the
Main Menu.

USB Flash Drive

When a properly configured USB Flash Drive is connected to the USB Port on the unit Control Panel, the Flash Drive
user interface will appear. The USB Flash Drive provides CargoWatch and ServiceWatch Data Logger downloads, flash

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 127
Section 4 - Operation

loading the HMI Control Panel and Base Controller software, as well as sending and retrieving OptiSet Plus files. A USB
Flash drive must be configured using WinTrac 5.1 or later before the flash drive can be used with SR-3 trailer units
equipped with a USB Communications Port.
Using a properly configured and enabled flash drive, the following functions may be available:
• Download the ServiceWatch Data Logger
• Download the CargoWatch Data Logger
• Flash load Base Controller Software
• Flash load HMI Control Panel Software
• Send OptiSet Plus files
• Retrieve OptiSet Plus files

Inserting a USB Flash Drive

If a properly configured USB Flash Drive is inserted into the USB Port on the unit Control Panel, the Flash Drive Menu
will automatically be shown on the HMI Control Panel. The HMI Control Panel will briefly show FLASH DRIVE and
FLASH DRIVE DETECTED. The Flash Drive Menu will appear as shown (Figure 67, p. 128).
Figure 67. Flash Drive Menu

The Flash Drive Menu will time out after about 20 seconds. When the Flash Drive Menu times out, the Standard Display
will appear. To go to the Standard Display, immediately press the EXIT Key.
If the Flash Drive has not been properly configured, it will not work when connected to the USB Port on the unit Control
Panel and an error message will appear on the unit HMI Control Panel as shown (Figure 68, p. 128).
N o t e : On occasion some Flash Drives that have been configured using WinTrac may still show this message. If so, a
different Flash Drive should be used.
Figure 68. Flash Drive Not Valid

Accessing the Flash Drive Menu

If the USB Icon is present in the upper left corner of the display, a USB Flash Drive is connected to the unit USB Port on
the Control Panel. To access the Flash Drive Menu when a USB Flash Drive is connected to the USB Port, press the
MENU Key (Figure 69, p. 129).
N o t e : If a USB Flash Drive is not connected to the unit, the Flash Drive Menu feature will not appear in the Main Menu.

128 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 4 - Operation

Figure 69. Menu Key

N o t e : The USB Icon will appear in the display when a USB Flash Drive is connected, even if the USB Flash Drive has not
been configured using WinTrac.
The Main Menu Flash Drive selection will appear. Press the SELECT Key to choose the Flash Drive feature (Figure 70, p.
129).
Figure 70. Main Menu - Flash Drive

The Flash Drive Menu will appear (Figure 71, p. 129).

• To download the ServiceWatch or CargoWatch Data Loggers, press the DOWNLOAD Key.
• To flash load software to the Base Controller or HMI Control Panel, press the FLASHLOAD Key.
• To send or retrieve OptiSet Plus files, press the OPTISET PLUS Key.
I m p o r t a n t : If a feature was not enabled when the Flash Drive was configured, the soft key for that feature will not be
present.
Figure 71. Flash Drive Menu

To exit to the Main Menu, press the EXIT Key.

Downloading the ServiceWatch or CargoWatch Data Loggers

To download the ServiceWatch or CargoWatch Data Loggers, press the DOWNLOAD Key from the Flash Drive Menu as
shown (, p. 131).

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 129
Section 4 - Operation

Figure 72. Flash Drive Menu

The DownLoad Menu will appear as shown (Figure 73, p. 130). To start the ServiceWatch Data Logger download, press
the SELECT Key.
Figure 73. Download - ServiceWatch

To choose the CargoWatch Data Logger for download, press the NEXT Key to display CARGOWATCH, and then press
the SELECT Key to start the CargoWatch download (Figure 74, p. 130).
Figure 74. Download - CargoWatch

The download screen will appear. A progress bar indicates the download progress. The CargoWatch download screen
is shown (Figure 75, p. 130).
Figure 75. CargoWatch Download

When the download is complete, the results are reported and the downloaded file is saved to the DOWNLOAD/
CARGOWATCH folder on the USB Flash Drive. To return to the Down Load Menu press the EXIT Key (Figure 76, p. 131).

130 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 4 - Operation

Figure 76. Download Successful

If the download fails, the screen shown (Figure 77, p. 131) will appear.
N o t e : The unit being downloaded must have a Trailer ID set by Wintrac. If a Trailer ID has not been assigned to the unit,
this error will occur.
Figure 77. Download Failed

Flash Loading the Base Controller or HMI Control Panel

To flash load the Base Controller or HMI Control Panel, press the FLASHLOAD Key from the Flash Drive Menu (, p. 131).
Figure 78. Flash Drive Menu

The Flash Load Menu will appear as shown (Figure 79, p. 131). The first component in the Flash Load Menu is SINGLE
TEMP CONTROLLER/MULTI TEMP CONTROLLER. To flash load the SINGLE TEMP CONTROLLER/MULTI TEMP
CONTROLLER, press the SELECT Key (SINGLE TEMP CONTROLLER is shown as an example).
Figure 79. Flash Load Menu

To flash load the HMI Control Panel, press the NEXT Key to display HMI, and then press the SELECT Key to start the HMI
Control Panel flash load (Figure 80, p. 132).

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 131
Section 4 - Operation

Figure 80. Flash Load Menu

The HMI Flash Load Menu will appear. If there is more than one HMI flash load file on the Flash Drive, the NEXT Key will
be present as shown (Figure 81, p. 132). If only one HMI flash load file is present on the Flash Drive, the NEXT Key will
not appear. Pressing the NEXT Key will display the next flash load file.
Figure 81. HMI Flash Load Menu

Pressing the NEXT Key will display the next flash load file. Pressing the SELECT Key will flash load the file shown on the
display to the HMI Control Panel (Figure 82, p. 132).
Figure 82. HMI Flash Load Menu

A confirmation screen will appear (Figure 83, p. 132). If the update shown is correct, press the YES Key.
Figure 83. Confirmation Screen

FLASH LOADING IN PROGRESS will be shown on the display while the flash load process initializes (Figure 84, p. 133).
This process may take several minutes.

132 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 4 - Operation

Figure 84. Progress Screen

The Flash Load Display will appear (Figure 85, p. 133). Progress is indicated by means of the black boxes in the bottom
two rows of the display.
Figure 85. Flash Load Display

When the flash load is complete, the TK Logo will briefly appear in the display. Then the CONFIGURING SYSTEM
PLEASE WAIT message is shown as the system restarts. When the unit is ready to run, the Flash Drive Menu appears on
the display (Figure 86, p. 133).
Figure 86. Flash Drive Menu

Recover HMI from Failed Flashload

Beginning with HMI control panel revision 7x20, users will be able to recover an HMI that has failed a flashload using
only a USB flash drive rather than WinTrac and a USB cable.
N o t e : Recovery via USB is available only after installing 7x20. If the flashload fails while installing 7x20, it will have to
be recovered using WinTrac and a USB cable.

Currently Installed HMI Software Flashloading to Software Action to Recover from a Failed HMI Flashload

7x15 or earlier 7x20 Use WinTrac and a USB cable (Refer to SB 1201).

7x20 or later 7x20 or later Use USB procedure shown below.

N o t e : While using this method, it is not necessary to open the control box and move the F10 fuse. However, if a second
attempt to flashload fails, it is recommended to move the F10 fuse.
If the HMI has failed the flashload, the following screen will typically be present.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 133
Section 4 - Operation

Turn the unit off and verify the USB is inserted in the flash drive port on the control box door. Turn the unit on.
N o t e : The unit may start and run at this point. Stay clear of all belts, fans, and moving parts. The engine will stop
running as soon as the HMI flashload process begins.

DANGER
Risk of Injury!
Keep hands and loose clothing clear of fans and belts at all times when the unit is operating with the doors
open.

Shortly after the controller boots it will recognize the inserted USB. The HMI will display a prompt to “Press any key for
HMI flashloading”.

If the HMI does not detect the USB after one minute, perform the following actions:
• Disconnect and reconnect USB.
• If disconnecting and reconnecting the USB is not successful, switch the HMI off and on.
• If power cycling the HMI is unsuccessful, open the control box door and move the F10 fuse to bypass position on
SR-3.
• If none of the above steps resolve the issue, the USB is likely at fault.
– Check and confirm that the USB is WinTrac configured.
– Determine if the USB can be successfully recognized by testing on another SLXe/SLXi trailer unit.
Pressing any soft key will bring up a selection screen showing the available HMI software revisions on the USB. Press
the Next soft key until the desired HMI control panel software revision is displayed on the screen and then press
“Select”.

Flashloading will begin and will proceed as normal.

134 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 4 - Operation

The HMI may take some time to initiate flashloading, which is normal. If the first attempt of selecting a valid HMI control
panel software revision results in the HMI inaccurately detecting an invalid file, perform a second attempt to select the
same valid file to initiate the flashload procedure.

Sending OptiSet Plus Files

The Flash Drive allows OptiSet Plus configurations to be sent to the Base Controller. It also allows OptiSet Plus
information to be retrieved as needed. To Send an OptiSet Plus Configuration File to the Base Controller, press the
OPTISET PLUS Key (Figure 87, p. 135).
Figure 87. OPTISET PLUS Key

The SEND Menu is the first menu to appear as shown (Figure 88, p. 135). Press the SELECT Key to choose the SEND
option.
Figure 88. Send Menu

Press the SELECT Key to choose the SEND option (Figure 89, p. 135). The files available for uploading are shown, one at
a time. If only one file is available, the NEXT Key and BACK Key will not be present. If more than one file is available,
they can be chosen using the NEXT Key and BACK Key. When the desired file is shown, press the SELECT Key to
choose it.
Figure 89. Send Option

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 135
Section 4 - Operation

There is a brief pause to get and display the available choices. The NEXT Key and BACK Key are used to scroll through
the possible choices. Choices are typically UNIT SETUP + TEMP PROFILES, TEMPERATURE PROFILES, and UNIT
SETUP. When the desired choice is shown on the display, press the SELECT Key (Figure 90, p. 136).
Figure 90. Unit Setup

The Unit Setup information is sent to the Base Controller. A progress bar indicates percent completion (Figure 91, p.
136).
Figure 91. Progress Bar

A successful send is confirmed on the display (Figure 92, p. 136). Press the EXIT Key to return to the Flash Drive Menu.
Figure 92. Send Successful

Retrieving OptiSet Plus Files

OptiSet Plus Configuration files can be retrieved for modification or for use with other units. To retrieve an OptiSet Plus
Configuration File from the Base Controller, press the OPTISET PLUS Key (Figure 93, p. 136).
Figure 93. OPTISET PLUS Key

The SEND Menu is the first menu to appear as shown (Figure 94, p. 137). Press the NEXT Key to display RETRIEVE and
press the SELECT Key to choose the RETRIEVE option.

136 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 4 - Operation

Figure 94. Send Menu

The files available for retrieval are shown, one at a time. The NEXT Key and BACK Key are used to select the desired file.
The first choice is ALL as shown (Figure 95, p. 137).
N o t e : The BACK Key will appear after the NEXT Key is pressed.
Figure 95. Retrieve Option

The following choices for ALL are available:

• CARGO SETUP + TEMP
• UNIT SETUP + TEMP PROFILES
• UNIT + CARGOWATCH SETUP
• TEMPERATURE PROFILES
• CARGOWATCH SETUP
• UNIT SETUP
When the desired file is shown, press the SELECT Key to choose it (Figure 96, p. 137).
Figure 96. Unit Setup - Select Key

The desired file is retrieved and saved to the Flash Drive. A progress bar indicates percent completion (Figure 97, p.
138).

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 137
Section 4 - Operation

Figure 97. Progress Bar

A successful retrieval is confirmed on the display (Figure 98, p. 138). Press the EXIT Key to return to the Flash Drive
Menu.
Figure 98. Retrieve Successful

Removing a USB Flash Drive

Verify all USB Flash Drive operations have completed before removing the Flash Drive from the USB Port on the unit.
To remove the USB Flash Drive, unplug it from the USB Port. The display shown (Figure 99, p. 138) will briefly appear,
followed by the Standard Display. The USB Icon will no longer be present.
I m p o r t a n t : Never remove the USB Flash Drive from the USB Port when it is actively doing a read or write operation.
Figure 99. Flash Drive Removed

Languages
If the Language Feature has been enabled from the Guarded Access Language Menu, an alternate language or
languages can be selected from the Language Menu. After a new language is chosen, all displays will appear in that
language. If the Language Feature has not been enabled, this menu does not appear. The default language is English.
Only languages specifically enabled from the Guarded Access Language Menu are available.
I m p o r t a n t : Exercise care when changing languages. Once changed, all HMI Control Panel displays will be in the new
language. If the user is not familiar with the new language, problems may be experienced returning to the
default language.
The languages available are dependent on the HMI Control Panel software revision. Other than the languages
supported, software revisions 65/75/7Bxx, 66/76/7Cxx, 67/77/7Dxx, and 68/7Exx are identical.
• Software Revision 65/75/7Bxx supports English, Spanish, French, German, Italian, Dutch, Portuguese, Greek,
Turkish, Hebrew and Arabic.
• Software Revision 66/76/7Cxx supports English, Danish, Russian, Norwegian, Swedish, Finnish, Polish, Hungarian,
Romanian, Bulgarian and Czech.

138 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 4 - Operation

• Software Revision 67/77/7Dxx supports English, Japanese and Chinese.

• Software Revision 68/7Exx supports English, English and Spanish, or allows any five languages from Software
Revision 65/75/7Bxx or 66/76/7Cxx to be selected. Japanese and Chinese are not available for use with this feature.
To select an alternate language, press the MENU Key (Figure 100, p. 139).
Figure 100. Menu Key

If more than one language is enabled, the Language Menu is the first Main Menu item to appear as shown (Figure 101,
p. 139). Press the SELECT Key to choose the Language Menu.
Figure 101. Main Menu - Language

The Language Menu will appear as shown (Figure 102, p. 139). Press the + or – Keys to select the desired language.
Only languages enabled from the Guarded Access Menu are available. When the desired language is shown, press the
YES Key to confirm the choice.
Figure 102. Language Menu

The display will briefly show PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE - PLEASE WAIT in the new language. The display will then
return to the Language Menu, but will show the new language (Figure 103, p. 139).
Figure 103. New Language

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 139
Section 4 - Operation

Repeat the process to select a different language. To select a different Main Menu item press the NEXT Key. To return to
the Standard Display press the EXIT Key.
I m p o r t a n t : If necessary, English and all other languages in the software version may be accessed from the Standard
Display.
Should it be necessary at any time to change to English or any other language in the installed software, return to the
Standard Display and then press and hold the first and last soft keys for five seconds as shown (Figure 104, p. 140). The
Standard Display is shown in Deutsch (German).
Figure 104. New Language

After five seconds the Language Menu will appear in the current language as shown (Figure 105, p. 140). Press the + or
– Keys to select the desired language. When the desired language is shown, press the YES Key to confirm the choice.
N o t e : All languages in the installed software can be selected using this method.
Figure 105. Language Menu

Alarms
The Alarm Menu allows the operator to view any active alarms, and allows most alarms to be cleared.

Log Alarm
Log Alarms are indicated for 30 seconds each time the unit is turned on. This level of alarm serves as a notice to take
corrective action before a problem becomes severe. Maintenance items such as maintenance hourmeter time-outs are
Log Alarms. The TemperatureWatch™ screen is not disabled if only Log Alarm(s) are active.
When the unit is turned on, the display will show the Thermo King Logo and then the “Configuring System” message. If
Log Alarm(s) are present, the Log Alarm notice will appear on the display for 30 seconds. The remote indicator alarm
light (if installed) will also be on during this period. After 30 seconds, the Standard Display will appear and the remote
indicator alarm light will go off.
N o t e : The Alarm Icon does not appear on startup with Log Alarms present.
If only Log Alarms exist, the display shown (Figure 106, p. 141) will appear and the optional remote alarm light will
illuminate for 30 seconds when the unit is turned on.

140 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 4 - Operation

Figure 106. Log Alarms Exist

Check Alarm
Check Alarms are indicated by a steady alarm indication at the top of the display and the message “Service Required
within 24 Hours”. The Alarm Icon will appear. This level of alarm serves as a notice to take corrective action before a
problem becomes severe. The unit will run with Check Alarms but some features and functions may be inhibited. The
TemperatureWatch screen is disabled if a Check Alarm is active.
If a Check Alarm condition occurs while the unit is running, the alarm icon will appear in the display as shown (Figure
107, p. 141).
Figure 107. Alarm Icon

Prevent Alarm
Prevent Alarms are indicated by a steady alarm indication at the top of the display and the message “Service Required
within 24 Hours”. The Alarm Icon will appear. The unit will be temporarily shut down if a Prevent Alarm is active. The
unit will remain shut down for a timed restart interval or until the fault conditions are corrected and then restart. If the
unit is in a temporary shutdown, Alarm Code 84 Restart Null will be present along with the associated Prevent Alarm. In
most cases, the unit will restart with reduced performance to determine if continued operation is possible. If the alarm
does not reoccur with reduced performance, the unit will return to full performance. If the unit is operating with reduced
performance, Alarm Code 85 Forced Unit Operation will also be present under some conditions. In general, if the alarm
condition reoccurs a defined number of times, the alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm and no further restarts are
possible. The TemperatureWatch screen is disabled if a prevent alarm is active.
N o t e : If the Restart After Shutdown feature in the Guarded Access Menu is set for CONTINUOUS, an unlimited number
of restart attempts are allowed.

Shutdown Alarm
If a Shutdown Alarm occurs while the unit is running, it will be indicated by all of the following (Figure 108, p. 142):
• The Alarm Icon will appear.
• The display, backlight and optional remote alarm light will flash on and off.
• The display will switch from normal to inverted and back (light areas become dark and dark areas become light.)
Shutdown Alarms will force the unit into shutdown. The unit will remain in shutdown until the Shutdown Alarm is
manually cleared. Exceptions are some engine and electric Shutdown Alarms that become Log Alarms when switched
to the alternate operating mode (diesel to electric or electric to diesel). The TemperatureWatch screen is disabled if a
unit level Shutdown Alarm is active.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 141
Section 4 - Operation

Figure 108. Shutdown Alarm

Pretrip Alarms
If an alarm occurs during a Pretrip Test, the alarm code will be displayed as Pretrip Alarm XX, where XX is the alarm
code.

Low Battery Voltage

If Alarm Code 61 Low Battery Voltage is set as a Shutdown Alarm, no subsequent alarm codes will be set with the
exception of Alarm Code 28 Pretrip Abort.

Alarm Codes When Switching Between Diesel and Electric

If a shutdown alarm occurs that affects only diesel mode operation and the unit is switched to electric, the diesel mode
shutdown alarm becomes an electric mode log alarm. This allows the unit to run in electric mode without clearing the
shutdown alarm that is preventing diesel mode operation. If the unit is switched back to diesel mode, the alarm again
become a diesel mode shutdown alarm and prevents unit operation.
In the same manner, if a shutdown alarm occurs that affects only electric mode operation and the unit is switched to
diesel, the electric mode shutdown alarm becomes a diesel mode log alarm to allow diesel mode operation. If the unit
is switched back to electric mode, the alarm reverts to an electric mode shutdown alarm and prevents unit operation. If
the unit is configured for electric to diesel Auto-Switch, it automatically starts and runs in diesel mode if an electric
shutdown occurs.

Clearing Alarm Codes

Most alarm codes can be cleared conventionally from the Alarm Menu using the CLEAR Key.
The following control and display sensor alarm codes can only be cleared from the Maintenance Menu or Guarded
Access Menu:
• Alarm Code 03 Check Control Return Air Sensor
• Alarm Code 04 Check Control Discharge Air Sensor
• Alarm Code 203 Check Display Return Air Sensor
• Alarm Code 204 Check Display Discharge Air Sensor
• Alarm Code 74 Controller Reset to Defaults.
The following alarm codes clear automatically:
• Alarm Code 64 Pretrip Reminder - Clears when a Pretrip Test is performed.
• Alarm Code 84 Restart Null - Clears when the unit is no longer in a restart null due to a Prevent Alarm.
• Alarm Code 85 Forced Unit Operation - Clears when the unit is no longer running in a forced mode due to a Prevent
Alarm.
• Alarm Code 91 Check Electric Ready Input - Clears automatically when electric power is restored.
• Alarm Code 92 Sensor Grades Not Set - Clears when the sensor grade is changed from 5H.
If the Limited Alarm Restarts feature is enabled, the following additional alarm codes may only be cleared from the
Guarded Access Menu. If this is the case, the CLEAR soft key will not appear if the alarms are displayed from the Main
Menu or the Maintenance Menu.
• Alarm Code 10 High Discharge Pressure
• Alarm Code 23 Cooling Cycle Fault
• Alarm Code 24 Heating Cycle Fault

142 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 4 - Operation

• Alarm Code 32 Refrigeration Capacity Low

Displaying and Clearing Alarm Codes

Alarms are displayed and cleared using the Alarm Menu. From the Standard Display, press the MENU Key (Figure 109,
p. 143).
Figure 109. Menu Key

The Language Menu or Alarms Menu will appear. If the Language Menu appears press the NEXT Key to show the
Alarms Menu (Figure 110, p. 143). When the Alarms Menu is shown, press the SELECT Key.
Figure 110. Select Key

The Alarm Display will appear. If no alarms are present, NO ALARMS will be shown (Figure 111, p. 143).
Figure 111. Alarms Menu

If alarms are present, the quantity of alarms (if more than one) and the most recent alarm code number will be shown.
In the example (Figure 112, p. 143), there are two alarms present. The most recent is Alarm Code 6. It indicates a
problem with the coolant temperature sensor.
Figure 112. Alarms Menu

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 143
Section 4 - Operation

After the alarm situation is resolved, press the CLEAR Key to clear the alarm. For additional information regarding the
alarm shown on the display, press the HELP Key. To display the next alarm, press the NEXT Key (Figure 113, p. 144).
Figure 113. Clear, Help, Next Keys

If a serious condition occurs, the unit will be shut down to prevent damage to the unit or the load. If this occurs, the
display will show that the unit is shut down and display the alarm code that caused the shutdown. In the example
(Figure 114, p. 144), the unit is shut down due to low oil level. For additional information regarding the alarm shown on
the display, press the HELP Key.
Figure 114. Low Engine Oil Level Display

A help message will appear. For the alarm shown above, the message “CHECK OIL LEVEL. IF UNIT IS SHUT DOWN,
REPAIR IMMEDIATELY. OTHERWISE, REPORT ALARM AT END OF THE DAY” will be shown on the display. Check the
oil level and add oil as required, clear the alarm and restart the engine.
To select a different Main Menu item, press the NEXT Key. To return to the Standard Display, press the EXIT Key again.

Important Alarm Notes

• If an alarm will not clear, it may still exist. If the alarm is not corrected, it will not clear or may be immediately set
again.
• If an alarm cannot be cleared from the Main Menu, the Clear Key will not appear. These alarms must be cleared
from the Maintenance or Guarded Access Menus.
• All alarms must be viewed before any of the alarms can be cleared.

™)
Data Logger (CargoWatch™
The CargoWatch Data Logger is physically located in the HMI Control Panel. It can support up to six optional
temperature sensors.
When shipped from the factory, CargoWatch sensors 1 and 2 are turned on to be logged and CargoWatch sensors 3
through 6 are turned off. Also, digital input 1 is turned on to be logged and digital inputs 2 through 4 are turned off.
Sensors and digital inputs can be turned on, off, and configured using the CargoWatch Menu in Guarded Access or with
Wintrac™. The CargoWatch Data Logger can also be configured using the USB Flash Drive OptiSet Plus Feature.
A Start of Trip can be sent to the unit ServiceWatch and CargoWatch Data Loggers. In addition, the CargoWatch Data
Logger contents can be printed with a hand-held printer.
The ServiceWatch and CargoWatch Data Logger are accessed using the Data Logger Menu. From the Standard Display,
press the MENU Key (Figure 115, p. 145).

144 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 4 - Operation

Figure 115. Standard Display - Menu Key

The Language Menu or Alarm Menu will appear (Figure 116, p. 145). Press the NEXT Key as required to display the Data
Logger Menu. When the Data Logger Menu is shown, press the SELECT Key.
Figure 116. Main Menu - Data Logger

The first feature that appears is the Start of Trip (Figure 117, p. 145). To send a Start of Trip press the SELECT Key to
select the feature, and then press it again to send the Start of Trip. The display will briefly show START OF TRIP
COMPLETE to confirm that a Start of Trip marker was set in the data logger.
N o t e : The start of trip marker is sent to both the CargoWatch and ServiceWatch data loggers.
Figure 117. Start of Trip

Press the NEXT Key to select the PRINT / VIEW feature. The PRINT / VIEW screen will appear (Figure 118, p. 145).
Figure 118. Datalogger - Print/View

Press the SELECT Key. The first PRINT / VIEW screen allows the operator to print a Delivery Ticket (Figure 119, p. 146).
Pressing the SELECT Key will print a delivery ticket. The Delivery Ticket is a short ticket that shows delivery specific
details including the current temperature (Figure 120, p. 146).

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 145
Section 4 - Operation

Figure 119. Print Data - Delivery Ticket

Figure 120. CargoWatch Delivery Ticket

Pressing the NEXT Key allows the operator to print a Trip Ticket using a hand-held printer. Pressing the SELECT Key will
print a Trip Ticket (Figure 121, p. 146). The Trip Ticket is a long ticket that shows details for the current trip including a
temperature history (Figure 122, p. 147). The Trip Ticket is also called a Journey Ticket.
Figure 121. Print Data - Trip Ticket

146 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 4 - Operation

Figure 122. CargoWatch Trip Ticket

To return to the Main Menu press the EXIT Key. To return to the Standard display press the EXIT Key again.

Hourmeters
The Hourmeters Menu allows the operator to view the unit hourmeters that have the view feature enabled in the
Guarded Access Menu. If the view feature for a particular hourmeter is not enabled, that hourmeter will continue to
accumulate time but cannot be viewed from the Main Menu. However, all hourmeters can be viewed from the
Maintenance Menu, even if they are not enabled.
Hourmeters are displayed using the Hourmeter Display. From the Standard Display, press the MENU Key (Figure 123,
p. 147).
Figure 123. Menu Key

The Language Menu or Alarm Menu will appear. Press the NEXT Key as required to show the Hourmeter Menu (Figure
124, p. 148). When the Hourmeter Menu is shown press the SELECT Key. The Hourmeter Display will appear.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 147
Section 4 - Operation

Figure 124. Main Menu - Hourmeters

Press the NEXT or PREVIOUS Key to scroll through the hourmeters (Figure 125, p. 148).
Figure 125. Hourmeter Display

Hourmeter names and definitions are shown in the table (Table 21, p. 148) in the order they appear. Only hourmeters
enabled in the Guarded Access Menu will be shown. To return to the Standard Display, press the EXIT Key.
Only configured hourmeters that have been enabled in the Viewable Hourmeter Setup Menu will be shown.
I m p o r t a n t : If a programmable hourmeter is not enabled or the view for that hourmeter is not turned on, it will not
appear in the display sequence.
Table 21. Hourmeter Names and Definitions
Hourmeter Name Definition

Total Hours Total number of hours the unit has been turned on (protection hours).

Total Run Time Hours Total number of hours the unit has run in both diesel and electric mode.

Engine Hours Total number of hours the unit has run in diesel mode.

Electric Run Hours Total number of hours the unit has run in electric mode.

Total Run Reminder 1 User Programmable - The number of hours before a Total Unit Run Time Maintenance Reminder 1 occurs.

Total Run Reminder 2 User Programmable - The number of hours before a Total Unit Run Time Maintenance Reminder 2 occurs.

Controller Power On Total hours the controller and HMI Control Panel have been turned on.

Pretrip Reminder User Programmable - number of hours before a Pretrip Reminder occurs.

Engine Reminder 1 User Programmable - The number of hours before an Engine Run Time Maintenance Reminder 1 occurs.

Engine Reminder 2 User Programmable - The number of hours before an Engine Run Time Maintenance Reminder 2 occurs.

Electric Reminder 1 User Programmable - The number of hours before an Electric Run Time Maintenance Reminder 1 occurs.

Electric Reminder 2 User Programmable - The number of hours before an Electric Run Time Maintenance Reminder 2 occurs.

Mode
Mode changes are made using the Mode Menu. From the Standard Display, press the MENU Key (Figure 126, p. 149).

148 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 4 - Operation

Figure 126. Menu Key

The Language Menu or Alarm Menu will appear (Figure 127, p. 149). Press the NEXT Key as required to show the Mode
Menu. When the Mode Menu is shown press the SELECT Key.
Figure 127. Main Menu - Mode

The first enabled mode change screen will appear (Figure 128, p. 149). To choose that function, press the SELECT Key.
To Scroll through the enabled features in the Mode Menu, press the NEXT Key.
Figure 128. Change Mode

Various operating modes can be selected using the Mode Menu. Not all modes may be available, depending on OptiSet
Plus usage and settings of other programmable features. To return to the Standard Display press the EXIT Key.

Turn Cycle Sentry On or Off

Cycle Sentry Mode can be turned On or Off if Cycle Sentry Mode is allowed by OptiSet Plus. If Cycle Sentry is turned off,
the unit runs in Continuous Mode unless Continuous Mode is not allowed by OptiSet Plus. Either Cycle Sentry or
Continuous operation can be disabled via OptiSet Plus. If the unit is running in Cycle Sentry Mode, press the SELECT
Key to turn off Cycle Sentry Mode as shown (Figure 129, p. 149).
Figure 129. Turn Off Cycle Sentry

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 149
Section 4 - Operation

Confirmation screens will briefly appear, and the unit will switch to Continuous Mode operation. To turn Cycle Sentry
back on press the SELECT Key again (Figure 130, p. 150).
N o t e : Cycle Sentry Mode can also be turned on and off using the Cycle Sentry Key on the HMI Control Panel.
Figure 130. Turn On Cycle Sentry

Select Temperature Units

If this feature is enabled in Guarded Access > Main Menu Configuration, the operator can select temperature units to be
displayed as either degrees Fahrenheit or degrees Celsius. To change the temperature units from Fahrenheit to Celsius,
press the SELECT Key as shown (Figure 131, p. 150).
Figure 131. Change Mode - Fahrenheit

Press the “+” and “-“ Keys to select the desired temperature units and press the YES Key to confirm (Figure 132, p.
150).
Figure 132. Change Keys

Confirmation screens will briefly appear, and the unit will display temperature units in Celsius (Figure 133, p. 150). To
return the display to Fahrenheit press the SELECT Key again.
Figure 133. Change Mode - Celsius

150 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 4 - Operation

Fresh Air Exchange Open or Closed

N o t e : This option is configurable on SLX/SLXe/SLXi Series units but does not actually change any parameters. This
option only exists to support SB Series units.
If installed and enabled, the Fresh Air Exchange option allows fresh outside air to be drawn into the trailer and the
interior air to be exhausted by opening the Fresh Air Exchange door. This feature is beneficial when hauling loads that
release gas as they ripen, such as potatoes. The Fresh Air Exchange feature is only available with setpoints above 32°F
(0°C). The feature is disabled with setpoints of 32°F (0°C) and below. To open the Fresh Air Exchange door, press the
SELECT Key as shown (Figure 134, p. 151).
I m p o r t a n t : The Fresh Air Exchange feature should be used exactly as specified by the customer.
The Fresh Air Exchange door will only be open when the unit engine is running. The door will close when the engine
shuts down to preserve unit battery life.
The setting of the Fresh Air Exchange door will survive power off/power on cycles, if the door is set to “Open” by the
operator, it will continue to open any time the engine is running until it is set to “Close” by the operator.
Figure 134. Change Mode - Open Fresh Air Exchange

Confirmation screens will briefly appear, and the Fresh Air Exchange door will open. To close the Fresh Air Exchange
door press the SELECT Key again (Figure 135, p. 151).
Figure 135. Change Mode - Close Fresh Air Exchange

Keypad Lockout
If enabled in Guarded Access > Main Menu Configuration, the keypad can be locked to prevent unauthorized use. If the
keypad is locked, only the On Key and Off Key function. The keypad will remain locked even if the unit is turned off and
back on. If Keypad Lockout is active, press and hold any soft key for five seconds to deactivate the feature.

Start Sleep Mode

If this feature is enabled in Guarded Access > Main Menu Configuration, the operator can select and set Sleep Mode
from the Mode Menu (Figure 136, p. 152). Sleep Mode is used to keep the engine warm and the battery charged when
the unit is not in use. When the unit is Sleep Mode, the display will show “SLEEP” and the current time.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 151
Section 4 - Operation

Figure 136. Start Sleep Mode

The following features are available in Sleep Mode. Follow the display prompts to select and set the features.
• Program Wakeup Time - This feature allows a wakeup time to be specified. When the selected time is reached, the
unit will start and resume normal operation. If a Wakeup Time is selected, the following features are available:
– Day to Wake Up - This feature allows the day the unit is to wake up to be specified.
– Hour to Wake Up - This feature allows the hour the unit is to wake up to be specified.
– Minute to Wake Up - This feature allows the minute the unit is to wake up to be specified.
– Run Pretrip on Wakeup - This feature allows a Pretrip Test to be automatically run when the unit wakes up.

Pretrip
A Pretrip Test verifies unit operation. This display allows a Pretrip Test to be selected and initiated by the operator. If the
Pretrip Test is entered with the unit shut down, a Full Pretrip Test with device amp checks will be performed. If the
Pretrip Test is entered with the unit running in either diesel or electric mode, a Running Pretrip Test is performed. Test
results are reported as PASS, CHECK, or FAIL when the Pretrip Test is completed.

Pretrip Test Conditions

• Current unit settings are saved and restored at the end of the Pretrip Test or if the unit is turned off and back on.
• A Pretrip Test can be run in either Diesel or Electric Mode.
• The unit will auto switch from Diesel Mode to Electric Mode or from Electric Mode to Diesel Mode during a Pretrip
Test if these features are enabled and the auto switch conditions occur.

Conditions Where Pretrip Tests are Not Allowed

• If any Shutdown Alarms are present. Pretrip tests are allowed with some Check and Log Alarms.
• If the unit is in Sleep Mode.
• If the unit is in Service Test Mode, Interface Board Test Mode, or Evacuation Mode.

Pretrip Test Considerations

When performing a Pretrip Test, the following issues should be considered:
• If running a Pretrip Test on a trailer loaded with dry cargo, verify that proper airflow can occur around the load. If the
load restricts airflow, false test results may occur. Also, these units have high refrigeration capacity which results in
rapid temperature changes. Sensitive dry cargo may be damaged as a result.
• If running a Pretrip Test on a trailer that has just been washed down, the extremely high humidity inside the trailer
may result in false test results.
• If running a Pretrip Test on a trailer loaded with sensitive cargo, monitor the load temperature during the test as
normal temperature control is suspended during pre-trip operation.
• Always perform Pretrip Tests with the trailer cargo doors closed to prevent false test failures.

Pretrip Test Sequence

Pretrip tests proceed in the order shown below. A Full Pretrip Test includes all tests. A Running Pretrip Test is started
with the engine or electric motor running and does not include the Amp Checks or Engine Start Check.
• A m p C h e c k s - Each electrical control component is energized and the current drawn is confirmed as within
specification.
• E n g i n e S t a r t - The Engine will start automatically.

152 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 4 - Operation

• D e f r o s t - If the coil temperature is below 7°C (45°F), a defrost cycle is initiated.

• R P M C h e c k - The engine RPM in high and low speed is checked during the Cool Check.
• C o o l C h e c k - The ability of the unit to cool in low speed is checked.
• H e a t C h e c k - The ability of the unit to heat in low speed is checked.
• R e p o r t T e s t R e s u l t s - The test results are reported as PASS, CHECK, or FAIL when the Pretrip Test is completed. If
test results are CHECK or FAIL, alarm codes will exist to direct the technician to the source of the problem.

Performing a Pretrip Test

If a Pretrip Test is initiated with the engine shut down, a Full Pretrip Test will be performed. If a Pretrip Test is initiated
with the engine or electric motor running, a Running Pretrip Test is performed.
• Before initiating a Pretrip Test, clear all alarm codes.
• To stop a Pretrip Test at any time, turn the unit off.
Pretrip Tests are initiated using the Pretrip Menu. From the Standard Display, press the MENU Key (Figure 137, p. 153).
Figure 137. Menu Key

The Language Menu or Alarm Menu will appear. Press the NEXT Key as required to show the Pretrip Menu (Figure 138,
p. 153). When the Pretrip Menu is shown, press the SELECT Key to start a Pretrip Test.
Figure 138. Pretrip Menu

The display will briefly show PROGRAMMING PRETRIP MODE (Figure 139, p. 153). If the unit is not running, a Full
Pretrip Test will be initiated. If the unit is running in either diesel or electric mode, a Running Pretrip will be performed.
Figure 139. Programming Pretrip Mode

If all alarms were not cleared, a prompt appears as shown (Figure 140, p. 154). Exit the Pretrip Test, clear all alarms, and
repeat the Pretrip Test.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 153
Section 4 - Operation

Figure 140. Alarms Not Cleared

If all alarms were cleared, the Pretrip Test display appears (Figure 141, p. 154).
Figure 141. Pretrip Test

• The top line of the display indicates the unit is performing the non-running portion of the Pretrip Test.
• The second line measures test progress. The number of tests completed of the total number of tests to be
performed is shown. In the example above, the unit is performing Test 1 of 26 Sensor Check.
• The soft keys may be used during the Pretrip Test to select the Hourmeter, Gauge, or Sensor Menus.
• To stop a Pretrip Test at any time, turn the unit off. This will generate Alarm Code 28 Pretrip Abort. Other alarm
codes may also be generated. This is normal when the Pretrip Test is halted before completion.
When the non-running tests are complete, the unit will start automatically and continue with the Running Pretrip Test.
In the example shown (Figure 142, p. 154), the unit is in the Running Pretrip and is performing Test 21 of 26 Cool Test.
Figure 142. Cool Test

When all tests are complete, the results are reported as PASS, CHECK, or FAIL (Figure 143, p. 154). If the results are
CHECK or FAIL, the accompanying alarm codes will direct the technician to the cause of the problem.
Figure 143. Pretrip Pass

154 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 4 - Operation

If the Pretrip Test results are CHECK or FAIL, the problem should be diagnosed and corrected before the unit is released
for service.

Diesel/Electric Menu
The Diesel/Electric Standby selection from the Main Menu allows the operator to manually select diesel or electric
mode operation. The unit can also be programmed to automatically select electric mode operation when standby
power is available and to automatically select diesel mode operation if standby power fails or is removed. If the unit is
programmed to switch automatically from diesel to electric and electric to diesel, these screens do not appear.

Switching from Diesel to Electric

If the unit is running in Diesel Mode and the Diesel to Electric Auto Switch Enabled feature in Guarded Access is set to
YES, the unit will automatically switch to Electric Mode operation when standby power is connected and available. The
screens shown below will not appear.
If the unit is running in Diesel Mode and the Diesel to Electric Auto Switch Enabled feature in Guarded Access is set to
NO, the unit can be switched to Electric Mode using the Electric Standby selection from the Main Menu. From the
Standard Display, press the MENU Key (Figure 144, p. 155).
Figure 144. Menu Key

The Language Menu or Alarm Menu will appear. Press the NEXT Key as required to show the Electric Standby
selection. When the Electric Standby selection is shown (Figure 145, p. 155) press the SELECT Key.
Figure 145. Electric Standby

If the unit has standby power available and is turned on, the electric standby run screen will appear. The new mode is
then confirmed for 10 seconds. The unit will start and run in Electric Mode. If electric standby power is not available, the
display will prompt for a return to Diesel Mode as shown (Figure 146, p. 156).
If the electric standby power source fails or is disconnected and manual switching to Diesel Mode is selected, the unit
will prompt for a switch to Diesel Mode. Selecting YES will switch unit operation back to Diesel Mode. Pressing the NO
Key will allow the unit to remain in Electric Mode even though standby power is not available. The unit will not run and
Alarm Code 91 Check Electric Ready Input will be set as a Prevent Alarm.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 155
Section 4 - Operation

Figure 146. Electric Standby Undetected

Switching from Electric to Diesel

If the unit is running in Electric Mode and the Electric to Diesel Auto Switch Enabled feature in Guarded Access is set to
YES, the unit will automatically switch to Diesel Mode operation when standby power is no longer available. The
screens shown below will not appear.
If the Diesel to Electric Auto Switch Enabled feature in Guarded Access is set to NO and standby power is disconnected
or fails, the unit will not automatically switch to Diesel mode. This is primarily designed to prevent unauthorized diesel
engine starts when the truck is indoors or on a ferry where engine operation is strictly prohibited.
If the unit is running in Electric Mode and the Electric to Diesel Auto Switch Enabled feature in Guarded Access is set to
NO, the unit can be switched to Diesel Mode using the Diesel selection from the Main Menu. From the Standard
Display, press the MENU Key (Figure 147, p. 156).
Figure 147. Menu Key

The Language Menu or Alarm Menu will appear. Press the NEXT Key as required to show the Diesel Mode selection.
When the Diesel Mode selection is shown press the SELECT Key (Figure 148, p. 156).
Figure 148. Diesel Mode

The new mode is confirmed for 10 seconds and the unit will return to Diesel Mode operation.

Adjust Brightness
The brightness of the HMI Control Panel display can be adjusted to allow for changing ambient light conditions. The
choices available to the operator are HIGH, MEDIUM, LOW, and OFF. OFF actually results in a very dim screen suitable
for low light conditions.
I m p o r t a n t : Before replacing an HMI with no backlight, check the Adjust Backlight feature to verify the backlight is
turned on.
Display brightness is adjusted using the Adjust Brightness Menu. From the Standard Display, press the MENU Key
(Figure 149, p. 157).

156 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 4 - Operation

Figure 149. Menu Key

The Language Menu or Alarm Menu will appear. Press the NEXT Key as required to show the Adjust Brightness Menu.
When the Adjust Brightness Menu is shown press the SELECT Key (Figure 150, p. 157).
Figure 150. Adjust Brightness

The Display Brightness Menu will appear as shown (Figure 151, p. 157). Press the + or – Keys to select the desired
display brightness. When the desired brightness is shown press the YES Key to confirm the choice.
Figure 151. Display Brightness Menu

The display (Figure 152, p. 157) will briefly show ADJUSTING BRIGHTNESS - PLEASE WAIT.
Figure 152. Adjusting Brightness

Time
The Time and Date held by the Base Controller can be checked. Time and Date cannot be changed from the Main Menu.
The time and date is accessed using the Main Menu. From the Standard Display, press the MENU Key (Figure 153, p.
158).

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 157
Section 4 - Operation

Figure 153. Menu Key

The Language Menu or Alarm Menu will appear. Press the NEXT Key as required to show the Time. When Time is
shown press the SELECT Key. The current time and date will appear (Figure 154, p. 158).
Figure 154. Date and Time

Using the Maintenance Menu

The Maintenance Menu contains features that allow the technician to view additional information, perform unit
diagnostics using Service Test Mode and Interface Board Test Mode, and evacuate and charge the unit with refrigerant
using Evacuation Mode. Software revisions can be checked and the time and date can be set.

Entering the Maintenance Menu

From the Standard Display, press the MENU Soft Key (Figure 155, p. 158).
Figure 155. Menu Key

The Maintenance Menu is accessed from the first Main Menu screen that appears, either the Language Display or the
Alarms Display. The Alarms Display is shown (Figure 156, p. 158). Press and hold both the unlabeled soft key and the
Exit Key for five seconds.
Figure 156. Alarms Menu

158 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 4 - Operation

The first Maintenance Menu feature will appear (Figure 157, p. 159). Press the NEXT and BACK Keys to scroll through
the Maintenance Menu choices. When the desired choice is shown on the display, press the SELECT Key to access it.
Figure 157. Maintenance Menu

To return to the Standard Display press the EXIT Soft Key. The HMI Control Panel will automatically return to the
Standard Display 30 seconds after the last key is pressed.

Maintenance Menu Choices

Hourmeters
The Hourmeters Menu allows the technician to view all the active unit hourmeters, even if the Main Menu view has
been turned off. The Maintenance Menu Hourmeter Display also allows the technician to reset the time on hourmeters
with a programmed time limit. Hourmeters can also be viewed from the Main Menu if enabled in Guarded Access. Refer
to Using the Main Menu (“Hourmeters,” p. 147) for detailed information.

Gauges
The Gauge Menu allows the technician to view the unit gauges. The Gauge Menu can also be accessed from the
Standard Display and the Main Menu. Refer to (“Using the Gauges Key,” p. 124) for detailed information.

Sensors
The Sensors Menu allows the technician to view the unit temperature sensors. The Sensors Menu can also be accessed
from the Standard Display and the Main Menu. Refer to (“Using the Sensors Key,” p. 125) for detailed information.

Alarms
The Alarms Menu allows the technician to view any active alarms, and also allows most alarms to be cleared. The
Alarms Menu is also available from the Main Menu. Refer to Using the Main Menu (“Alarms,” p. 140) for detailed
information.

Telematics Status
N o t e : Only available with TK BlueBox installed.
The Telematics Status Menu will appear in the Maintenance Menu if the Guarded Access > REB Type Configured is set
to anything except NONE. Selecting it allows the user to check the status of the Telematics System. It will display
descriptions of possible causes if it detects any problems. If no problems are detected, the screen shown below
appears.
Figure 158. Status OK

If problems are detected, the screen shown below will display multiple descriptions. Press the HELP Key to display a
help screen. Press the EXIT Key to return to the Maintenance Menu.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 159
Section 4 - Operation

Figure 159. Status Descriptions

Service Test Mode

Service Test Mode allows the technician to force the unit to a known operating mode for diagnostic purposes. The unit
can be either running or not running. If the unit is not running and a running test is selected, the unit will start and run.
I m p o r t a n t : Service Test Mode is not allowed if any shutdown alarms exist or if the unit is in a Prevent Mode Shutdown
Null (Alarm Code 84 is set). Clear all alarms before attempting to use Service Test Mode.
Choose Service Test by pressing the SELECT Key when SERVICE TEST is shown in the Maintenance Menu. Select
Running or Non Running tests. The SERVICE TEST screen appears as shown (Figure 160, p. 160).
Figure 160. Service Test Display

The test shown is the High Speed Cool test. Return, Discharge, and Evaporator Coil temperatures are shown. The
Temperature Differential is also calculated and displayed.
• A test will remain active for 15 minutes. A countdown counter shows the time remaining for the test. If the test times
out, it will terminate and the unit will be shut down (if running) and Alarm Code 54 Test Mode Timeout will be set.
• The GAUGES Key is used to scroll through the gauges.
• The TEST Key allows the various tests to be selected.
• The EXIT Key returns to the Maintenance Menu.
Not all tests are available on all units. Only tests used by the specific unit configuration will appear.

Service Test Modes

• Off • Low Speed Heat • Modulation Cool 100% with Hot Gas Bypass (ETV units only)

• Null • High Speed Heat • Modulation Cool 100% (ETV units only)

• High Speed Cool • Defrost • Modulation Heat 100% (ETV units only)

• Low Speed Cool • Cool Bypass (ETV Units Only)

Table 22. Devices Energized - Diesel Mode

Service Test Mode Test Run Relay High Speed Heat D/E Relay Hot Gas Bypass ETV Damper

Null

High Speed Cool ON ON Enabled

Low Speed Cool ON Enabled

160 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 4 - Operation

Table 22. Devices Energized - Diesel Mode (continued)

Service Test Mode Test Run Relay High Speed Heat D/E Relay Hot Gas Bypass ETV Damper

Low Speed Heat ON ON Enabled

High Speed Heat ON ON ON Enabled

Defrost ON ON Enabled ON

Cool Bypass ON ON Enabled

Mod Cool 100% HGB ON ON 100 Steps Open

Mod Cool 100% ON 100 Steps Open

Mod Heat 100% ON ON 100 Steps Open

Table 23. Devices Energized - Electric Mode

Service Test Mode Test Run Relay High Heat D/E Relay Hot Gas Bypass ETV Damper
Speed/
Electric
Heat

Null

Cool ON ON Enabled

Hot Gas Heat ON ON ON Enabled

Hot Gas & Elec Heat ON ON ON ON Enabled

Defrost ON ON ON ON Enabled ON

Cool Bypass ON ON ON Enabled

Mod Cool 100% HGB ON ON ON 100 Steps Open

Mod Cool 100% ON ON 100 Steps Open

Mod Heat 100% ON ON ON 100 Steps Open

Interface Board Test

Interface Board Test Mode allows the technician to energize and de-energize individual control devices for diagnostic
purposes. The unit cannot be running to use this test. If the test is entered with the unit running, the unit will shut down.
I m p o r t a n t : Interface Board Test Mode is not allowed if any shutdown alarms exist or if the unit is in a Prevent Mode
Shutdown Null (Alarm Code 84 is set). Clear all alarms before using Interface Board Test Mode.
Choose Interface Board Test by pressing the SELECT Key when INTERFACE BOARD TEST is shown in the Maintenance
Menu. The Interface Board Test screen appears as shown (Figure 161, p. 161).
Figure 161. Interface Board Test

The test shown is the Heat Output Test. Discharge Pressure, Suction Pressure, Amps, and Volts are shown.
• The TEMP ON Key is used to momentarily energize the device.
• The LOCK ON Key energizes the device for 15 minutes. A countdown counter shows the time remaining for the test.
If the test times out Alarm Code 54 Test Mode Timeout is set. Not all devices can be locked on.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 161
Section 4 - Operation

• The UNLOCK Key unlocks the display and returns to the Interface Board Test.
• The EXIT Key returns to the Maintenance Menu.
Not all tests are available on all units. Only tests used by the specific unit will appear.

Interface Board Test Modes and Current Draw

N o t e : Device current will vary dependant on battery voltage and battery condition.

Interface Board Test Approximate Device Comments

Current Draw

Preheat Relay 70 Amps Temporary On only

Buzzer Negligible Temporary On only

Run Relay 2.0 Amps

Alternator Excite Output 0.5 – 2.0 Amps

Heat Output 0.4 Amps

Damper Relay 6.0 Amps

Indicator Light 0.1 Amps

Alarm Light 0.1 Amps

Diesel/Electric Relay 1.1 Amps Not available if ER is high

Electric Heat 1.5 Amps

High Speed Relay 4.6 Amps

Hot Gas Bypass 1.5 Amps ETV units only

Fresh Air Exchange 6.0 Amps

Display Self Test

The Display Self Test allows the technician to perform a number of self tests on the unit HMI Control Panel. The tests
available are shown below.
Choose Display Self Test by pressing the SELECT Soft Key when DISPLAY SELF TEST is chosen in the Maintenance
Menu. The Display Self Test screen appears. Select a test from the Display Self Test Menu.
Available Tests:
• LCD Test - This test allows the technician to select a normal or inverted display. If inverted is chosen the display is
reversed – segments that were turned on are now turned off and segments that were turned off are now turned on.
The technician visually verifies that all display segments are functioning properly.
• Keypad Test - This test prompts the technician to press the four soft keys, the Defrost Key and the Cycle Sentry Key.
Each time the requested key is pressed the next prompt is displayed, allowing the technician to verify proper
operation of these keys.
• Backlight Test - This test allows the technician to turn the backlight on and off to confirm operation.
• Brightness Test - This test allows the technician to select Low, Medium or High backlight intensity.
• Buzzer Test - This test allows the technician to turn the HMI buzzer on and off to verify operation.
• Heater Output - This test allows the technician to turn the HMI display heater on and off.
• Serial E2 - This test allows the technician to perform an internal HMI memory test. The test takes less than one
second and the results are reported as PASS or FAIL.
• Data Log Flash - This test allows the technician to perform an internal HMI CargoWatch data logger memory test.
The test takes less than one second and the results are reported as PASS or FAIL.
• RTC Update - This test allows the technician to perform an internal HMI real time clock test. The test takes less than
three seconds and the results are reported as PASS or FAIL.

162 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 4 - Operation

Evacuation Test
This menu allows the technician to open all normally closed refrigeration system valves to evacuate and charge the unit
with refrigerant. If the battery voltage falls below 13.0 Vdc the technician is prompted to connect a battery charger to
maintain sufficient voltage to hold all valves open.
I m p o r t a n t : Evacuation mode has no time-out. The unit will remain in Evacuation Mode indefinitely unless the battery
voltage becomes excessive.
All selectable unit features will be disabled when in evacuation mode. Auto switch from diesel to electric or from
electric to diesel is allowed, but unit will not start.
• Evacuation mode is not allowed if:
– Any shutdown alarms are present.
– The unit is in restart null.
– The unit is in a start sequence.
• When in evacuation mode:
– If the unit is running it will shut down automatically when entering Evacuation Mode.
– Alarm Code 86 Check Discharge Pressure Sensor is disabled.
– Alarm Code 87 Check Suction Pressure Sensor is disabled.
– Door switch operation is disabled.
Choose Evacuation Test by pressing the SELECT Soft Key when EVACUATION TEST is shown by the Maintenance
Menu. The Evacuation Test display shown below will appear and remain on the display so long as the battery voltage
does not fall below 13.0 Vdc. All normally closed refrigerant valves are energized to the open position to allow system
evacuation to effectively remove air and moisture from the refrigeration system.

If the battery voltage falls below 13.0 Vdc, the technician is prompted to install a battery charger to guarantee sufficient
voltage to keep all valves open during the evacuation process.

If the voltage from the battery charger rises above 16 Vdc, the controller will be turned off to prevent damage to the
electronics and/or system components. To exit Evacuation Mode, press the EXIT Soft Key or turn the unit off.

Software Revision
This menu allows the technician to view the current installed software revision for the HMI Control Panel and the Base
Controller.
Choose Software Revision by pressing the SELECT Soft Key when SOFTWARE REVISION is shown by the Maintenance
Menu. The Software Revision display appears as shown below.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 163
Section 4 - Operation

The NEXT and BACK Soft Keys allow the technician to scroll through the software revisions. Software revisions appear
in the order shown below:
• Display Software Revision
• Controller Software Revision
• Supervisor Software Revision (Determined by HMI Control Panel software revision)
The WinTrac Service Tool is used to flash software updates to the HMI Control Panel and Base Controller.

Set Time and Date

This menu allows the technician to view and change the HMI Control Panel clock/calendar.
Choose Set Time and Date by pressing the SELECT Soft Key when SET TIME AND DATE is shown by the Maintenance
Menu. The Set Time and Date display appears as shown.

The - and + Soft Keys are used to change the hour as required. Pressing the YES Soft Key changes the hour to the
selected time and then shows the next Time/Date screen. The screens appear in the order shown below:
• Hour
• Minute
• Date (Day)
• Month
• Year

Refrigerant Type
The Refrigerant Type feature allows the technician to configure the unit refrigerant type so that it can be displayed in
the Maintenance Menu. Only available if Unit Model is configured as SLX or SLXi. This feature can be configured in
Guarded Access > Unit Configuration Menu by selecting either R-452A, R134A, or R-404A.
Figure 162. Refrigerant Type Displayed

164 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 4 - Operation

Unit Serial Number

N o t e : Only available on SLXi units.
This feature allows the technician to set the Unit Serial Number for display using WinTrac 6.0 or later. Once
communication is established with the HMI and WinTrac, update the Unit SN and select “Update Unit”. The unit serial
number will be displayed in the HMI Maintenance Menu.
Figure 163. Configuring Unit SN Using WinTrac

Figure 164. Unit Serial Number Displayed

Using the Guarded Access Menu

The Guarded Access Menu contains menus that allow the technician to check and change the unit’s programmable
features. These features are detailed in Section 3 of this manual. Service Procedure A02A explains how to display and
record the Guarded Access programmable feature settings. Service Procedure A04A explains how to set the Guarded
Access programmable features.
The Guarded Access programmable features can also be changed using the WinTrac™ Service Tool. Once created, the
Unit Setup file can be transferred to a USB Flash Drive to send the file to the unit. For more information, refer to the
WinTrac Service Tool help file.
I m p o r t a n t : The Guarded Access Menu is entered from the last feature of the Maintenance Menu. The unit must not be
running in order to enter the Guarded Access Menu. If the unit is running, entering Interface Board Test
Mode from the Maintenance Menu will shut the unit down. Press the EXIT Key to return to the Maintenance
Menu and continue scrolling to the end of the Maintenance Menu to enter the Guarded Access Menu.

Entering the Guarded Access Menu

From the Standard Display, press the MENU Key.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 165
Section 4 - Operation

The Maintenance Menu is accessed from the first Main Menu screen that appears, either the Flash Drive Display,
Language Display, or the Alarms Display. The Alarms Display is shown. Press and hold both the unlabeled soft key and
the Exit Key for five seconds.

The Maintenance Menu will appear. Press the NEXT Key to scroll to Set Time and Date selection at the end of the
Maintenance Menu choices. Press and hold both the unlabeled soft key and the Exit Key for five seconds.

I m p o r t a n t : If a Security Code has been set, the correct code must be entered here to gain access to the Guarded Access
Menu. If an Access Code is requested and the code is not known, enter 4444.
If an Access Code is not enabled or when the correct security code is entered (4444 always works), the first Guarded
Access Menu feature will appear. Press the NEXT and BACK Keys to scroll through the Guarded Access Menu choices.
When the desired choice is shown on the display, press the SELECT Key to access it.

166 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 4 - Operation

I m p o r t a n t : If Unit Type in the Guarded Access > Unit Configuration Menu is changed from trailer to truck or truck to
trailer, it is necessary to exit the Guarded Access Menu after making the change. This will reset the software
to the new setting. Failure to do so will cause the wrong selections to be present in other Guarded Access
Menu settings. For example, if the feature was set TRAILER and changed to TRUCK, the reset changes the
trailer settings to truck settings. Failure to do so would result in trailer feature settings being shown, even
though the Unit Type had been changed to truck.
After the unit is reset, the Guarded Access Menu should be re-entered to complete other required feature
changes.
The Unit Type default setting is (Trailer).
N o t e : A warm restart is performed when the Guarded Access Menu is exited. The unit is reconfigured so that any
changes that were made from the Guarded Access Menu take effect.
To return to the Standard Display, press the EXIT Key.

Rear Remote Control Panel (Optional)

The optional Rear Remote Control Panel is connected to the control system and is used to operate the unit from a
remote location, typically at the rear of the trailer. In the illustration below, all display segments are turned on.

I m p o r t a n t : There are several versions of the Rear Remote Control Panel available. They can be identified by the color of
the wide border around the actual control panel. SR-3 Single Temperature Rear Remote Control Panels
have a black border. SR-3 SPECTRUM Multi-Temperature Rear Remote Control Panels have a blue border.
They are two separate control panels and are not interchangeable.

Rear Remote Control Panel Functionality

The Rear Remote Control Panel functions that are available to the user are determined by the setting of the Rear
Remote Control and Rear Remote Control Action features in the Guarded Access / Unit Configuration Menu. Refer to
Unit Configuration in Section 3 of this manual for details of these features.
When the unit is turned on at the Rear Remote Control Panel either the Remote Standard Display or [STAnd by] will
appear on the display.

Rear Remote Control Action Set to Run

If the Rear Remote Control Action is set to RUN the Remote Standard Display will be present on the Rear Remote
Control Panel and the unit will start and run when the Rear Remote Control Panel ON Key is pressed. Pressing the Rear
Remote Control Panel OFF Key will turn the unit off.
If the control system is powered up from the Rear Remote Control Panel the Remote Standard Display will appear in
both the Rear Remote Control Panel display and the unit HMI Control Panel display. In addition to turning the unit on
and off and starting the unit, when set to RUN the Rear Remote Control Panel allows the following:
• Turn the unit off and on
• The unit will start and run
• Change the Setpoint
• Select Cycle Sentry or Continuous Mode (unless prevent by OptiSet Plus)
• Display discharge air temperature
• Display and clear alarm codes
• Initiate a manual defrost cycle
• Send a Start of Trip marker to the ServiceWatch and CargoWatch Data Loggers

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 167
Section 4 - Operation

• Initiate a Pretrip Test

Rear Remote Control Action Set to Stand By

If the Rear Remote Control Action is set to STAND BY, pressing the Rear Remote Control Panel ON Key will power up
the control system, but the unit will not start and run. Pressing the Rear Remote Control Panel OFF Key will turn the unit
off. The HMI Control Panel on the unit must be used to start and stop unit operation.
In addition to turning the unit on and off, when set to STAND BY the Rear Remote Control Panel allows the following:
• Turn the unit on and off
• The unit will not start and run
• Change the Setpoint
• Select Cycle Sentry or Continuous Mode (unless prevent by OptiSet Plus)
• Display discharge air temperature
• Display and clear alarm codes
• Send a Start of Trip marker to the ServiceWatch and CargoWatch Data Loggers
However, when in STAND BY, the engine will not start and a Defrost Cycle or Pretrip Test cannot be initiated.
If the control system is powered up from the remote control panel a stand by message will appear in both the remote
control panel display and the unit HMI Control Panel display as shown below:

Rear Remote Control Panel Unit HMI Control Panel

When the StAnd bY display is shown, press the Select Key to show the Remote Standard Display. When the remote
standard Display is shown, the setpoint and operating mode can be changed, the discharge air temperature can be
displayed and alarms can be viewed and cleared. In addition, a Start of Trip can be sent to the data loggers.
After the last key is pressed, the display will return to the StAnd bY display shown above in about 10 seconds.

Keypad

The nine touch sensitive keys are used to turn the unit on and off. They also allow the setpoint to be changed, Cycle
Sentry or Continuous Mode to be selected, Alarm Codes and other operating data to be displayed and Pretrip Tests and
Defrost Cycles to be performed. A Start of Trip marker can also be sent to the data loggers.

ON KEY Turns the unit on as determined by the setting of Rear Remote Control Action.

OFF KEY Turns the unit off.

168 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 4 - Operation

UP ARROW KEY Increases setpoint or changes other setting.

DOWN ARROW KEY Decreases setpoint or changes other setting.

Allows Cycle Sentry to be turned on and off, displays the discharge air temperature and
SELECT KEY
alarms.

ENTER KEY Executes a prompt or loads a new setpoint or other setting.

PRETRIP KEY Initiates a Pretrip Test.

TK LOGO KEY Sends a Start of Trip marker to the data logger.

DEFROST KEY Initiates a defrost cycle if conditions allow.

Display
The display normally shows the Standard Display of return air temperature and setpoint. The icons on either side of the
display indicate operating modes and alarms. The display shown here has all possible segments illuminated. The
display icons are defined below:

Cool Icon This icon appears when the unit is cooling.

Heat Icon This icon appears when the unit is heating.

Modulation Icon This icon appears when the unit is in modulation.

Defrost Icon This icon appears when the unit is defrosting.

Cycle Sentry Icon This icon appears when the unit is operating in Cycle Sentry mode.

Alarm Icon This icon appears when an alarm condition has been detected.

Electric Standby Icon This icon appears when the unit is operating in the optional electric standby mode.

Setpoint Icon This icon appears when the setpoint is being shown in the display.

Not Used This icon appears during a remote control panel test but is not currently used.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 169
Section 4 - Operation

Reading a Typical Remote Standard Display

The Remote Standard Display shows the temperature and setpoint. The icons at the sides of the display indicate
operating conditions.

The Remote Standard Display above shows the following information:

• The temperature (typically return air temperature) is 35.8°F.
• The setpoint is 35°F.
• The unit is cooling as shown by the icon at the upper left side of the display.
• The unit is operating in Cycle Sentry mode as shown by the icon at the upper right side of the display.

Remote Control Panel Lockout

The remote control panel may be locked out during some control system functions such as Service Test Mode, Interface
Board Test Mode and while setting programmable features. If this is the case, the display shown below will appear. The
display will return to the Remote Standard Display when allowed by the control system.

Turning the Unit On or Off (Configured for STAND BY operation)

The control system is turned on by pressing the ON Key and off by pressing the OFF Key. When the On Key is pressed
the remote display briefly shows all segments and then STAnd by as shown below. A stand by message will also
appear on the unit HMI Control Panel display. The setpoint can be changed but the unit will not start and run. Only the
Select Key, Enter Key and Up and Down Arrow Keys are functional. The unit can be started and run by pressing the unit
HMI Control Panel ON Key.
I m p o r t a n t : To change the setpoint, press the Select Key to show the Remote Standard Display. The setpoint can now
be changed as shown later in this section.

Turning the Unit On and Off (Configured for RUN operation)

The unit is turned on by pressing the ON Key and off by pressing the OFF Key. When the On Key is pressed the remote
display briefly shows all segments and then COn FIg as the control system initializes. The Remote Standard Display will
appear as shown below. The unit will start and run if necessary.

170 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 4 - Operation

Changing the Setpoint

The setpoint can be changed when the Remote Standard Display is shown.
1. When the Remote Standard Display is shown, press the Up or Down Arrow Keys to select the desired setpoint.

2. When the desired setpoint is shown on the display, immediately press the Enter Key to load the new setpoint. The
display will briefly show [Lod] and then the new setpoint will reappear in the display.

I m p o r t a n t : The Enter Key must be pressed or the setpoint will not be changed. The display will return to the Standard
Display and the setpoint will return to the old setpoint in about 10 seconds if the Enter Key is not pressed.
A l a r m C o d e 1 2 7 S e t p o i n t N o t E n t e r e d is set, to indicate that the setpoint change was started but not
completed.
I m p o r t a n t : Confirm that the correct setpoint is set.

Selecting Cycle Sentry or Continuous Mode

Cycle Sentry or Continuous Mode operation can be changed using the Select Key.
1. When the Remote Standard Display is shown, press the Select Key once to display the Cycle Sentry prompt.

2. Use the Up and Down Arrow Keys to chose either YES or nO. Yes = Cycle Sentry Mode. nO = Continuous Mode.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 171
Section 4 - Operation

3. When the desired selection is shown, press the Enter Key to load the setting. The display will briefly show [Lod] and
then the new selection will briefly appear in the display.

4. The display will then return to the Remote Standard Display.

Displaying the Discharge Air Temperature

The discharge air temperature can be shown using the Select Key.
1. When the Remote Standard Display is shown, press the Select Key twice. The discharge air temperature will be
shown in the display for about 10 seconds.

2. The display will then return to the Remote Standard Display.

Viewing and Clearing Alarm Codes

Alarm Codes can be displayed and cleared using the Select Key.
1. When the Remote Standard Display is shown, press the Select Key three times. Any alarm codes present will be
shown in the display, with the most recent alarm code shown first. If no alarm codes are present the display will
show [00].

2. To clear a displayed alarm code, press the Enter Key. The display will briefly show CLEAr ALm.

3. If any additional alarms are present, the next alarm will be shown. If no other alarms are present the display will
briefly show [00].

172 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 4 - Operation

4. The display will then return to the Remote Standard Display.

Starting a Manual Defrost Cycle

If conditions allow, a manual defrost cycle can be initiated using the Defrost Key.
1. Press the Defrost Key. The defrost prompt [EnTEr dEF] will appear in the display.

2. When the defrost prompt is shown, press the Enter Key to start a manual defrost. The display will briefly show
LOAd dEF and then a defrost cycle will begin if conditions allow.

3. The display will return to the Remote Standard Display. The Defrost Icon will be shown in the display.

4. The defrost cycle will terminate automatically.

Sending a Start of Trip Marker

A Start of Trip marker can be sent to the data loggers using the Thermo King Logo Key.
1. Press the Thermo King Logo Key. The Start of Trip [EnTEr SOt] prompt will appear in the display.

2. When the Start of Trip prompt is shown, press the Enter Key to send a Start of Trip marker to the CargoWatch and
ServiceWatch data loggers. The display will briefly show LOAd SOt.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 173
Section 4 - Operation

3. The display will return to the Remote Standard Display.

Running a Pretrip Test

A Pretrip Test can be started using the Pretrip Key. If the unit is not running when the Pretrip Test is started a Full Pretrip
Test will be performed. If the unit is running when the Pretrip Test is started a Running Pretrip Test will be performed.
1. Clear any alarm codes as shown previously.
2. Press the Pretrip Key. The Pretrip [EntEr PrE] prompt will appear in the display.

3. When the Pretrip prompt is shown, press the Enter Key to start a Pretrip Test. The display will briefly show LOAd
PrE. If the unit is not running a Full Pretrip Test will be performed. If the unit is running a Running Pretrip Test will be
performed.

4. When the Pretrip Test is running the display will show PrE trP. The HMI Control Panel will show the Pretrip Test
progress.

5. When the Pretrip Test is complete the display will show PASS, CHEC or FAIL. Pressing the Select Key will return to
the Remote Standard Display.

174 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
Section 5 - Diagnostics
SR-3 Diagnostics
This section is devoted to diagnostic routines designed to help the technician quickly identify the cause of a problem
and repair it using the correct tools, information, and procedures. It is important that the required procedures be
followed exactly. Failure to do so may result in an incomplete repair.
The following hints will prove helpful:
• Download the ServiceWatch™ Data Logger using the WinTrac™ Service Tool. Review the data to determine the
conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the alarm is set and
cleared. This data can be very helpful in determining the cause of the alarm.
• Operators should record all alarm codes in sequence for reference. Alarm codes are displayed in order of
occurrence, with the most recent alarm code displayed last.
• Every effort should be made to perform a Pretrip Test on a suspect unit. In almost all cases, the Pretrip Test will
result in one or more alarm codes that will lead you directly to the problem.
• Clear all alarm codes before starting a Pretrip Test.
• If multiple alarm codes are present, diagnose and repair alarm codes caused by faulty components or control
circuits first and repeat the full Pretrip Test. Diagnosing and repairing component or control circuit based alarms will
often correct unit operation alarms such as reduced refrigeration capacity.
• Use Interface Board Test and Service Test Mode as appropriate to verify unit operation.
• Verify all connectors at the Base Controller, HMI Control Panel, and Expansion Module (if multi-temp unit) are
properly seated.
• Verify all outboard harness connectors are properly seated.
• Verify all programmable features are set to the customer’s specifications before releasing the unit for service.
Each alarm code presented in this section will have information that will assist the technician in the diagnostic
procedure. Not all alarm codes will have all of the sub-topics listed below.
• Alarm Types: This topic will list the specific alarm type for the alarm code.
• Associated Alarm Codes: This topic will list any associated alarm codes that may appear and may be related to the
alarm code or even another alarm code. For example, an Alarm Code 18 for engine overheat will often times have
an Alarm Code 42 set at the same time indicating that the unit was forced to low speed. Another example would be
that a unit shut down on an Alarm Code 10 for high discharge pressure. When the unit shut down it would also have
set an Alarm Code 84 indicating that the unit will restart in a set period of time.
N o t e : Not all associated alarm codes may be listed.
• Component Description and Location: This topic will briefly describe the related component(s) and location(s).
• Circuit Description: This topic will briefly describe the circuit(s) involved.
• Considerations: This topic will give additional information that the technician may find useful.
• How Alarm is Set: This topic briefly describes how the alarm is set.
• How Alarm is Cleared: This topic briefly describes how the alarm is cleared.
• Diagnostic Procedure: This topic will list the specific diagnostic procedures to be followed by the technician.

Electrostatic Discharge
The following electrostatic precautions must be taken:
• Keep all Base Controllers, HMI Control Panels, and Expansion Modules (if multi-temp unit) in anti-static bags at all
times.
• When working with electrical circuits that contain microprocessors, always wear an ESD wrist strap and connect the
opposite end to the chassis ground or CH terminal. This precaution will prevent electrostatic discharge from
damaging circuits.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 175
Section 5 - Diagnostics

Physical Protection
Protect any defective Base Controller, HMI Control Panel, or Expansion Module (if multi-temp unit) from physical
damage by placing them in the shipping carton supplied with the replacement. They will be returned to Thermo King
for failure analysis and possible remanufacture.

Corrective Actions As A Result Of Alarm Codes

Every effort should be made to perform a Pretrip Test on a unit suspected of having a defect. In almost all cases, the
Pretrip Test will result in one or more alarm codes that will lead you directly to the problem.
Download the ServiceWatch Data Logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data to determine the conditions
at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the alarm is set and cleared. This data
can be very helpful in determining the cause of the alarm.

176 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

General 0-200 Series Alarm Codes

The following 0 to 200 Series alarm codes are general alarms.

00 NO ALARMS EXIST
No action required.

02 EVAPORATOR COIL SENSOR

Alarm Type
Check (Shutdown during a Pretrip Test)
Associated Alarm Codes
13 Sensor Calibration Check
Component Description and Location
This sensor is an un-graded sensor and does not require calibration. The sensor is located at the top of the evaporator
behind the panel below the evaporator blower outlet.
Circuit Description
The evaporator coil temperature sensor circuit is a two wire circuit. The CTP-01 (+) wire connects the Base Controller 35
pin sensor connector J3 Pin 25 to the blue sensor wire. The CTN-01 (-) wire connects the Base Controller 35 pin sensor
connector J3 Pin 14 to the brown sensor wire. The sensor wires are routed in the Sensor Harness. The sensor is hard-
wired to the sensor harness.
Considerations
1. Sensors should be positioned to minimize the potential for moisture entry where the wires enter the sensor shell.
Mount sensors with the barrel up and the wires down wherever possible.
2. Sensor alarms are classified as either Soft Failures or Hard Failures.
A Soft Failure is defined as erratic operation or sensor drift that exceeds acceptable tolerances. If this occurs, the
alarm code for the suspect sensor will be set along with Alarm Code 13. This indicates a potential problem that may
not be immediately apparent, and also shows that a hard failure as defined below did not occur. Alarm Code 13 is
always set if a soft failure occurs.
N o t e : Alarm Code 13 can be cleared by the driver, while sensor Alarm Codes 03, 04, 203, and 204 can only be
cleared from the Guarded Access Menu. If the unit has only Alarm Code 03, 04, 203, or 204 set when
inspected, that alarm code may have been originally set with Alarm Code 13. Checking the ServiceWatch data
logger download will indicate the conditions that existed when the failure occurred.
A Hard Failure is defined by an out of range sensor reading, typically caused by an open or shorted sensor,
connector, or harness conductor. The sensor display will show dashes if a hard failure occurs. If this occurs, only the
alarm code for that sensor will be set (such as Alarm Code 03 if the control return air sensor failed). Alarm Code 13
will not be set if a hard failure occurs.
N o t e : The controller may not be currently showing dashes for the sensor reading, but the alarm will be present
when the unit is inspected. If a sensor alarm code is set, a failure did occur at some point. Checking the
ServiceWatch data logger download will indicate when the hard failure occurred.
How Alarm is Set
1. If the sensor reading is 93°C (200°F) or over for 10 seconds, Alarm Code 02 is set as a Check Alarm. The sensor
reading will display dashes [ - - - ] and may return to normal. This condition is termed a hard sensor failure.
2. If the sensor reading is -46°C (-50°F) or under for 10 seconds, Alarm Code 02 is set as a Check Alarm. The sensor
reading will display dashes [ - - - ] and may return to normal. The -46°C (-50°F) check is ignored when the zone is in a
Low Evaporator Coil Temperature Demand Defrost. This condition is termed a hard sensor failure.
3. If the differential between the coil and other sensors is too large when Alarm Code 02 is cleared, Alarm Code 02 and
Alarm Code 13 are set as Check Alarms. This condition is termed a soft sensor failure.
4. If the sensor reading is erratic over time but does not go above 93°C (200°F) or below -46°C (-50°F), Alarm Code 02
and Alarm Code 13 are set as Check Alarms. This condition is termed a soft sensor failure.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm can be cleared manually. When the alarm is cleared, the return air sensors, discharge air sensors, and
evaporator coil sensor must all read within 17°C (30°F) of each other. If they do not, it is assumed that the sensor

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 177
Section 5 - Diagnostics

reading is not accurate. The alarm code is not cleared and Alarm Code 13 will also be set. Also, if the sensor is over or
under range when the alarm clear is attempted, the alarm will not be cleared.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
• Alarm Code 02 (Sensor was out of range):
1. Display the sensor reading using the Sensor Menu. If the display shows [- - - -], the sensor is defective and
should be replaced. If the condition still exists, check the sensor circuit for an open wire or short to ground (Refer
to Service Procedure D01A). Check the Base Controller in accordance with Service Procedure A01A.
2. If the display is normal proceed as shown below.
• Alarm Code 02 and Alarm Code 13 (Sensor was reading erratically):
1. Review the ServiceWatch data logger and check the sensor reading at the time the alarm was set. Also review
the history to see if previous alarm codes exist that would indicate an intermittent problem. If the sensor appears
to have read incorrectly, it should be replaced.
2. If the problem reoccurs, check the sensor connector/sensor circuit in accordance with Service Procedure D01A.
• If all or many of the Sensor Codes (02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 11, 12 and 13) are set:
1. Verify the 35 pin Base Controller sensor connector J3 is securely attached.
2. Check the Base Controller in accordance with Service Procedure A01A.

178 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

03 RETURN CONTROL AIR SENSOR

Alarm Type
Check (Shutdown during a Pretrip Test)
Associated Alarm Codes
11 Unit or Zone Controlling on Alternate Sensor
13 Sensor Calibration Check
92 Sensor Grades Not Set
203 Check Display Return Air Sensor
Component Description and Location
This sensor is one of a pair of return air sensors. Both return air sensors must agree within specified limits. The sensor
associated with Alarm Code 03 is used for unit control. The sensor is located next to the display return air sensor in the
return air stream. It is a graded sensor.
A brass clamp should be installed between the two return air sensors. This clamp increases the thermal coupling
between the sensors to provide more accurate temperature readings when the temperature is changing rapidly. Rapid
temperature changes may occur during pulldown or when the door has been opened. This clamp is not required on the
discharge air sensors.
Circuit Description
The control return air temperature sensor circuit is a two wire circuit. The RTP-01 (+) wire connects the Base Controller
35 pin sensor connector J3 pin 1 to the blue sensor wire. The RTN-01 (-) wire connects the Base Controller 35 pin sensor
connector J3 pin 2 to the brown sensor wire. The sensor wires are routed in the sensor harness and the sensor is hard-
wired to the sensor harness.
Considerations
1. If the unit is controlling on return air temperature and a problem occurs with either return air sensor, the unit will
switch to Discharge Air Control and Alarm Code 11 will be set. The appropriate sensor alarm codes will also be set.
2. Sensor codes must be cleared from the Guarded Access Menu before Alarm Code 11 can be cleared.
3. Sensor grades must be correctly set to the actual grade of the sensor installed. Failure to do so may result in
nuisance sensor alarm codes.
4. Sensors should be positioned to minimize the potential for moisture entry where the wires enter the sensor shell.
Mount sensors with the barrel up and the wires down wherever possible.
5. Sensor alarms are classified as either Soft Failures or Hard Failures.
A Soft Failure is defined as erratic operation or sensor drift that exceeds acceptable tolerances. If this occurs, the
alarm code for the suspect sensor will be set along with Alarm Code 13. This indicates a potential problem that may
not be immediately apparent, and also shows that a hard failure as defined below did not occur. Alarm Code 13 is
always set if a soft failure occurs.
N o t e : Alarm Code 13 can be cleared by the driver, while sensor Alarm Codes 03, 04, 203, and 204 can only be
cleared from the Guarded Access Menu. If the unit has only Alarm Code 03, 04, 203, or 204 set when
inspected, that alarm code may have been originally set with Alarm Code 13. Checking the ServiceWatch data
logger download will indicate the conditions that existed when the failure occurred.
A Hard Failure is defined by an out of range sensor reading, typically caused by an open or shorted sensor,
connector, or harness conductor. The sensor display will show dashes if a hard failure occurs. If this occurs, only the
alarm code for that sensor will be set (such as Alarm Code 03 if the control return air sensor failed). Alarm Code 13
will not be set if a hard failure occurs.
N o t e : The controller may not be currently showing dashes for the sensor reading, but the alarm will be present
when the unit is inspected. If a sensor alarm code is set, a failure did occur at some point. Checking the
ServiceWatch data logger download will indicate when the hard failure occurred.
How Alarm is Set
1. If the sensor reading is 93°C (200°F) or over for 10 seconds, Alarm Code 03 is set as a Check Alarm. The sensor
reading will display dashes [ - - - ] and may return to normal. This condition is termed a hard sensor failure.
2. If the sensor reading is -46°C (-50°F) or under for 10 seconds, Alarm Code 03 is set as a Check Alarm. The sensor
reading will display dashes [ - - - ] and may return to normal. This condition is termed a hard sensor failure.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 179
Section 5 - Diagnostics

3. If the differential between the return air temperature and other temperature sensors is too large when Alarm Code
03 is cleared, Alarm Code 03 and Alarm Code 13 are set as Check Alarms. This condition is termed a soft sensor
failure.
4. If the sensor reading is erratic over time but does not go above 93°C (200°F) or below -46°C (-50°F), Alarm Code 03
and Alarm Code 13 are set as Check Alarms. This condition is termed a soft sensor failure.
5. If the sensor grade for this sensor is set to 5H, Alarm Code 03 and Alarm Code 92 are set as Check Alarms.
6. The temperatures of the control return air sensor and display return air sensor twins are not within a specified range
(2.7°F or 1.5°C). If the faulty sensor can be determined, only the alarm code for that sensor and Alarm Code 13 will
be set. Alarm Codes 03, 203, and 13 are set if the faulty sensor cannot be determined.
N o t e : When a single temperature unit is without redundant sensors (or a single temperature unit with redundant
sensors disabled) the sensors will have a 5°F or 2.8°C jump count/time alarm setting. When a single
temperature unit has redundant sensors enabled, the sensor will have a 2.7°F or 1.5°C alarm jump count
range if both the control and display sensors are graded.
How Alarm is Cleared
N o t e : This alarm can only be cleared manually from the Guarded Access menu.
When the alarm is cleared the return air sensors, discharge air sensors, and evaporator coil sensor must all read within
17°C (30°F) of each other. If they do not, it is assumed that the sensor reading is not accurate. The alarm code is not
cleared and Alarm Code 13 will also be set. Also, if the sensor is over or under range when the alarm clear is attempted,
the alarm will not be cleared.
If the alarm is set by condition #5 above, Alarm Code 92 will clear automatically if the sensor grade is changed from 5H.
If the sensor grade remains 5H, Alarm Code 92 can not be cleared.
Programmable Features
This is a graded sensor. The sensor grade must be correctly set in the Guarded Access Menu.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
• Alarm Code 03 (Sensor was out of range):
1. Display the sensor reading using the Sensor Menu. If the display shows [- - - -], the sensor is defective and
should be replaced. If the condition still exists, check the sensor circuit for an open wire or short to ground (Refer
to Service Procedure D01A). Check the Base Controller in accordance with Service Procedure A01A.
2. If the display is normal, proceed as shown below.
• Alarm Code 03 and Alarm Code 13 (Sensor drifted or was reading erratically):
1. Review the ServiceWatch data logger and check the sensor reading at the time the alarm was set. Also, review
the history to see if previous alarm codes exist that would indicate an intermittent problem. If the sensor appears
to have read incorrectly, it should be replaced.
2. Verify the sensor grades are set to the actual sensor grade.
3. Check for an airflow obstruction and correct sensor mounting.
4. If the problem reoccurs, check the sensor connector/sensor circuit in accordance with Service Procedure D01A.
• Alarm Code 03 and Alarm Code 92 (Sensor grade set to 5H):
1. Verify and set the sensor grade.
• Alarm Code 03 and/or Alarm Code 203 are set with Alarm Code 13 (Dual sensors don’t agree):
1. Review the ServiceWatch data logger and check the senor readings at the time the alarm was set. Also, review
the history to see if previous alarm codes exist that would indicate the problem sensor. If a sensor appears to
have read incorrectly, it should be replaced.
2. Check for an airflow obstruction and correct sensor mounting. Verify the brass clamp is installed on the two
return air sensors.
3. Verify the sensor grades are set to the actual sensor grade, and are not transposed.
4. If the offending sensor cannot be determined, either ice bath both return air sensors simultaneously to
determine which sensor is inaccurate or replace both sensors.

180 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

• If all or many of the Sensor Codes (02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 11, 12, 203 and 204) are set:
1. Verify the 35 pin Base Controller sensor connector J3 is securely connected.
2. Check the Base Controller in accordance with Service Procedure A01A.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 181
Section 5 - Diagnostics

04 DISCHARGE AIR CONTROL SENSOR

Alarm Type
Check (Shutdown during a Pretrip Test)
Associated Alarm Codes
11 Unit or Zone Controlling on Alternate Sensor
13 Sensor Calibration Check
92 Sensor Grades Not Set
204 Check Display Discharge Air Sensor
Component Description and Location
This sensor is one of a pair of dual discharge air sensors. Both discharge air sensors must agree within specified limits.
The sensor associated with Alarm Code 04 is used for unit control. The sensor is located next to the display discharge
air sensor in the discharge air stream. It is a graded sensor.
Circuit Description
The discharge air temperature sensor circuit is a two wire circuit. The DTP-01 (+) wire connects the Base Controller 35
pin sensor connector J3 pin 24 to the blue sensor wire. The DTN-01 (-) wire connects the Base Controller 35 pin sensor
connector J3 pin 13 to the brown sensor wire. The sensor wires are routed in the Sensor Harness and the sensor is
hard-wired to the sensor harness.
Considerations
1. If the unit is controlling on discharge air temperature and a problem occurs with either discharge air sensor, the unit
will switch to Return Air Control and Alarm Code 11 will be set. The appropriate sensor alarm codes will also be set.
2. Sensor codes must be cleared from the Guarded Access Menu before Alarm Code 11 can be cleared.
3. Sensor grades must be correctly set to the actual grade of the sensor installed. Failure to do so may result in
nuisance sensor alarm codes.
4. Sensors should be positioned to minimize the potential for moisture entry where the wires enter the sensor shell.
Mount sensors with the barrel up and the wires down wherever possible.
5. Sensor alarms are classified as either Soft Failures or Hard Failures.
A Soft Failure is defined as erratic operation or sensor drift that exceeds acceptable tolerances. If this occurs, the
alarm code for the suspect sensor will be set along with Alarm Code 13. This indicates a potential problem that may
not be immediately apparent, and also shows that a hard failure as defined below did not occur. Alarm Code 13 is
always set if a soft failure occurs.
N o t e : Alarm Code 13 can be cleared by the driver, while sensor Alarm Codes 03, 04, 203, and 204 can only be
cleared from the Guarded Access Menu. If the unit has only Alarm Code 03, 04, 203, or 204 set when
inspected, that alarm code may have been originally set with Alarm Code 13. Checking the ServiceWatch data
logger download will indicate the conditions that existed when the failure occurred.
A Hard Failure is defined by an out of range sensor reading, typically caused by an open or shorted sensor,
connector, or harness conductor. The sensor display will show dashes if a hard failure occurs. If this occurs, only the
alarm code for that sensor will be set (such as Alarm Code 03 if the control return air sensor failed). Alarm Code 13
will not be set if a hard failure occurs.
N o t e : The controller may not be currently showing dashes for the sensor reading, but the alarm will be present
when the unit is inspected. If a sensor alarm code is set, a failure did occur at some point. Checking the
ServiceWatch data logger download will indicate when the hard failure occurred.
How Alarm is Set
1. If the sensor reading is 93°C (200°F) or over for 10 seconds, Alarm Code 04 is set as a Check Alarm. The sensor
reading will display dashes [ - - - ] and may return to normal. This condition is termed a hard sensor failure.
2. If the sensor reading is -46°C (-50°F) or under for 10 seconds, Alarm Code 04 is set as a Check Alarm. The sensor
reading will display dashes [ - - - ] and may return to normal. This condition is termed a hard sensor failure.
3. If the differential between the discharge and other sensors is too large when Alarm Code 04 is cleared, Alarm Code
04 and Alarm Code 13 are set as Check Alarms. This condition is termed a soft sensor failure.
4. If the sensor reading is erratic over time but does not go above 93°C (200°F) or below -46°C (-50°F), Alarm Code 04
and Alarm Code 13 are set as Check Alarms. This condition is termed a soft sensor failure.

182 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

5. If the sensor grade for this sensor is set to 5H, both Alarm Code 04 and Alarm Code 92 are set as Check Alarms.
6. The temperatures of the control discharge air sensor and display discharge air sensor twins are not within a
specified range (2.7°F or 1.5°C). If the faulty sensor can be determined, only the alarm code for that sensor and
Alarm Code 13 will be set. Alarm Codes 04, 204, and 13 are set if the faulty sensor cannot be determined.
N o t e : When a single temperature unit is without redundant sensors (or a single temperature unit with redundant
sensors disabled) the sensors will have a 5°F or 2.8°C jump count/time alarm setting. When a single
temperature unit has redundant sensors enabled, the sensor will have a 2.7°F or 1.5°C alarm jump count
range if both the control and display sensors are graded.
How Alarm is Cleared
N o t e : This alarm can only be cleared manually from the Guarded Access menu.
When the alarm is cleared, the return air sensors, discharge air sensors, and evaporator coil sensor must all read within
17°C (30°F) of each other. If they do not, it is assumed that the sensor reading is not accurate. The alarm code is not
cleared and Alarm Code 13 will also be set. Also, if the sensor is over or under range when the alarm clear is attempted,
the alarm will not be cleared.
If the alarm is set by condition #5 above, Alarm Code 92 will clear automatically if the sensor grade is changed from 5H.
If the sensor grade remains 5H, Alarm Code 92 can not be cleared.
Programmable Features
This is a graded sensor. The sensor grade must be correctly set in the Guarded Access Menu.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
• Alarm Code 04 (Sensor was out of range):
1. Display the sensor reading using the Sensor Menu. If the display shows [- - - -], the sensor is defective and
should be replaced. If the condition still exists, check the sensor circuit for an open wire or short to ground (Refer
to Service Procedure D01A). Check the Base Controller in accordance with Service Procedure A01A.
2. If the display is normal, proceed as shown below.
• Alarm Code 04 and Alarm Code 13 (Sensor drifted or was reading erratically):
1. Review the ServiceWatch data logger and check the sensor reading at the time the alarm was set. Also, review
the history to see if previous alarm codes exist that would indicate an intermittent problem. If the sensor appears
to have read incorrectly, it should be replaced.
2. Verify the sensor grades are set to the actual sensor grade.
3. Check for an airflow obstruction and correct sensor mounting.
4. If the problem reoccurs, check the sensor connector/sensor circuit in accordance with Service Procedure D01A.
• Alarm Code 04 and Alarm Code 92 (Sensor grade set to 5H):
1. Verify and set the sensor grade.
• Alarm Code 04 and/or Alarm Code 204 are set with Alarm Code 13 (Dual sensors don’t agree):
1. Review the ServiceWatch data logger and check the senor readings at the time the alarm was set. Also, review
the history to see if previous alarm codes exist that would indicate the problem sensor. If a sensor appears to
have read incorrectly, it should be replaced.
2. Check for an airflow obstruction and correct sensor mounting.
3. Verify the sensor grades are set to the actual sensor grade, and are not transposed.
4. If the offending sensor cannot be determined, either ice bath both discharge air sensors simultaneously to
determine which sensor is inaccurate or replace both sensors.
• If all or many of the Sensor Codes (02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 11, 12, 203 and 204) are set:
1. Verify the 35 pin Base Controller sensor connector J3 is securely connected.
2. Check the Base Controller in accordance with Service Procedure A01A.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 183
Section 5 - Diagnostics

05 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Alarm Type
Check (Shutdown during a Pretrip Test)
Associated Alarm Codes
13 Sensor Calibration Check
Component Description and Location
This sensor is an un-graded sensor and does not require calibration. The sensor is located in the condenser air stream
behind the condenser grill.
Circuit Description
The ambient temperature sensor circuit is a two wire circuit. The ATP-01 (+) wire connects the Base Controller 35 pin
sensor connector J3 pin 3 to the blue sensor wire. The ATN-01 (-) wire connects the Base Controller 35 pin sensor
connector J3 pin 4 to the brown sensor wire. The sensor wires are routed in the Sensor Harness. The sensor is
connected to the sensor harness with a Deutsch connector.
Considerations
1. Sensors should be positioned to minimize the potential for moisture entry where the wires enter the sensor shell.
Mount sensors with the barrel up and the wires down wherever possible.
2. Sensor alarms are classified as either Soft Failures or Hard Failures.
A Soft Failure is defined as erratic operation or sensor drift that exceeds acceptable tolerances. If this occurs, the
alarm code for the suspect sensor will be set along with Alarm Code 13. This indicates a potential problem that may
not be immediately apparent, and also shows that a hard failure as defined below did not occur. Alarm Code 13 is
always set if a soft failure occurs.
N o t e : Alarm Code 13 can be cleared by the driver, while sensor Alarm Codes 03, 04, 203, and 204 can only be
cleared from the Guarded Access Menu. If the unit has only Alarm Code 03, 04, 203, or 204 set when
inspected, that alarm code may have been originally set with Alarm Code 13. Checking the ServiceWatch data
logger download will indicate the conditions that existed when the failure occurred.
A Hard Failure is defined by an out of range sensor reading, typically caused by an open or shorted sensor,
connector, or harness conductor. The sensor display will show dashes if a hard failure occurs. If this occurs, only the
alarm code for that sensor will be set (such as Alarm Code 03 if the control return air sensor failed). Alarm Code 13
will not be set if a hard failure occurs.
N o t e : The controller may not be currently showing dashes for the sensor reading, but the alarm will be present
when the unit is inspected. If a sensor alarm code is set, a failure did occur at some point. Checking the
ServiceWatch data logger download will indicate when the hard failure occurred.
How Alarm is Set
1. If the sensor reading is over 93°C (200°F) for 10 seconds, set alarm code 05 as a Check Alarm. The sensor reading
will display dashes [ - - - ] and may return to normal. This condition is termed a hard sensor failure.
2. If the sensor reading is under -46°C (-50°F) for 10 seconds, set alarm code 05 as a Check Alarm. The sensor reading
will display dashes [ - - - ] and may return to normal. This condition is termed a hard sensor failure.
3. If the sensor reading is erratic over time but does not go above 93°C (200°F) or below -46°C (-50°F), Alarm Code 05
and Alarm Code 13 are set as Check Alarms. This condition is termed a soft sensor failure.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually. If the sensor is over or under range when the alarm clear is attempted, the alarm will
not be cleared.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
• Alarm Code 05 (Sensor was out of range) Only:
1. Display the sensor reading using the Sensor Menu. If the display shows [- - - - ], the sensor is defective and
should be replaced. If the condition still exists, check the sensor circuit for an open wire or short to ground (Refer
to Service Procedure D01A). Check the Base Controller in accordance with Service Procedure A01A.

184 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

2. If the display is normal, proceed as shown below.

• Alarm Code 05 and Alarm Code 13 (Sensor drifted or was reading erratically):
1. Review the ServiceWatch data logger and check the sensor reading at the time the alarm was set. Also, review
the history to see if previous alarm codes exist that would indicate an intermittent problem. If the sensor appears
to have read incorrectly, it should be replaced.
2. Check for an airflow obstruction and correct sensor mounting.
3. If the problem reoccurs, check the sensor connector/sensor circuit in accordance with Service Procedure D01A.
• If all or many of the Sensor Codes (02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 11, 12, 203 and 204) are set:
1. Verify the 35 pin Base Controller sensor connector J3 is securely connected.
2. Check the Base Controller in accordance with Service Procedure A01A.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 185
Section 5 - Diagnostics

06 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Alarm Type
Log, Check, or Shutdown (Shutdown during a Pretrip Test or if Alarm Code 37 is set)
Becomes a Log Alarm if the unit is switched to electric operation
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
Component Description and Location
This sensor is an un-graded sensor and does not require calibration. The sensor is located in the engine thermostat
housing.
Circuit Description
The coolant temperature sensor circuit is a two wire circuit. The WTP-01 (+) wire connects the Base Controller 35 pin
sensor connector J3 pin 26 to the blue sensor wire. The WTN-01 (-) wire connects the Base Controller 35 pin sensor
connector J3 pin 15 to the brown sensor wire. The sensor wires are routed in the Sensor Harness. The sensor is
connected to the sensor harness with a Deutsch connector.
Considerations
Connectors should be positioned to minimize the potential for moisture entry where the wires enter the connector shell.
How Alarm is Set
1. If the sensor reading is 121°C (250°F) or over for 10 seconds, Alarm Code 06 is set as a Check Alarm. The sensor
reading will display dashes [ - - - ] and may return to normal.
2. If the sensor reading is -46°C (-50°F) or under for 10 seconds, Alarm Code 06 is set as a Check Alarm. The sensor
reading will display dashes [ - - - ] and may return to normal.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually. If the sensor is over or under range when the alarm clear is attempted, the alarm will
not be cleared.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
• Alarm Code 06 (Sensor was out of range) Only:
1. Display the sensor reading using the Sensor Menu. If the display shows [- - - - ], the sensor is defective and
should be replaced. If the condition still exists, check the sensor circuit for an open wire or short to ground. Refer
to Service Procedure D01A. Check the Base Controller in accordance with Service Procedure A01A.
2. If Alarm Code 06 is generated, verify coolant level is correct and cooling system is correctly bled of air.
• If all or many of the Sensor Codes (02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 11, 12, 203 and 204) are set:
1. Verify that the 35 pin Base Controller sensor connector J3 is securely connected.
2. Check the Base Controller in accordance with Service Procedure A01A.

186 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

07 ENGINE RPM SENSOR

Alarm Type
Check
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
Component Description and Location
The flywheel sensor is a proximity sensor that generates a pulse as each flywheel tooth passes the sensor. The Base
Controller counts these pulses and performs the arithmetic necessary to convert the pulses into engine rpm. It is
located on the flywheel housing above the starter.
Circuit Description
The flywheel sensor circuit is a two wire circuit and is not polarity sensitive. The FS1-01 wire connects the Base
Controller 36 pin connector J7 pin 35 to one side of the flywheel sensor. The FS2-01 wire connects the Base Controller
36 pin connector J7 pin 36 to the other side of the flywheel sensor. The sensor wires are routed in the Main Harness.
How Alarm is Set
1. If the alternator frequency is greater than 100 Hz and oil pressure input is high but the RPM sensor indicates less
than 800 RPM, Alarm Code 07 is set as a Check Alarm.
2. If the alternator frequency is greater than 100 Hz and oil pressure input is high but the RPM sensor indicates less
than 300 RPM for 4 seconds, Alarm Code 07 is set as a Check Alarm.
3. If the RPM is less than 40 during an engine start attempt, Alarm Code 07 is set as a Check Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Disconnect the sensor wires at the flywheel sensor. Check the AC voltage at the sensor with the engine running. If a
small AC voltage (greater than 1.0 Vac) is not present, check the sensor adjustment. Turn the unit off and loosen the
lock nut and turn the sensor in until it contacts the flywheel. Back the sensor out ½ turn and tighten the lock nut.
Start the unit and recheck the sensor voltage. If more than 1.0 Vac is still not present, the sensor is defective and
must be replaced.
2. Disconnect the FS1-01 and FS2-01 connections and check the flywheel sensor continuity. The resistance between
the flywheel sensor terminals should be approximately 250 to 300 ohms. Also check from each flywheel sensor
terminal to ground. If either terminal is shorted to ground, the flywheel sensor is defective.
3. If AC voltage is present, disconnect the flywheel harness at the Base Controller and disconnect the flywheel sensor.
Using a Fluke meter set for ohms, check for shorts to chassis ground on the FS1-01 and FS2-01 wires. If a short
exists, examine the wiring harness for chaffed areas and repair, as required.
4. If no shorts to chassis ground exist, connect the FS1-01 wire to the FS2-01 wire at the sensor. Check continuity from
FS1-01 to FS2-01 at the 36 pin Base Controller connector. The circuit should measure less than one ohm. If the
circuit is open, check the harness using the wiring diagram for the unit.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 187
Section 5 - Diagnostics

09 HIGH EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE

Alarm Type
Shutdown
Associated Alarm Codes
02 Evaporator Coil Sensor
Component Description and Location
This sensor is an un-graded sensor and does not require calibration. The sensor is located at the top of the evaporator
behind the panel below the evaporator blower outlet.
How Alarm is Set
If the unit is running and the evaporator coil temperature was greater than or equal to 68°C (155°F) or the discharge air
temperature was greater than or equal to 57°C (135°F), Alarm Code 09 is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check refrigeration system operation, especially in heat and defrost.
a. This alarm may be set if the three-way valve is stuck in the heat position.
b. This alarm may be set if the defrost damper is stuck in the closed position.
2. Check the evaporator fan for proper operation.
3. If both the coil temperature sensor and the discharge temperature sensor are failed, the defrost cycle is terminated
on time. If this occurs, the unit may remain in defrost long enough to cause excessive evaporator coil temperature.
4. Check evaporator coil sensor operation, as shown in Alarm Code 02. If the evaporator coil sensor reads high due to
a defective sensor, Alarm Code 09 may be set as a result.

188 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

10 HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE

Alarm Type
Prevent or Shutdown
Associated Alarm Codes
84 Restart Null
Component Description and Location
The High Pressure Cutout Switch (HPCO) is located on the compressor discharge manifold.
Circuit Description
The high pressure cutout circuit is a two wire circuit. The PHPC-01 wire connects the Base Controller 36 pin connector
J7 pin 17 to one side of the high pressure cutout switch. The HPCO-01 wire connects the Base Controller 36 pin
connector J7 pin 18 to the other side of the high pressure cutout switch. The switch is not polarity sensitive. The switch
wires are routed in the Main Harness. The HPCO switch is connected to the Main Harness with a Deutsch connector.
Considerations
If the HPCO switch is open, it will always shut the unit down. The switch contacts break power to the Run Relay and Coil
which prevents the fuel solenoid from energizing.
How Alarm is Set
1. If the HPCO switch opens, Alarm Code 10 is set as a Prevent Alarm. Two restart attempts will be made to allow
continued operation at temporarily reduced performance. If, at the end of the two attempts full performance is not
possible, the alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm. The temporary shutdown period is 15 minutes. Alarm Code 84 is set
along with Alarm Code 10 to indicate the unit is in a temporary shutdown mode.
If continuous restarts are enabled, a Shutdown Alarm is not set after two attempts. The temporary shutdown period
is 60 minutes if continuous restarts are enabled. Alarm Code 84 is set along with Alarm Code 10 to indicate the unit
is in a temporary shutdown mode.
If restarts are disabled, the alarm will be set as a shutdown on the first occurrence.
2. If the discharge pressure transducer exceeds a pre-set value (greater than 470 PSIG and less than 500 PSIG for five
seconds) and the discharge pressure transducer is not failed, Alarm Code 10 is set as a Prevent Alarm. Two restart
attempts will be made to allow continued operation at temporarily reduced performance. If, at the end of the two
attempts full performance is not possible, the alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm. The temporary shutdown period is
15 minutes. Alarm Code 84 is set along with Alarm Code 10 to indicate the unit is in a temporary shutdown mode.
If continuous restarts are enabled, a Shutdown Alarm is not set after two attempts. The temporary shutdown period
is 60 minutes if continuous restarts are enabled. Alarm Code 84 is set along with Alarm Code 10 to indicate the unit
is in a temporary shutdown mode.
If restarts are disabled, the alarm will be set as a shutdown on the first occurrence.
How Alarm is Cleared
1. The alarm can be cleared manually or may be reset if the condition no longer exists.
2. The alarm will clear automatically at the conclusion of a successful prevent routine.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check the refrigeration system for high discharge pressure and correct as required.
2. Check the HPCO for proper operation with unit not running. Verify discharge pressure with gauge manifold. If
discharge pressure is less than switch opening pressure (refer to Specifications), resistance across the switch
contacts should read less than one ohm.
3. If HPCO checks good in Step 2, reconnect unit harness and check resistance at J7 pin 2 and 18. Resistance should
read less than one ohm. A resistance of greater than one ohm indicates an open or high resistance.
4. Check the Base Controller High Pressure Cutout fuse F25.
5. Check the discharge pressure transducer for correct and accurate readings.
6. Check the refrigeration system valves for correct operation. A fault that prevents refrigerant flow from the system
high side to the system low side may create high discharge pressure.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 189
Section 5 - Diagnostics

7. Review the ServiceWatch download in technician level view. The associated alarm data will show the status of the
HPCO switch and the discharge pressure at the time the alarm was set. If this data indicates that the HPCO switch
opened but the discharge pressure remained within acceptable limits, the actual problem is a defective HPCO switch
or circuit, not high discharge pressure.
8. For SLX/SLXe units that are experiencing nuisance Alarm Code 10 issues, refer to Service Bulletin SB1012-1.

11 UNIT OR ZONE CONTROLLING ON ALTERNATE SENSOR

Alarm Type
Check
Associated Alarm Codes
03 Return Control Air Sensor
04 Discharge Air Control Sensor
203 Check Display Return Air Sensor
204 Check Display Discharge Air Sensor
Component Description and Location
See Alarm Codes indicated above.
Circuit Description
See Alarm Codes indicated above.
How Alarm is Set
The primary control sensor (either return or discharge depending on unit settings) has failed and the unit is controlling
on the alternate sensor. If the unit is operating with return air sensor control, and either of the dual return air sensors
fails, the unit will control using the discharge air sensor. If the unit is operating with discharge air sensor control, and
either of the discharge air sensors fails, the unit will control using the return air sensor.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared automatically. The associated sensor alarm code (03 or 04) must be cleared before Alarm Code 11
can be cleared.
If Alarm Code 12 is set, Alarm Code 11 will be auto cleared.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Determine which sensor Alarm Codes (03, 04, 203, or 204) are present. Proceed as shown for that Alarm Code.

190 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

12 SENSOR SHUTDOWN
Alarm Type
Check or Shutdown
Associated Alarm Codes
03 Return Control Air Sensor
04 Discharge Air Control Sensor
13 Sensor Calibration Check
65 Abnormal Temperature Differential
203 Check Display Return Air Sensor
204 Check Display Discharge Air Sensor
Component Description and Location
See Alarm Codes indicated above.
Circuit Description
See Alarm Codes indicated above.
How Alarm is Set
Fresh Setpoints: Both return and discharge sensors have failed or have been disabled by the dual sensor alarm control.
With a fresh range setpoint, the alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
Frozen Setpoints: Both return and discharge sensors have failed or have been disabled by the dual sensor alarm
control. With a frozen range setpoint, the alarm is set as a Check Alarm. The unit will be forced into continuous low
speed cool.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared automatically when the associated sensor Alarm Codes 03, 04, 203, and 204 are cleared.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Determine which sensor Alarm Codes (03, 04, 203, or 204) are present. Proceed as shown for that Alarm Code.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 191
Section 5 - Diagnostics

13 SENSOR CALIBRATION CHECK

Alarm Type
Check
Associated Alarm Codes
02 Evaporator Coil Sensor
03 Return Control Air Sensor
04 Discharge Air Control Sensor
05 Ambient Temperature Sensor
203 Check Display Return Air Sensor
204 Check Display Discharge Air Sensor
Component Description and Location
See Alarm Codes indicated above.
Circuit Description
See Alarm Codes indicated above.
Considerations
Sensor alarms are classified as either Soft Failures or Hard Failures.
A Soft Failure is defined as erratic operation or sensor drift that exceeds acceptable tolerances. If this occurs, the alarm
code for the suspect sensor will be set along with Alarm Code 13. This indicates a potential problem that may not be
immediately apparent, and also shows that a hard failure as defined below did not occur. Alarm Code 13 is always set if
a soft failure occurs.
N o t e : Alarm Code 13 can be cleared by the driver, while sensor Alarm Codes 03, 04, 203, and 204 can only be cleared
from the Guarded Access Menu. If the unit has only Alarm Code 03, 04, 203, or 204 set when inspected, that alarm
code may have been originally set with Alarm Code 13. Checking the ServiceWatch data logger download will
indicate the conditions that existed when the failure occurred.
A Hard Failure is defined by an out of range sensor reading, typically caused by an open or shorted sensor, connector,
or harness conductor. The sensor display will show dashes if a hard failure occurs. If this occurs, only the alarm code
for that sensor will be set (such as Alarm Code 03 if the control return air sensor failed). Alarm Code 13 will not be set if
a hard failure occurs.
N o t e : The controller may not be currently showing dashes for the sensor reading, but the alarm will be present when
the unit is inspected. If a sensor alarm code is set, a failure did occur at some point. Checking the ServiceWatch
data logger download will indicate when the hard failure occurred.
How Alarm is Set
1. Evaporator Coil Sensor Check: If the evaporator coil, return, and discharge sensors do not read within a specified
number of degrees of each other 20 minutes after a defrost cycle terminates, Alarm Code 13 is set as a Check Alarm.
Alarm Code 02 will also be set.
2. The alarm is set (after five seconds) if after clearing Alarm Codes 02, 03, 04, 203, or 204, all return, discharge, and
coil sensors do not read within a specified number of degrees of each other.
3. Return, Discharge, and Evaporator Coil Sensor Check: If the return, discharge, or evaporator coil sensors are reading
erratically over a specified time, Alarm Code 13 will be set as a Check Alarm along with the alarm code for the erratic
sensor (Alarm Code 03, 203 or Alarm Code 04, 204).
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually. The associated sensor code must be cleared from the Guarded Access menu.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
Determine which sensor Alarm Codes (02, 03, 04, 05, 203, or 204) are present along with Alarm Code 13. Proceed as
shown for that Alarm Code.

192 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

15 CHECK INTAKE AIR HEATER

Alarm Type
Log, Check, or Shutdown
Associated Alarm Codes
62 Ammeter Out of Calibration
Component Description and Location
The intake air heater is located at the engine intake manifold.
Circuit Description
Power to the intake air heater is supplied by the H circuit. The associated Base Controller fuse is fuse F5. Intake air
heater current is monitored by the Base Controller shunt.
How Alarm is Set
1. If the current draw is out of specification during an engine start, Alarm Code 15 is set as a Log Alarm if the current is
below the minimum and the battery voltage is within specifications. The alarm is set as a Check Alarm if the current
exceeds the maximum specification. Minimum preheat current for the Yanmar engine is 50 amps. Maximum
preheat current for the Yanmar engine is 83 amps.
2. If the current draw is out of specification during a Pretrip Test, Alarm Code 15 is set as a Shutdown Alarm. Minimum
preheat current on the Yanmar engine is 50 amps. Maximum preheat current on Yanmar engine is 83 amps.
3. If during a Pretrip Test the current does not return to less than 0.5 amps when de-energized, Alarm Code 15 is set as
a Shutdown Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check the operation of the preheat circuit using Interface Board Test Mode. LED 3 should illuminate. Current draw
should be approximately 50-83 amps.
2. If the current draw is zero, check for an open heater, blown fuse F5, or defective K2 Preheat Relay.
3. If the current draw is low, check for low battery voltage or high circuit resistance.
4. If the current draw is in excess of 83 amps, check for a shorted intake air heater.
5. Check for battery voltage at the intake air heater when the preheat circuit is energized. The voltage should be above
11.2 volts. If the voltage is low, check the entire preheat circuit for excessive resistance due to burned preheat relay
contacts or loose or corroded connections. Verify all connections are secure.
6. Verify the current values above with an external ammeter. If the values do not match, the shunt may be defective.
Check the Base Controller in accordance with Service Procedure A01A.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 193
Section 5 - Diagnostics

17 ENGINE FAILED TO CRANK

Alarm Type
Log, Check, Prevent, or Shutdown in Diesel Mode; Log in Electric Mode
Associated Alarm Codes
20 Engine Failed to Start
63 Engine Stopped
84 Restart Null
How Alarm is Set
1. If the engine fails to reach 40 RPM or rises above and then falls below 40 RPM during the engine crank sequence,
this alarm is set as a Prevent Alarm. Two attempts are made to crank, and Alarm Code 17 is set as a Shutdown
Alarm.
2. An Alarm Code 17 that follows an Alarm Code 20/84 will be set as a Shutdown Alarm.
3. If Alarm Code 17 follows an Alarm Code 63 that has been cleared, only one crank attempt will be made.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check the battery cables for clean and tight connections. Check the condition of the battery with a Midtronics Tester
or other Conductance/Impedance Tester that has an AGM Battery Setting.
2. Check available voltage on the 8S wire at the starter solenoid while the unit is going through a start sequence. A
forced engine start can be attempted by switching to “continuous” run mode. If voltage is present during start
attempt, either the starter is defective, the engine/compressor is locked, or a poor ground exists between the bell
housing and the starter face (check for possible corrosion).
3. If no or low voltage is present on 8S during start attempt, verify LED 25 is illuminated during a start attempt.
4. If LED 25 is not illuminated, check F3 fuse.
5. Check 8S circuit from the controller to the starter for broken wire, loose crimps, or a pushed pin.
6. With the battery disconnected, attempt to turn the engine over with a breaker bar.
7. If a Model 50 Electric Standby unit, check for a failed clutch or seized electric motor.

194 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

18 HIGH ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

Alarm Type
Prevent or Shutdown in Diesel Mode
Log in Electric Mode
Associated Alarm Codes
42 Unit Forced to Low Speed
84 Restart Null
Considerations
This alarm becomes a Log Alarm if the unit is switched to Electric Mode. Alarm Code 18 alarm conditions will be
monitored while the unit is operating in Electric Mode, and will auto-clear when the engine coolant temperature is
reduced to a safe value.
How Alarm is Set
1. If the coolant temperature is greater than 107°C (225°F) for 30 seconds as determined by the coolant temperature
sensor and the coolant level sensor is not indicating low coolant level, Alarm Code 18 is set as a Prevent Alarm. Two
attempts will be made to allow continued operation at temporarily reduced performance. If, at the end of the two
attempts full performance is not possible, the alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm. The temporary shutdown period is
15 minutes. Alarm Code 84 is set along with Alarm Code 18 to indicate the unit is in a temporary shutdown mode.
If continuous restarts are enabled, a Shutdown Alarm is not set after two attempts. The temporary shutdown period
is 60 minutes if continuous restarts are enabled. Alarm Code 84 is set along with Alarm Code 18 to indicate the unit
is in a temporary shutdown mode. If restarts are disabled, the alarm will be set as a shutdown on the first
occurrence.
2. If the coolant temperature is greater than 107°C (225°F) for 30 seconds as determined by the coolant temperature
sensor and the coolant level sensor is indicating low coolant level, Alarm Code 18 is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
1. The alarm can be cleared manually if the condition no longer exists. If condition still exists, it will reset.
2. The alarm will clear automatically at the conclusion of a successful prevent routine.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check the engine water temperature using the Gauge Menu. If the temperature is above 107°C (225°F), check the
engine cooling system to determine the cause of overheating.
2. Check for Alarm Code 37 as a related alarm.
CAUTION
Hazardous Pressures!
Do not remove expansion tank cap while coolant is hot.

3. Check the engine coolant level. Bleed air from the cooling system if necessary.
4. Check the water pump drive belt.
5. Check the radiator for airflow and coolant flow restrictions.
6. Check the Water Temperature Sensor in accordance with Alarm Code 06.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 195
Section 5 - Diagnostics

19 LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE

Alarm Type
Shutdown in Diesel Mode
Log in Electric Mode
Associated Alarm Codes
31 Check Oil Pressure Switch
66 Low Engine Oil Level
Component Description and Location
The oil pressure switch is located at the side of the oil filter housing.
Circuit Description
The low oil pressure switch circuit is a single wire circuit. The 20B wire connects the Base Controller 36 pin connector J7
pin 28 to the low oil pressure switch. The switch is not polarity sensitive and is closed on low oil pressure. This applies
chassis ground to the Base Controller. The switch wire is routed in the Main Harness.
Considerations
This alarm becomes a Log Alarm if the unit is switched to Electric Mode. It will again become a Shutdown Alarm if the
unit is switched to Diesel Mode.
How Alarm is Set
If running in diesel mode and the oil pressure is low for 30 seconds, Alarm Code 19 is set as a Shutdown Alarm. If the
low oil level switch is indicating low oil level when this occurs, Alarm Code 66 Low Engine Oil Level will also be set as a
Shutdown Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check for Alarm Code 31 as a related alarm.
2. Check engine oil level.
3. Display the oil pressure when the unit is running, using the Gauge Menu. The oil pressure should be [OK]. If not, the
switch may be stuck closed or the switch circuit may be shorted. If shorted, Alarm Code 31 would be active.
4. Verify the oil pressure switch is open with good oil pressure and closed with low oil pressure. The oil pressure
switch should be closed when the engine is not running and open when the engine is running. Confirm using an
ohmmeter.
5. Check the voltage of the 20B-01 wire at the 36 pin Base Controller connector J7 pin 28. Battery volts should be
present when the engine is running.
6. Check the 20B wire in the Main Harness with an ohmmeter for continuity in accordance with Service Procedure
H04A.
7. Connect an external oil pressure gauge and confirm that adequate oil pressure (20 psig or above) is present when
the unit is running.

196 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

20 ENGINE FAILED TO START

Alarm Type
Log, Check, Prevent, or Shutdown in Diesel Mode
Log in Electric Mode
Associated Alarm Codes
15 Check Air Intake Heater
63 Engine Stopped Reason Unknown
84 Restart Null
Considerations
This alarm becomes a Log Alarm if the unit is switched to Electric Mode.
How Alarm is Set
1. If the engine failed to start after the starter motor was allowed to crank for the maximum allowed time, Alarm Code
20 is set as a Prevent Alarm. Two start attempts are normally made.
2. If the engine coolant sensor temperature is greater than -12°C (10°F), the crank timer on the first start attempt is 15
seconds. The crank timer on the second start is 15 seconds.
3. If the engine coolant temperature is less than -12°C (10°F), the crank timer on the first start attempt is six seconds.
The crank timer on the second start is 30 seconds.
Notes:
1. If Alarm Code 20 follows an Alarm Code 17/84, Alarm Code 20 will be set as a Shutdown Alarm.
2. If Alarm Code 20 follows an Alarm Code 63 alarm clear, only one crank attempt will be made.
How Alarm is Cleared
1. The alarm can be cleared manually if the condition no longer exists. If condition still exists, it will reset.
2. The alarm will clear automatically at the conclusion of a successful prevent routine.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check the unit fuel level.
2. Check fuel solenoid for proper operation, fuel pump, and fuel system electrically, mechanically and for fuel flow
restrictions or blockages.
3. Check for cause of slow start or no start of the engine.
4. In cold ambient temperatures, check for fuel gelling.
5. Check for restricted air cleaner or air intake system.
6. Verify the intake air heater is operating properly, using Interface Board Test Mode.
7. If a Model 50 electric standby unit, check for a failed clutch or seized electric motor.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 197
Section 5 - Diagnostics

21 COOLING CYCLE CHECK

Alarm Type
Prevent
Associated Alarm Codes
23 Cooling Cycle Fault
84 Restart Null
85 Forced Unit Operation
Considerations
1. The unit may be heating when it should be cooling.
2. This is a Prevent Alarm. A second occurrence of this alarm will be set as Alarm Code 23 Cooling Cycle Fault
Shutdown Alarm.
3. If restarts are disabled, Alarm Code 23 will be set as a Shutdown Alarm on the first occurrence of the alarm.
How Alarm is Set
If the unit or zone is exhibiting a heating temperature differential (∆T) while operating in cool mode, Alarm Code 21 is
set as a Prevent Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
The alarm is cleared automatically or manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check temperature differential by displaying the temperature differential, or by checking the difference between the
return and discharge air temperature sensors.
2. Check refrigerant level.
3. Attach gauges and evaluate unit refrigeration system performance.
4. Verify that sensor grades are set correctly.
5. Check for proper air flow. Short cycling, caused by a blocked air flow path, may generate this code.
6. Check the three-way valve. A defective valve that does not shift to the cooling position may cause this alarm.
7. Check the pilot solenoid valve. A defective valve that is stuck open will prevent the three-way valve from shifting to
the cooling position.

198 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

22 HEATING CYCLE CHECK

Alarm Type
Check or Prevent
Associated Alarm Codes
24 Heating Cycle Fault
84 Restart Null
85 Forced Unit Operation
Considerations
1. The unit may be cooling when it should be heating.
2. This is a Prevent Alarm. A second occurrence of this alarm will be set as Alarm Code 24 Heating Cycle Fault
Shutdown Alarm if the zone is operating in the fresh setpoint range.
3. The alarm is set as a Check Alarm if the unit is operating in the frozen setpoint range. Heat operation is locked out if
an Alarm Code 24 is set in a unit that is operating in the frozen setpoint range.
4. If restarts are disabled, Alarm Code 24 will be set as a Shutdown Alarm on the first occurrence of the alarm.
How Alarm is Set
If the unit or zone is exhibiting a cooling temperature differential (∆T) while operating in heat mode, Alarm Code 22 is
set as a Prevent Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
The alarm is cleared automatically or manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the Wintrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician Level
to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the alarm
is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check temperature differential by displaying the temperature differential, or by checking the difference between the
return and discharge air temperature sensors.
2. Check refrigerant level.
3. Attach gauges and evaluate unit refrigeration system performance.
4. Verify that sensor grades are set correctly.
5. Check for proper air flow. Short cycling, caused by a blocked air flow path, may generate this code.
6. Check the three-way valve. A defective valve that does not shift to the heating position may cause this alarm.
7. Check the pilot solenoid valve. A defective valve that is stuck closed will prevent the three-way valve from shifting to
the heating position.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 199
Section 5 - Diagnostics

23 COOLING CYCLE FAULT

Alarm Type
Shutdown
Associated Alarm Codes
21 Cooling Cycle Check
Considerations
1. The unit may be heating when it should be cooling.
2. This is a Shutdown Alarm. It is typically preceded by Alarm Code 21 Cooling Cycle Check.
3. If restarts are disabled, Alarm Code 23 will be set as a Shutdown Alarm on the first occurrence of the alarm.
How Alarm is Set
If the unit or zone was operating with a heating temperature differential (∆T) while operating in cool mode and Alarm
Code 21 has previously been set, Alarm Code 23 is set as a Shutdown Alarm. If the unit is in a Pretrip Test or Restarts
are set DISABLED, Alarm Code 23 can be set without Alarm Code 21 having occurred.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually. If the Limited Alarm Restarts feature is active, Alarm Code 23 will be promoted to
Guarded Access clear.
If restarts are disabled, Alarm Code 23 will be set as a Shutdown Alarm on the first occurrence of the alarm.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check temperature differential by displaying the temperature differential, or by checking the difference between the
return and discharge air temperature sensors.
2. Check refrigerant level.
3. Attach gauges and evaluate unit refrigeration system performance.
4. Verify that sensor grades are set correctly.
5. Check for proper air flow. Short cycling, caused by a blocked air flow path, may generate this code.
6. Check the three-way valve. A defective valve that does not shift to the cooling position may cause this alarm.
7. Check the pilot solenoid valve. A defective valve that is stuck open will prevent the three-way valve from shifting to
the cooling position.

200 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

24 HEATING CYCLE FAULT

Alarm Type
Shutdown
Associated Alarm Codes
22 Heating Cycle Check
Considerations
1. The unit may be cooling when it should be heating.
2. This is a Shutdown Alarm. It is typically preceded by Alarm Code 22 Heating Cycle Check.
3. If restarts are disabled, Alarm Code 24 will be set as a Shutdown Alarm on the first occurrence of the alarm.
4. This alarm cannot be set in a unit operating in the frozen setpoint range. The alarm is set as a Check Alarm if the unit
is operating in the frozen setpoint range. Heat operation is locked out if an Alarm Code 24 is set in a unit that is
operating in the frozen setpoint range.
How Alarm is Set
If the unit or zone was operating with a cooling temperature differential (∆T) while operating in heat mode and Alarm
Code 22 has previously been set, Alarm Code 24 is set as a Shutdown Alarm. If the unit is in a Pretrip Test or Restarts
are set DISABLED, Alarm Code 24 can be set without Alarm Code 22 having occurred.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually. If the Limited Alarm Restarts feature is active, Alarm Code 24 will be promoted to
Guarded Access clear.
If restarts are disabled, Alarm Code 24 will be set as a Shutdown Alarm on the first occurrence of the alarm.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check temperature differential by displaying the temperature differential, or by checking the difference between the
return and discharge air temperature sensors.
2. Check refrigerant level.
3. Attach gauges and evaluate unit refrigeration system performance.
4. Verify that sensor grades are set correctly.
5. Check for proper air flow. Short cycling, caused by a blocked air flow path, may generate this code.
6. Check the three-way valve. A defective valve that does not shift to the heating position may cause this alarm.
7. Check the pilot solenoid valve. A defective valve that is stuck closed will prevent the three-way valve from shifting to
the heating position.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 201
Section 5 - Diagnostics

25 ALTERNATOR CHECK
Alarm Type
Log, Check, or Shutdown
Associated Alarm Codes
120 Check Alternator Excite Circuit
Considerations
The alternator excite voltage is controlled by the Alternator Excite Output. The Alternator Excite Output will supply
alternator excite voltage after the engine starts.
How Alarm is Set
1. If the engine is running, oil pressure is good, charge amps are less than -1.0 amps, and battery volts are less than
13.2 volts for two and a half minutes, the alarm is set as a Check Alarm in normal operation and during a Pretrip
Test, and as a Shutdown Alarm in Sleep Mode.
2. If the engine is running, oil pressure is good, and battery volts are greater than 16.0 volts, the alarm is set as a Check
Alarm. If the voltage stays above 16.0 volts for two and a half minutes, the alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
3. If the unit is running in electric, the alternator frequency is >100HZ, charge amps are less than -1.0 amps, and battery
volts are less than 13.2 volts for two and a half minutes, the alarm is set as a Check Alarm in normal operation and
during a Pretrip Test, and as a Shutdown Alarm in Sleep Mode.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check and adjust the alternator drive belt.
2. Start the engine or electric motor and check the battery voltage and amperage, using the Gauge Display in the
Maintenance Menu. The voltage should be greater than 13.2 volts but less than 16 volts. Current flow should be
greater than -1.0 amps.
3. Check the alternator connections.
4. Check the excitation voltage at the alternator. Excitation voltage should be equal to the battery voltage.
5. Check the operation of the Alternator Excite Output using Interface Board Test Mode. Verify the Alternator Excite
LED 18 illuminates. The Alternator Excite Output will supply alternator excite voltage as soon as the engine starts.
6. Check the sense voltage at the alternator. Sense voltage should be equal to the battery voltage.
7. Check Fuse F20 on the Base Controller.
8. Check for good ground and bare metal connection with ground wire.

202 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

26 CHECK REFRIGERATION CAPACITY

Alarm Type
Check
Associated Alarm Codes
32 Refrigeration Capacity Low
85 Forced Unit Operation
Considerations
If the unit is running in reduced capacity mode because of a Prevent Alarm and Alarm Code 26 is set, Alarm Code 85 is
also set. Alarm Code 85 indicates the unit was forced into a reduced capacity mode.
How Alarm is Set
If the unit or zone heating or cooling capacity is reduced far enough below normal levels to indicate a refrigeration
problem, Alarm Code 26 is set as a Check Alarm. The capacity loss is not significant enough to force the unit into
shutdown mode.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually or automatically after alarm conditions or some sensor temperatures have changed.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check temperature differential by displaying the temperature differential, or by checking the difference between the
control return and control discharge sensors.
2. Check refrigerant level.
3. Attach gauges and evaluate unit refrigeration system performance.
4. Verify that sensor grades are set correctly.
5. Check for proper air flow. Short cycling, caused by a blocked air flow path, may generate this code.
6. Check evaporator superheat.

28 PRETRIP OR SELF CHECK ABORT

Alarm Type
Shutdown
Associated Alarm Codes
The active associated alarm codes.
How Alarm is Set
If a Shutdown Alarm occurs during a Pretrip test, Alarm Code 28 is set and the unit is shut down. The alarm condition
that caused the shutdown is also set. Alarm Code 28 is also set if the unit is turned off while a Pretrip Test is in progress
or if the Pretrip Test is terminated by a communications command.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. This is a normal alarm any time the Pretrip Test is terminated before the completion of all tests.
2. Proceed with the corrective actions for any alarm codes that occurred.
3. After repairs, repeat the Pretrip Test. Refer to Section 4 for details.
4. If only Alarm Code 28 is set, the unit may have been turned off during a Pretrip Test, or the test may have been
interrupted by a communications request. Clear the alarm and repeat the Pretrip Test.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 203
Section 5 - Diagnostics

29 DEFROST DAMPER CIRCUIT CHECK

Alarm Type
Check or Shutdown
Associated Alarm Codes
137 Damper Gear Motor Heater
Component Description and Location
The defrost damper is located in the discharge air stream at the top of the unit. It is closed during defrost to prevent
warm air from being circulated over the load. The damper solenoid is mounted just outside the discharge plenum and
is connected to the damper door by means of mechanical linkage.
Circuit Description
The Damper Solenoid circuit is a two wire circuit. The Damper Solenoid is energized by Relay K4 and Fuse F6 on the
Base Controller. The 29 wire applies 12 Vdc to one side of the Damper Solenoid to energize the solenoid. The CHD wire
connects the other side of the solenoid to chassis ground at the ground plate near the unit battery. The solenoid is not
polarity sensitive, but the suppression diode must be installed with the bar end of the diode toward the 29 wire. The
wires are routed in the Main Harness.
Considerations
Power for this circuit requires the run relay to be energized.
How Alarm is Set
1. If during a Pretrip Test the zone is configured with a damper solenoid and current is not between 2 to 10 amps when
the solenoid is energized, Alarm Code 29 is set as a Check Alarm.
2. If during a Pretrip Test the zone is configured with a damper solenoid and current does not return to less than or
equal to 2.0 amps when de-energized, Alarm Code 29 is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
3. If during a Pretrip Test the unit is equipped with a damper gear motor and the motor travel timer exceeds its limit
and the motor stall current has not been exceeded, Alarm Code 29 is set as a Check Alarm.
4. If the unit is configured with a damper gear motor and a driver fault is detected, Alarm Code 29 is set as a Check
Alarm.
5. If the unit is configured with a damper gear motor and the motor current travel timer exceeds its limit and the motor
stall current has not been exceeded, Alarm Code 29 is set as a Check Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check the operation of the damper door circuit using Interface Board Test Mode.
2. Use the HMI Control Panel amps gauge to check the current drawn by the damper solenoid while operating the
damper door with Interface Board Test Mode. The current draw should be approximately 6 amps. (Damper Solenoid
Only)
3. Energize the damper solenoid using Interface Board Test Mode and check for battery voltage on the 29 circuit. If
voltage is present and no current was measured in the step above, replace the damper solenoid. (Damper Solenoid
Only)
4. If the unit is not configured correctly, Alarm Code 137 may occur instead of Alarm Code 29.

204 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

30 DEFROST DAMPER STUCK

Alarm Type
Check
Associated Alarm Codes
137 Damper Gear Motor Heater
Component Description and Location
The defrost damper door is located in the discharge air stream at the top of the unit. It is closed during defrost to
prevent warm air from being circulated over the load. The Damper Gear Motor is mounted just outside the discharge
plenum and is connected to the damper door by means of mechanical linkage.
Circuit Description
The damper motor circuit is a two wire circuit. The GM- (black) wire is connected to one side of the damper gear motor
and the GM+ (red) wire is connected to the other side of the gear motor. The motor wires are routed in the Main
Harness. The Damper Heater wires 8F-01 and CH-19 are also routed in the Main Harness.
Considerations
1. The damper gear motor requires a Base Controller equipped with damper motor provisions.
2. Power for the damper heater requires the run relay to be energized.
How Alarm is Set
This alarm is set as a Check alarm if the damper gear motor draws excessive current for a specified time. This indicates
that the damper is frozen, stalled, or stuck.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
N o t e : When the alarm is cleared, the damper motor will be indexed to verify correct operation. The damper door will
first be positioned fully open and then fully closed. If the operating mode requires the damper door to be closed,
it will remain closed. If the operating mode requires the damper door to be open, it will be repositioned open.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check the operation of the damper door gear motor circuit using Interface Board Test Mode. Verify LED 31 Damper
Door Open and LED 32 Damper Door Close illuminate as required.
2. The initial (breakaway) current draw occurs over a very short period of time and cannot be accurately measured.
Once the motor is running, the current draw should not exceed 0.8 amps.
3. Check for ice buildup between the damper blade and damper housing. Breaking the ice may cause excessive current
draw.
4. Check the door and linkage for binding, ice, or other restrictions to proper door operation.
5. If Alarm Code 30 is setting as a Log alarm during defrost and automatically clearing at end of defrost (for multiple/
consecutive defrosts) and SR-3 software is DA15 or earlier, update software to DA20 or later (includes software
improvement for damper control during defrost).

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 205
Section 5 - Diagnostics

31 CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH

Alarm Type
Log or Shutdown in Diesel Mode
Log in Electric Mode
Associated Alarm Codes
19 Low Engine Oil Pressure
66 Low Engine Oil Level
Component Description and Location
The oil pressure switch is located at the side of the oil filter housing.
Circuit Description
The low oil pressure switch circuit is a single wire circuit. The 20B wire connects the Base Controller 36 pin connector J7
pin 28 to the low oil pressure switch. The switch is not polarity sensitive and is closed on low oil pressure. This applies
chassis ground to the Base Controller. The switch wire is routed in the Main Harness.
Considerations
If this alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm in diesel mode operation, it becomes a Log Alarm if the unit is switched to
electric mode operation.
If the alarm exists in electric mode and the unit is switched to diesel, either condition #1 or #2 below apply.
How Alarm is Set
For SL-400e/SLX Series/SLXe Series/SLXi Series units with DA15 software and earlier:
1. If the unit is in diesel mode but not running (Engine RPM < 40, Alternator frequency < 50), the oil level is good, and
the oil pressure switch is not indicating low oil pressure, Alarm Code 31 is set as a Log Alarm.
2. If the unit is in diesel mode but not running (Engine RPM < 40, Alternator frequency < 50), the oil level is not good,
and the oil pressure switch is not indicating low oil pressure, Alarm Code 31 is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
3. If the unit is running in electric mode and the oil pressure switch is not indicating low oil pressure, Alarm Code 31 is
set as a Log Alarm.
For SL-400e/SLX Series/SLXe Series/SLXi Series units with DA20 software and later:
1. If the unit is in diesel mode, unit performing non-running pretrip test (Engine RPM < 40, Alternator frequency < 50),
the oil level is good, and the oil pressure switch is not indicating low oil pressure, Alarm Code 31 is set as a Log
Alarm.
2. If the unit is running in electric mode, unit performing pretrip test, and the oil pressure switch is not indicating low
oil pressure, Alarm Code 31 is set as a Log Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Display the oil pressure when the unit is not running, using the Gauge Menu. The oil pressure should show [LOW]. If
not, the switch may be stuck open or the switch circuit may be open.
2. Check the 20B-01 wires in the controller harness with an ohmmeter for continuity in accordance with Service
Procedure H04A.

206 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

32 REFRIGERATION CAPACITY LOW

Alarm Type
Shutdown
Associated Alarm Codes
26 Check Refrigeration Capacity
Considerations
Alarm Code 32 requires that Alarm Code 26 has been set first.
How Alarm is Set
If the unit heating or cooling capacity has degraded to the point where it has insufficient capacity to operate, Alarm
Code 32 is set as a Shutdown Alarm. The unit's cooling or heating performance is considerably impaired. Corrective
actions such as defrost have failed to improve performance.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check temperature differential by displaying the temperature differential, or by checking the difference between the
return and discharge air temperature sensors.
2. Check refrigerant level.
3. Attach gauges and evaluate unit refrigeration system performance.
4. Verify that sensor grades are set correctly.
5. Check for proper air flow. Short cycling, caused by a blocked air flow path, may generate this code.
6. Check the compressor and refrigeration system.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 207
Section 5 - Diagnostics

33 CHECK ENGINE RPM

Alarm Type
Check (Pretrip Only)
Associated Alarm Codes
07 Engine RPM Sensor
Considerations
Only checked during a Pretrip Test.
How Alarm is Set
1. If during a Pretrip Test the engine high speed RPM is not within the correct range for the unit configuration, Alarm
Code 33 is set as a Check Alarm.
2. If during a Pretrip Test the engine low speed RPM is not within the correct range for the unit configuration, Alarm
Code 33 is set as a Check Alarm.
Notes:
1. For engine RPM speeds, refer to Specifications.
2. If engine type is Yanmar 2.1, correct RPM range is within +10%/-10% of RPM setting.
3. If engine type is TK486VMGS5 (NRMM), correct RPM range is within +15%/-10% of RPM setting.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check and adjust high speed in accordance with the Maintenance Manual for the unit.
2. Check and adjust low speed in accordance with the Maintenance Manual for the unit.
3. Check for a binding solenoid or disconnected linkage.
4. Verify the selected High and Low speeds match the programmed unit configuration.
5. Check the High Capacity settings in the Guarded Access – Unit Configuration Menu. Improper high capacity settings
can cause this alarm.
N o t e : Use Service Test Mode to run the unit in high speed cool and low speed cool. Refer to Section 4 for details.

208 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

35 CHECK RUN RELAY CIRCUIT

Alarm Type
Shutdown
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
Circuit Description
The K1 Run Relay, LED 6, and associated fuse are located on the Base Controller. The 7K circuit is internal within the
Base Controller.
Power to the Run Relay circuit is supplied by fuse F25. Refer to the schematic diagram for the unit for complete circuit
details.
When the Run Relay is energized, 8 circuit power is supplied to the 7K circuit. This alarm code indicates that 7K circuit
digital input is not present when the Run Relay output is energized or that 7K power is present when the Run Relay is
de-energized.
How Alarm is Set
1. If the Run Relay is energized and the 7K input is low at the Base Controller, Alarm Code 35 is set as a Shutdown
Alarm.
2. If the Run Relay is not energized and the 7K input is high at the Base Controller for four seconds, Alarm Code 35 is
set as a Shutdown Alarm.
3. If current draw is not between -0.5 to 5 amps when the Run Relay is energized during a Pretrip Test Amps Check,
Alarm Code 35 is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
4. If current draw is not less than 0.5 amps when the Run Relay is de-energized during a Pretrip Test Amps Check,
Alarm Code 35 is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check the Run Relay circuit fuse on the Base Controller. Power to the Run Relay circuit is supplied by the 7.5 amp
fuse F25. Refer to the schematic diagram for the unit for complete circuit details.
2. Check to verify the K1 Run Relay LED 6 is energized.
3. Check the operation of the K1 Run Relay circuit using Interface Board Test Mode.
4. Check to verify the High Pressure Cutout Switch is closed (HPCO and PHPCO circuits).
5. Check for available voltage at HPCO and PHPCO wires. Battery volts should be present when the unit is turned on.
6. Review the ServiceWatch download. The associated alarm data will show the status of the 7K circuit when the alarm
was set.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 209
Section 5 - Diagnostics

36 ELECTRIC MOTOR FAILED TO RUN

Alarm Type
Log, Check, Prevent, or Shutdown in Electric Mode
Log in Diesel Mode
Associated Alarm Codes
84 Restart Null
122 Check Diesel/Electric Circuit
Considerations
This alarm becomes a Log Alarm if the unit is switched to diesel.
How Alarm is Set
If the alternator frequency is less than 100 Hz for five seconds when the electric motor should be running, Alarm Code
36 is set as a Prevent or Shutdown Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.

WARNING
Hazardous Voltage!
Units featuring Electric Standby utilize 460, 400, or 230 volt 3 phase AC electrical power any time the unit is
operating in Electric Mode. This voltage potential is also present any time the unit is connected to a source of
external standby power. Extreme care must be used when working on the unit, as these voltages are capable
of causing serious injury or death.

1. Check the motor, motor contactor, overload relay, and other associated electric standby motor circuitry. The internal
pull coil/hold coil circuits in the contactor may be defective, requiring replacement of contactor.
2. Check the voltages at the phase detect module. Battery voltage should be present on the ER wire and the 8 wire.
3. Check the standby power voltage at the phase detect module. Standby power should be available at L1, L2, and L3.
4. Check the voltage at the motor contactor coils. Battery voltage should be present on either the 7EC or 7EB wire
when the motor should be running.
5. Check for a reason that would prevent the motor from turning the alternator, such as slipping belts, clutch, etc.
6. Check the alternator as shown in Alarm Code 25.
7. Download and check the ServiceWatch data logger to determine the operating conditions present when the alarm
code was set. Use the running Service Test Mode Feature to duplicate the operating conditions. The alternator
frequency and engine RPM are logged in ServiceWatch and this information is viewable in technician mode. This
information can be used to confirm the RPM sensor reading and alternator frequency when the alarm was set.

210 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

37 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL

Alarm Type
Log, Check, or Shutdown in Diesel Mode
Log or Check in Electric Mode
Associated Alarm Codes
06 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
Circuit Description
Optical Sensor: The three wire optical sensor is supplied with +5 Vdc and common from the Base Controller. The sensor
is located in the coolant tank. The coolant level must be at or above the sensor location. If the sensor is not submerged
in coolant, this alarm will be generated after the condition exists for three minutes. This alarm will self-clear
automatically if the coolant level rises above the sensor location. The wiring is located in the Main Harness via the CLS-
01, CLN-01, CLP-01 circuits.
Magnetic Switch: The two wire magnetic switch is actuated by a float inside the coolant expansion tank. The switch is
closed if the coolant level is adequate. The two wire switch supplies +5 Vdc from the CLP wire to the CLS wire when the
coolant level is adequate. The circuit is opened if coolant level falls below an adequate level. This alarm will self-clear
automatically if the coolant level rises above the sensor location. The wiring is located in the Main Harness via the CLS
and CLP circuits.
Considerations
The Discharge Pressure Transducer, Suction Pressure Transducer, and Coolant Level switch each have a separate 5 Vdc
power supply. A short circuit condition in one transducer or switch circuit should not affect the other circuits.
How Alarm is Set
1. If the engine coolant level input indicates low coolant level for three minutes and the unit is in Electric Mode, Alarm
Code 37 will be set as a Log Alarm. If the engine coolant level input indicates low coolant level for three minutes and
the unit is in Diesel Mode, Alarm Code 37 will be set as a Check Alarm. If the unit is switched to Electric Mode, this
alarm remains a Check Alarm.
2. If Alarm Code 06 is set and the engine coolant level input indicates low coolant level for three minutes and the unit
is in Electric Mode, Alarm Code 37 will be set as a Check Alarm. If Alarm Code 06 is set and the engine coolant level
input indicates low coolant level for three minutes and the unit is in Diesel Mode, Alarm Code 37 will be set as a
Shutdown Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
The alarm self-clears if coolant level input indicates good coolant level for three seconds. It can also be manually
cleared.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.

CAUTION
Risk of Injury!
Exercise extreme care when checking hot coolant.

1. Check the engine coolant level. Verify coolant is above sensor when the coolant is cold.
2. Check the sensor connector for a pushed pin, loose pin crimp, or broken wire.
3. Check that +5 Vdc is present between the CLP-01 wire from the Base Controller and chassis ground.
4. Check the voltage between the CLS-01 wire and chassis ground. Voltage should be +5 Vdc when the sensor or
switch is submerged in coolant and less than +0.5 Vdc when the sensor or switch is not submerged.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 211
Section 5 - Diagnostics

38 ELECTRIC PHASE REVERSED

Alarm Type
Shutdown in Electric Mode
Log in Diesel Mode
Associated Alarm Codes
90 Electric Overload
How Alarm is Set
Two phases are reversed on three phase standby power between the motor contactor and the motor or the motor is
incorrectly wired. This will cause the compressor and condenser fan to rotate in the wrong direction. This is checked by
monitoring the evaporator temperature differential.
1. If the unit is running in Electric Mode in heat or cool for at least 15 minutes and then the temperature differential
between return air temperature and discharge air temperature is greater than 10°C (50°F) and is still greater than 7°C
(45°F) after five minutes, Alarm Code 38 is set as a Shutdown Alarm. The large temperature differential indicates the
motor is rotating in the wrong direction.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.

WARNING
Hazardous Voltage!
Units featuring Electric Standby utilize 460, 400, or 230 volt 3 phase AC electrical power any time the unit is
operating in Electric Mode. This voltage potential is also present any time the unit is connected to a source of
external standby power. Extreme care must be used when working on the unit, as these voltages are capable
of causing serious injury or death.

1. Check motor wiring to verify phase rotation is correct.

2. Confirm that the 7EC-01 wire is connected to the MCB motor contactor and the 7EB-01 wire is connected to the MCA
motor contactor.
3. Check the voltages at the phase detect module. Battery voltage should be present on the 7EA wire and the 8 wire.
4. Check the standby power voltage at the phase detect module. Standby power should be available at L1, L2, and L3.
5. Confirm that the phase wiring between contactor MCA and MCB is correct.

212 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

39 CHECK WATER VALVE CIRCUIT

N o t e : SB Units only.
Alarm Type
Check (Pretrip Only)
Associated Alarm Codes
28 Pretrip Abort
111 Unit Not Configured Correctly
How Alarm is Set
The water valve is not currently used. However, the associated output is checked during the Non-running Pretrip Test to
verify nothing has been mistakenly connected to it. The output is energized and then de-energized to verify that no
device is connected to the circuit and that the Base Controller is operating properly.
1. If current flow is detected during the output energized phase of the Non-running Pretrip Test, Alarm Code 39 will be
set as a Check Alarm and Alarm Code 111 will be set as a Log Alarm. The Non-running Pretrip Test will be allowed to
complete.
2. If current flow is detected during the output de-energized phase of the Non-running Pretrip Test, Alarm Code 39 will
be set as a Check Alarm, Alarm Code 111 be set as a Log Alarm and Alarm Code 28 will be set as a Shutdown Alarm.
The Pretrip Test will be aborted.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check unit configuration to confirm proper setting.
2. Check the Base Controller wiring to verify that there is no connection to connector J7 pin 9.
3. Check the Base Controller in accordance with Service Procedure A01A.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 213
Section 5 - Diagnostics

40 CHECK HIGH SPEED CIRCUIT

Alarm Type
Pretrip Only: Log, Check, or Shutdown
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
Component Description and Location
The high speed solenoid is located at the rear of the injector pump.
Circuit Description
The High Speed Solenoid circuit is a two wire circuit. The High Speed Solenoid is energized by Relay K3 and Fuse F6 on
the Base Controller. The 7D wire applies 12 Vdc to one side of the High Speed Solenoid to energize the solenoid. The
CHHS wire connects the other side of the solenoid to chassis ground at the ground plate near the unit battery. The
solenoid is not polarity sensitive, but the suppression diode must be installed with the bar end of the diode toward the
7D wire. The wires are routed in the main harness.
How Alarm is Set
1. If during a Pretrip Test the current is not between 2 to 8 amps when the solenoid is energized, Alarm Code 40 is set
as a Check Alarm.
2. If during a Pretrip Test the current does not return to less than 0.5 amps when de-energized, Alarm Code 40 is set as
a Shutdown Alarm. If current flow is detected during the output de-energized phase of the Non-running Pretrip Test,
Alarm Code 40 is set as a Check Alarm and Alarm Code 28 will be set as a Shutdown Alarm. The Pretrip Test will be
aborted.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check the operation of the high speed circuit, using Interface Board Test Mode. Verify the High Speed Relay LED 5
illuminates. If LED 5 does not illuminate, the Base Controller may be defective. Check the Base Controller in
accordance with Service Procedure A01A.
2. Use the HMI control panel amps gauge to check the current drawn by the high speed solenoid, while operating the
high speed solenoid with Interface Board Test Mode. The current draw should be approximately 4.6 amps. If the
current is greater than 8 amps, check the circuit for a shorted conductor or speed solenoid. If the current draw is
zero, check Base Controller fuse F6. Refer to the unit wiring diagrams for wire numbers, locations, and additional
details.
3. Energize the high speed solenoid using Interface Board Test Mode, and check for battery voltage on the 7D-01
circuit. If voltage is present at the solenoid terminals and no current was measured in the step above, replace the
high speed solenoid. If voltage is not present at the solenoid terminals, check the high speed circuit conductors for
continuity. Refer to the unit wiring diagrams for wire numbers, locations, and additional details.

214 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

41 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

Alarm Type
Check
Associated Alarm Codes
42 Unit Forced to Low Speed
43 Unit Forced to Low Speed Modulation
Considerations
Alarm Code 41 indicates the engine coolant temperature is above expected operating limits, but is not high enough to
force a shutdown condition.
How Alarm is Set
If the engine coolant temperature rises above 98°C (210°F) and remains above 96°C (205°F) for 60 seconds, Alarm Code
41 is set as a Check Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check the engine coolant temperature by pressing the Gauge Key.

CAUTION
Risk of Injury!
Exercise extreme care when checking hot coolant.

2. Check the engine coolant level.

3. Check the water pump drive belt.
4. Check the radiator for airflow or coolant flow blockage.
5. Download and check the ServiceWatch data logger information to determine the operating conditions that were
present when the alarm code was set. Use running Service Test Mode to duplicate the operating conditions.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 215
Section 5 - Diagnostics

42 UNIT FORCED TO LOW SPEED

Alarm Type
Log
Associated Alarm Codes
10 High Discharge Pressure
18 High Engine Coolant Temperature
41 Check Engine Coolant Temperature
43 Unit Forced to Low Speed Modulation
How Alarm is Set
If the unit has been forced to low speed operation as a result of high engine coolant temperature (98°C or 210°F) or high
discharge pressure, Alarm Code 42 will be set as a Log Alarm. Alarm Code 10, 18, or 41 will also be set.
How Alarm is Cleared
Alarm will self-clear if unit returns to normal operation.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Troubleshoot as shown for the associated alarm code.
2. Download and check the ServiceWatch data logger information to determine the operating conditions that were
present when the alarm code was set. Use running Service Test Mode to duplicate the operating conditions.

43 UNIT FORCED TO LOW SPEED MODULATION

Alarm Type
Log
Associated Alarm Codes
10 High Discharge Pressure
18 High Engine Coolant Temperature
41 Check Engine Coolant Temperature
42 Unit Forced to Low Speed
Considerations
Applies to all ETV equipped units.
How Alarm is Set
Unit has been forced to low speed, but the engine coolant temperature is still above acceptable limits. The ETV will be
closed to reduce the engine load.
How Alarm is Cleared
Alarm will self-clear if unit returns to normal operation.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Troubleshoot as shown for the associated alarm code.
2. Download and inspect the ServiceWatch data logger information to determine the operating conditions that were
present when the alarm code was set. Use running Service Test Mode to duplicate the operating conditions.

216 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

44 CHECK FUEL SYSTEM

Alarm Type
Shutdown
Associated Alarm Codes
96 Low Fuel Level
98 Check Fuel Level Sensor
Component Description and Location
Either float style or solid state style fuel level sensor must be installed and selected from Guarded Access > Unit
Configuration > Fuel Sensor Type.
Low Fuel Shutdown must be enabled from Guarded Access > Unit Configuration > Low Fuel Shutdown.
Considerations
Alarm Code 44 Check Fuel System is not available if Guarded Access > Programmable Features > Rail Option is set
ENABLED.
How Alarm is Set
If a fuel level sensor is enabled and fuel level falls to less than 7% (solid state) or 10% (float) of tank capacity for five
minutes, Alarm Code 44 is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
If this alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm, manually clearing the alarm will demote it to a Check Alarm.
This alarm is cleared automatically when the fuel level is increased to more than 15% (solid state) or 20% (float) of tank
capacity.
This alarm is cleared automatically if Alarm Code 98 is set.
This alarm is cleared automatically if the unit is switched to Electric Mode operation.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
I m p o r t a n t : Do not open the fuel system unless required.
1. Check fuel tank level and fill as required.
2. Check fuel and/or fuel tank for contamination.
3. Check the fuel filter/water separator.
4. Check fuel level sensor for proper operation.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 217
Section 5 - Diagnostics

45 CHECK HOT GAS BYPASS CIRCUIT

Alarm Type
Check or Shutdown
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
Component Description and Location
The hot gas bypass solenoid is located in the condenser section next to the receiver tank. It is a normally closed valve.
Circuit Description
The hot gas bypass solenoid circuit is a two wire circuit. The HG-01 wire connects the Base Controller Connector J7 Pin
5 to one side of the hot gas bypass solenoid. The CHHG wire connects the other side of the solenoid to chassis ground
at the ground plate near the unit battery. The solenoid is not polarity sensitive. The switch wires are routed in the main
harness. A Smart FET on the Base Controller supplies power to the HG-01 circuit.
Considerations
1. During a non-running Pretrip, the current draw is determined by the Base Controller shunt reading.
2. During normal operation, the current draw is determined by the Smart FET feedback to the Base Controller.
3. If an alarm code is set during normal operation, the ServiceWatch Data Logger will list the Alarm Code, FLTCT (Fault
Current), Battery Volts, and the Shunt Current. The FLTCT will be the high or low current draw as determined by the
Smart FET feedback that caused the Alarm Code to set.
4. If the alarm code relates to the hot gas bypass valve in the download, there will be no zone information. If the alarm
code relates to the hot gas solenoid, there will be zone information. Single temperature units will show Zone 1.
How Alarm is Set
1. If during normal operation the current is greater than 3 amps or less than 0.5 amps at specified intervals after the
solenoid is energized, Alarm Code 45 is set as a Check Alarm and the output is turned off. If the output circuit is
shorted, it will be turned off immediately to protect the circuit and the alarm code will be set. Hot gas valve
operation is not allowed until Alarm Code 45 is cleared. The unit will continue to run but with reduced performance
until the condition is corrected and the alarm is cleared. If this condition occurs when the unit is in Evacuation Mode,
Alarm Code 45 will be set as a Shutdown Alarm.
2. If during normal operation the current does not return to less than 0.5 amps at a specified interval after the solenoid
is de-energized, Alarm Code 45 is set as a Check Alarm. Hot gas valve operation is not allowed until Alarm Code 45
is cleared. The unit will continue to run but with reduced performance until the condition is corrected and the alarm
is cleared.
3. If during a Pretrip Test the current is not between 0.5 to 3 amps when the solenoid is energized, Alarm Code 45 is set
as a Check Alarm.
4. If during a Pretrip Test the current does not return to less than 0.5 amps when de-energized, Alarm Code 45 is set as
a Shutdown Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. If FLTCT is greater than 3.0 amps, the circuit has excessive current flow. Check for a shorted circuit or solenoid coil.
2. If FLTCT is less than 0.5 amps, the circuit has low current flow. Check for high resistance or an open in the circuit or
solenoid coil.
Indicator LED Diagnosis
1. Clear the alarm to reset the Smart FET. Check the operation of the Hot Gas Solenoid circuit using Interface Board
Test Mode. Verify the Base Controller Hot Gas Solenoid circuit LED illuminates. For Base Controller LED
identification, refer to the LED decal on the control box door. If the Base Controller Hot Gas Solenoid circuit LED
illuminates, proceed to Step 2. If the Base Controller Hot Gas Solenoid circuit LED does not illuminate, proceed to
Step 3.

218 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

2. If the Base Controller Hot Gas Solenoid circuit LED illuminates and Alarm Code 45 is set, the circuit has high
resistance or is open. Use the HMI Control Panel amps gauge to check the current drawn by the Hot Gas Solenoid,
while operating the solenoid with Interface Board Test Mode. The current draw should be approximately 1.5 amps.
If the current is not within limits, check for high resistance or open in the circuit or solenoid coil as shown in Step 3.
Verify that all circuit connectors are secure.
3. If the Base Controller Hot Gas Solenoid circuit LED does not illuminate and Alarm Code 45 is set, check for a shorted
circuit or solenoid coil. Disconnect the 36 pin Connector J7 and check the Hot Gas Solenoid circuit at Pin 5 with an
accurate ohmmeter for a short circuit, open circuit, shorts to ground, or loose connection. The solenoid coil
resistance should be approximately 8.3 ohms.

46 CHECK AIR FLOW

Alarm Type
Check
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
Component Description and Location
The Blocked Air Chute Detect uses the Spare 1 sensor mounted in the discharge air chute.
Programmable Features
Refer to “Blocked Air Chute Detect” in Section 3 for details and setup.
How Alarm is Set
Alarm is set if the difference between the control discharge air temperature and a chute mounted sensor (Spare 1)
exceeds the programmed limits as set in Guarded Access. Refer to “Blocked Air Chute Detect” in Section 3 for details.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check the discharge air chute for restricted air flow.
2. Check the spare sensor to verify that it is positioned in the chute air flow at the rear of the trailer and is not
obstructed.
3. Check operation of the spare sensor.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 219
Section 5 - Diagnostics

48 CHECK BELTS OR CLUTCH

Alarm Type
Shutdown
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
Considerations
For DA15 software and earlier, applies to units equipped with electric standby only. For DA20 software and later,
applies to all SLX/SLXi trailer units.
How Alarm is Set
The ratio between the engine RPM and alternator frequency is monitored. If these values are not in the proper ratio, it is
an indication that drive belt slippage is occurring and Alarm Code 48 is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check belts and clutch for condition, operation, and slippage.
2. Check for a stuck compressor.
3. Check alternator operation.
4. Check "W" circuit including resistor for continuity. Monitor with Wintrac or a frequency meter.
5. Check unit configuration if this alarm occurs on a Model 30 (diesel only) unit.
6. Verify the unit model is correctly configured. This alarm is dependant on the alternator drive pulley sizes used in the
unit. The pulley sizes can vary between unit models.
7. Verify that the correct pulley is installed on the alternator. This code can occur if the alternator is replaced with an
alternator with the wrong size pulley installed.
8. Download and check the ServiceWatch data logger to determine the operating conditions present when the alarm
code was set. Use the running Service Test Mode Feature to duplicate the operating conditions. The alternator
frequency and engine RPM are logged in ServiceWatch and this information is viewable in technician mode. This
information can be used to confirm the RPM sensor reading and alternator frequency when the alarm was set.

50 RESET CLOCK
Alarm Type
Log
How Alarm is Set
This alarm indicates that power to the HMI control panel has been interrupted for an extended period and the hold
capacitor for the clock/calendar has discharged. As a result, the clock/calendar is no longer accurate. Turning the unit on
will recharge the hold capacitor in the HMI control panel.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually and automatically when time/date information is updated.
Diagnostic Procedure
1. Turn the unit on to recharge the hold capacitor in the Truck Premium Display (Truck) or HMI Control Panel (Trailer).
2. Reset the clock to the customer’s time zone.

220 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

52 CHECK HEAT CIRCUIT

Alarm Type
Check or Shutdown
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
Component Description and Location
The pilot solenoid is located in the condenser section adjacent to the receiver tank.
Circuit Description
The pilot solenoid circuit is a two wire circuit. The 26-01 wire connects the Base Controller connector J7 pin 3 to one
side of the pilot solenoid. The CHPS wire connects the other side of the solenoid to chassis ground at the ground plate
near the unit battery. The solenoid is not polarity sensitive. The switch wires are routed in the main harness. A Smart
FET on the Base Controller supplies power to the 26-01 circuit.
Considerations
1. During a non-running Pretrip, the current draw is determined by the Base Controller shunt reading.
2. During normal operation, the current draw is determined by the Smart FET feedback to the Base Controller.
3. If an alarm code is set during normal operation, the ServiceWatch Data Logger will list the Alarm Code, FLTCT (Fault
Current), Battery Volts, and the Shunt Current. The FLTCT will be the high or low current draw as determined by the
Smart FET feedback that caused the Alarm Code to set.
How Alarm is Set
1. If during normal operation the current is greater than 3 amps or less than 0.5 amps at specified intervals after the
solenoid is energized, Alarm Code 52 is set as a Check Alarm and the output is turned off. If the output circuit is
shorted, it will be turned off immediately to protect the circuit and the alarm code will be set. Hot gas valve
operation is not allowed until Alarm Code 52 is cleared. The unit will continue to run but with reduced performance
until the condition is corrected and the alarm is cleared. If this condition occurs when the unit is in Evacuation Mode,
Alarm Code 52 will be set as a Shutdown Alarm.
2. If during normal operation the current does not return to less than 0.5 amps at a specified interval after the solenoid
is de-energized, Alarm Code 52 is set as a Check Alarm. Hot gas valve operation is not allowed until Alarm Code 52
is cleared. The unit will continue to run but with reduced performance until the condition is corrected and the alarm
is cleared.
3. If during a Pretrip Test the current is not between 0.5 to 3 amps when the solenoid is energized, Alarm Code 52 is set
as a Check Alarm.
4. If during a Pretrip Test the current does not return to less than 0.5 amps when de-energized, Alarm Code 52 is set as
a Shutdown Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. If FLTCT is greater than 3.0 amps the circuit has excessive current flow. Check for a shorted circuit or solenoid coil.
2. If FLTCT is less than 0.5 amps the circuit has low current flow. Check for high resistance or an open in the circuit or
solenoid coil.
Indicator LED Diagnosis
1. Clear the alarm to reset the Smart FET. Check the operation of the Pilot Solenoid circuit using Interface Board Test
Mode. Verify the Base Controller Pilot Solenoid circuit LED illuminates. For Base Controller LED identification, refer
to the LED decal on the control box door. If the Base Controller Pilot Solenoid circuit LED illuminates, go to Step 2. If
the Base Controller Pilot Solenoid circuit LED does not illuminate, go to Step 3.
2. If the Base Controller Pilot Solenoid circuit LED illuminates and Alarm Code 52 is set, the circuit has high resistance
or is open. Use the HMI Control Panel amps gauge to check the current drawn by the Pilot Solenoid, while operating
the solenoid with Interface Board Test Mode. The current draw should be approximately 1.1 amps. If the current is

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 221
Section 5 - Diagnostics

not within limits, check for high resistance or open in the circuit or solenoid coil as shown in Step 3. Verify that all
circuit connectors are secure.
3. If the Base Controller Pilot Solenoid circuit LED does not illuminate and Alarm Code 52 is set, check for a shorted
circuit or solenoid coil. Disconnect the 36 pin Connector J7 and check the Pilot Solenoid circuit at Pin 3 with an
accurate ohmmeter for a short circuit, open circuit, shorts to ground, or loose connection. The solenoid coil
resistance should be approximately 9.6 ohms.
4. If no problems are found in Steps 1-3 and the output LED does not illuminate, check the Base Controller in
accordance with Service Procedure A01A.

54 TEST MODE TIMEOUT

Alarm Type
Shutdown
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
Considerations
The HMI will display the remaining test time. The timer can be reset by pressing the HMI test “Select” key while the
respective Service Test Mode or Interface Board Test Mode test is active.
How Alarm is Set
1. If the unit has been in the same Service Test Mode function for 15 minutes, Alarm Code 54 is set as a Shutdown
Alarm.
2. If the unit has been in the same Interface Board Test Mode function for 15 minutes, Alarm Code 54 is set as a
Shutdown Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Clear the alarm and re-enter the test mode as necessary to complete the diagnosis or repair.

222 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

61 LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE

Alarm Type
Log or Shutdown
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
Considerations
If Alarm Code 61 is set as a Shutdown Alarm, no subsequent alarm codes will be set with the exception of Alarm Code
28.
This alarm code can be set by either low voltage or excessive voltage conditions.
How Alarm is Set
1. If the unit is running, and battery voltage is less than 11.2 volts for three minutes, Alarm Code 61 is set as a
Shutdown Alarm.
2. If during the preheat cycle prior to an engine start the battery voltage is below 10.5 volts during an engine start,
Alarm Code 61 is set as a Log Alarm.
N o t e : The preheat output will have been de-energized prior to the alarm being set.
3. If during a Pretrip Test the preheat amps check is not within limits, and battery voltage is less than 11.2 volts, Alarm
Code 61 is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
4. If during a Pretrip Test all outputs are de-energized, and battery voltage is not within limits, Alarm Code 61 is set as
a Shutdown Alarm.
5. If the unit is in Evacuation Mode, and battery voltage is greater than 17.0 volts for three minutes, Alarm Code 61 is
set as a Shutdown Alarm.
6. If three power-up and start attempts are made without a successful start, Alarm Code 61 is set as a Shutdown
Alarm. This indicates that the battery voltage dropped low enough during the start sequence that the Base
Controller powered down. This can also occur if the unit is turned on and off three times without allowing the unit to
start.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check for discharged battery and charge as required.
2. Check the battery terminals for tightness and signs of corrosion.
3. Check battery cable connections between Base Controller and ground plate.
4. Check Base Controller 2, 2A, and CH connections for tightness and signs of corrosion.
5. Load test the battery, replace if necessary.
6. Check the unit ground plate connections for tightness and signs of corrosion.
7. With the engine running, check the battery voltage and charge rate using the Gauge Menu.
8. Check the operation of the alternator. Verify the belt is properly adjusted.
9. Review the ServiceWatch downloads to check for three start attempts and the reason for the start attempts.
10. Review the ServiceWatch data logger to determine the operating conditions present when the alarm code was set.
The battery voltage, charge current, and alternator frequency are logged in ServiceWatch and this information is
viewable in technician mode. This information can be used to determine which condition caused the alarm to be set.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 223
Section 5 - Diagnostics

62 AMMETER OUT OF CALIBRATION

Alarm Type
Check or Shutdown (Pretrip Only)
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
Considerations
The current shunt on the Base Controller is a surface mount device and is conformal coated for protection. Field
resistance measurement of this circuit cannot be made.
How Alarm is Set
1. Shunt calibration check in Pretrip Test shows shunt circuit is out of calibration with all outputs de-energized.
2. Controller shunt current is out of range high (greater than 10 amps).
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually or automatically.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check the ServiceWatch download for abnormal ammeter readings or all dashes [ - - - - ].
2. Check the current draw with the unit off and compare it to the reading of a clamp-on ammeter.
3. Check the Base Controller assembly in accordance with Service Procedure A01A.

224 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

63 ENGINE STOPPED
Alarm Type
Prevent or Shutdown in Diesel Mode
Log in Electric Mode
Associated Alarm Codes
17 Engine Failed To Crank
20 Engine Failed To Start
84 Restart Null
Considerations
Becomes a Log Alarm if unit is switched to Electric Mode.
If the Restart Unit After Shutdown feature is set for Continuous, the Shutdown Alarm condition is disabled and the
interval between restart attempts is increased from 15 minutes to 1 hour.
N o t e : This feature is recommended only for rail application where the equipment is operated unattended for long
periods of time. Refer to the Restart Unit After Shutdown feature in Section 3 for additional information.
How Alarm is Set
1. If the unit was running and still should be but has stopped, Alarm Code 63 is set as a Prevent Alarm. This is
determined based on multiple factors, and can be caused by an intermittent condition. Three restart attempts will be
made to allow continued operation at temporarily reduced performance. The time interval between restart attempts
is 15 minutes. If at the end of the three attempts full performance is not possible, the alarm is set as a Shutdown
Alarm. If the Restart Unit After Shutdown feature is set for Continuous, the Shutdown Alarm condition is disabled. If
the Restart Unit After Shutdown feature is set for Disabled, the alarm will be set as a Shutdown Alarm on the first
occurrence.
2. If Alarm Code 17 or Alarm Code 20 occurs after Alarm Code 63 is cleared, Alarm Code 63 will be set as a Shutdown
Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually or automatically.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check for other alarm codes and proceed as indicated for each code.
2. Perform a Pretrip Test to determine cause for shutdown.
3. Verify the fuel level and check the fuel pump for proper operation.
4. Check the air cleaner and intake hose for obstructions.
5. Check the unit fuses.
6. Check the RPM sensor for proper operation.
7. Check Run Relay and fuel solenoid components and circuits.
8. Check for low battery voltage.
9. Verify all ground connections on the master ground plate are secure.
10. Check for a seized compressor or engine.
11. Review the ServiceWatch data logger information to determine the operating conditions that were present when the
alarm code was set. Use the running Service Test Mode feature to duplicate the operating conditions as required.
Unit operating data is logged in ServiceWatch and the data is viewable in technician mode.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 225
Section 5 - Diagnostics

64 PRETRIP REMINDER
Alarm Type
Log
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
Considerations
The alarm is cleared when Pretrip Test is entered. If the Pretrip Test is not successful, the alarm will not be reset. If the
Pretrip Test is not successful, diagnose and correct the fault.
Programmable Features
This feature must be programmed. Refer to Hourmeters in Section 3 for details.
How Alarm is Set
If a programmable hourmeter is set as a Pretrip Reminder and the hourmeter time expires, Alarm Code 64 is set as a
Log Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
The alarm self-clears when a Pretrip Test is entered.
Diagnostic Procedure
1. Perform a Pretrip Test to confirm unit operation.
2. Reset the Pretrip Reminder hourmeter after a Pretrip Test is entered.

226 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

65 ABNORMAL TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL

Alarm Type
Check
Associated Alarm Codes
13 Sensor Calibration Check
Considerations
This alarm applies to single temperature units with redundant sensors disabled.
Sensor alarms are classified as either Soft Failures or Hard Failures.
A Soft Failure is defined as erratic operation or sensor drift that exceeds acceptable tolerances. If this occurs, the alarm
code for the suspect sensor will be set along with Alarm Code 13. This indicates a potential problem that may not be
immediately apparent, and also shows that a hard failure as defined below did not occur. Alarm Code 13 is always set if
a soft failure occurs.
N o t e : Alarm Code 13 can be cleared by the driver, while sensor Alarm Codes 03, 04, 203, and 204 can only be cleared
from the Guarded Access Menu. If the unit has only Alarm Code 03, 04, 203, or 204 set when inspected, that alarm
code may have been originally set with Alarm Code 13. Checking the ServiceWatch data logger download will
indicate the conditions that existed when the failure occurred.
A Hard Failure is defined by an out of range sensor reading, typically caused by an open or shorted sensor, connector,
or harness conductor. The sensor display will show dashes if a hard failure occurs. If this occurs, only the alarm code
for that sensor will be set (such as Alarm Code 03 if the control return air sensor failed). Alarm Code 13 will not be set if
a hard failure occurs.
N o t e : The controller may not be currently showing dashes for the sensor reading, but the alarm will be present when
the unit is inspected. If a sensor alarm code is set, a failure did occur at some point. Checking the ServiceWatch
data logger download will indicate when the hard failure occurred.
How Alarm is Set
Alarm Code 65 is set if there is an abnormally large cooling or heating temperature differential and the offending sensor
cannot be determined. Alarm Code 13 will also be set.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
Determine which sensor Alarm Codes (02, 03, 04, 05, 203, or 204) are present along with Alarm Code 13. Proceed as
shown for that Alarm Code.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 227
Section 5 - Diagnostics

66 LOW ENGINE OIL LEVEL

Alarm Type
Shutdown in Diesel Mode
Log in Electric Mode
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
Component Description and Location
The switch is located on the top of the engine oil pan. The switch is open with full oil level and closed with low oil level.
Circuit Description
The wiring is located in the main harness via the OLS and CHOL circuits.
Considerations
A shutdown level Alarm Code 66 becomes a Log Alarm if the unit is switched from Diesel Mode to Electric Mode. A log
level Alarm Code 66 becomes a Shutdown Alarm if the unit is switched from Electric to Diesel Mode.
How Alarm is Set
1. If the engine oil level switch indicates low engine oil for three minutes, Alarm Code 66 is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
2. If Alarm Code 66 is manually cleared and the engine oil level is still low, Alarm Code 66 is reset as a Shutdown
Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check and adjust the engine oil level as required.
2. Check the switch with an ohmmeter. It should be open when the oil level is satisfactory.
3. Check the harness wires OLS-01 and CHOL with an ohmmeter for continuity in accordance with Service Procedure
H04A.

228 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

67 CHECK LIQUID LINE SOLENOID

Alarm Type
Check (Pretrip Only)
Associated Alarm Codes
28 Pretrip Abort
111 Unit Not Configured Correctly
How Alarm is Set
The liquid line solenoid is not used on single temperature applications. However, the associated output is checked
during the Non-running Pretrip Test to be certain nothing has been mistakenly connected to it. The output is energized
and then de-energized to verify that no device is connected to the circuit and that the Base Controller is operating
properly.
1. If current flow is detected during the output energized phase of the Non-running Pretrip Test, Alarm Code 67 will be
set as a Check Alarm and Alarm Code 111 will be set as a Log Alarm. The Non-running Pretrip Test will be allowed to
complete.
2. If current flow is detected during the output de-energized phase of the Non-running Pretrip Test, Alarm Code 67 will
be set as a Check Alarm, Alarm Code 111 will be set as a Log Alarm, and Alarm Code 28 will be set as a Shutdown
Alarm. The Pretrip Test will be aborted.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check unit configuration to confirm proper setting.
2. Check the Base Controller wiring to verify there is no connection to connector J7 pin 4.
3. Check the Base Controller in accordance with Service Procedure A01A.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 229
Section 5 - Diagnostics

68 INTERNAL CONTROLLER FAULT

Alarm Type
Log, Check, or Shutdown
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
How Alarm is Set
1. If a shutdown level internal fault occurs in the Base Controller, Alarm Code 68 is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
2. If a check level internal fault occurs in the Base Controller, Alarm Code 68 is set as a Check Alarm.
3. If a log level internal fault occurs in the Base Controller, Alarm Code 68 is set as a Log Alarm.
Diagnostic Procedure
1. Replace the Base Controller.
2. Return the failed Base Controller for failure analysis.

70 HOURMETER FAILURE
Alarm Type
Log
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
How Alarm is Set
If one or more hourmeters exceeds 499,999 hours, Alarm Code 70 is set as a Log Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
1. If the hourmeter readings are normal, perform a Cold Start in accordance with Service Procedure A07A.
I m p o r t a n t : Any time a Cold Start is performed, the Base Controller must be set up using Service Procedure A04A.
Failure to do so may result in the unit not operating to customer specifications.
2. If the code can now be cleared, proceed with Base Controller setup in accordance with Service Procedure A04A.

230 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

74 CONTROLLER RESET TO DEFAULTS

Alarm Type
Check
How Alarm is Set
If all the Base Controller programmable features have been reset to factory defaults, Alarm Code 74 is set as a Check
Alarm. Alarm Code 74 is typically set by a cold start.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm can only be cleared from the Guarded Access Menu.
Diagnostic Procedure
1. Verify the Base Controller cold start jumper J101/J102 is in the correct (up) position. It should match the white mark
on the Base Controller, at the side of the jumper. If the jumper is in the wrong position, a cold start will occur every
time the unit is turned on.
2. Complete the Base Controller setup in accordance with Service Procedure A04A.
I m p o r t a n t : Any time Alarm Code 74 occurs, the Base Controller must be set up in accordance with Service
Procedure A04A. Failure to do so may result in the unit not operating to customer specifications.
N o t e : If unit configuration is switched from Trailer to Truck, this alarm code could be set.
a. Alarm Code 74 will be cleared during the Base Controller setup.

79 INTERNAL DATA LOGGER OVERFLOW

Alarm Type
Log
How Alarm is Set
If too many data logger events occurred at once or if too many data logger events occurred during a download, Alarm
Code 79 is set as a Log Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
No corrective action is possible. This serves only as an indication that an event occurred that was not recorded by the
data logger.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 231
Section 5 - Diagnostics

84 RESTART NULL
Alarm Type
Prevent
Associated Alarm Codes
10 High Discharge Pressure
17 Engine Failed to Crank
18 High Engine Coolant Temperature
20 Engine Failed to Start
21 Cooling Cycle Check
22 Heating Cycle Check
36 Electric Motor Failed to Run
42 Unit Forced To Low Speed
63 Engine Stopped
90 Electric Overload
91 Check Electric Ready Input
Considerations
1. This alarm is a secondary alarm that is set along with the associated primary alarm.
2. The alarm indicates that the unit is in a temporary (“prevent” or “restart null”) shutdown. The alarm clears
automatically if the condition does not re-occur.
3. Many of these actions include a “waiting period” (to allow the engine to cool down, a high pressure condition to
subside or the like). The alarm code that caused the condition and Alarm Code 84 might be present to indicate that
the Base Controller is taking a corrective action and that a restart will be attempted when conditions permit.
4. If the corrective action is successful, the original alarm code and Alarm Code 84 are cleared automatically. If the
original alarm condition continues to occur, and the corrective actions taken by the Base Controller are not
successful, the original alarm code remains. Alarm Code 84 is automatically cleared and the unit shuts down.
5. This alarm occurs if unit operation is not allowed as a result of the associated prevent alarm. For example, if a high
discharge pressure condition shuts the unit down, a waiting period occurs to allow system pressures to equalize. A
restart occurs when conditions permit.
6. If restarts are disabled, Alarm Code 84 is also disabled.
7. Most Prevent Alarms become Shutdown Alarms if three occurrences of the alarm occur within a set time period.
8. Alarm Codes 10, 18, and 63 are not promoted to shutdown level if the Continuous Restarts feature is enabled.
9. Alarm Codes 32 and 63 are promoted to guarded access clearable Shutdown Alarms if the Limited Restarts Feature
is enabled and the Shutdown Alarm occurs three times with a 12 hour time period.
10. Some Prevent Alarms will result in modified unit operation after the alarm is self cleared. For example, Alarm Code
10 will result in Alarm Code 42 being set and the unit being forced to low speed for a one hour period.
11. If the unit is turned off while Alarm Code 84 is present, the primary alarm becomes a Shutdown Alarm when the unit
is turned back on.
How Alarm is Set
This alarm is set with the associated alarm that caused the condition.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm clears automatically if the condition is resolved.
Diagnostic Procedure
Check for associated alarms and repair as required.

232 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

85 FORCED UNIT OPERATION

Alarm Type
Check
Associated Alarm Codes
26 Check Refrigeration Capacity
Considerations
1. This alarm is a secondary alarm that is set along with the associated primary alarm.
2. This alarm indicates that the unit was forced to a different operating mode than would normally be implemented
under the existing conditions. This can occur as result of high discharge pressure. It indicates that normal unit
operation has been over-ridden (i.e., the discharge pressure setpoint has been reduced). The alarm is only set if a
low cooling capacity condition occurs while the unit is in reduced capacity mode.
How Alarm is Set
This alarm is set only if an alert low refrigeration capacity alarm occurs while the unit is operating in the reduced
capacity state.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm clears automatically if the condition is resolved.
Diagnostic Procedure
Check for associated alarms and repair as required.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 233
Section 5 - Diagnostics

86 CHECK DISCHARGE PRESSURE SENSOR

Alarm Type
Check
Associated Alarm Codes
10 High Discharge Pressure
Circuit Description
The three wire discharge pressure sensor is supplied with +5 Vdc and ground from the Base Controller. The wiring is
located in the Sensor Harness via the DPP, DPN, and DPI circuits.
Considerations
The Discharge Pressure Transducer, Suction Pressure Transducer and Coolant Level switch each have a separate 5 Vdc
power supply. A short circuit condition in one transducer or switch circuit should not affect the other circuits.
The maximum discharge pressure that can be displayed is 500 psig. If the sensed pressure is greater than 500 psig, the
HMI Control Panel will display [ - - - - ] instead of the discharge pressure.
The minimum discharge pressure that can be sensed is -10 psig. If the sensed pressure is less than -10 psig, the HMI
Control Panel will display [ - - - - ] instead of the discharge pressure. The control system cannot determine if the
minimum sensed pressure is the result of an electrical short or very low system pressure.
The Discharge Pressure Transducer will have a “500” on the body of the part. The Suction Pressure Transducer will
have a “200” on the body of the part. They are not interchangeable.
How Alarm is Set
1. If the unit is not running and the discharge pressure transducer reading is greater than 500 psig for 10 seconds,
Alarm Code 86 is set as a Check Alarm. If the unit is in a Pretrip Test, this alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
2. If the unit is running, the ambient temperature is greater than -12°C (10°F), and the discharge pressure transducer
reading is less than +15 psig for 10 seconds, Alarm Code 86 is set as a Check Alarm. If the unit is in a Pretrip Test,
this alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
3. If Alarm Code 10 is cleared and the discharge pressure transducer reading is greater than or equal to 425 psig but
less than 500 psig, Alarm Code 86 is set as a Check Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually. Clearing the code will cause the unit to shut down and restart to check the transducer
for proper operation by performing an ETV check.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check the discharge pressure display using the Gauge Menu.
2. If the discharge pressure is not displayed by the Base Controller, unplug the transducer and check for +5 Vdc
between DPP and DPN. If +5 Vdc is not present, check the Base Controller in accordance with Service Procedure
A01A.
3. Check the harness wires DPP, DPN, and DPI for continuity using an ohmmeter.
4. Connect refrigeration gauges to verify that the sensor is displaying the correct pressure. Replace the sensor if
required.

234 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

87 CHECK SUCTION PRESSURE SENSOR

Alarm Type
Check
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
Circuit Description
The three wire suction pressure sensor is supplied with +5 Vdc and ground from the Base Controller. The sensor is
located in the suction line and downstream of the ETV (if present). The wiring is located in the Sensor Harness via the
SPP, SPN, and SPI circuits.
Considerations
The Discharge Pressure Transducer, Suction Pressure Transducer and Coolant Level switch each have a separate 5 Vdc
power supply. A short circuit condition in one transducer or switch circuit should not affect the other circuits.
The maximum suction pressure that can be displayed is 200 psig. If the sensed pressure is greater than 200 psig, the
HMI Control Panel will display [ - - - - ] instead of the suction pressure. When the unit is off and the refrigerant pressures
have equalized, the system pressure can exceed 200 psig when ambient temperatures are above 35°C (90°F). If this
occurs the HMI Control Panel will display [ - - - - ]. This is normal operation and no cause for concern.
The minimum suction pressure that can be sensed is -12 psig.
If the sensor opens, the display will read -10 PSIG. An alarm may not be generated immediately but the unit will be
forced to low speed due to low suction pressure.
The Suction Pressure Transducer will have a “200” on the body of the part. The Discharge Pressure Transducer will
have a “500” on the body of the part. They are not interchangeable.
How Alarm is Set
1. If the unit is running and the suction pressure sensor reading is greater than 186 PSIG for 10 seconds, Alarm Code
87 is set as a Check Alarm. If the unit is in a Pretrip Test, this alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm. If the suction
pressure is greater than 186 PSIG, the sensor display will be dashes [ - - - - ].
2. If the unit is running and the suction pressure sensor reading is less than -10 PSIG for 10 seconds, Alarm Code 87 is
set as a Check Alarm. If the unit is in a Pretrip Test, this alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
3. If suction pressure does not change ±3 PSIG during the ETV test, Alarm Code 87 is set as a Check Alarm. If the unit is
in a Pretrip Test, this alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually. Clearing the code will cause the unit to shut down and restart to check the transducer
for proper operation by performing an ETV check.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check the suction pressure display using the Gauge Menu. If the suction pressure is -10 psig, turn the unit off and
allow the system refrigerant pressures to equalize. If the displayed suction pressure remains at -10 psig, the suction
pressure transducer is defective and must be replaced.
2. Check the suction pressure display using the Gauge Menu. If the sensor reads [ - - - - ] psig, turn the unit off and
allow the system pressures to equalize.
a. If the actual suction pressure is less than 180 psig, but the displayed suction pressure remains at [ - - - - ], the
transducer is defective and must be replaced.
b. If the suction pressure is greater than 180 psig, the suction pressure transducer may be operating normally.
Place the unit in full cool and allow the return air temperature to drop below 10°C (50°F). If the suction pressure
display remains at [ - - - - ], the transducer, controller power supply, or conductors are faulty.
3. If the suction pressure is not displayed by the Base Controller, unplug the transducer and check for +5 Vdc between
SPP-01 and SPN-01. If 5 volts is not present, check the Base Controller in accordance with Service Procedure A01A.
4. Connect refrigeration gauges to verify that the sensor is not displaying the correct pressure. Replace the sensor.
5. Check the harness wires SPP-01, SPN-01, and SP-01 for continuity using an ohmmeter.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 235
Section 5 - Diagnostics

89 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLING VALVE CIRCUIT

Alarm Type
Check or Shutdown
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
Component Description and Location
The Electronic Throttling Valve (ETV) is located in the suction line behind the evaporator panel of SL units and in front
of unit (left hand side) on suction line between the vibrasorber and accumulator tank of SLX/SLXe/SLXi Series units.
I m p o r t a n t : There are two different valves currently in use. They are connected in a similar manner, but the valve wire
color codes are different for each valve. Refer to the unit schematic diagram for connection details.
Circuit Description
The ETV circuit consists of four wires from the ETV driver located on the Base Controller to the ETV. The harness wires
to the valve are labeled EVA-01, EVB-01, EVC-01, and EVD-01. These wires are located in the main harness.
How Alarm is Set
The electrical test is performed before every engine or electric motor start. The running test is only performed when the
unit restarts after a shutdown or prevent alarm or if the Base Controller senses a problem with either or both of the
refrigerant pressure transducers. The running test is also performed when an engine start occurs during a Pretrip Test.
When Alarm Code 89 is cleared, the unit will shut down (if running) and perform a full ETV test to confirm proper ETV
operation.
The alarm can be set during the non-running or running phases of the unit engine start routine.
1. During the non-running phase, the ETV driver outputs are checked for error conditions (ETV electrical test).
2. During the first phase of the running test, the ETV is nearly closed. The ETV closing is confirmed by a drop in suction
pressure.
3. During the second phase of the running test, the ETV is opened. The ETV opening is confirmed by a rise in suction
pressure.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually. The unit will shut down (if running) and perform a full ETV test to confirm proper ETV
operation.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check the suction and discharge pressures with unit not running, to determine if refrigerant charge appears
adequate.
2. Check the electrical operation of electronic throttling valve circuit in accordance with Service Procedure G03A.
3. If the electronic throttling valve appears to function electrically, check the refrigeration system for low refrigerant, a
frozen expansion valve, or a severe restriction in the suction side of the system.

236 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

90 ELECTRIC OVERLOAD
Alarm Type
Check or Prevent in Electric Mode
Log in Diesel Mode
Associated Alarm Codes
84 Restart Null
111 Unit Not Configured Correctly
Considerations
This alarm becomes a Log Alarm if the unit is switched from Electric Mode to Diesel Mode.
How Alarm is Set
Alarm conditions are only active when three phase power is connected (ER input is high).
1. This alarm will be set during Electric Mode operation if the Base Controller determines that the electric motor
overload relay (EOL) has tripped.
2. If during a Pretrip Test the unit is not configured electric standby and the EOL input is low, Alarm Code 90 is set as a
Check Alarm and Alarm Code 111 is set as a Log Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.

WARNING
Hazardous Voltage!
Units featuring Electric Standby utilize 460, 400, or 230 volt 3 phase AC electrical power any time the unit is
operating in Electric Mode. This voltage potential is also present any time the unit is connected to a source of
external standby power. Extreme care must be used when working on the unit, as these voltages are capable
of causing serious injury or death.

1. Check the electric motor for current draw. Refer to the motor nameplate for the Full Load Amperage rating (FLA) of
the motor.
2. Check the setting of the motor overload relay. Refer to Specifications for settings.
3. Check the EOL-01 circuit for continuity from J6 pin 2 on the Base Controller to the overload relay.
4. Check for continuity between the overload relay terminals 95 and 96. The contacts should be normally closed.
5. Check the CHHV circuit for continuity to chassis ground.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 237
Section 5 - Diagnostics

91 CHECK ELECTRIC READY INPUT

Alarm Type
Prevent in Electric Mode
Log in Diesel Mode
Associated Alarm Codes
84 Restart Null
Considerations
This alarm becomes a Log Alarm if the unit is switched from Electric Mode to Diesel Mode.
How Alarm is Set
This alarm will only be set if the unit is configured for manual switchover from electric to diesel.
1. If Electric Mode operation is selected and the Base Controller determines that three phase standby power is not
connected (ER input is low), Alarm Code 91 is set as a Prevent Alarm.
2. If unit switches from electric to diesel and auto switch from electric to diesel is enabled, Alarm Code 91 is set as a
Log Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared automatically when one of the two following actions occur:
1. The unit is auto switched or manually switched to Diesel Mode operation.
2. Three phase standby power is restored to the unit.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.

WARNING
Hazardous Voltage!
Units featuring Electric Standby utilize 460, 400, or 230 volt 3 phase AC electrical power any time the unit is
operating in Electric Mode. This voltage potential is also present any time the unit is connected to a source of
external standby power. Extreme care must be used when working on the unit, as these voltages are capable
of causing serious injury or death.

1. Check the ER-01 circuit from the phase detect module for 12 volts to chassis ground when standby power is
connected to the unit.
2. Check the 8 circuit at the phase detect module for 12 volts.
3. Check to verify standby power of the correct voltage is present at L1, L2, and L3 on the phase detect module.
4. With unit off, check the ER-01 circuit for continuity from J6 pin 5 on the Base Controller to the phase detect module.
5. If steps 1-4 above are correct, check the Base Controller in accordance with Service Procedure A01A.
6. If steps 1, 2, 4, or 5 above do not correct the fault, replace the phase detect module.

238 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

92 SENSOR GRADES NOT SET

Alarm Type
Check
Associated Alarm Codes
03 Return Control Air Sensor
04 Discharge Air Control Sensor
203 Check Display Return Air Sensor
204 Check Display Discharge Air Sensor
Considerations
The sensor grade must be set using the Sensor Calibration feature in the Guarded Access Menu. If the sensor grade is
not properly set, the sensor reading will not be accurate. Grade 5H is set as the default grade on factory Base Controller
and is used as an indication that the sensor grade has not been set.
Alarm Code 92 is not set for spare sensors. However, if used, spare sensors should be calibrated to achieve maximum
accuracy.
How Alarm is Set
If any graded return or discharge sensor is in valid range and the sensor grade is set to grade 5H (default) when the unit
power switch is turned on, Alarm Code 92 is set as a Log Alarm. The offending sensor alarm code (03, 04, 203, or 204) is
also set.
How Alarm is Cleared
Clears automatically when the sensor grade is set to other than 5H. The offending sensor alarm code (03, 04, 203, or
204) must be manually cleared in Guarded Access after the sensor grades have been set.
Diagnostic Procedure
1. Verify actual sensor grades for all graded sensors.
2. Using this information, calibrate the sensors using the Sensor Calibration feature in the Guarded Access Menu. For
additional details, refer to Service Procedure A15A.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 239
Section 5 - Diagnostics

94 CHECK LOADER #1 CIRCUIT

Alarm Type
Check (Pretrip Only)
Associated Alarm Codes
28 Pretrip Abort
111 Unit Not Configured Correctly
How Alarm is Set
The Loader #1 is not currently used. However, the associated output is checked during the Non-running Pretrip Test to
be certain nothing has been mistakenly connected to it. The output is energized and then de-energized to verify that no
device is connected to the circuit and that the Base Controller is operating properly.
1. If current flow is detected during the output energized phase of the Non-running Pretrip Test, Alarm Code 94 will be
set as a Check Alarm and Alarm Code 111 will be set as a Log Alarm. The Non-running Pretrip Test will be allowed to
complete.
2. If current flow is detected during the output de-energized phase of the Non-running Pretrip Test, Alarm Code 94 will
be set as a Check Alarm, Alarm Code 111 will be set as a Log Alarm, and Alarm Code 28 will be set as a Shutdown
Alarm. The Pretrip Test will be aborted.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check unit configuration to confirm proper setting.
2. Check the Base Controller wiring to verify there is no connection to connector J7 pin 7.
3. Check the Base Controller in accordance with Service Procedure A01A.

240 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

95 CHECK LOADER #2 CIRCUIT

Alarm Type
Check (Pretrip Only)
Associated Alarm Codes
28 Pretrip Abort
111 Unit Not Configured Correctly
How Alarm is Set
The Loader #2 is not currently used. However, the associated output is checked during the Non-running Pretrip Test to
be certain nothing has been mistakenly connected to it. The output is energized and then de-energized to verify that no
device is connected to the circuit and that the Base Controller is operating properly.
1. If current flow is detected during the output energized phase of the Non-running Pretrip Test, Alarm Code 95 will be
set as a Check Alarm and Alarm Code 111 will be set as a Log Alarm. The Non-running Pretrip Test will be allowed to
complete.
2. If current flow is detected during the output de-energized phase of the Non-running Pretrip Test, Alarm Code 95 will
be set as a Check Alarm, Alarm Code 111 will be set as a Log Alarm, and Alarm Code 28 will be set as a Shutdown
Alarm. The Pretrip Test will be aborted.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check unit configuration to confirm proper setting.
2. Check the Base Controller wiring to verify there is no connection to connector J7 pin 7.
3. Check the Base Controller in accordance with Service Procedure A01A.

96 LOW FUEL LEVEL

Alarm Type
Log or Check
Associated Alarm Codes
98 Check Fuel Level Sensor
Considerations
This alarm is enabled only if the unit is configured with a fuel level sensor.
How Alarm is Set
1. If the fuel level indicated by the fuel level sensor falls to 15% (solid state) or 20% (float) of tank capacity, Alarm Code
96 is set as a Check Alarm.
2. If rail option is enabled and fuel level is below 50%, Alarm Code 96 is set as a Log Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared automatically when the fuel level exceeds 25% (solid state) or 30% (float) of tank capacity.
This alarm is cleared automatically if fuel level is above 75% if rail option is enabled.
Diagnostic Procedure
Check fuel tank level and fill as required.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 241
Section 5 - Diagnostics

98 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

Alarm Type
Check
Associated Alarm Codes
96 Low Fuel Level
Component Description and Location
The ultrasonic fuel level sensor (if used) is mounted to a flange on top of the fuel tank. The ultrasonic fuel level sensor
consists of a sensor, a sensor tube (or focus tube), and two gaskets. The sensor is a transducer that emits ultrasonic
sound waves. The sound waves reflect off the fuel in the sensor tube and return to the transducer. The transducer
senses the reflected sound waves and determines the fuel level in the sensor tube.
Ultrasonic fuel level sensors are calibrated for use with fuel tanks of particular size and shape. Refer to the appropriate
unit Parts Manual for the correct part numbers.
The ultrasonic fuel level sensor and the fuel gauge on the end of the fuel tank measure the fuel level differently. The
ultrasonic fuel level sensor measures the actual volume of fuel in the tank. The fuel gauge measures the height of the
fuel in the tank. Therefore, the fuel level at which fuel level sensor reading and the fuel gauge reading agree closely is at
50% or 1/2 full. The readings at other fuel levels may not agree as closely. If you think the ultrasonic fuel level sensor is
not working correctly, the best thing to do is to check the output voltage as shown in step 4 below. The output voltage
should be between approximately 1.0 Vdc for an empty tank to 4.0 Vdc for a full tank.
Considerations
This alarm is enabled only if the unit is configured with a fuel level sensor.
How Alarm is Set
Alarm is set when the fuel level sensor is determined to be out of range.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Use the GAUGES soft key to display the Fuel Level Sensor reading and compare it to the reading of the fuel gauge
on the end of the fuel tank. The Fuel Level Sensor reading should be approximately 50% when the fuel gauge reads
1/2 full.
2. Check to verify that the Fuel Sensor Type is set to Solid State in Unit Configuration in the Guarded Access Menu.
3. Turn the unit on and check for battery voltage (12 Vdc) between the 2PL (J3-12 pin) and FUELN (J3-35 pin) wires in
the sensor harness at the J3 connector on the base controller. This is the input voltage. If battery voltage is not
present, check the microprocessor.
4. If battery voltage is present, check the output voltage between the FLL (J3-23 pin) and FUELN (J3-35 pin) wires in the
sensor harness at the J3 connector on the base controller. The voltage should be between 1 and 4 Vdc depending
on the fuel level as shown the following table:

Fuel Level Output Voltage

Empty Approximately 1.0 Vdc

1/2 Full Approximately 2.5 Vdc

Full Approximately 4.0 Vdc

N o t e : The output voltages listed above are for the ultrasonic fuel level sensor designed to be used with SR-3
controllers. Other systems such as third party telematics systems may use sensors with slightly different
output voltages. Refer to the sensor specifications for those sensors.
5. If the output voltage is incorrect, check the continuity of the wires that go from the J3 connector on the base
controller to the sensor as shown in the following table and verify the connections are clean and tight.

242 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

N o t e : The sensor cable (or interconnect harness) wires are connected to the sensor wires with solder connections
and heat shrink tubing during installation. Refer to the applicable Installation Manual for more information.

J3 Sensor Sensor Cable Sensor Sensor

Connector Harness Wire Connector Cable Wire
Pin Pin Wire

12 2PL A Green Red

23 FLL B White Yellow

35 FUELN C Black Black

6. If the wires have good continuity and the connections are clean and tight, replace the sensor.

108 DOOR OPEN TIMEOUT

Alarm Type
Check
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
Considerations
Changes in the door switch state are not recognized for four seconds. This is to prevent rapid unit operation changes if
the door is ajar or the door switch is defective.
The unit or zone will be restarted after the off timer expires.
How Alarm is Set
The following conditions must be met:
• The optional door switch must be installed.
• The unit must be programmed (unit null, high speed lockout, or zone null, if multi-temp) to force the unit off/on door
opening.
• A maximum door open timeout must be programmed.
• Door open timeout alarm set to enabled.
1. When door open timer expires, the unit will resume normal operation even if the door is still open. Alarm Code 108
is set as a Check Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Download the ServiceWatch data logger and review the information to determine if the door switch is defective or if
the door was left open for an extended period of time during loading or unloading of the truck or trailer.
2. Check the operation of the door switches.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 243
Section 5 - Diagnostics

111 UNIT NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY

Alarm Type
Log
Associated Alarm Codes
02 Check Evaporator Coil Sensor
03 Return Control Air Sensor
04 Discharge Air Control Sensor
29 Defrost Damper Circuit Check
30 Defrost Damper Stuck
45 Hot Gas Bypass Circuit
67 Check Liquid Line Solenoid Circuit
90 Electric Overload
94 Check Loader #1 Circuit
95 Check Loader #2 Circuit
113 Check Electric Heat Circuit
121 Check PWM/Liquid Injection Circuit
122 Check Diesel/Electric Circuit
137 Damper Gear Motor Heater
How Alarm is Set
If a mismatch exists between the unit hardware configuration and the unit hardware as detected by the Base Controller,
Alarm Code 111 is set as a Log Alarm
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
1. Verify actual unit configuration.
2. Set the unit configuration using the Unit Configuration sub-menu of the Programming Menu in accordance with
Service Procedure A04A.
3. Verify correct Base Controller and software installed.

244 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

113 CHECK ELECTRIC HEAT CIRCUIT

Alarm Type
Check or Shutdown (Pretrip Test Only)
Associated Alarm Codes
28 Pretrip Abort
111 Unit Not Configured Correctly
How Alarm is Set
This alarm is set if the measured shunt current is incorrect during a non-running pre-trip test. Current is measured with
the output on and off.
1. The alarm is set as a Check Alarm if the current is not within specifications when the output circuit is energized.
2. The alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm if the current does not return to zero when the output is de-energized.
3. The alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm if the unit is not configured as a Model 50 unit and the current flow is within
specifications when the output circuit is energized.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check for battery voltage at the 7E wire on the heater contactor.
2. Check the heater contactor coil for continuity.
3. Verify actual unit configuration.

114 MULTIPLE ALARMS - CAN NOT RUN

Alarm Type
Shutdown
Associated Alarm Codes
03 Return Control Air Sensor
04 Discharge Air Control Sensor
203 Check Display Return Air Sensor
204 Check Display Discharge Air Sensor
How Alarm is Set
If both pressure transducers are failed and Alarm Code 03/203 or Alarm Code 04/204 is set, Alarm Code 114 is set as a
Shutdown Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually or automatically.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
Proceed as indicated for the associated alarm codes.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 245
Section 5 - Diagnostics

117 AUTO OR MANUAL SWITCH FROM DIESEL TO ELECTRIC

Alarm Type
Log or Shutdown
Associated Alarm Codes
118 Auto or Manual Switch from Electric to Diesel
How Alarm is Set
1. If the unit is switched from diesel operation to electric operation during a Pretrip Test, Alarm Code 117 is set as a
Log Alarm. The Pretrip Test will be restarted from the beginning in Electric Mode.
2. If the unit is switched from diesel operation to electric operation during a non-running Service Test Mode operation,
Alarm Code 117 is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
3. If the unit is switched from diesel operation to electric operation during normal operation, this alarm is set as a Log
Alarm for information only.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Information only. No action is required.

118 AUTO OR MANUAL SWITCH FROM ELECTRIC TO DIESEL

Alarm Type
Log or Shutdown
Associated Alarm Codes
117 Auto or Manual Switch from Diesel to Electric
How Alarm is Set
1. If the unit is switched from electric operation to diesel operation during a Pretrip Test, Alarm Code 118 is set as a
Log Alarm. The Pretrip Test will be restarted from the beginning in Diesel Mode.
2. If the unit is switched from electric operation to diesel operation during a non-running Service Test Mode operation,
Alarm Code 118 is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
3. If the unit is switched from electric operation to diesel operation during normal operation, this alarm is set as a Log
Alarm for information only.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Information only. No action is required.

246 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

120 CHECK ALTERNATOR EXCITE CIRCUIT

Alarm Type
Check or Shutdown
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
Circuit Description
The Alternator Excite circuit is a single wire circuit. The EXC wire connects the Base Controller connector J7 pin 33 to
the alternator excite terminal. The wire is routed in the main harness. A Smart FET on the Base Controller supplies
power to the EXC circuit. LED 18 is turned on when the alternator excite output is energized.
Considerations
The alternator excite input is energized when the engine starts to supply excitation voltage to the alternator.
How Alarm is Set
1. If during normal operation the current is not within specifications (above 2 amps) three seconds after the alternator
excite output is energized, Alarm Code 120 is set as a Check Alarm and the output is turned off. Alternator excite
operation is not allowed until Alarm Code 120 is cleared. The unit will continue to run but with reduced performance
until the condition is corrected and the alarm is cleared.
2. If during normal operation the current does not return to less than 0.5 amps three seconds after the alternator excite
output is de-energized, Alarm Code 120 is set as a Check Alarm. Alternator excite operation is not allowed until
Alarm Code 120 is cleared. The unit will continue to run but with reduced performance until the condition is
corrected and the alarm is cleared.
3. If during a Pretrip Test the current is not within specifications when the alternator excite output is energized, Alarm
Code 120 is set as a Check Alarm.
4. If during a Pretrip Test the current does not return to less than 0.5 amps when de-energized, Alarm Code 120 is set
as a Shutdown Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check the operation of the alternator excite circuit using Interface Board Test Mode. Verify the alternator excite
circuit LED illuminates . If the alternator excite circuit LED 18 illuminates, proceed to Step 2. If the alternator excite
circuit LED 18 does not illuminate, proceed to Step 3.
2. If the alternator excite circuit LED 18 does illuminate, check for 12 Vdc at the alternator excite terminal. If 12 Vdc is
not present, check for a short circuit, open circuit, or loose connection.
3. If the alternator excite circuit LED 18 does not illuminate, check the circuit with an accurate ohmmeter for a short
circuit, open circuit, shorts to ground, or loose connection.
4. Disconnect the EXC wire at the alternator and check for 12 Vdc when the engine is running. If 12 Vdc is not present,
check the EXC circuit for continuity.
5. Check the Base Controller in accordance with Service Procedure A01A.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 247
Section 5 - Diagnostics

121 CHECK PWM/LIQUID INJECTION CIRCUIT

Alarm Type
Log or Shutdown (Pretrip Only)
Associated Alarm Codes
111 Unit Not Configured Correctly
How Alarm is Set
The PWM/Liquid Injection Circuit is currently not used. However, the associated output is checked during the Non-
running Pretrip Test to verify nothing has been mistakenly connected to it. The output is energized and then de-
energized to verify that no device is connected to the circuit and that the Base Controller is operating properly.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check unit configuration to confirm proper setting.
2. Check the Base Controller wiring to verify that there is no connection to connector J7 pin 10.
3. Check the Base Controller in accordance with Service Procedure A01A.

248 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

122 CHECK DIESEL/ELECTRIC CIRCUIT

Alarm Type
Check or Shutdown (Pretrip Test Only)
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
Circuit Description
The Diesel/Electric circuit is energized by the Diesel/Electric Relay K5 on the Base Controller. The 7E wire supplies 12
Vdc to the Phase Select Module to energize the appropriate Standby Motor contactor.
Considerations
The following is true on all units, even if Electric Standby is not present:
1. When the Diesel/Electric Relay is energized during a Pretrip Test, the Fuel Solenoid is de-energized. The current flow
measured by the shunt should decrease to indicate that the Fuel Solenoid is actually de-energized. If the current
flow does not decrease, the Fuel Solenoid was not de-energized and Alarm Code 122 is set. This is normal
operation.
2. If the current flow decreases by less than 0.75 amps when the Fuel Solenoid is de-energized, the Fuel Solenoid is
presumed to be de-energized and the Pretrip Test continues.
3. If the current flow decreases by more than 0.75 amps when the Fuel Solenoid is de-energized, Alarm Code 122 is
also set. This indicates that the Fuel Solenoid is drawing excessive current. Alarm Code 35 is not set under these
conditions.
How Alarm is Set
1. If during a Pretrip Test the unit is configured with Diesel/Electric Relay and current is less than 0.5 amps when the
circuit is energized, Alarm Code 122 is set as a Check Alarm.
2. If during a Pretrip Test the zone is configured with Diesel/Electric Relay and current is greater than 0.5 amps of run
relay reference when de-energized, Alarm Code 122 is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check the operation of the Diesel/Electric relay using Interface Board Test Mode in the Maintenance Menu. Verify
the Diesel/Electric LED 7 illuminates.
2. Use the HMI control panel amps gauge to check the current drawn by the Diesel/Electric relay while operating the
Diesel/Electric relay with Interface Board Test Mode. The current draw should be between 0.5 to 2 amps.
3. If Alarm Code 122 is set, check the current draw of the Fuel Solenoid using Interface Board Test Mode. If the current
draw for the Fuel Solenoid decreases by more than 0.75 amps during the Diesel/Electric Relay Test, the Fuel
Solenoid should be replaced.
I m p o r t a n t : Do not replace the Base Controller without first confirming that Alarm Code 122 was not set by the Fuel
Solenoid drawing current in excess of 0.75 amps.
N o t e : A replacement fuel solenoid can be plugged in but not physically installed and a Pretrip Test run to confirm the
original fuel solenoid is the source of the problem.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 249
Section 5 - Diagnostics

127 SETPOINT NOT ENTERED

Alarm Type
Check
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
How Alarm is Set
If the setpoint was changed but the change was not confirmed by pressing the YES key, Alarm Code 127 is set as a
Check Alarm. The setpoint has not been changed and has returned to the original setting.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Information only. Verify setpoint is adjusted properly.

128 ENGINE RUN TIME MAINTENANCE REMINDER #1

Alarm Type
Log
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
Considerations
The programmable hourmeter alarms can be cleared from the Guarded Access Menu only.
How Alarm is Set
If one of the user programmed hourmeters has exceeded the time limit, Alarm Code 128 is set as a Log Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared from the Guarded Access Menu only.
Diagnostic Procedure
1. Perform required maintenance as dictated by owner requirements.
2. Reset the hourmeter limit after completion in accordance with Service Procedure A28A.

250 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

129 ENGINE RUN TIME MAINTENANCE REMINDER #2

Alarm Type
Log
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
Considerations
The programmable hourmeter alarms can be cleared from the Guarded Access Menu only.
How Alarm is Set
If one of the user programmed hourmeters has exceeded the time limit, Alarm Code 129 is set as a Log Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared from the Guarded Access Menu only.
Diagnostic Procedure
1. Perform required maintenance as dictated by owner requirements.
2. Reset the hourmeter limit after completion in accordance with Service Procedure A28A.

130 ELECTRIC RUN TIME MAINTENANCE REMINDER #1

Alarm Type
Log
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
Considerations
The programmable hourmeter alarms can be cleared from the Guarded Access Menu only.
How Alarm is Set
If one of the user programmed hourmeters has exceeded the time limit, Alarm Code 130 is set as a Log Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared from the Guarded Access Menu only.
Diagnostic Procedure
1. Perform required maintenance as dictated by owner requirements.
2. Reset the hourmeter limit after completion in accordance with Service Procedure A28A.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 251
Section 5 - Diagnostics

131 ELECTRIC RUN TIME MAINTENANCE REMINDER #2

Alarm Type
Log
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
Considerations
The programmable hourmeter alarms can be cleared from the Guarded Access Menu only.
How Alarm is Set
If one of the user programmed hourmeters has exceeded the time limit, Alarm Code 131 is set as a Log Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared from the Guarded Access Menu only.
Diagnostic Procedure
1. Perform required maintenance as dictated by owner requirements.
2. Reset the hourmeter limit after completion in accordance with Service Procedure A28A.

132 TOTAL UNIT RUN TIME MAINTENANCE REMINDER #1

Alarm Type
Log
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
Considerations
The programmable hourmeter alarms can be cleared from the Guarded Access Menu only.
How Alarm is Set
If one of the user programmed hourmeters has exceeded the time limit, Alarm Code 132 is set as a Log Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared from the Guarded Access Menu only.
Diagnostic Procedure
1. Perform required maintenance as dictated by owner requirements.
2. Reset the hourmeter limit after completion in accordance with Service Procedure A28A.

252 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

133 TOTAL UNIT RUN TIME MAINTENANCE REMINDER #2

Alarm Type
Log
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
Considerations
The programmable hourmeter alarms can be cleared from the Guarded Access Menu only.
How Alarm is Set
If one of the user programmed hourmeters has exceeded the time limit, Alarm Code 133 is set as a Log Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared from the Guarded Access Menu only.
Diagnostic Procedure
1. Perform required maintenance as dictated by owner requirements.
2. Reset the hourmeter limit after completion in accordance with Service Procedure A28A.

134 CONTROLLER POWER ON HOURS

Alarm Type
Log
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
Considerations
The programmable hourmeter alarms can be cleared from the Guarded Access Menu only.
How Alarm is Set
If one of the user programmed hourmeters has exceeded the time limit, Alarm Code 134 is set as a Log Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared from the Guarded Access Menu only.
Diagnostic Procedure
1. Perform required maintenance as dictated by owner requirements.
2. Reset the hourmeter limit after completion in accordance with Service Procedure A28A.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 253
Section 5 - Diagnostics

135 CHECK SPARE DIGITAL INPUTS

Alarm Type
Log or Check (Pretrip Only)
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
How Alarm is Set
1. The Pretrip test indicates that a connection is made to a spare digital input and should not be.
2. Alarm Code 135 is set as a Log Alarm and the number of spare digital input detected.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Correct the wiring error.

136 CHECK SPARE DIGITAL OUTPUTS

Alarm Type
Log or Check (Pretrip Only)
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
How Alarm is Set
1. The Pretrip test indicates that a connection is made to a spare digital output and should not be.
2. Alarm Code 136 is set as a Log Alarm and the amp draw, battery volts, and number of spare digital output detected
(if more than one output tested).
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Correct the wiring error.

254 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

137 DAMPER GEAR MOTOR HEATER

N o t e : Units with damper gear motor actuator only.
Alarm Type
Check
Associated Alarm Codes
30 Defrost Damper Stuck
Circuit Description
On units equipped with a damper gear motor, the damper solenoid output is used to control the motor heater.
Considerations
If the unit is not properly configured, Alarm Code 137 may occur instead of Alarm Code 29.
How Alarm is Set
Alarm Code 137 is set if the measured shunt current is incorrect during Non-running Pretrip. Current is measured with
the output on and off.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Download the ServiceWatch data logger using WinTrac. Review the data using Technician Level to determine the
conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the alarm is set and
cleared. This data can be very helpful in determining the cause of the alarm.
Check unit configuration.

141 AUTO-SWITCH DIESEL TO ELECTRIC DISABLED

Alarm Type
Check
Associated Alarm Codes
36 Electric Motor Failed to Run
38 Electric Phase Reversed
90 Electric Overload
Considerations
When this alarm is set, the unit will remain in Diesel Mode operation even when connected to a fully functional electric
standby power system.
How Alarm is Set
If the Autoswitch Diesel to Electric feature is enabled and the unit switches to Electric Mode operation and an Electric
Mode Shutdown Alarm is already set, Alarm Code 141 is set as a Check Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Check for associated alarms and repair as required.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 255
Section 5 - Diagnostics

145 LOSS OF CONTROLLER “ON” FEEDBACK SIGNAL

Alarm Type
Log
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
Circuit Description
The Base Controller “On” feedback signal is supplied by 8X power flowing through fuse F7 (2A) to pin 6 on the CAN
connectors J12, J13, and J14. The power on pin 6 of CAN connector J14 flows to the HMI Control Panel pin 6. The
presence of power at pin 6 of the HMI Control Panel indicates that power is present on the 8X circuits.
Active CAN communications indicate the K9 On/Off Relay is energized and the Base Controller is running. If CAN
communications are active but power is not present at pin 6 of the HMI Control Panel, there is a problem with the 8XP
or 8X circuit(s).
How Alarm is Set
If communications have been established between the Base Controller and a CAN connected device such as the HMI
Control Panel and the device feedback input is low for three seconds, Alarm Code 145 is set as a Log Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
1. Verify that fuse F7 is not blown. If fuse F7 is blown, check the 8XP circuit for shorts. This circuit supplies power to pin
6 of all the CAN communication ports (J12, J13, and J14) on the Base Controller. If necessary, check for shorts at any
devices connected to any of the CAN ports.
2. Check for power at pin 6 of the HMI Control Panel. If power is not present, check for an open in the 8XP circuit from
fuse F7 to pin 6 of the CAN communication ports.

146 SOFTWARE VERSION MISMATCH

Alarm Type
Shutdown
Associated Alarm Codes
111 Unit Not Configured Correctly
How Alarm is Set
If single temperature software is detected in a unit with a Multi-Temperature Expansion Module connected, Alarm Code
146 is set as a Shutdown Alarm. Alarm Code 111 will also be set as a Log Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually. The alarm will also clear automatically if the correct version of Base Controller software
is flash loaded.
Diagnostic Procedure
Flash load the correct software for the application.
N o t e : For the latest information, refer to the Software Compatibility Matrix:
For EMEA: Info Central (Software Updates > Microprocessors > Compatibility Matrix)

256 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

148 AUTO-SWITCH ELECTRIC TO DIESEL DISABLED

Alarm Type
Check
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
How Alarm is Set
If the Autoswitch Electric to Diesel feature is set yes and the unit switches to Diesel Mode operation and an Diesel Mode
Shutdown Alarm is already set, Alarm Code 148 is set as a Check Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Check for associated alarms and repair as required.

149 ALARM NOT IDENTIFIED

Alarm Type
Check
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
Considerations
This alarm, if present, does not affect unit operation. It is an information only alarm. If set, this alarm code may not
appear in either the CargoWatch or ServiceWatch Data Loggers.
How Alarm is Set
This alarm is set by the HMI if the alarm cannot be identified due to a communications error, or if the alarm count
exceeds the number of alarms in the alarm queue. Alarm Code 149 is set as a Check Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
N o t e : This alarm may not be able to be cleared from the Main or Guarded Access Menu. If Alarm Code 149 cannot be
cleared, a Cold Start may be required to allow the alarm to be cleared.
Diagnostic Procedure
Download the ServiceWatch data logger using WinTrac. Review the data using Technician Level to determine the
conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the alarm is set and
cleared. This data can be very helpful in determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check and correct other existing alarms.
2. Perform a Base Controller Cold Start in accordance with Service Procedure A07A. Record the programmable
settings before performing the Cold Start and reprogram all settings after the Cold Start is completed. Clear all
alarm codes.
3. If this alarm is still set, it may not be possible to clear it. Should this be the case, consult the District or Area Service
Manager for instructions on how to proceed.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 257
Section 5 - Diagnostics

150 OUT OF RANGE LOW (HMI)

Alarm Type
Log
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
Considerations
The CargoWatch temperatures and times that will cause an alarm to be set are user programmable. These CargoWatch
Data Logger features are configured as required for the particular customer applications. Refer to the Sensor
Configuration Menu - CargoWatch Data Logger in Section 3 for details.
This alarm is only logged in the CargoWatch Data Logger.
Verify the CargoWatch Data Logger is downloaded before installing HMI Control Panel software. The HMI Control Panel
Cold Start will erase any existing data in the CargoWatch Logger.
How Alarm is Set
1. If the temperature falls below the user programmed temperature for the user programmed time interval, Alarm
Code 150 is set as a Log Alarm.
2. If a CargoWatch sensor is open or shorted, Alarm Code 150 is set as a Log Alarm.
3. If Out of Range Checking is turned On and no CargoWatch sensors are connected, Alarm Code 150 is set as a Log
Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the CargoWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician Level
to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the alarm
is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Determine the cause of low CargoWatch sensor temperature and correct as necessary.
2. Verify the CargoWatch Data Logger is downloaded before installing HMI Control Panel software. The HMI Control
Panel Cold Start will erase any existing data in the CargoWatch Data Logger.
3. If no CargoWatch sensors are connected and the Out of Range feature is turned On, perform an HMI Control Panel
Cold Start using the WinTrac Service Tool. The Cold Start will set the Out of Range Checking to Off.
I m p o r t a n t : Do not attempt a cold start using the Base Controller jumpers or with the download cable connected to the
ServiceWatch port as this will restart the SR-3 Base Controller, not the HMI Control Panel.

258 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

151 OUT OF RANGE HIGH (HMI)

Alarm Type
Log
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
Considerations
The CargoWatch temperatures and times that will cause an alarm to be set are user programmable. These CargoWatch
Data Logger features are configured as required for the particular customer applications. Refer to the Sensor
Configuration Menu - CargoWatch Data Logger in Section 3 for details.
This alarm is only logged in the CargoWatch Data Logger.
Verify the CargoWatch Data Logger is downloaded before installing HMI Control Panel software. The HMI Control Panel
Cold Start will erase any existing data in the CargoWatch Logger.
How Alarm is Set
1. If the temperature rises above the user programmed temperature for the user programmed time interval, Alarm
Code 151 is set as a Log Alarm.
2. If a CargoWatch sensor is open or shorted, Alarm Code 151 is set as a Log Alarm.
3. If Out of Range Checking is turned On and no CargoWatch sensors are connected, Alarm Code 151 is set as a Log
Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the CargoWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician Level
to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the alarm
is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Determine the cause of high CargoWatch sensor temperature and correct as necessary.
2. Verify the CargoWatch Data Logger is downloaded before installing HMI Control Panel software. The HMI Control
Panel Cold Start will erase any existing data in the CargoWatch Data Logger.
3. If no CargoWatch sensors are connected and the Out of Range feature is turned On, perform an HMI Control Panel
Cold Start using the WinTrac Service Tool. The Cold Start will set the Out of Range Checking to Off.
I m p o r t a n t : Do not attempt a cold start using the Base Controller jumpers or with the download cable connected to the
ServiceWatch port as this will restart the SR-3 Base Controller, not the HMI Control Panel.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 259
Section 5 - Diagnostics

157 OPTISET FILE MISMATCH

Alarm Type
Check
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
How Alarm is Set
Alarm Code 157 indicates that a problem exists with the OptiSet Plus Temperature Profiles.
Alarm Code 157 will be set as on power-up if the OptiSet configuration in the Base Controller does not match the
configuration held in the HMI Control Panel. This alarm condition usually occurs if the Base Controller is Cold Started or
replaced.
If OptiSet Plus with Named Products is in use and the Base Controller is Cold Started or replaced with a new Base
Controller, the Named Temperature Profiles are deleted by the Cold Start or do not exist in the replacement Base
Controller but still exist in the HMI Control Panel. The following conditions will exist:
1. Alarm Code 157 will be set.
2. Alarm Code 157 may be able to be cleared manually but will reoccur when the unit is powered off and back on.
3. The OptiSet Plus Reset selection in Guarded Access Menu may not be available. An OptiSet Plus Reset can still be
performed using the WinTrac Service Tool.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually by reloading OptiSet Plus (or completely clearing it) or it will reoccur.
Diagnostic Procedure
1. OptiSet Plus File is Available: If the correct OptiSet Plus File is available, sending the OptiSet Plus File to the
ServiceWatch Data Logger will transfer the correct Temperature Profiles to both the Base Controller and the HMI
Control Panel.
The OptiSet Plus Temperature Profiles in the Base Controller and HMI Control Panel now match. Alarm Code 157
can be cleared manually.
2. OptiSet Plus File is Not Available: Sending an OptiSet Plus Reset using the WinTrac Service Tool will reset both the
Base Controller and the HMI Control Panel to OptiSet defaults. All OptiSet Plus Temperature Profiles will be cleared
from both the Base Controller and HMI Control Panel – OptiSet Plus will be set to factory defaults with Numeric
Settings only.
I m p o r t a n t : The OptiSet Plus Reset selection in Guarded Access Menu may not be available. An OptiSet Plus Reset
can still be performed using the WinTrac Service Tool.
I m p o r t a n t : The WinTrac Service Tool OptiSet Plus Reset will occur deceivingly fast and is not reported as successful
by the WinTrac Service Tool. However, the OptiSet Plus Reset will be performed.
There are no OptiSet Plus Temperature Profiles in either the Base Controller or HMI Control Panel. Alarm Code 157
can be cleared manually.
3. Alternative Action if OptiSet Plus File is Not Available: Perform an HMI Control Panel Cold Start in accordance with
Service Procedure A07B. The HMI Control Panel will be reset to defaults and all OptiSet Plus Temperature Profiles
will be cleared from the HMI. OptiSet Plus will be set to factory defaults with Numeric Settings only.
I m p o r t a n t : The CargoWatch Data Logger will also be cleared. Download the CargoWatch Data Logger before
performing a Cold Start.
There are no OptiSet Plus Temperature Profiles in the Base Controller or HMI Control Panel. Alarm Code 157 can be
cleared manually.
4. Allow Alarm Code 157 to remain set: Alarm Code 157 OptiSet Plus Profile Mismatch can be left set temporarily, only
Numeric Setpoints will be available.

OptiSet File Mismatch - A Long String of Numbers is Present in Lieu of Named Products but
Alarm Code 157 is Not Present
If the HMI Control Panel is Replaced or Cold Started:
1. If OptiSet Plus with Named Products is in use and the HMI Control Panel is Cold Started or replaced with a new HMI
Control Panel, the Named Temperature Profiles are deleted by the Cold Start or do not exist in the replacement HMI
Control Panel but still exist in the Base Controller. The following conditions will exist:

260 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

a. A long string of numbers will be shown in place of Named Product names.

b. The OptiSet Plus Reset can be performed using either the Guarded Access Menu or the WinTrac Service Tool.
2. Corrective Action
a. OptiSet Plus File is Available: If the correct OptiSet Plus File is available, sending the OptiSet Plus File to the
ServiceWatch Data Logger will transfer the correct Temperature Profiles to both the Base Controller and the HMI
Control Panel.
The OptiSet Plus Temperature Profiles in the Base Controller and HMI Control Panel now match. The Named
Profiles will now be present in lieu of the long strings of numbers.
b. OptiSet Plus File is Not Available: Sending an OptiSet Plus Reset using the Guarded Access Menu or the WinTrac
Service Tool will reset both the Base Controller and the HMI Control Panel to OptiSet defaults. All OptiSet Plus
Temperature Profiles will be cleared from both the Base Controller and HMI Control Panel – OptiSet Plus will be
set to factory defaults with Numeric Settings only.
I m p o r t a n t : The WinTrac Service Tool OptiSet Plus Reset will occur deceivingly fast and is not reported as
successful by the WinTrac Service Tool. However, the OptiSet Plus Reset will be performed.
There are no OptiSet Plus Temperature Profiles in either the Base Controller or HMI Control Panel.
c. Alternative Action if OptiSet Plus File is Not Available: Perform a Base Controller Cold Start in accordance with
Service Procedure A07A. The Base Controller will be reset to defaults. Record programmable settings before
performing the Cold Start and re-program all settings after the Cold Start is completed. Clear all alarm codes. All
OptiSet Plus Temperature Profiles will be cleared – OptiSet Plus will be set to factory defaults with Numeric
Settings only.
I m p o r t a n t : All Guarded Access Programmable Feature settings will be cleared and set to factory defaults.
Record all Guarded Access settings before performing the Cold Start. All Guarded Access Settings
must be set to the recorded values or customer specifications before releasing the unit for service.
There are no OptiSet Plus Temperature Profiles in either the Base Controller or HMI Control Panel.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 261
Section 5 - Diagnostics

158 PRIMARY (NEW) SOFTWARE FAILED TO LOAD

Alarm Type
Check
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
Considerations
Base Controller Software flash loads via the WinTrac Service Tool, USB Flash Drive, or other methods are all performed
and checked in the same manner.
How Alarm is Set
When new software is being flash loaded to a Base Controller, the current revision software is held intact until the new
revision software is installed and verified. If the flash load is unsuccessful, the Base Controller will continue to operate
with the current revision software and Alarm Code 158 will be set as a Check Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared automatically when the new software is successfully flash loaded. The alarm can be cleared
manually, but will return when the unit power is switched off and back on.
Diagnostic Procedure
Retry the flash load procedure.

159 CHECK BATTERY CONDITION

Alarm Type
Log
Associated Alarm Codes
N/A
Considerations
1. This feature is included in the Guarded Access Menu to provide users with an alarm which can indicate that the
main system battery is not performing well (discharging very quickly). Applicable for both diesel and electric mode.
The alarm can be enabled or disabled through the HMI Guarded Access Menu or preset using Optiset (default is
disabled).
2. The counter will be cleared whenever any restart other than low voltage restart occurs. The counter will also be
cleared whenever the timer expires.
3. The counter for consecutive low battery restarts will be cleared whenever any restart other than low voltage restart
occurs. The counter for consecutive low battery restarts, which is different from the counter in #1 below, will be
cleared when the timer expires.
How Alarm is Set
1. Three consecutive (i.e., counter is not cleared in-between) low battery voltage restarts will cause Alarm Code 159, if
it occurs within an adjustable time frame (minimum = 1 minute, maximum = 60 minutes, default = 30 minutes) after
C/S null entries.
2. Two consecutive low battery voltage restarts occurring within an adjustable time frame (minimum = 1 minute,
maximum = 10 minutes, default = 5 minutes) after C/S null entries.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check the battery and replace if necessary.
2. Review the ServiceWatch download to check the number of “Non-running” starts during Cycle Sentry operation
(after C/S null entry).

262 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

3. Verify there are no third party devices connected to the unit which can drain the battery quickly due to a high current
draw.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 263
Section 5 - Diagnostics

203 CHECK DISPLAY RETURN AIR SENSOR

Alarm Type
Check or Shutdown during a Pretrip Test
Associated Alarm Codes
03 Return Control Air Sensor
11 Unit Controlling on Alternate Sensor
13 Sensor Calibration Check
92 Sensor Grades Not Set
Component Description and Location
This sensor is one of a pair of return air sensors. Both return air sensors must agree within specified limits. The sensor
associated with Alarm Code is used to display the temperature. The sensor is located next to the control return air
sensor in the return air stream. It is a graded sensor.
A brass clamp should be installed between the two return air sensors. This clamp increases the thermal coupling
between the sensors to provide more accurate temperature readings when the temperature is changing rapidly. Rapid
temperature changes may occur during pulldown or when the door has been opened. This clamp is not required on the
discharge air sensors.
Circuit Description
The display return air temperature sensor circuit is a two wire circuit. The RTRP-01 (+) wire connects the Base Controller
35 pin sensor connector J3 pin 21 to the blue sensor wire. The RTRN-01 (-) wire connects the Base Controller 35 pin
sensor connector J3 pin 32 to the brown sensor wire. The sensor wires are routed in the sensor harness and the sensor
is hard wired to the sensor harness.
Considerations
1. If the unit is controlling on return air temperature and a problem occurs with either return air sensor, the unit will
switch to Discharge Air Control and Alarm Code 11 will be set. The appropriate sensor alarm codes will also be set.
2. Sensor codes must be cleared from the Guarded Access Menu before Alarm Code 11 can be cleared.
3. Sensor grades must be correctly set to the actual grade of the sensor installed. Failure to do so may result in
nuisance sensor alarm codes.
4. Sensors should be positioned to minimize the potential for moisture entry where the wires enter the sensor shell.
Mount sensors with the barrel up and the wires down wherever possible.
5. Sensor alarms are classified as either Soft Failures or Hard Failures.
A Soft Failure is defined as erratic operation or sensor drift that exceeds acceptable tolerances. If this occurs, the
alarm code for the suspect sensor will be set along with Alarm Code 13. This indicates a potential problem that may
not be immediately apparent, and also shows that a hard failure as defined below did not occur. Alarm Code 13 is
always set if a soft failure occurs.
N o t e : Alarm Code 13 can be cleared by the driver, while sensor Alarm Codes 03, 04, 203, and 204 can only be
cleared from the Guarded Access Menu. If the unit has only Alarm Code 03, 04, 203, or 204 set when
inspected, that alarm code may have been originally set with Alarm Code 13. Checking the ServiceWatch data
logger download will indicate the conditions that existed when the failure occurred.
A Hard Failure is defined by an out of range sensor reading, typically caused by an open or shorted sensor,
connector, or harness conductor. The sensor display will show dashes if a hard failure occurs. If this occurs, only the
alarm code for that sensor will be set (such as Alarm Code 03 if the control return air sensor failed). Alarm Code 13
will not be set if a hard failure occurs.
N o t e : The controller may not be currently showing dashes for the sensor reading, but the alarm will be present
when the unit is inspected. If a sensor alarm code is set, a failure did occur at some point. Checking the
ServiceWatch data logger download will indicate when the hard failure occurred.
Programmable Features
This is a graded sensor. The sensor grade must be correctly set in the Guarded Access Menu.
How Alarm is Set
1. If the sensor reading is over 93°C (200°F) for 10 seconds, Alarm Code 203 is set as a Check Alarm. The sensor
reading will display dashes [ - - - ] and may return to normal. This condition is termed a hard sensor failure.

264 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

2. If the sensor reading is under -46°C (-50°F) for 10 seconds, Alarm Code 203 is set as a Check Alarm. The sensor
reading will display dashes [ - - - ] and may return to normal. This condition is termed a hard sensor failure.
3. If the differential between the return air temperature and other temperature sensors is too large when Alarm Code
03 is cleared, Alarm Code 203 and Alarm Code 13 are set as Check Alarms. This condition is termed a soft sensor
failure.
4. If the sensor reading is erratic over time but does not go above 93°C (200°F) or below -46°C (-50°F), Alarm Code 203
and Alarm Code 13 are set as Check Alarms. This condition is termed a soft sensor failure.
5. If the sensor grade for this sensor is set to 5H, Alarm Code 203 and Alarm Code 92 are set as Check Alarms.
6. The temperatures of the control return air sensor and display return air sensor twins are not within a specified
range. If the faulty sensor can be determined, only the alarm code for that sensor and Alarm Code 13 will be set.
Alarm Codes 03, 203, and 13 are set if the faulty sensor cannot be determined.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm can only be cleared manually from the Guarded Access menu.
When the alarm is cleared, the return air sensors, discharge air sensors, and evaporator coil sensor must all read within
17°C (30°F) of each other. If they do not, it is assumed that the sensor reading is not accurate. The alarm code is not
cleared and Alarm Code 13 will also be set. Also, if the sensor is over or under range when the alarm clear is attempted,
the alarm will not be cleared.
If the alarm is set by Condition #5 above, Alarm Code 92 will clear automatically if the sensor grade is changed from 5H.
If the sensor grade remains 5H, Alarm Code 92 cannot be cleared.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
• Alarm Code 203 (Sensor was out of range):
1. Display the sensor reading using the Sensor Menu. If the display shows [- - - -], the sensor is defective and
should be replaced. If the condition still exists, check the sensor circuit for an open wire or short to ground (Refer
to Service Procedure D01A). Check the Base Controller in accordance with Service Procedure A01A.
2. If the display is normal, proceed as shown below.
• Alarm Code 203 and Alarm Code 13 (Sensor drifted or was reading erratically):
1. Review the ServiceWatch data logger and check the senor reading at the time the alarm was set. Also, review the
history to see if previous alarm codes exist that would indicate an intermittent problem. If the sensor appears to
have read incorrectly, it should be replaced.
2. Verify the sensor grades are set to the actual sensor grade.
3. Check for an airflow obstruction and correct sensor mounting.
4. If the problem reoccurs, check the sensor connector/sensor circuit in accordance with Service Procedure D01A.
• Alarm Code 203 and Alarm Code 92 (Sensor grade set to 5H):
1. Verify and set the sensor grade.
• Alarm Code 03 and/or Alarm Code 203 are set with Alarm Code 13 (Dual sensors don’t agree):
1. Review the ServiceWatch data logger and check the sensor readings at the time the alarm was set. Also, review
the history to see if previous alarm codes exist that would indicate the problem sensor. If a sensor appears to
have read incorrectly, it should be replaced.
2. Check for an airflow obstruction and correct sensor mounting. Verify the brass clamp is installed on the two
return air sensors.
3. Verify the sensor grades are set to the actual sensor grade and are not transposed.
4. If the offending sensor cannot be determined, either ice bath both return air sensors simultaneously to
determine which sensor is inaccurate or replace both sensors.
• If all or many of the Sensor Alarm Codes (02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 11, 12, 203, and 204) are set:
1. Verify the 35 pin Base Controller sensor connector J3 is securely connected.
2. Check the Base Controller in accordance with Service Procedure A01A.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 265
Section 5 - Diagnostics

204 CHECK DISPLAY DISCHARGE AIR SENSOR

Alarm Type
Check or Shutdown during a Pretrip Test
Associated Alarm Codes
04 Discharge Air Control Sensor
11 Unit Controlling on Alternate Sensor
13 Sensor Calibration Check
92 Sensor Grades Not Set
Component Description and Location
This sensor is one of a pair of dual discharge air sensors. Both discharge air sensors must agree within specified limits.
The sensor associated with Alarm Code 204 is used to display the temperature. The sensor is located next to the display
discharge air sensor in the discharge air stream. It is a graded sensor.
Circuit Description
The discharge air temperature sensor circuit is a two wire circuit. The DTRP-01 (+) wire connects the Base Controller 35
pin sensor connector J3 pin 22 to the blue sensor wire. The DTRN-01 (-) wire connects the Base Controller 35 pin sensor
connector J3 pin 33 to the brown sensor wire. The sensor wires are routed in the sensor harness and the sensor is hard
wired to the sensor harness.
Considerations
1. If the unit is controlling on discharge air temperature, and a problem occurs with either discharge air sensor, the
unit will switch to Return Air Control and Alarm Code 11 will be set. The appropriate sensor alarm codes will also be
set.
2. Sensor codes must be cleared from the Guarded Access Menu before Alarm Code 11 can be cleared.
3. Sensor grades must be correctly set to the actual grade of the sensor installed. Failure to do so may result in
nuisance sensor alarm codes.
4. Sensors should be positioned to minimize the potential for moisture entry where the wires enter the sensor shell.
Mount sensors with the barrel up and the wires down wherever possible.
5. Sensor alarms are classified as either Soft Failures or Hard Failures.
A Soft Failure is defined as erratic operation or sensor drift that exceeds acceptable tolerances. If this occurs, the
alarm code for the suspect sensor will be set along with Alarm Code 13. This indicates a potential problem that may
not be immediately apparent, and also shows that a hard failure as defined below did not occur. Alarm Code 13 is
always set if a soft failure occurs.
N o t e : Alarm Code 13 can be cleared by the driver, while sensor Alarm Codes 03, 04, 203, and 204 can only be
cleared from the Guarded Access Menu. If the unit has only Alarm Code 03, 04, 203, or 204 set when
inspected, that alarm code may have been originally set with Alarm Code 13. Checking the ServiceWatch data
logger download will indicate the conditions that existed when the failure occurred.
A Hard Failure is defined by an out of range sensor reading, typically caused by an open or shorted sensor,
connector, or harness conductor. The sensor display will show dashes if a hard failure occurs. If this occurs, only the
alarm code for that sensor will be set (such as Alarm Code 03 if the control return air sensor failed). Alarm Code 13
will not be set if a hard failure occurs.
N o t e : The controller may not be currently showing dashes for the sensor reading, but the alarm will be present
when the unit is inspected. If a sensor alarm code is set, a failure did occur at some point. Checking the
ServiceWatch data logger download will indicate when the hard failure occurred.
Programmable Features
This is a graded sensor. The sensor grade must be correctly set in the Guarded Access Menu.
How Alarm is Set
1. If the sensor reading is over 93°C (200°F) for 10 seconds, Alarm Code 204 is set as a Check Alarm. The sensor
reading will display dashes [ - - - ] and may return to normal. This condition is termed a hard sensor failure.
2. If the sensor reading is under -46°C (-50°F) for 10 seconds, Alarm Code 204 is set as a Check Alarm. The sensor
reading will display dashes [ - - - ] and may return to normal. This condition is termed a hard sensor failure.

266 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

3. If the differential between the discharge and other sensors is too large when Alarm Code 04 is cleared, Alarm Code
204 and Alarm Code 13 are set as Check Alarms. This condition is termed a soft sensor failure.
4. If the sensor reading is erratic over time but does not go above 93°C (200°F) or below -46°C (-50°F), Alarm Code 204
and Alarm Code 13 are set as Check Alarms. This condition is termed a soft sensor failure.
5. If the sensor grade for this sensor is set to 5H, Alarm Code 204 and Alarm Code 92 are set as Check Alarms.
6. The temperatures of the control discharge air sensor and display discharge air sensor twins are not within a
specified range. If the faulty sensor can be determined, only the alarm code for that sensor and Alarm Code 13 will
be set. Alarm Codes 04, 204, and 13 are set if the faulty sensor cannot be determined.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm can only be cleared manually from the Guarded Access Menu.
When the alarm is cleared, the return air sensors, discharge air sensors, and evaporator coil sensor must all read within
17°C (30°F) of each other. If they do not, it is assumed that the sensor reading is not accurate. The alarm code is not
cleared and Alarm Code 13 will also be set. Also, if the sensor is over or under range when the alarm clear is attempted,
the alarm will not be cleared.
If the alarm is set by Condition #5 above, Alarm Code 92 will clear automatically if the sensor grade is changed from 5H.
If the sensor grade remains 5H, Alarm Code 92 cannot be cleared.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
• Alarm Code 204 (Sensor was out of range):
1. Display the sensor reading using the Sensor Menu. If the display shows [- - - -], the sensor is defective and
should be replaced. If the condition still exists, check the sensor circuit for an open wire or short to ground (Refer
to Service Procedure D01A). Check the Base Controller in accordance with Service Procedure A01A.
2. If the display is normal, proceed as shown below.
• Alarm Code 204 and Alarm Code 13 (Sensor drifted or was reading erratically):
1. Review the ServiceWatch data logger and check the senor reading at the time the alarm was set. Also, review the
history to see if previous alarm codes exist that would indicate an intermittent problem. If the sensor appears to
have read incorrectly, it should be replaced.
2. Verify the sensor grades are set to the actual sensor grade.
3. Check for an airflow obstruction and correct sensor mounting.
4. If the problem reoccurs, check the sensor connector/sensor circuit in accordance with Service Procedure D01A.
• Alarm Code 204 and Alarm Code 92 (Sensor grade set to 5H):
1. Verify and set the sensor grade.
• Alarm Code 04 and/or Alarm Code 204 are set with Alarm Code 13 (Dual sensors don’t agree):
1. Review the ServiceWatch data logger and check the sensor readings at the time the alarm was set. Also, review
the history to see if previous alarm codes exist that would indicate the problem sensor. If a sensor appears to
have read incorrectly, it should be replaced.
2. Check for an airflow obstruction and correct sensor mounting.
3. Verify the sensor grades are set to the actual sensor grade and are not transposed.
4. If the offending sensor cannot be determined, either ice bath both return air sensors simultaneously to
determine which sensor is inaccurate or replace both sensors.
• If all or many of the Sensor Alarm Codes (02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 11, 12, 203, and 204) are set:
1. Verify the 35 pin Base Controller sensor connector J3 is securely connected.
2. Check the Base Controller in accordance with Service Procedure A01A.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 267
Section 5 - Diagnostics

252 AUTO FRESH AIR EXCHANGE DOOR (AFAED)

N o t e : SB Units Only.
Alarm Type
Check or Shutdown
Associated Alarm Codes
111 Unit Not Configured Correctly
Component Description and Location
Fresh Air Exchange allows fresh outside air to be drawn into the trailer and the interior air to be exhausted. This feature
is beneficial when hauling loads that release gas as they ripen, such as potatoes. The Fresh Air Exchange feature should
be used exactly as specified by the customer.
I m p o r t a n t : The Fresh Air Exchange feature is only available with setpoints above 0°C (32°F). The feature is disabled
with setpoints of 0°C (32°F) and below.
A Damper Solenoid and mechanical linkage is used to open and close the Fresh Air Exchange door.
Circuit Description
The Fresh Air Exchange circuit is a two wire circuit. The Fresh Air Exchange Solenoid is energized by Relay K8 and Fuse
F11 on the Base Controller. The AFA wire applies 12 Vdc to one side of the Fresh Air Exchange Solenoid to energize the
solenoid. The CHAFA wire connects the other side of the solenoid to chassis ground at the ground plate near the unit
battery. The solenoid is not polarity sensitive, but the suppression diode must be installed with the bar end of the diode
toward the AFA wire. The wires are routed in the main harness.
The Fresh Air Reed Switch is closed when the fresh air door is closed and open when the fresh air door is open. Wire
numbers AFASW and CHSW supply door position information to the microprocessor digital input at J7 pin 19.
Considerations
In normal operation, the Auto Fresh Air Solenoid is energized only when the unit engine is running.
How Alarm is Set
1. When the Fresh Air Exchange Solenoid is energized, the fresh air door will open and the Auto Fresh Air Reed Switch
will also be open. If a mismatch exists between the Fresh Air Exchange and the Auto Fresh Air Reed Switch, up to
three additional attempts to open the door will be made by de-energizing and energizing the Fresh Air Exchange
Solenoid at one second intervals. If the door still fails to open as indicated by the Auto Fresh Air Reed Switch, Alarm
Code 252 is set as a Check Alarm. The Fresh Air Exchange Solenoid will remain energized to open the door if
conditions change (e.g., should some ice melt that was restricting door movement).
2. If during a Pretrip Test the unit is configured with Fresh Air Exchange and current is greater than 0.5 amps when the
Fresh Air Exchange Solenoid is energized, Alarm Code 252 is set as a Check Alarm.
3. If during a Pretrip Test the unit is configured with Fresh Air Exchange and current does not return to less than or
equal to 0.5 amps when de-energized, Alarm Code 252 is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm is cleared manually.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the WinTrac Service Tool. Review the data using Technician
Level to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
1. Check the operation of the Fresh Air Exchange circuit using Interface Board Test Mode. Verify the Fresh Air
Exchange LED 22 illuminates.
2. Use the HMI Control Panel amps gauge to check the current drawn by the Fresh Air Exchange Solenoid while
operating the Fresh Air Exchange Door with Interface Board Test Mode. The current draw should be approximately
6 amps.
3. Energize the Fresh Air Exchange Solenoid using Interface Board Test Mode and check for battery voltage on the AFA
circuit. If voltage is present and no current was measured in the step above, replace the Fresh Air Exchange
Solenoid.

268 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 5 - Diagnostics

4. Verify that the Auto Fresh Air Reed Switch is closed when the fresh air door is closed and open when the fresh air
door is open. Battery voltage should be present at J7 pin 19 when the switch is open (door is open). Zero volts
should be present at J7 pin 19 when the switch is closed (door is closed).
5. Inspect the Fresh Air Exchange mechanical components for binding or ice buildup.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 269
Section 6 - Service Procedures
A01A - Base Controller Functional Test
Purpose:
To confirm proper operation of the SR-3 Base Controller.
Materials Required:
• Fluke Digital Multimeter
Operation:
Base Controller
• LED 21 Application Micro: Heartbeat - two flashes (approximately one second pause)
Important Notes:
• Always do a quick visual inspection of all connectors to verify that they are seated prior to replacing a component.
Correct any issue identified prior to completing the following Procedure. Check the following:
N o t e : Any external component attached to the Base Controller that is not properly operating may impact the
operation of the Base Controller.
– Gaskets properly seated.
– Wires and pins properly seated into connector body.
– Loose pins, wires, or connections.
– Signs of corrosion on connectors, fuse holders, etc.
– If any open fuses, check harness for pinched/chafed wires or cut jackets.
– Battery terminals for loose connections.
– Security of frame grounds.
– F10 fuse correctly positioned (downward = normal). If F10 fuse is in bypass position (upward), auto start may
result.
• This procedure only checks circuits, inputs, outputs, etc. For a complete automated test of the Base Controller, refer
to Service Procedure A01A-1.
Procedure:
To complete this procedure, refer to the Figures on the following pages.

270 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 6 - Service Procedures

Figure 165. Base Controller Functional Test

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 271
Section 6 - Service Procedures

Figure 166. Base Controller Functional Test

272 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 6 - Service Procedures

Figure 167. Base Controller Functional Test

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 273
Section 6 - Service Procedures

A01A-1 - Base Controller Automated Test

Purpose:
To confirm proper operation of the Base Controller.
Materials Required:
Diagnostic Tool (P/N 204-1930)
N o t e : Refer to Section 7 for details.
Operation:
Base Controller - LED 21 Application Micro (Heartbeat)
• Flashing once per second - Indicates normal Base Controller operation.
• Flashing several times per second - Indicates the Base Controller is in flash load mode. Flash loading the controller
usually resolves this situation. If this condition cannot be resolved, the Base Controller may need to be replaced.
Refer to the Regional Service Department if condition cannot be corrected.
• Always off - Indicates the Base Controller is not operating. This may occur for reasons other than a defective Base
Controller. Verify power is available, all connections are secure, and harnesses are in good condition. Verify the unit
battery is not dead. Check the unit fuses.
• Always on - Indicates the Base Controller is rebooting or is under test by the Diagnostic Tool. If this condition cannot
be resolved, the Base Controller must be replaced.
Important Notes:
• The Diagnostic Tool Software provides detailed and illustrated on-screen instructions for connecting the Diagnostic
Tool and performing the tests. Follow the instructions carefully. The instructions in this Service Procedure are
intended to support the instructions provided by the software, not replace them.
• When using the Diagnostic Tool, supply power from a known good battery, a suitable power supply, or by
connecting a battery charger to the unit battery. Low voltage caused by a low unit battery will affect the test results.
The threshold for battery power influencing test results is about 11.5 Vdc.
• When testing a Base Controller, supply power to the Base Controller power connections as shown in the
instructions. Do not supply power to the Diagnostic Tool. Supplying power to the Diagnostic Tool may result in a
communication failure.
• If communications problems have been experienced with the components under test, the CAN Test should be
performed. The CAN Test cannot be run without a USB to CAN Adaptor and a CAN Test Cable as shown below.

The USB Connector on the adaptor cable is attached to the test PC The 9 Pin Connector on the cable is attached to the 9 pin connector
computer. The 9 Pin Connector on the blue adaptor body is attached on the USB to CAN Adaptor body. The Red J1 Connector is attached
to the CAN Test Cable. to the J1 Connector on the Blue Diagnostic Tool.

• Verify all connections are secure when attaching the tester and reconnecting the unit wiring harnesses.
• If a component fails the test, verify all wiring is correctly connected.
• Complete the Control System Warranty Report (TK 54903-9-FO) if the repair is covered under warranty. This
Warranty Report, as well as a printed copy of the Diagnostic Tool Test Report is necessary to process a warranty

274 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 6 - Service Procedures

claim. In addition, appropriate ServiceWatch and CargoWatch data logger downloads that relate to the issue can be
extremely helpful for failure analysis studies.
Table 24. Procedure
Step Action Result Comments

1 Turn the Microprocessor On/Off switch Failure to do so may damage the unit
off. components.

2 Start the TK Diagnostic Tool software on The TK Diagnostic Tool Software provides
the computer. illustrated step by step connection and test
instructions.

3 Diagnostic Tool software version 4.x will If the prompt does not appear, you are
prompt the technician to use the correct using software prior to Revision 4.1. This
Diagnostic Tool. software will not test SR-3 Base Controller
assemblies.

4 From the Diagnostic Tool software menu,

select “SR-3 Series - English”.

5 Left click RUN SELECTED TEST.

6 Confirm the test selection by left clicking

RUN TEST WITH SERVICE REPORT.

7 Follow the prompts to connect the

Diagnostic Tool to the unit Base Controller
assembly and perform the test.

8 When the test is complete, the results will

be reported on the computer.

9 If the assembly failed the test, check the The test results will indicate if a problem
test results for possible causes and exists with the Base Controller.
correct as directed.

10 Retest the assembly if necessary to If the component fails the test, verify the
confirm the test results. wiring is correctly connected.

11 Record the data as requested by the test Complete the Control System Warranty
report. Report (TK 54903-9-FO) if the repair is
covered under warranty. The form is
included with the replacement component.

12 Print the test report for future use. A copy of the Diagnostic Tool Test Report is
also necessary to process a warranty
claim.

13 Disconnect the Diagnostic Tool and Verify all connectors are secure and
reconnect the unit harnesses and wires. harnesses are properly routed and held in
place with tie bands.

14 After repairs are completed, perform a

Full Pretrip Test to confirm unit operation.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 275
Section 6 - Service Procedures

A01B - HMI Control Panel Automated Test

Purpose:
To confirm proper operation of the HMI Control Panel.
Materials Required:
Diagnostic Tool (P/N 204-1930)
N o t e : Refer to Section 7 for details.
Important Notes:
• The Diagnostic Tool Software provides detailed and illustrated on-screen instructions for connecting the Diagnostic
Tool and performing the tests. Follow the instructions carefully. The instructions in this Service Procedure are
intended to support the instructions provided by the software, not replace them.
• When using the Diagnostic Tool, supply power from a known good battery, a suitable power supply, or by
connecting a battery charger to the unit battery. Low voltage caused by a low unit battery will affect the test results.
The threshold for battery power influencing test results is about 11.5 Vdc.
• When testing an HMI Control Panel, supply power to the Diagnostic Tool power connections as shown in the
instructions.
• If communications problems have been experienced with the components under test, the CAN Test should be
performed. The CAN Test cannot be run without a USB to CAN Adaptor and a CAN Test Cable as shown below.

The USB Connector on the adaptor cable is attached to the test PC The 9 Pin Connector on the cable is attached to the 9 pin connector
computer. The 9 Pin Connector on the blue adaptor body is attached on the USB to CAN Adaptor body. The Red J1 Connector is attached
to the CAN Test Cable. to the J1 Connector on the Blue Diagnostic Tool.

• Verify all connections are secure when attaching the tester and reconnecting the unit wiring harnesses.
• If a component fails the test, verify all wiring is correctly connected.
• Complete the SR-3 Control System Warranty Report (TK 54903-9-FO) if the repair is covered under warranty. This
Warranty Report, as well as a printed copy of the Diagnostic Tool Test Report is necessary to process a warranty
claim. In addition, appropriate ServiceWatch and CargoWatch data logger downloads that relate to the issue can be
extremely helpful for failure analysis studies.
Table 25. Procedure
Step Action Result Comments

1 Turn the Microprocessor On/Off switch Failure to do so may damage the unit
off. components.

2 Start the TK Diagnostic Tool software on The TK Diagnostic Tool Software provides
the computer. illustrated step by step connection and test
instructions.

3 Diagnostic Tool software version 4.x will If the prompt does not appear, you are
prompt the technician to use the correct using software prior to Revision 4.1. This
Diagnostic Tool. software will not test SR-3 HMI Control
Panel.

276 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 6 - Service Procedures

Table 25. Procedure (continued)

Step Action Result Comments

4 From the Diagnostic Tool software menu, Figure here

select “SR-3 Series - English”.

5 Left click RUN SELECTED TEST.

6 Confirm the test selection by left clicking

RUN TEST WITH SERVICE REPORT.

7 Follow the prompts to connect the

Diagnostic Tool to the HMI Control Panel
and perform the test.

8 When the test is complete, the results will

be reported on the computer.

9 If the HMI Control Panel failed the test, The test results will indicate if a problem
check the test results for possible causes exists with the HMI Control Panel.
and correct as directed.

10 Retest the HMI Control Panel if necessary If the component fails the test, verify the
to confirm the test results. wiring is correctly connected.

11 Record the data as requested by the test Complete the SR-3 Control System
report. Warranty Report (TK 54903-9-FO) if the
repair is covered under warranty. The form
is included with the replacement
component.

12 Print the test report for future use. A copy of the Diagnostic Tool Test Report is
also necessary to process a warranty
claim.

13 Disconnect the Diagnostic Tool and Verify all connectors are secure and
reconnect the unit harnesses and wires. harnesses are properly routed and held in
place with tie bands.

14 After repairs are completed, perform a

Full Pretrip Test to confirm unit operation.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 277
Section 6 - Service Procedures

A01C - HMI Control Panel Self Test

Purpose:
To confirm proper operation of the HMI Control Panel using the built in Display Self Test.
Operation:
The following procedure allows the technician to determine if the HMI Control Panel is operating properly using the
built in HMI Self Tests.
Important Notes:
• Replace only one component at a time to verify the problem component is correctly identified.
Table 26. Procedure
Step Action Result Comments

HMI Control Panel Self Test

1 To access the Maintenance Menu, press

the MENU key.

2 The Maintenance Menu is accessed from

the first Main Menu screen that appears;
either the Language Display or the Alarms
Display. Press and hold both the
unlabeled soft key and the Exit Key for
five seconds.

3 The first Maintenance Menu feature will

appear. Press the UP and DOWN Keys to
scroll through the Maintenance Menu
choices. When DISPLAY SELF TEST is
shown on the display, press the SELECT
Key to access it.

4 The DISPLAY SELF TEST menu appears.

The available tests are shown below.

5 Press the UP and DOWN Keys to scroll

through the Display Self Test Menu
choices.

6 When DISPLAY SELF TEST is shown on

the display, press the SELECT Key to
access it.

7 When the individual test is complete

another test can be selected.

8 When testing is finished press EXIT to

return to the Maintenance Menu.

Available Tests:
• L C D T e s t – This test allows the technician to select a normal or inverted display. If inverted is chosen the display is
reversed – segments that were turned on are now turned off and segments that were turned off are now turned on.
The technician visually verifies that all display segments are functioning properly.
• K e y p a d T e s t – This test prompts the technician to press the four soft keys, the Defrost Key and the Cycle Sentry
Key. Each time the requested key is pressed the next prompt is displayed, allowing the technician to verify proper
operation of these keys.
• B a c k l i g h t T e s t – This test allows the technician to turn the backlight on and off to confirm operation.
• B r i g h t n e s s T e s t – This test allows the technician to select Low, Medium or High backlight intensity.
• B u z z e r T e s t – This test allows the technician to turn the HMI buzzer on and off to verify operation.
• H e a t e r O u t p u t – This test allows the technician to turn the HMI display heater on and off.
• U n i t O n / O f f O u t p u t T e s t – This test allows the technician to turn the Unit On/Off output off. This turns the unit off to
confirm that the output can be turned off. To restart the unit, press the On key.
• S P R D i g i t a l O u t p u t T e s t – This test allows the technician to turn digital output 2 on and off. This allows the
operation of a device attached to this output to be checked.

278 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 6 - Service Procedures

• S e r i a l E 2 – This test allows the technician to perform an internal HMI memory test. The test takes less than one
second and the results are reported as PASS or FAIL.
• D a t a l o g F l a s h – This test allows the technician to perform an internal HMI CargoWatch data logger memory test.
The test takes less than one second and the results are reported as PASS or FAIL.
• R T C U p d a t e – This test allows the technician to perform an internal HMI real time clock test. The test takes less than
three seconds and the results are reported as PASS or FAIL.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 279
Section 6 - Service Procedures

A02A - Recording Existing Programmable Feature Settings

Purpose:
To retrieve and record the sensor grades and programmable feature settings of an SR-3 Base Controller.
Materials Required:
• A copy of the Setup Sheet at the end of this Service Procedure.
Operation:
• The settings of the graded sensors and all programmable features must be retrieved before replacing a Base
Controller or performing a Base Controller Cold Start. These settings will then be duplicated in the replacement
Base Controller or after the Cold Start.
• The default settings are shown on the Setup Sheet at the end of this Service Procedure.
• If a sensor grade is not shown on the setup sheet, physically check the sensor to determine the grade. It is very
important that sensor grades be set properly.
• Refer to Section 3 for a complete description of programmable features.
Table 27. Procedure
Step Action Result Comments

1 Turn the unit on.

2 Press the MENU key. The Operator Menu appears. Do not let the unit start. The Guarded
Access Menu cannot be entered if the
unit is running.

3 Press and hold both the EXIT and unlabeled The Maintenance Menu appears.
soft key for five seconds.

4 Press the DOWN key as required to display

the Software Revision Menu. Then press the
SELECT key to enter the Software Revision
Menu.

5 Use the UP and/or DOWN keys to scroll Record the software revisions on the Setup
through the HMI Control Panel and Base Sheet.
Controller software revisions.

6 When the software revisions have been

recorded, press the EXIT key to return to the
Maintenance Menu.

7 Press the UP and DOWN key as required to The real time clock is located in the
display the Set Time and Date Menu. Then HMI Control Panel. The time is
press the SELECT key to enter the Set Time supplied to the Base Controller each
and Date Menu. time the unit is turned on. If the Base
Controller is changed, the clock
setting will be supplied to the Base
Controller when the unit is turned on.
If the HMI Control Panel is changed,
the time and date must be checked
and set if necessary.

8 Check the Time to determine the time zone Record the time zone on the Setup Sheet. Compare local time to unit time to
used by the customer. determine time zone.

9 When the time zone has been recorded, press

the EXIT key to return to the Maintenance
Menu.

10 Verify the unit is not running. The unit will not If the unit is running, scroll back and
enter the Guarded Access Menu if it is enter Interface Board Test Mode. This
running. will cause the unit to shut down.
Press the Exit key to return to the
Maintenance Menu. Scroll back to the
Set Time and Date Menu and proceed
with the next step.

11 Press and hold both the EXIT and unlabeled The Guarded Access Menu appears. If a Security Code is requested, enter
key for five seconds. the Security Code or [4444] to enter
the Guarded Access Menu.

280 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 6 - Service Procedures

Table 27. Procedure (continued)

Step Action Result Comments

12 The Programmable Features Menu will

appear. Press the SELECT key to enter the
Programmable Features Menu.

13 Use the UP and/or DOWN keys to scroll Record all Programmable Features settings
through all settings in the Programmable on the Setup Sheet.
Features Menu.

14 When all Programmable Features settings

have been recorded, press the EXIT key to
return to the Guarded Access Menu.

15 Use the UP and/or DOWN keys to scroll to the Use the Setup Sheet as a guide.
next Guarded Access Menu.

16 Use the SELECT key to enter the next Use the Setup Sheet as a guide.
Guarded Access Menu.

17 Use the UP and/or DOWN keys to scroll Record all Programmable Features settings
through all settings in the Menu. on the Setup Sheet.

18 Use the EXIT key to return to the Guarded

Access Menu.

19 Continue to use Steps 15 – 18 as required to The OptiSet Plus features will be

complete the Setup Sheet. retrieved at the end of this procedure
using a separate OptiSet Plus
Procedure. Refer to Service
Procedure A47B Retrieving and
Sending OptiSet Plus Configurations.

20 When all settings have been recorded, press

the EXIT key to return to the Guarded Access
Menu.

21 Press the EXIT key again to return to the

Standard Display.

22 Download the ServiceWatch and CargoWatch This information may be needed for
data loggers. diagnostics.

23 Download the OptiSet Plus settings using

Service Procedure A47B Setting Up OptiSet
Plus Features using the WinTrac Service Tool.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 281
Section 6 - Service Procedures

Setup Sheet - XXxx Software

I m p o r t a n t : Not all features shown on the Setup Sheet may appear. This is dependent on hardware type, software
revision, and unit settings.
Table 28. Software Revision
Function Default Setting Recorded Setting

HMI Control Panel XXxx

Base Controller XXxx

Table 29. Set Date and Time

Function Default Setting Recorded Setting

Time Zone As specified by customer

Compare local time to unit time to determine time zone. The real time clock is located in the HMI Control Panel. The time is supplied to the Base
Controller each time the unit is turned on. If the Base Controller is changed, the clock setting will be supplied to the Base Controller when the
unit is turned on. If the HMI Control Panel is changed, the time and date must be checked and set if necessary.

Table 30. Security Code

Function Default Setting Recorded Setting

Security Code as specified by customer None

Note: If an unknown security code is set, use Security Code 4444 to gain access.

Table 31. Programmable Features

Function Default Setting Recorded Setting

Temperature Units FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS

Pressure Units PSI

Restart Unit After Shutdown ENABLED

Setpoint High Limit 27°C (80°F)

Setpoint Low Limit -29°C (-20°F)

Fuel Saver II ENABLED

High Speed Pull Down ENABLED

Fresh Frozen Range -4°C (24°F) or -9°C (15°F)

Door Open Forces LOG ONLY

Door Open Timeout (HRS:MIN) 1 Hour

Sleep Mode After Pretrip DISABLED

Rail Option DISABLED

Rail Alternate (If Rail Option = ENABLED) DISABLED

Blocked Air Chute Detect DISABLED

Temperature Differential (If Blocked Air Chute = ENABLED) 2.8°C (5°F)

Time to Alarm (If Blocked Air Chute = ENABLED) 0:30

Door Open Override (If Blocked Air Chute = ENABLED) DISABLED

Discharge Pressure Setpoint 415 PSIG

Water Temperature Setpoint 99°C (210°F)

282 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 6 - Service Procedures

Table 31. Programmable Features (continued)

Function Default Setting Recorded Setting

Limited Alarm Restarts DISABLED

Remote Device DISABLED

COM 1 Default Baud Rate 1200

COM 2 Default Baud Rate 9600

COM 3 Default Baud Rate 9600

High Temperature Defrost DISABLED

Local Authorization of OS+ Upload (Not Currently Used)

Local Authorization of Flash Load (Not Currently Used)

Table 32. Main Menu Configuration

Function Default Setting Recorded Setting

Add Keypad Lockout to Mode Menu DISABLED

Add Sleep to Mode Menu DISABLED

Add Temperature Units to Mode Menu DISABLED

Table 33. Hourmeter Setup - Program Hourmeter

Function Default Setting Recorded Setting

Total Run Time Reminder # 1 Hours OFF

Total Run Time Reminder # 2 Hours OFF

Controller Power On Hours OFF

Pretrip Reminder Hours OFF

Engine Run Time Reminder # 1 OFF

Engine Run Time Reminder # 2 OFF

Electric Run Time Reminder # 1 OFF

Electric Run Time Reminder # 2 100 HOURS

Table 34. Hourmeter Setup - Viewable Hourmeter Setup

Function Default Setting Recorded Setting

Total Hours DISABLED

Total Run Time Hours ENABLED

Engine Hours ENABLED

Electric Hours ENABLED

Total Run Time Reminder # 1 Hours DISABLED

Total Run Time Reminder # 2 Hours DISABLED

Controller Power On Hours DISABLED

Pretrip Reminder Hours DISABLED

Engine Run Time Reminder # 1 Hours DISABLED

Engine Run Time Reminder # 2 Hours DISABLED

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 283
Section 6 - Service Procedures

Table 34. Hourmeter Setup - Viewable Hourmeter Setup (continued)

Function Default Setting Recorded Setting

Electric Run Time Reminder # 1 Hours DISABLED

Electric Run Time Reminder # 2 Hours DISABLED

Table 35. Hourmeter Setup - Programmable Service Due Date

Function Default Setting Recorded Setting

Engine Run Time Service Due Date DISABLED

Table 36. Sensor Calibration

Function Default Setting Recorded Setting

Control Return Air Sensor Grade 5H

Control Discharge Air Sensor Grade 5H

Display Return Air Sensor Grade 5H

Display Discharge Air Sensor Grade 5H

Spare 1 Sensor Grade 5H

Table 37. Cycle Sentry Setup

Function Default Setting Recorded Setting

Cycle Sentry Amps 5 AMPS

Cycle Sentry Battery Voltage 12.2 VOLTS

Check Battery Condition Alarm DISABLED

Table 38. Defrost Setup

Function Default Setting Recorded Setting

Defrost Interval In Range with Fresh Setpoint 6 HOURS

Defrost Interval Not In Range with Fresh Setpoint 4 HOURS

Defrost Interval In Range with Frozen Setpoint 6 HOURS

Defrost Interval Not In Range with Frozen Setpoint 4 HOURS

Maximum Defrost Duration 45 MINUTES

Table 39. Language Setup (First Language = 65/75/7Bxx, Second Language = 66/76/7Cxx, Third Language = 67/77/
7Dxx)
Function 65xx/75/7Bxx 66xx/76/7Cxx 67xx/77/7Dxx Default Setting Recorded
Setting

Default Language ENGLISH

Enable Language English English English ENABLED

Enable Language Spanish Danish Japanese DISABLED

Enable Language French Russian Chinese Mandarin DISABLED

Enable Language German Norwegian DISABLED

Enable Language Italian Swedish DISABLED

Enable Language Dutch Finnish DISABLED

284 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 6 - Service Procedures

Table 39. Language Setup (First Language = 65/75/7Bxx, Second Language = 66/76/7Cxx, Third Language = 67/77/
7Dxx) (continued)
Function 65xx/75/7Bxx 66xx/76/7Cxx 67xx/77/7Dxx Default Setting Recorded
Setting

Enable Language Portuguese Polish DISABLED

Enable Language Greek Hungarian DISABLED

Enable Language Turkish Romanian DISABLED

Enable Language Hebrew Bulgarian DISABLED

Enable Language Arabic Czech DISABLED

Table 40. Access Code Setup

Function Default Setting Recorded Setting

Enter Access Code NO CODE

Table 41. Sensor Configuration (CargoWatch)

Function Default Setting Recorded Setting

Logging Interval 15 Minutes

Table 42. Up to 6 Sensors may be Configured

Function Default 1 2 3 4 5 6

Sensor Logging 1-2 On, 3-6 Off

Sensor Name Log Sensor X

Out of Range Checking OFF

Low Limit -10.8°

High Limit 10.8°

Italian Logging OFF

Sensor Averaging OFF

Table 43. Up to 4 Digital Inputs may be Configured

Function Default 1 2 3 4

Door Open Logging 1 On, 2-4 Off

Digital Input #X Name Digital Input #X

Table 44. Countdown and Conservative Features

Function Default Setting Recorded Setting

Countdown OFF

Conservative OFF

These features allow extended data logging when the unit is turned off.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 285
Section 6 - Service Procedures

Table 45. SOT on Setpoint

Function Default Setting Recorded Setting

SOT on Setpoint DISABLED

If set Enabled, this feature sends a Start of Trip marker to the CargoWatch and
ServiceWatch Data Loggers any time the setpoint is changed.

Table 46. Unit Configuration

Function Default Setting Recorded Setting

Unit Type Trailer

Engine Type Yanmar 2.1

Compressor Type RECIP

ETV Configured YES

Electric Standby Equipped (Model 50) YES

Electric Heat Option (Model 50) YES

Electric Motor Type (14 HP Type, 24 HP Type) (Model 50) NO

Diesel to Electric Auto Switch Enabled (Model 50) NO

Electric to Diesel Auto Switch Enabled (Model 50) NO

Unit Model As Built

High Capacity Unit NO

High Capacity Fresh (If High Capacity = YES) NO

Defrost Motor Equipped NO

Fuel Sensor Type NONE

Rear Remote Control NONE

Rear Remote Control Action (If Rear Remote installed) Stand By

Pretrip/Sleep Switch Options DISABLED

3rd Party Device Control NONE

Low Fuel Shutdown DISABLED

Fresh Air Exchange DISABLED

286 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 6 - Service Procedures

A03A - Base Controller Replacement

Purpose:
To replace the Base Controller.
Materials Required:
• Cable ties
Operation:
The Base Controller is removed from the control box as an assembly.
Important Notes:
• It is very important that the correct Base Controller be used for replacement. Refer to Section 7 to determine the
required Base Controller for the application.
• It is very important that the correct Base Controller software be used. Base Controllers are supplied from Service
Parts with the most recent software at the time of manufacture. The anti-static shipping bags are also marked with
pertinent information. Refer to Section 7 to determine the required Base Controller software for the application.
Check the available software in the Asset Library for the current released software version.
• Some applications may require the 60 amp fuse be removed from the old Base Controller and installed in the
replacement Base Controller.
• Verify the harnesses are reconnected properly and do not place excessive strain on the connectors. Secure the
harnesses with cable ties as required.
Table 47. Procedure
Step Action Result Comments

1 Log the existing Base Controller settings This information will be used to set up the
using Service Procedure A02A. replacement Base Controller.

2 Turn the unit off.

3 Disconnect standby power, if connected.

4 Disconnect the unit battery. Some circuits are directly connected to the
unit battery.

5 Disconnect all harness connectors from the

Base Controller assembly.

6 Remove the screws securing the Base

Controller to the control box and remove
the Base Controller assembly from the
control box.

7 Install the new Base Controller assembly in

the control box.

8 Reconnect all harness connectors to the Apply Super Lube as needed. Verify all
Base Controller. connectors are securely mated and secure
the harnesses with cable ties as required.

9 Reconnect the unit battery.

10 Reconnect the standby power if needed.

11 Turn the unit on. The real time clock settings will be loaded
from the HMI Control Panel when the unit
is turned on.

12 Clear any alarm codes.

13 Set up all programmable features using

Service Procedure A04A.

14 Run a Pretrip Test to verify proper unit

operation.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 287
Section 6 - Service Procedures

A03B - HMI Control Panel Replacement

Purpose:
To replace the HMI Control Panel.
Materials Required:
• Cable ties
Operation:
The HMI Control Panel is removed from the control box door as an assembly.
Important Notes:
• It is very important that the correct HMI Control Panel software be used. HMI Control Panels are supplied from
Service Parts with the most recent software at the time of manufacture. The anti-static shipping bags are also
marked with pertinent information. Refer to Section 7 to determine the required HMI Control Panel software for the
application. Check the available software in the Asset Library for the current released software version.
• Verify the harnesses are reconnected properly and do not place excessive strain on the connectors. Secure the
harnesses with cable ties as required.
Table 48. Procedure
Step Action Result Comments

1 Turn the unit off.

2 Disconnect standby power, if connected.

3 Disconnect the unit battery.

4 Disconnect the harness connector from the

HMI Control Panel.

5 Remove the four screws securing the HMI

Control Panel to the control box and remove
the HMI Control Panel from the control box.

6 Install the new HMI Control Panel in the

control box.

7 Re-connect the harness connector to the HMI Verify all connectors are securely
Control Panel. Apply Super Lube as required. mated and secure the harnesses
with cable ties as required.

8 Reconnect the unit battery.

9 Reconnect the standby power if needed.

10 Turn the unit on. The programmable feature settings

will be loaded from the Base
Controller when the unit is turned
on.

11 Clear any alarm codes.

12 Check the setting of the real time clock and The clock may be set from the
correct if necessary. Maintenance Menu or with the
WinTrac Service Tool.

13 Run a Full Pretrip Test to verify proper unit

operation.

288 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 6 - Service Procedures

A04A - Programmable Feature Setup

Purpose:
To set the sensor grades and programmable features of an SR-3 Base Controller to customer specifications.
Materials Required:
• A completed copy of the Setup Sheet at the back of Service Procedure A02A Recording Existing Programmable
Feature Settings.
Operation:
• The settings of the graded sensors and all programmable features must be programmed after replacing a Base
Controller or performing a Base Controller Cold Start.
• Refer to Section 3 for a complete description of programmable features.
• The default settings are shown on the appropriate Setup Sheet at the back of Service Procedure A02A.
• If a sensor grade is not shown on the setup sheet, visually check the sensor to determine the grade. It is very
important that sensor grades be set properly.
Table 49. Procedure
Step Action Result Comments

1 Turn the unit on.

2 Press the MENU key. The Operator Menu appears.

3 Press and hold both the EXIT and unlabeled The Maintenance Menu appears.
key for five seconds.

4 Press the DOWN key as required to display

the Software Revision Menu.

5 Use the UP and/or DOWN keys to scroll Verify the Software revisions are as desired.
through the HMI Control Panel and Base
Controller software revisions.

6 When the software revisions have been

verified, press the EXIT key to return to the
Maintenance Menu.

7 Press the NEXT key as required to display the The real time clock is located in the
Set Time and Date Menu. Then press the HMI Control Panel. The time is
SELECT key to enter the Set Time and Date supplied to the Base Controller each
Menu. time the unit is turned on. If the Base
Controller is changed the clock
setting will be supplied to the Base
Controller when the unit is turned
on. If the HMI Control Panel is
changed the time and date must be
checked and set if necessary.

8 Verify that the Time is set to the time zone

used by the customer as shown on the setup
sheet.

9 When the time zone has been verified, press

the EXIT key to return to the Maintenance
Menu.

10 Verify the unit is not running. The unit will not If the unit is running, scroll back and
enter the Guarded Access Menu if it is enter Interface Board Test Mode.
running. This will cause the unit to shut down.
Press the Exit key to return to the
Maintenance Menu. Scroll back to
the Set Time and Date Menu and
proceed with the next step.

11 Press and hold both the EXIT and unlabeled The Guarded Access Menu appears. If a Security Code is requested, enter
key for five seconds. the Security Code or [4444] to enter
the Guarded Access Menu.

12 The Programmable Features Menu will

appear. Press the SELECT key to enter the
Programmable Features Menu.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 289
Section 6 - Service Procedures

Table 49. Procedure (continued)

Step Action Result Comments

13 Use the UP and/or DOWN keys to scroll Set all Programmable Features settings to
through all the features in the Programmable those shown on the Setup Sheet.
Features Menu.

14 When all Programmable Features have been

set, press the EXIT key to return to the
Guarded Access Menu.

15 Use the UP and/or DOWN keys to scroll to the Use the Setup Sheet as a guide.
next Guarded Access Menu.

16 Use the SELECT key to enter the next Use the Setup Sheet as a guide.
Guarded Access Menu.

17 Use the UP and/or DOWN keys to scroll Set all menu settings to those shown on the
through all settings in the Menu. Setup Sheet.

18 Use the EXIT key to return to the Guarded

Access Menu.

19 Continue to use Steps 15 – 18 as required to The OptiSet features are set up using
complete the Setup Sheet. the WinTrac Service Tool. Refer to
Service Procedure A47B.

20 When all settings have been recorded, press

the EXIT key to return to the Guarded Access
Menu.

21 Press the EXIT key again to return to the

Standard Display.

22 Set up the OptiSet features using Service

Procedure A47B.

23 Run a Pretrip Test to verify proper unit

operation.

290 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 6 - Service Procedures

A07A - Performing a Base Controller Cold Restart

Purpose:
To perform a Cold Restart on the Base Controller.
Materials Required:
• WinTrac Service Tool software loaded on a PC
Procedure:
Refer to the WinTrac Service Tool Tools Menu and select Cold Restart.

A07B - Performing an HMI Control Panel Cold Restart

Purpose:
To perform a Cold Restart on the HMI Control Panel.
Materials Required:
• WinTrac Service Tool software loaded on a PC
Procedure:
Refer to the WinTrac Service Tool Tools Menu and select Cold Restart.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 291
Section 6 - Service Procedures

A15A - Setting Unit Temperature Sensor Grade

Purpose:
To set the sensor grades of graded sensors.
Operation:
The following sensors are graded sensors and must be properly calibrated.
• For Single Temperature Units: The control and display return air temperature sensors and the control and display
discharge air temperature sensors are graded sensors. The Spare 1 temperature sensor is also a graded sensor.
• For Multi-Temperature Units: The return air temperature sensors and discharge air temperature sensors for all
zones are graded sensors. The three spare temperature sensors are also graded sensors.
Any time these sensors are replaced or a Cold Start is performed, the sensor grade must be correctly entered to verify
optimum performance of the unit. The sensor grade is stamped on the barrel of each sensor. Failure to properly
calibrate sensors may result in nuisance alarm codes.
Important Notes:
• Always record the marked sensor grades of any replacement return, discharge or spare temperature sensors. The
grade is required to complete the sensor calibration procedure.
• If any return air temperature or discharge air temperature sensor grade is set to 5H, Alarm Code 92 will be set.
Calibrating the sensor grades automatically clears Alarm Code 92. This alarm code does not apply to spare sensors.
However, when used, spare sensors should still be calibrated to achieve maximum accuracy.
Table 50. Procedure
Step Action Result Comments

1 Verify and record the sensor grades of all Alarm Code 92 does not apply to
return air, discharge air, and spare sensors (if spare sensors. However, when used,
used) by physically checking the sensor. spare sensors should still be
calibrated to achieve maximum
accuracy.

2 Turn the unit on.

3 Press the MENU key. The Main Menu appears.

4 Press and hold both the EXIT and unlabeled The Maintenance Menu appears.
key for five seconds.

5 Press the DOWN key as required to display The Set Time and Date Menu appears.
the Set Time and Date Menu.

6 Press and hold both the EXIT and unlabeled The Guarded Access Menu appears.
key for five seconds.

7 Press the DOWN key as required to display The Sensor Calibration Menu appears.
the Sensor Calibration Menu.

8 When the Sensor Calibration Menu is shown, The first graded sensor and the current
press the SELECT key to access the Sensor grade appear.
Calibration Menu.

9 If necessary, use the UP and/or DOWN keys These keys scroll through all graded sensors Verify the correct sensor is selected.
to select the sensor to be calibrated. installed on the unit.

10 When the sensor to be calibrated is shown on The Sensor Change Menu for the selected
the display, press the SELECT key. sensor will appear.

11 Use the “+” and “-” keys to change the

sensor grade to match the grade stamped on
the sensor.

12 When the correct grade is shown, press the

YES key to confirm the choice.

13 If necessary, repeat steps 9 – 12 to change

any other sensor grades that are not correct.

14 Press Exit to leave the Sensor Calibration

Menu.

292 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 6 - Service Procedures

Table 50. Procedure (continued)

Step Action Result Comments

15 If graded sensor alarms exist (Alarm Codes The Alarms Menu will appear.
03 and/or 04), use the BACK key to return to
the Alarms Menu in Guarded Access.

16 Press the SELECT key to enter the Alarms

Menu.

17 Press the CLEAR key to clear the sensor

alarms.

18 When finished, press the EXIT key several

times or turn the unit off to exit the Sensor
Calibration Menu.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 293
Section 6 - Service Procedures

A26A - Welding on Units Equipped with Base Controllers

Purpose:
To prevent damage to the Base Controller and other components during welding operations.
Operation:
Electric welding generates high amperage currents that can damage electrical and electronic components. In order to
minimize the possibility of damage the following procedures should be followed.
Table 51. Before Welding

Step Action Result Comments

1 Turn the unit off.

2 Disconnect standby power, if connected.

3 Disconnect both battery cables.

4 Connect the welder ground cable as close as

possible to the area where the welding is to
be performed. Move the welder ground cable
as required.

Table 52. After Welding

Step Action Result Comments

1 Reconnect both battery cables.

2 Reconnect the standby power if needed.

3 Perform a Pretrip Test to verify proper

operation.

294 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 6 - Service Procedures

A28A - Setting Unit Running Time Hourmeters

Purpose:
This procedure should be followed to set the fixed running time hourmeters such as Total Hours, Total Run Time Hours,
Engine Hours, Electric Run Time Hours, and Zone Run Hours after replacing a Base Controller with a new replacement
Base Controller.
Important Notes:
• Time can only be added if all hourmeters have less than 100 hours accumulated. If hourmeter time exceeds 100
hours, the hourmeter time can no longer be changed.
• If time in excess of 100 hours has been entered, the hourmeters can no longer be changed. Exercise care when
changing these hourmeter settings. Verify the correct number of hours are selected for each hourmeter.
• Do not allow the three minute Guarded Access keypad timeout to occur during this procedure. If the keypad times
out before all desired changes are made and a hourmeter exceeds 100 hours, the hourmeters can no longer be
changed.
• Do not exit hourmeter setup until all hourmeters have been set as required. Once the hourmeter setup has been
exited, this menu is locked out and the hourmeters can no longer be changed.
Table 53. Procedure
Step Action Result Comments

1 Determine the number of hours to be set on

each hourmeter. If the unit is a Model 50 unit,
verify the total of Engine Hours and Electric
Run Time Hours is equal to the number of
hours to be set as Total Run Time Hours.

2 Turn the unit on.

3 Press the MENU key. The Main Menu appears. Press the MENU key.

4 Press and hold both the EXIT and unlabeled The Maintenance Menu appears.
key for five seconds.

5 Press the NEXT key as required to display the

Set Time and Date Menu.

6 Press and hold both the EXIT and unlabeled The Guarded Access Menu appears.
key for five seconds. If a Security Code is
requested, enter the Security Code or [4444]
to enter the Guarded Access Menu.

7 Press the EXIT key to display the Hourmeter The Hourmeter Setup Menu appears.
Setup Menu.

8 Press the SELECT key to choose the

Hourmeter Setup Menu.

9 Press the SELECT key again to choose the

Program Hourmeter Menu.

10 Press the EXIT key to scroll to the last item in

the Program Hourmeter Menu. The NEXT key
will disappear.

11 Press and hold both the EXIT and unlabeled

Important: Do not exit the hourmeter setup or allow the Guarded Access keypad
key for five seconds.
timeout to occur during this procedure. If the keypad times out and an
This will add the non-programmable
hourmeter exceeds 100 hours, the hourmeters will be locked and can
hourmeters to the menu only if the number of
no longer be changed.
hours in these hourmeters are less than 100
hours.

12 Use the NEXT and/or BACK keys to show the

desired hourmeter. When the desired
hourmeter is shown, press the SELECT key to
chose it.

13 Change the value of the hourmeter by

pressing the + or - keys.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 295
Section 6 - Service Procedures

Table 53. Procedure (continued)

Step Action Result Comments

14 When the correct number of hours is shown,

Important: If time in excess of 100 hours has been entered the hourmeters can no
press the YES key to accept the change.
longer be changed. Exercise care when changing hourmeter settings.

15 Repeat Steps 12-14 as necessary to change

the remaining hourmeters.

16 When all hourmeters are set, press the EXIT

Important: If time in excess of 100 hours has been entered the hourmeters can no
key to return to the Program Hourmeter
longer be changed. Verify all settings are correct before leaving this
Menu.
menu.

296 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 6 - Service Procedures

A46A - Flash Loading Base Controller Software

Purpose:
To update software for the Base Controller using a computer and the WinTrac Service Tool.
Materials Required:
WinTrac application software loaded on a computer.
Flash Loading using USB Flash Drive:
Units equipped with a USB Port can flash load Base Controller software using a WinTrac Service Tool configured USB
Flash Drive. Refer to Section 4 for details.
Procedure:
Refer to the WinTrac Service Tool Tools Menu and select Flashload.

A46B - Flash Loading HMI Control Panel Software

Purpose:
To update software for the HMI Control Panel using a computer and WinTrac Service Tool.
Materials Required:
WinTrac application software loaded on a computer.
Flash Loading using USB Flash Drive:
Units equipped with a USB Port can flash load HMI Control Panel software using a WinTrac Service Tool configured
USB Flash Drive. Refer to Section 4 for details.
Procedure:
Refer to the WinTrac Service Tool Tools Menu and select Flash Load.

A47B - Retrieving and Sending OptiSet Plus Configurations

Purpose:
To retrieve and send OptiSet Plus configurations to and from the Base Controller using a computer and the WinTrac
Service Tool.
Procedure:
Refer to the WinTrac Service Tool OptiSet Plus function.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 297
Section 6 - Service Procedures

A48A - Phase Detect Module Operation and Diagnostics

Purpose:
To understand phase detect module operation and diagnostic procedures.
Description:
The phase detect module is designed to monitor three phase voltages from 160 volts AC to 510 volts AC.

WARNING
Hazardous Voltage!
Units featuring Electric Standby utilize 460, 400, or 230 volt 3 phase AC electrical power any time the unit is
operating in Electric Mode. This voltage potential is also present any time the unit is connected to a source of
external standby power. Extreme care must be used when working on the unit, as these voltages are capable
of causing serious injury or death.

Operation:
The brown, blue and black wires are used to sample the power at L1, L2 and L3 respectively. Operating power from 12
to 24 Vdc is supplied to the module via the 8 wire and CH wire.
When the voltage sensed rises above 180 volts AC and all three phases are present the module ER wire will output 12-
24 Vdc after the conditions exist for 2 to 4 seconds. This signal informs the base controller that electric standby
operation is possible. If the voltage drops below 160 volts AC or a phase is lost, the output is turned off after the
condition exists for 8 to 10 seconds. The module continues to monitor the power and will again output 12-24 Vdc within
2 to 4 seconds after the voltage rises above 180 volts AC and all three phases are present.
If phase rotation is L1, L2, L3, the 7EB wire will supply 12 to 24 Vdc to energize the appropriate phase rotation contactor.
If phase rotation is L1, L3, L2, the 7EC wire will supply a chassis ground to energize the appropriate phase rotation
contactor. The 7EB and 7EC wires are interlocked to prevent both phase contactors from being energized at once.
Connections:
Connections to the module are shown in the tables below.
Table 54. Power Connections
Input Description

8F Supplies nominal 12-24 volt DC power to the phase detect module.

CH Chassis ground.

Table 55. Inputs

Input Description

L1 This brown wire supplies standby power L1 to the phase detect module.

L2 This blue wire supplies standby power L2 to the phase detect module.

L3 This black wire supplies standby power L3 to the phase detect module.

298 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 6 - Service Procedures

Table 56. Outputs

Input Description

7EH With 12-24 Vdc is supplied, then outputs 7EB and 7EC will be at 12-24 Vdc.

7EB If phase rotation is L1, L2, L3, this wire will provide 12-24 Vdc to energize the appropriate phase rotation contactor. The 7EC wire is
interlocked to prevent both phase contactors from being energized at once.

7EC If phase rotation is L1, L3, L2, this wire will provide 12-24 Vdc to energize the appropriate phase rotation contactor. The 7EB wire is
interlocked to prevent both phase contactors from being energized at once.

ER This wire will output 12-24 Vdc two to four seconds after the voltage rises above 180 volts AC and all three phases are present. If
the voltage drops below 160 volts AC or a phase is lost and the condition remains for 8 to 10 seconds, the output is turned off. The
module continues to monitor and will again output 12-24 Vdc two to four seconds after the power returns to normal (voltage rises
above 180 volts AC and all three phases are present).

Table 57. Connector Pinout

Pin Wire Description

1 8F Power to Module

2 CH Chassis ground

3 ER Power OK

4 7EH Switches the 7EC and 7EB from grounding to power logic

5 7EB Phase A-B-C

6 7EC Phase A-C-B

7 Unused

8 Unused

9 Unused

Removal and Replacement:

WARNING
Hazardous Voltage!
Units featuring Electric Standby utilize 460, 400, or 230 volt 3 phase AC electrical power any time the unit is
operating in Electric Mode. This voltage potential is also present any time the unit is connected to a source of
external standby power. Extreme care must be used when working on the unit, as these voltages are capable
of causing serious injury or death.

1. Turn the unit off.

2. Disconnect the unit battery.
3. Disconnect the standby power.
4. Disconnect the three wires from the phase detect module at the motor contactor.
5. Unplug the phase detect module harness.
6. Remove the old phase detect module.
7. Install the new phase detect module.
8. Connect the new phase detect module wires to the upper contactor as follows:
a. Connect the brown wire to L1 on the contactor.
b. Connect the blue wire to L2 on the contactor.
c. Connect the black wire to L3 on the contactor.
d. Use crimp-on terminals as required.
e. Connect the plug on the short harness from the phase detect module.
9. Install the high voltage cover.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 299
Section 6 - Service Procedures

10. Secure wires and wire harnesses as required using cable ties.
11. Connect the unit battery.
12. Connect standby power.
13. Perform a Pretrip Test to verify proper operation.

WARNING
Hazardous Voltage!
Units featuring Electric Standby utilize 460, 400, or 230 volt 3 phase AC electrical power any time the unit is
operating in Electric Mode. This voltage potential is also present any time the unit is connected to a source of
external standby power. Extreme care must be used when working on the unit, as these voltages are capable
of causing serious injury or death.

Table 58. Diagnostics

Step Action Result Comments

1 Plug the standby power cord into a known

good standby power supply and turn the unit
on.

2 Using a Fluke Meter, measure the standby The standby voltage between phases should
voltage between phases L1 - L2, L2 - L3 and be between 200 - 500 Vac. If not, repair as
L3 - L1 at the input to the terminals where necessary to supply the needed voltage to
the Brown, Blue, and Black wires are the unit.
connected.

3 Check the 8F and CH circuits to the phase If this power is not present, check the 8
detect module. 12-24 Vdc must be present circuit from the On/Off switch.
from 8F to CH.

4 If correct power is present in the test above, If power is not present, replace the phase Removal and replacement of the
the ER circuit on the base controller should detect module. phase detect module is detailed on a
have 12-24 Vdc present. previous page.

5 If LED 7 on the base controller is illuminated, If power is not present, check the Diesel/
the 7EH circuit should have 12-24 Vdc Electric Relay circuit on the base controller.
present.

6 If the unit is calling for operation ( LED 7 If neither contactor is energized, check for Removal and replacement of the
illuminated), one of the phase select 12-24 Vdc. If voltage is not present, replace phase detect module is detailed on a
contactors should be energized. the phase detect module. previous page.

300 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 6 - Service Procedures

A49A - CargoWatch Data Logger

Purpose:
To understand, use, and diagnose the CargoWatch Data Logger.
Materials Required:
WinTrac application software loaded on a computer.
Description:
Allows the user to manage, download, and view CargoWatch data. Configure the CargoWatch Data Logger and sensor
settings.
Procedure:
Refer to the WinTrac Service Tool USB Flash Drive Menu.

A50A - ServiceWatch Data Logger

Purpose:
To understand and use the ServiceWatch Data Logger.
Materials Required:
WinTrac application software loaded on a computer.
Description:
Allows the user to manage, download, and view ServiceWatch data. Configure the ServiceWatch Data Logger and
sensor settings.
Procedure:
Refer to the WinTrac Service Tool USB Flash Drive Menu.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 301
Section 6 - Service Procedures

D01A - Temperature Sensor Test

Purpose:
To confirm the proper operation of the unit temperature sensors.
Materials Required:
• Fluke Digital Multimeter
Operation:
Both graded and ungraded sensors are used on SR-3 applications. Graded sensors are used to sense return air and
discharge air temperatures. The spare sensor (if used) is also a graded sensor. Ungraded sensors are used to sense coil
temperatures and ambient air temperature. Both graded and ungraded sensors are checked in the same manner.
Dual Sensors:
Dual temperature sensors are provided for both return air temperature and discharge air temperature. The sensors are
physically located next to each other to insure common readings. The control sensor is used for unit control and the
display sensor is used by the HMI Control Panel to display the return and discharge temperatures.
Return Air Sensor:
These sensors monitor the temperature of the air returning to the evaporator coil. The sensors are located in the return
air flow and are connected directly to the Base Controller/Interface Board connector J3. These sensors are graded
sensors and must be replaced with graded sensors. The Base Controller/Interface Board must be calibrated to the actual
grade of the installed sensor in order to operate properly. The Control Return Air Sensor is connected to the Base
Controller/Interface Board via the RTP and RTN wires. When replacing a sensor, verify the sensors are connected
properly.
Discharge Air Sensor:
These sensors monitor the temperature of the air leaving the evaporator coil. The sensors are located in the evaporator
discharge air path and are connected directly to the Base Controller/Interface Board via connector J3. These sensors are
graded sensors and must be replaced with graded sensors. The Base Controller/Interface Board must be calibrated to
the actual grade of the installed sensor, in order to operate properly. The Control Discharge Air Sensor is connected to
the Base Controller/Interface Board via the DTP and DTN wires. When replacing a sensor, verify the sensors are
connected properly.
Hard and Soft Failure:
Sensor alarms can occur in the following ways:
• Hard Failure - is defined by an out of range sensor reading, typically caused by an open or shorted sensor. The
sensor display will show dashes if a hard failure occurs. If this occurs only the alarm code for that sensor will be set.
Alarm Code 13 will not be present. The controller may not be showing dashes for the sensor reading, but the alarm
will be active when the unit is inspected. If a sensor alarm code is set, a failure did occur at some point. Checking a
ServiceWatch Data Logger download at Technician Level may indicate when the hard failure occurred.
• Soft Failure - is defined by erratic operation or sensor drift that exceeds acceptable tolerances (sensor is out of
calibration). If this occurs, the alarm code for the suspect sensor or sensors will be set along with Alarm Code 13.
This indicates a potential problem that may not be immediately apparent, and that a hard failure as defined above
did not occur. Checking a ServiceWatch Data Logger download at Technician Level may indicate when the soft
failure occurred.
Important Notes:
• Polarity must be considered when connecting temperature sensors. If the sensors are connected backwards, the
display will show dashes (- - - -). Refer to the schematic or wiring diagram for the correct connections.
Table 59. Procedure
Step Action Result Comments

1 Disconnect the sensor to be replaced from

the sensor harness.

2 If the sensor is a soft failure, replace the

sensor and proceed to Step 7.

3 If the sensor is a hard failure, turn the unit

off. Disconnect the J3 plug at the Base
Controller.

302 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 6 - Service Procedures

Table 59. Procedure (continued)

Step Action Result Comments

4 Locate the plug terminals for the sensor. The resistance should be from 35 kΩ to 45 This verifies a complete sensor
Using a high quality meter, check the kΩ. circuit but does not check the
resistance of the sensor harness and sensor. accuracy of the sensor.

5 If circuit resistance is not normal, disconnect If resistance is near 0 ohms, replace the
and bypass the sensor and retest. sensor. If resistance is high or reads OL, test
and repair the harness as required.

6 If circuit resistance is normal, check The meter should read OL. This verifies that the circuit is not
continuity from the positive wire to chassis shorted to chassis ground.
ground.

7 If the harness passes inspection, check the If the Base Controller fails the test, it must
Base Controller in accordance with Service be replaced.
Procedure A01A.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 303
Section 6 - Service Procedures

D03A - Pressure Transducer Test

Purpose:
To confirm the proper operation of the suction or discharge pressure transducers.
Materials Required:
• Fluke Digital Multimeter
Operation:
The Base Controller has a separate 5 Vdc power supply for the Discharge Pressure Transducer, Suction Pressure
Transducer, and Coolant Level switch. A short circuit condition in one transducer or switch circuit should not affect the
other devices.
Discharge Pressure Transducers:
The maximum discharge pressure that can be displayed is 500 psig. If the sensed pressure is greater than 500 psig, the
HMI Control Panel will display [ - - - - ] instead of the discharge pressure.
The minimum discharge pressure that can be sensed is -10 psig. The control system cannot determine if the minimum
sensed pressure is the result of an electrical short or very low system pressure.
Suction Pressure Transducers:
The maximum suction pressure that can be displayed is 200 psig. If the sensed pressure is greater than 200 psig, the
HMI Control Panel will display [ - - - - ] instead of the suction pressure. When the unit is off and the refrigerant pressures
have equalized, the system pressure can exceed 200 psig when ambient temperatures are above 35°C (90°F). If this
occurs, the HMI Control Panel will display [ - - - - ]. This is normal operation and no cause for concern.
The minimum suction pressure that can be sensed is -12 psig.
If the suction pressure transducer opens, the display will read -10 psig. An alarm may not be generated immediately but
the unit will be forced to low speed due to low suction pressure.
Pressure Transducer Identification:
The Discharge Pressure Transducer will have “500” on the body of the part. The Suction Pressure Transducer will have
“200” on the body of the part. The transducers are not interchangeable.
Table 60. Procedure
Step Action Result Comments

1 Turn the unit on.

2 Access the Gauge Menu and display the The display should show the pressure Confirm the reading with
suction pressure or discharge pressure. reading for the transducer. If the transducer refrigeration gauges as necessary.
reading is obviously incorrect or the display
shows [ - - - - ], proceed as shown below.

3 Turn the unit off and disconnect the suction or

discharge pressure transducer at the
transducer plug.

4 Turn the unit on.

5 Check the voltage at the transducer harness The voltage between the DPP and DPN wires
connector. (Discharge Pressure) or SPP and SPN wires
(Suction Pressure) must be from 4.90 to
5.10 Vdc. If the voltage is not present,
proceed to Step 6. If the voltage is correct,
proceed to Step 7.

6 If the voltage is not present, check the If the continuity checks good and voltage is
harness continuity of the DPP-DPN or SPP- still not present, check the Base Controller in
SPN wires. accordance with Service Procedure A01A.
Replace the Base Controller if necessary.

304 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 6 - Service Procedures

Table 60. Procedure (continued)

Step Action Result Comments

7 If the voltage is correct, check the harness If the voltage is correct and the DPI or SPI
continuity of the DPI or SPI wires. wire has continuity, replace the transducer
in question.

8 Transducer circuit operation can be verified If the transducer in the gauge manifold Apply discharge or suction pressure
by installing a known good transducer in the reads properly, the unit transducer is bad. to the test transducer via the gauge
center port of a gauge manifold. Connect the manifold center port.
transducer to the unit wiring harness and
check the gauge reading.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 305
Section 6 - Service Procedures

E01A - Low Voltage Disconnect Switch Operation and Diagnostics

Purpose:
To understand low voltage disconnect switch operation and diagnostic procedures.
Materials Required:
• Fluke Digital Multimeter
Description:
The Low Voltage Disconnect (LVD) switch verifies that all SLXi units provide a dedicated device connection point for
external devices, while also preventing battery discharge/depletion of the EON battery during unit idle periods. The LVD
switch replaces the battery safeguard.
All external device connections must be connected through the LVD switch. Failure to connect external devices through
the LVD switch may result in controller and/or battery related failures being rejected by warranty. Example of “external
devices” which are required to be powered through the LVD switch connection points include Third Party telematics,
TouchPrint printer, TouchPrint dataloggers.
Operation:
The LVD switch acts as a protective medium between the SLXi unit electrical system and external device(s).

The LVD switch:

• Disconnects power to external devices when battery voltage drops below 12.1V (for longer than 5-7 minutes).
• Automatically resets (resumes power to devices) when system voltage rises above 13V (for longer than 10 seconds).
• Provides connection point in control box for up to three external devices.

306 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 6 - Service Procedures

• Is located attached to the frame below the alternator.

• External device connection point consists of an 8-pin Deutsch connector located inside the control box.

• Recommended total maximum current draw from all external devices (when unit is powered down) is 2 amps.
– Excessive current draw due to external devices when unit is powered down will result in the LVD switch
disconnecting the output after a short period of time (within hours - depending on total current draw).
– If current draw from all external devices exceeds 14 amps, the LVD will stop functioning and require power
cycling (disconnect and reconnect unit main battery terminals or plug at LVD for longer than 10 seconds to hard
reset).

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 307
Section 6 - Service Procedures

Table 61. Diagnostics

Step Action Result Comments

1 If there is no power output from LVD If voltage reading is much less (e.g., 2V or
connection harness to external devices, use a less) than the voltage reading of the main
multimeter/voltmeter to measure voltage battery, the LVD most likely requires a reset
output from LVD harness positive and (when main battery voltage is less than
negative terminals located in control box. 12.1V).

2 Turn unit on (running). Once unit is running When unit is running, the alternator will Typical power output from alternator
for 10+ seconds, accomplish step 1 again to provide more than 13V power output to LVD. in normal unit running operation is
confirm if issue is resolved. Check that power When LVD power input is 13V or higher for 13.8V to 14.2V.
output on LVD harness in control box is 10+ seconds, it should ‘unlock’ or reset the
similar to main battery voltage (12V or LVD and provide power output to external
higher), and that external devices are now devices once again.
operating.

3 If step 2 is unsuccessful, disconnect LVD If this resolves the issue, root cause is likely This action performs a power cycle
harness plug from LVD (for 10+ seconds) and one of the following: (hard reset) of the LVD.
reconnect. Alternatively, disconnect main
• High amp draw of 14+ amps from all
battery cable terminals for 10+ seconds and
external device(s) which forced LVD to
reconnect.
require hard reset/power cycle.
• Installation of external devices (such as
third party telematics) sometimes
require LVD to be power cycled
immediately after installation.

4 If none of the above steps resolves the issue.

• Short circuit on LVD cables (from LVD to
external devices/control box connection
harness).
• Short circuit on LVD cables (from LVD to
alternator).
• Defective LVD.

5 If replacing the LVD resolves the issue. If the defective LVD shows evidence
• Check for any evidence of water ingress
of water ingress, it will likely require
on the LVD plug terminals/pins on main
replacement of LVD.
harness to LVD.
If unit is within warranty and LVD is
• Check for any evidence of water ingress requested back under warranty
on the pins of the removed/defective claim, it is recommended to seal LVD
LVD. in air/water tight plastic bag once
removed from the unit to retain any
potential internal moisture in LVD.

308 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 6 - Service Procedures

F01A - Oil Level Switch Check and Replacement

Purpose:
To test the oil level switch for proper operation.
Materials Required:
• Fluke Digital Multimeter
Operation:
The switch is open with the float up (indicating full oil level). The switch is closed with the float down (indicating low oil
level).
Table 62. Procedure
Step Action Result Comments

1 Turn the unit off.

2 Disconnect the Deutsch connector at the The oil level switch is located on the
switch. top of the oil pan.

3 Use an ohmmeter to check switch continuity. With the oil above the "add" mark, the This check can be performed while
switch should be open. If the engine is six or changing the oil.
more quarts low, the switch should be
closed.

4 Reconnect the Deutsch connector.

Table 63. Replacing the Switch - Screw In Applications

Step Action Result Comments

1 Turn the unit off.

2 Disconnect the Deutsch connector at the The oil level switch is located on the
switch. top of the oil pan.

3 Unscrew and remove the old switch.

4 Apply Teflon tape to the threads on the new

switch.

5 Screw the new switch into the hole in the oil

pan. Tighten until snug. Do not over-tighten.

6 Reconnect the Deutsch switch connector.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 309
Section 6 - Service Procedures

F05A - Oil Pressure Switch Test

Purpose:
To test the oil pressure switch for proper operation.
Materials Required:
• Fluke Digital Multimeter
Table 64. Procedure
Step Action Result Comments

1 Connect a multimeter set for DC Volts

between the 20B wire at the oil pressure
shutdown switch and chassis ground.

2 Turn the unit on and observe the meter The voltage with the unit on and the engine
reading. not running should be zero. If there is
voltage present, the switch is defective.

3 Start the engine and observe the meter Battery voltage should be present when the
reading. engine is running. If the voltage is low or is
zero, proceed to Step 4.

4 With the unit running, disconnect the 20B If the battery voltage is present on the wire, Check the 20B circuit as required to
wire from the switch. Measure the voltage the switch is defective and should be determine the cause.
from the 20B wire to chassis ground. replaced.
If the voltage on the 20B wire is low or zero,
there is a problem in the 20B circuit.

310 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 6 - Service Procedures

F07B - Magnetic Coolant Level Sensor Test

Purpose:
To confirm proper operation of the magnetic coolant level sensor.
Materials Required:
• Fluke Digital Multimeter
Operation:
A magnetic reed switch is used to determine the coolant level. This two wire switch is supplied with +5 Vdc from the
Base Controller on the CLP wire (J7 Pin 15). The switch outputs +5 Vdc on the CLS wire (J7 Pin 16) when coolant level is
above the sensor and less than 0 Vdc when the coolant level is below the sensor.
The switch is housed in an isolated chamber within the coolant tank. A magnetic float is located in the engine coolant
adjacent to the switch chamber. The switch will open or close as the magnetic float falls or rises with the coolant level.
The switch can be changed without removing coolant from the radiator. Exercise care when removing and installing the
reed switch as the switch is enclosed in a glass shell.

CAUTION
Hazardous Pressures!
Do not remove expansion tank cap while coolant is hot.

Table 65. Procedure

Step Action Result Comments

1 Disconnect the switch and check the voltage +5 Vdc should be present between the CLP
between the CLP wire at the sensor harness wire and chassis ground. If not, check the
connector and chassis ground for +5 Vdc. harness and connectors as required to
determine the cause.

2 If +5 Vdc is present at the sensor, check the Less than 0.5 Vdc should be present when
voltage on the CLS wire at the sensor harness the coolant level is below the switch and +5
connector. Vdc should be present when the coolant
level is above the switch. If these voltages
are not present, the sensor must be
replaced.

3 The switch is housed in an isolated chamber Exercise care when removing and
within the coolant tank. The switch can be installing the reed switch as the
changed without removing coolant from the switch is enclosed in a glass shell.
radiator. Carefully pry the switch from the
chamber in the coolant tank. To
install the switch, carefully press it
into the chamber by hand.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 311
Section 6 - Service Procedures

F08A - Coolant Temperature Sensor Test

Purpose:
To test the coolant temperature sensor for proper operation.
Materials Required:
• Fluke Digital Multimeter
Important Notes:
• Polarity must be considered when connecting temperature sensors. If the sensors are connected backwards, the
display will show dashes (- - - -). Refer to the schematic or wiring diagram for the correct connections.
Table 66. Procedure
Step Action Result Comments

1 Turn the unit off.

2 Disconnect the sensor at the plug next to the

sensor.

3 Turn the unit on. The Standard Display will appear.

4 Access the Gauge Menu and display Coolant The display for the Engine Coolant If all the temperature sensors show
Temperature. Temperature sensor should show dashes [ - dashes [ - - - - ] without being
- - - ]. disconnected, the Base Controller is
defective.

5 Using a multimeter, check the voltage at the The voltage must be from 4.90 to 5.10 volts
sensor plug on the harness. DC.

6 If the voltage at the harness connector is

correct, replace the sensor.

7 If the voltage measured in Step 6 is incorrect, If the Base Controller fails the test, it must
check the Base Controller in accordance with be replaced.
Service Procedure A01A.

8 If the Base Controller passes the test, the

problem is in the wiring harness. Test and
repair the harness as required.

Figure 168. Coolant Temperature Sensor

312 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 6 - Service Procedures

F09A - RPM Sensor Test and Adjustment

Purpose:
To test and adjust the RPM sensor.
Materials Required:
• Fluke Digital Multimeter
Operation:
The RPM sensor rarely fails but may require adjustment for proper operation.
Table 67. Procedure
Step Action Result Comments

1 Turn the unit off.

2 Remove the FS1 and FS2 wires from the

sensor.

3 Check the sensor resistance using a The sensor resistance should be 250 to 300
multimeter. ohms with the wires removed. If not, the
sensor should be replaced.

4 Loosen the lock nut, turn the sensor in until it

contacts the ring gear on the flywheel, then
back it out ½ turn and tighten the lock nut.

5 Turn the unit on.

6 Using Service Test Mode, place the unit in For information on Service Test
High Speed Cool (HSC). Mode, refer to Section 4.

7 Check the voltage across the sensor The voltage in high speed should read from Set the meter to read AC volts.
terminals with the FS1 and FS2 wires 1.0 to 5.0 Vac.
removed.

8 If the required voltage is not present, replace

the RPM sensor. If the required voltage is
present, check the harness wires and repair
as required.

9 Reattach the FS1 and FS2 wires to the sensor. Polarity is not important.

10 Access the Gauge Menu and display Engine The display should show the engine RPM.
RPM.

11 If the RPM reading does not appear in the If the Base Controller fails the test, it must
display, check the Base Controller in be replaced.
accordance with Service Procedure A01A.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 313
Section 6 - Service Procedures

G03A - Electronic Throttling Valve (ETV) Test

Purpose:
To confirm proper operation of the Electronic Throttling Valve.
N o t e : If the ETV must be changed, refer to the Maintenance Manual for the specific unit.
Materials Required:
• Fluke Digital Multimeter
Operation:
This procedure should be used to check the operation of the Electronic Throttling Valve (ETV) if Alarm Code 89 occurs.
Alarm Code 89 indicates that refrigeration system pressures did not respond as expected when the Electronic Throttling
Valve was opened and closed, or that an electrical fault with the ETV system was detected (Condition #3). This may be
caused by a malfunction in the Electronic Throttling Valve or associated circuit or a refrigeration system problem such
as low refrigerant level, frozen expansion valve or severe suction side restriction. If an electrical fault with the ETV
system was detected, the ETV should be replaced.
The ETV has two internal coils. The Base Controller operates the valve by energizing the coils with a variable frequency
AC signal. The sequence in which the Base Controller energizes the coils determines the direction of travel and the
frequency or “speed” of the signal determines the speed of valve motion (i.e., how fast the valve travels). Wires EVA
and EVB energize one coil and wires EVC and EVD energize the other coil. The ETV circuits are protected by Smart FETs.
Valve position may be monitored by using the Gauges key on the HMI. 0 indicates the valve is fully closed and 800
indicates the valve is fully opened.
I m p o r t a n t : The LEDs on the Base Controller can be used to verify Base Controller output to the ETV.
Electronic Throttling Valve Types and Wire Color Codes:
The round style ETV does not have a removable connector on the valve. There is a sheathed cable consisting of colored
wires that run from the valve to the Deutsch connector on the cable. The square style ETV has a change in design of the
valve body and stepper motor. It also has an integrated four-pin Deutsch connector located at the end of the stepper
motor (no harness). The square design allows for ease of service and a low torque setting, providing low strain to
piping during service and repair work.
SR-3 Base Controllers feature yellow and green ETV LEDs located at the lower left edge of the board. These LEDs flash
when a signal is being sent to the ETV. The LEDs flash rapidly for a brief period of time on initial startup and at a slower
rate when the valve is opening or closing normally. If the LEDs are flashing, a signal is being sent to the ETV.

Round Style ETV Square Style ETV

Table 68. ETV Harness Connections

Round Style Square Style

Harness Wire # Wire Colors Harness Wire #

EVA Red EVA

EVB Green EVB

314 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 6 - Service Procedures

Table 68. ETV Harness Connections (continued)

Round Style Square Style

Harness Wire # Wire Colors Harness Wire #

EVC White EVC

EVD Black EVD

Table 69. Procedure

Step Action Result Comments

1 Power down the unit and verify that all

connectors are secure.

2 Disconnect Base Controller connector J7 and The resistance should be from 20 to 35 Identify the associated pins on the
measure resistance between the EVA and ohms. If the resistance is incorrect, check ETV and check for continuity at the
EVB wires at the connector. the EVA and EVB wires and connectors valve. If the resistance from the EVA
leading to the ETV. Verify the valve and EVB pins directly on the valve is
• J7 Pin 24 – EVA wire
connector is properly attached to the valve. not from 20 to 35 ohms, the valve is
• J7 Pin 23 – EVB wire defective.

3 Measure the resistance between EVA and Neither pin should show a short to
ground, and EVB and ground (should be an ground.
open circuit).

4 Measure resistance between the EVC and The resistance should be from 20 to 35 Identify the associated pins on the
EVD wires at the connector. ohms. If the resistance is incorrect, check ETV and check for continuity at the
the EVC and EVD wires and connectors valve. If the resistance from the EVC
• J7 Pin 11 – EVC wire
leading to the ETV. Verify the valve and EVD pins directly on the valve is
• J7 Pin 12 – EVD wire connector is properly attached to the valve. not from 20 to 35 ohms, the valve is
defective.

5 Measure the resistance between EVC and Neither pin should show a short to
ground, and EVD and ground (should be an ground.
open circuit).

6 Reconnect J7 to the Base Controller.

7 Disconnect the ETV from the main unit

harness.

8 Set the multimeter to read AC (alternating Check voltage between EVA and
current) voltage and connect the leads to the EVB, not the green and red wires
EVA and EVB wires in the main unit harness attached to the ETV.
at the ETV.

9 Turn the unit on and enter Evacuation Test AC voltage between EVA and EVB with the Prior to the LEDs blinking, it is
from the Maintenance Menu. Pay attention to valve opening during Evacuation Test should normal for the AC voltage read on
the ETV LEDs on the board. When all four be between 8-13 Vac. the meter to fluctuate. Pay attention
LEDs appear to blink at the same time, read to voltage only when all four LEDs
AC voltage between EVA and EVB. are blinking. The voltage read on the
multimeter may be higher (up to 16
Vac) if a battery charger is connected
to the unit.

10 Turn the unit off.

11 With the multimeter set to read AC volts, Check voltage between EVC and
connect the leads to the EVC and EVD wires in EVD, not the white and black wires
the main unit harness at the ETV. attached to the ETV.

12 Turn the unit on and enter Evacuation Test AC voltage between EVC and EVD with the
from the Maintenance Menu. Pay attention to valve opening during Evacuation Test should
the ETV LEDs on the board. When all four be between 6-10 Vac.
LEDs appear to blink at the same time, read
AC voltage between EVC and EVD.

13 Turn the unit off.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 315
Section 6 - Service Procedures

Table 69. Procedure (continued)

Step Action Result Comments

14 If the tests above were successful, the If the electronic throttling valve
electronic throttling valve should be appears to function electrically and
operational. If the tests were not successful, problems still exist, check the
proceed with step 14. refrigeration system for low
refrigerant, frozen expansion valve,
a severe restriction in the low side of
the system, or a mechanically failed
ETV.

15 If the electronic throttling valve circuit is not

functioning electrically, replace the controller.

316 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 6 - Service Procedures

G04A - Electronic Throttling Valve (ETV) Mechanical Operation Test

Purpose:
To confirm proper mechanical operation of the Electronic Throttling Valve.
N o t e : If the ETV must be changed, refer to the Maintenance Manual for the specific unit.
Materials Required:
• Stepper Valve Tester
Operation:
This procedure should be used to check mechanical operation of the Electronic Throttling Valve (ETV) whenever an ETV
is suspected faulty. Alarm Code 89 indicates that refrigeration system pressures did not respond as expected when the
ETV was opened and closed, or that an electrical fault with the ETV system was detected. Other alarm codes may be
generated if the ETV fails to regulate suction pressure, such as Alarm Codes 10 and 18. These alarms may be caused by
a malfunction in the ETV or associated circuit.
The ETV contains a Stepper Motor that moves a piston located in the valve body. The piston position in the valve body
determines the amount of refrigerant flow through the valve. Refrigerant flow through the valve is decreased as the
piston is extended into the valve body. Suction pressure will drop as the amount of flow through the valve decreases.
As the piston retracts, more refrigerant is able to flow through the valve and suction pressure increases.
The position of the ETV can be read in the Gauges Menu. A position of 0 indicates the piston is fully extended in the
valve body and that the valve is fully closed. A position of 800 indicates the piston is fully retracted and that the valve is
fully open.
Electronic Throttling Valve Types and Wire Color Codes:
The round style ETV does not have a removable connector on the valve. There is a sheathed cable consisting of colored
wires that run from the valve to the Deutsch connector on the cable. The Stepper Motor Tester is connected to the ETV
using this Deutsch connector. A pigtail must be constructed in order to connect the tester to the ETV. The ETV may
operate backwards if the connections are reversed. The square tyle ETV has a change in design of the valve body and
stepper motor. It also has an integrated four-pin Deutsch connector located at the end of the stepper motor (no
harness). The square design allows for ease of service and a low torque setting, providing low strain to piping during
service and repair work.
When using the Stepper Motor Tester, the ETV position displayed on the HMI does not indicate actual valve position;
the valve is being controlled manually by the tester. The unit harness from the Base Controller must be disconnected
from the valve at the Deutsch plug in order to connect the ETV tester. The Base Controller will attempt to control the
valve position but will be unable to since the valve is disconnected. The HMI will display requested ETV position,
however, the valve will not respond to requests from the Base Controller and the displayed position will likely not be
the actual position of the valve. Alarm Code 89 will likely not be generated in this case.
I m p o r t a n t : DO NOT open the valve too far, this may cause a possible Alarm Code 10 in high ambient or stall the engine
if in low speed.
The harness wire number, wire color on ETV, and binding post color on the tester are shown in the table (Table 70, p.
318).

Round Style ETV Square Style ETV

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 317
Section 6 - Service Procedures

Table 70. ETV Harness and Tester Connections

Harness Wire # Wire Color on ETV Post Color on Tester

EVA-01 Red White

EVB-01 Green Black

EVC-01 White Red

EVD-01 Black Green

Table 71. Procedure

Step Action Result Comments

1 Power down the unit.

2 Disconnect the ETV from the main unit

harness and connect the ETV to the Stepper
Motor Tester using a pigtail.

3 Set the tester to 50 steps per second and This closes the ETV. Near the end of 10-15 The LEDs on the tester will blink as
press the rocker switch to the “CLOSE” seconds you will hear the valve fully closing. the valve is being positioned.
position for 10-15 seconds.

4 Press the rocker switch to the “OPEN” This slightly opens the ETV and prevents the ETV position displayed on the HMI
position for 2-3 seconds. unit from running in a vacuum on startup. will not be accurate as the tester is
positioning the valve, not the base
controller.

5 Turn the unit on and enter Service Test Mode The engine will start and the unit will enter
in the Maintenance Menu. Select Engine low speed cool operation.
Running Low Speed Cool.

6 While monitoring suction pressure in the Suction pressure shown on the HMI should
Gauges menu on the HMI, press the tester increase as the valve is being opened.
rocker switch to the “OPEN” position for 3-5
seconds.

7 While monitoring suction pressure on the Suction pressure shown on the HMI should Suction pressure will go into a
HMI, press the tester rocker switch to the decrease as the valve is being closed. vacuum if the valve fully closes
“CLOSED” position for 3-5 seconds. during this test. Depending on
suction pressure, more than 3-5
seconds of closing the valve may be
required to notice a pressure
decrease.

8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 as necessary to confirm If suction pressure rises and falls
ETV operation. when using the tester to position the
ETV, the valve is mechanically
functioning. Accomplish Service
Procedure G03A to confirm electrical
operation of the ETV circuit.

9 Turn the unit off.

10 If the suction pressure does not rise and fall Causes of low suction pressure
when using the tester to position the ETV, the include a restricted expansion valve,
valve is likely failed. Check the unit for causes low charge or a heavily frosted
of low suction pressure and non-responsive evaporator coil. Causes of non-
suction pressure. responsive suction pressure include
an inoperative compressor or front
seated suction service valve.

318 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 6 - Service Procedures

H04A - Wiring Harness Continuity Test

Purpose:
To illustrate the correct procedures for checking harness continuity on equipment utilizing solid state devices.
Materials Required:
• Fluke Digital Multimeter
• Jumper wires as required
Important Notes:
• Do not use battery and light test tools to check continuity.
– Using these devices may present excessive voltage or current to solid state devices, causing damage or
destroying the solid state device.
• Never test a circuit to see if it is energized by tapping the circuit wire to ground and watching for a spark.
– This will damage solid state components or blow a fuse.
• Use a high quality digital multimeter or an analog meter with high input impedance.
– Older analog (needle type meter movement) meters and some inexpensive “mechanic tool box” meters present
a large load to the circuit being tested. This can significantly alter the meter reading, especially when measuring
small voltages or currents.
Table 72. Procedure
Step Action Result Comments

1 Locate the suspect circuit on the appropriate

wiring diagram.

2 Isolate both ends of the circuit using the Harness connections are identified in
Important: Failure to isolate both ends may
following methods as required: the Service Procedures appropriate
cause misleading results.
to the device in question. They may
• Disconnect the appropriate connector at
also be determined by referring to
the Base Controller.
the appropriate wiring diagrams.
• Disconnect the device connector at the
device.
• Remove the wire from the device
terminal.

3 Using jumpers as required, connect each end The meter must show a very low resistance Verify the ohmmeter battery is good
of the circuit to a high quality multimeter. (less than 1.0 ohm), indicating circuit and the meter zeros with the leads
continuity. If not, the circuit is open or has held together to prevent misleading
excessive resistance. Troubleshoot the results.
circuit to determine the cause using the
wiring diagrams.

4 After determining that the circuit passes a The meter should indicate an open circuit. If
continuity test, remove one test meter lead not, the circuit is shorted to ground.
and connect it to the chassis ground to check Troubleshoot the circuit to determine the
for a short to ground. cause using the wiring diagrams.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 319
Section 7 - Service Information
SR-3 Base Controller
Hardware Versions and Service Part Numbers
For the latest information, refer to the applicable Part Catalog (New) available through the Dealer Portal/iService.

Label Identification
The label is located on the edge of the Base Controller Mounting Base. The label shows board Engineering Part
Number, Service Part Number, and installed Software Revision. The Base Controller Serial Number for SR-3
applications ends in “3T1” as shown in the example below.

Software Requirements
Single temperature applications with SR-3 Base Controllers must use SR-3 Base Controller Software Revision Dxxx.

Compatibility
The SR-3 Base Controller is 100% compatible with and may be used to replace the combined SR-2 Base Controller/
Interface Board assembly. The SR-3 Base Controller mounting base uses the same mounting hole pattern as did the SR-
2 Base Controller/Interface Board. The connectors on the SR-3 Base Controller are located in approximately the same
positions as they are on an SR-2 Base Controller/Interface Board. However, when replacing an SR-2 Base Controller/
Interface Board with an SR-3 Base Controller, the wiring harness may need to be relocated slightly to reach the some of
the connectors.
For the latest information, refer to the Software Compatibility Matrix available through the Dealer Portal/iService:
• For North America: Asset Library (Software & Downloads > Microprocessor)
• For EMEA: EMEA Info Central (Software Updates > Microprocessors > Compatibility Matrix)

320 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 7 - Service Information

SR-3 HMI Control Panel

Hardware Versions and Service Part Numbers
For the latest information, refer to the applicable Part Catalog (New) available through the Dealer Portal/iService.

Label Identification
The label is located on the back of the HMI Control Panel. The label shows Engineering Part Number, Service Part
Number, and installed Software Revision. The HMI Control Panel Serial Number for SR-3 applications ends in “0T3” as
shown in the example below.

Software Requirements
SR-3 HMI Control Panels used on SR-3 applications without USB capability must use HMI Control Panel Software
Revision 6550 or later.
SR-3 HMI Control Panels used on SR-3 applications with USB capability must use HMI Control Panel Software Revision
6560 or later.

Compatibility
For the latest information, refer to the Software Compatibility Matrix available through the Dealer Portal/iService:
• For North America: Asset Library (Software & Downloads > Microprocessor)
• For EMEA: EMEA Info Central (Software Updates > Microprocessors > Compatibility Matrix)

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 321
Section 7 - Service Information

SR-2/SR-3 Diagnostic Tool

An SR-2/SR-3 Diagnostic Tool with Diagnostic Tool Software 4.1 or greater is required to test the SR-3 Base Controller. It
is available as a complete tool and also as an update kit for the SR-2 Blue Diagnostic Tool.
Features:
The SR-2/SR-3 Diagnostic Tool includes the following new features:
• Tests the SR-3 Base Controller.
• Tests the SR-3 USB Communications Port.
• Tests the SR-3 Base Controller and HMI Control Panel CAN Ports using a USB to CAN Adaptor.
Complete SR-2/SR-3 Diagnostic Tool:
The complete SR-2/SR-3 Diagnostic Tool is available as Service Part Number 204-1930. It includes the following:
• The Blue Diagnostic Tool. This component is the same as the Blue Diagnostic Tool supplied with earlier versions of
the Diagnostic Tool.
• All cables supplied with previous Blue Diagnostic Tool.
• A USB Cable to connect the USB Port on the SR-3 Base Controller to a USB Flash Drive.
• A USB to CAN Adaptor. This adaptor is required to perform the CAN Test that is part of the new Diagnostic Tool.
• A CAN Test Cable to connect the USB to CAN Adaptor to the Diagnostic Tool J1 Connector.
• SR-2/SR-3 Diagnostic Tool Software Revision 4.x.
• Instructions and Storage Box.
SR-2/SR-3 Diagnostic Tool Upgrade Kit:
The SR-2/SR-3 Diagnostic Tool Upgrade Kit is available as Service Part Number 204-1931. It utilizes the current Blue SR-
2 Diagnostic Tool hardware (Part Number 204-1196) and cables with no changes and includes the following:
• A USB Cable to connect the USB Port on the SR-3 Base Controller to a USB Flash Drive.
• A USB to CAN Adaptor. This adaptor is required to perform the CAN Test that is part of the new Diagnostic Tool.
• A CAN Test Cable to connect the USB to CAN Adaptor to the Diagnostic Tool J1 Connector.
• SR-2/SR-3 Diagnostic Tool Software Revision 4.x.
• Instructions.
SR-2/SR-3 Diagnostic Tool Software:
The diagnostic tool software is available through the Dealer Portal/iService in the Asset Library or EMEA Info Central
website. Go to http://www.thermoking.com/tk/index.asp
For North America: choose Asset Library (Software and Downloads > PC Software > SR-2 and SR-3 Diagnostic Tool).
For EMEA: choose EMEA Info Central and select Home > Software Updates > Tester Software > SR-2 and SR-3
Diagnostic Tool. It will take a few moments to load. Save and unzip the file to the desired directory on your computer. It
will take a few moments to unzip and there will be several files as a result. If necessary, double click Setup.exe to install
the software.

322 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 7 - Service Information

SR-3 Power On/Off Control

SR-3 HMI Control Panels with software revision 6550 or later control power on and power off operations by the use of a
Supervisor Microprocessor located within the SR-3 HMI Control Panel.
• Power on requests are controlled by turning on the SR-3 HMI Control Panel. This in turn supplies a path to chassis
ground to energize the On/Off Relay K9. The unit will turn on.
• Power off requests are controlled by removing the path to chassis ground to de-energize On/Off Relay K9.
• The CargoWatch Data Logger will document power on and what device turned power on (SR-3 HMI Control Panel,
SCOM, or an external device such as iBox).
• The CargoWatch Data Logger will document power off and what device turned power off (SR-3 HMI Control Panel,
SCOM. or an external device such as iBox).

HMI Control Panel - Unit Not Turned On

The diagram below shows the power conditions present before the unit has been turned on. The battery voltage is
present at HMI Control Panel Pin 34 through the coil of the On/Off Relay K9 and the ON/OFF circuit.
N o t e : HMI Control Panel Pin 12 will have power from the battery even if the Microprocessor On/Off Switch is turned off
(open).
Table 73. Schematic Diagram Text Color Definitions

CH chassis ground circuits are shown in green on the diagrams.

Power circuits are shown in red on the diagrams.

Other text colors are defined in the descriptions.

The Microprocessor On/Off Switch is turned on (closed).

Figure 169. Unit is Turned Off - Microprocessor Power Switch On

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 323
Section 7 - Service Information

HMI Control Panel - Turning The Unit On

The diagram (Figure 170, p. 324) shows the power conditions when the unit has been turned on by pressing the On
Key.
1. Pressing the On Key of the HMI Control Panel turns the HMI microprocessor on. The HMI Control Panel
microprocessor then supplies chassis ground to the ON/OFF circuit at HMI Control Panel Pin 34 by connecting it
internally to HMI Control Panel Pin 35.
2. This energizes the On/Off Relay K9, which closes the normally open K9 contacts to supply power to the 8X, 8P, and
8XP - BLK3 circuits. The K9 LED 23 will illuminate to indicate the On/Off Relay K9 is energized. The 8P circuit signals
the Base Controller to turn on. The Base Controller Heart Beat LED 21 will begin to flash, indicating that the Base
Controller is powered up. The 8XP - BLK3 wire supplies feedback to Pin 6 of the HMI Control Panel that the Base
Controller is powered up.
3. T h e u n i t w i l l s t a r t a n d r u n a s d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e B a s e C o n t r o l l e r p r o g r a m m a b l e f e a t u r e s e t t i n g s .
Notes:
1. Battery power is present at HMI Control Panel Pin 12 even if the Microprocessor On/Off Switch is turned off
(open).
2. The HMI Control Panel communicates with the Base Controller through the CAN (Controller Area Network)
bus connections CANL - BLK1 and CANH - RED1. CAN is a standard serial communications protocol that
allows communication between two or more devices. The circuit that connects devices is called the CAN Bus.
3. The HMI Control Panel monitors power on the 8X circuit through the 8XP - BLK3 circuit.
Table 74. Schematic Diagram Text Color Definitions

CH chassis ground circuits are shown in green on the diagrams.

Power circuits are shown in red on the diagrams.

Other text colors are defined in the descriptions.

The Microprocessor On/Off Switch is turned on (closed).

Figure 170. Turning the Unit On with HMI Control Panel

324 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 7 - Service Information

HMI Control Panel - Turning The Unit On From A Remote Control Panel
The diagram (Figure 171, p. 326) shows the power conditions present when the unit has been turned on by pressing the
Remote Control Panel On Key on a unit equipped with an HMI Control Panel.
1. Pressing the Remote Control Panel On Key initiates turning the unit on by supplying chassis ground to the ON
(ORN) circuit at the Remote Control Panel Pin 4 for five seconds. This turns the HMI Control Panel on and energizes
the On/Off Relay K9. During this five second interval, the communications in steps 2 through 7 occur. After five
seconds, the Remote Control Panel removes the ground from the ON (ORN) circuit but the On/Off Relay K9 is now
provided a ground by the HMI Control Panel (step 7) and will remain on.
2. T h e H M I C o n t r o l P a n e l p o w e r s u p a n d d i s p l a y s t h e “ R E M O T E S T A R T - P L E A S E W A I T ” s c r e e n .
3. The HMI Control Panel sends a query via the CAN Bus to the Base Controller asking if the Remote Control Panel is
attempting to turn the unit on.
4. The Base Controller sends a query via the RS-232 serial port (RXD and TXD circuits) to the Remote Control Panel
asking if the Remote Control Panel is attempting to turn the unit on.
5. The Remote Control Panel will reply via the RS-232 serial port (RXD and TXD circuits) to the Base Controller that it is
attempting to turn the unit on.
6. The Base Controller replies to the HMI Control Panel via the CAN Bus that the Remote Control Panel is attempting to
turn the unit on.
7. The HMI Control Panel microprocessor supplies chassis ground to the ON/OFF circuit at HMI Control Panel Pin 34 by
connecting it internally to HMI Control Panel Pin 35.
8. This energizes the On/Off Relay K9, which closes the normally open K9 contacts to supply power to the 8X, 8P, and
8XP - BLK3 circuits. The K9 LED 23 will illuminate to indicate the On/Off Relay K9 is energized. The 8P circuit signals
the Base Controller to turn on. The Base Controller Heart Beat LED 21 will begin to flash, indicating that the Base
Controller is powered up. The 8XP - BLK3 wire supplies feedback to Pin 6 of the HMI Control Panel that the Base
Controller is powered up.
9. T h e u n i t w i l l s t a r t a n d r u n a s d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e B a s e C o n t r o l l e r a n d t h e R e m o t e C o n t r o l P a n e l
programmable feature settings.
Table 75. Schematic Diagram Text Color Definitions

CH chassis ground circuits are shown in green on the diagrams.

Power circuits are shown in red on the diagrams.

Other text colors are defined in the descriptions.

The Microprocessor On/Off Switch is turned on (closed).

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 325
Section 7 - Service Information

Figure 171. Turning Unit On with HMI Control Panel and Remote Control Panel

N o t e : This simplified diagram does not show the remote controller harness connector located in the evaporator.

326 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 7 - Service Information

HMI Control Panel - Turning The Unit Off From A Remote Control Panel
The diagram (Figure 172, p. 328) shows the power conditions present when the unit has been turned off by pressing the
Remote Control Panel Off Key on a unit equipped with an HMI Control Panel.
1. Pressing the Remote Control Panel Off Key momentarily supplies a chassis ground to the OFF circuit at the Remote
Control Panel Pin 5 as shown by the green dashed lines. This causes the HMI Control Panel to begin to power down.
2. The HMI Control Panel powers down. This turns the unit off by removing the ground from the ON/OFF circuit at HMI
Control Panel Pin 34 to de-energize the On/Off Relay K9 relay as shown by bold blue dashed lines.
3. W h e n t h e O n / O f f R e l a y i s d e - e n e r g i z e d , p o w e r i s r e m o v e d f r o m t h e 8 X , 8 P , a n d 8 X P - B L K 3 c i r c u i t s a s s h o w n
in thin black on the diagram. When power is removed from the 8P circuit, this signals the Base Controller to
turn off. The Base Controller Heart Beat LED 21 will stop flashing, indicating that the Base Controller is
powered down.
Notes:
1. If the OFF (YEL) circuit from the Remote Controller to the HMI Control Panel is not connected, the HMI
Control Panel will power down by sending messages via the communication ports.
2. On SR-3 applications, the OFF Line is connected to CAN Connectors J12, J13, and J14 at Pin 7. The OFF Line
is also connected to CAN Connector J98 Pin 10.
Table 76. Schematic Diagram Text Color Definitions

CH chassis ground circuits are shown in green on the diagrams.

Power circuits are shown in red on the diagrams.

Other text colors are defined in the descriptions.

The Microprocessor On/Off Switch is turned on (closed).

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 327
Section 7 - Service Information

Figure 172. Turning Unit Off with HMI Control Panel and Remote Control Panel

328 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 7 - Service Information

HMI Control Panel Messages/Causes

The following error messages will appear on the HMI Control Panel display if the stated conditions occur.
[SYSTEM IS POWERING DOWN]
If the HMI Control Panel ON key is pressed and the TK Logo display is shown and then [SYSTEM IS POWERING DOWN]
appears, the OFF Line between a remote control device and the HMI Control Panel is likely shorted to ground. The HMI
Control Panel will not remain powered up if the OFF Line is shorted to ground. On SR-3 applications, the OFF Line is
connected to CAN Connectors J12, J13, and J14 at Pin 7. The OFF Line is also connected to CAN Connector J98 Pin 10.
N o t e : In some cases, if the OFF Line circuit is shorted to ground, the HMI Control Panel may not power up at all.
[COMMUNICATIONS FAILURE - - LOST CONTROLLER CONNECT]
This message indicates that the HMI Control Panel has not received any messages from the Base Controller for 20
seconds. The HMI Control Panel will stay powered up and try to re-establish communications with the Base Controller
via the CAN Bus. This message can result from one of the following conditions:
• If there are open or shorted circuits on the CANL or CANH wires between the HMI Control Panel and the Base
Controller CAN Bus circuits.
• If the CAN communications fail between the HMI Control Panel and Base Controller or if CAN communications are
not operational.
• If the HMI Control Panel or Base Controller is defective.
[LOST CONTROLLER POWER]
This message indicates that the HMI Control Panel has detected a loss of power on the 8XP circuit and that the Base
Controller did not respond to messages from the HMI Control Panel for at least three seconds. If this occurs, the HMI
Control Panel will display LOST CONTROLLER POWER - - POWERING DOWN and shut down. This message can result
from one of the following conditions:
• If there are open circuits or bad connections on the 8XP and CAN Bus circuits between the HMI Control Panel and
the Base Controller.
• If Fuse F10 is blown or if the K9 On/Off Relay on the Base Controller is defective.
• If the Base Controller is defective.
[CHECK 8X WIRING]
If this message appears, it indicates that the HMI Control Panel has detected a loss of power on the 8XP circuit but CAN
communications between the HMI Control Panel and the Base Controller still exist. This message can result if 8XP
power is lost as a result of one of the following conditions:
• Loss of 8XP power could be caused by an open 8XP circuit or a bad connection between the HMI Control Panel and
the Base Controller.
• Loss of 8XP power will occur if Fuse F7 on the Base Controller is blown.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 329
Section 7 - Service Information

SR-3 HMI Power Up and Power Down Documentation

SR-3 HMI Control Panels have a Supervisor Microprocessor that documents the reason a unit is powered up or
powered down. The power up and power down information is logged into the CargoWatch Data Logger contained in
the HMI Control Panel. This data can be very helpful in determining the causes of power up and power down issues.
One exception to the logging of these items is if a power supply or ground problem turns the HMI off instantly. If this
should happen, the HMI is immediately Off and will not make the normal logs that it does in a controlled power down
sequence.
The tables list the Power Up and Power Down reasons along with a brief description.
Table 77. Power Up Reasons

Num- Description Comments

ber

1 On Key Pressing the HMI Control Panel On Key is the reason for an On Key power up.

2 On Line Providing a ground to the On Line is the reason for an On Line power up. The On Line power up is normally
initiated by a Remote Controller On Key being pressed or a 3rd party Telematic device providing a ground
via the iBox. Grounding of the On Line will cause the K9 On/Off Relay coil to energize and initiate a power
up of the Base Controller and the HMI Control Panel.

3 DPD Connecting a download cable to the CargoWatch Download Port is the reason for a DPD power up.
Connecting the download cable will ground the DPD wire causing the HMI to power up. This will allow the
user to perform a download without the unit running.

4 Cold Crank A Cold Crank power up may occur during a low voltage situation during an attempted engine start.

5 Reset A Reset power up may occur if the CAN communication to the HMI Control Panel has been interrupted and
then re-established. Essentially the HMI Control Panel reboots and comes back on line. This can be
observed in downloads where the unit and HMI Control Panel are both operating and a Power Up Reset will
be observed without a prior Power Down being present.

6 Unknown Unknown reason.

7 Conservative Mode A Conservative Mode power up will be present if the Conservative Mode has been programmed in the HMI
Control Panel. This power up happens at user defined time intervals to document temperature readings on
the CargoWatch Sensors when the unit is turned Off.

Table 78. Power Down Reasons

Num- Description Comments
ber

0 Unknown Unknown reason.

1 Off Key Pushing the HMI Control Panel Off Key is the reason for an Off Key power down.

2 Off Line An Off Line power down is normally initiated by pushing a Remote Controller Off key or by a 3rd party
Telematic device. Pushing the Remote Controller Off key or a Remote Off command from a 3rd party
Telematics device will ground the Off Line to Pin 33 of the HMI Control Panel. This will cause the unit to turn
off.
Note: A grounded Off Line can be the reason for a unit not turning on at all or be the cause of nuisance Off
Line power downs if the Off Line wire has an intermittent ground.

3 Reserved

4 8XP No Controller On A 8XP No Controller On Signal power down will occur if the 8XP feedback is not present from the K9 On/Off
Signal relay 8X circuit to Pin 6 of the HMI Control Panel and there is no CAN communication between the Base
Controller and HMI Control Panel.

5 Communications A Communication Request Time Out power down will occur if a download cable has caused a power up of
Request Timeout the HMI and there has been no activity, such as a download, on the HMI download port. If no activity had
(SCOM) been present on the port, the HMI will power down to preserve the battery.

6 Network Power A Network Power Down will occur if there is a serial command from a Remote Controller to turn the unit Off.
Down Normally, the Remote Controller turning the unit Off is accomplished by the Off button pulling the Off Line
low resulting in an Off Line power down. If the Off Line were not present or the Off wire had an open circuit,
the Remote Controller Off key also initiates a serial command to turn the unit off. In this case, the HMI will
log a Network Power Down

330 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 7 - Service Information

Table 78. Power Down Reasons (continued)

Num- Description Comments
ber

7 Remote Start A Remote Start Timeout power down will occur if the Remote Control does not communicate with the
Timeout controller after an On Line (Remote Control On Key) power up. If the Remote Controller will not
communicate via the J10 serial port that it had initiated the On Line power up, the HMI Control Panel will do
a Remote Start Timeout log and power the HMI Control Panel and Base Controller down.

8 Conservative Mode A Conservative Mode power down complements a Conservative Mode power up. It will be present if the
Conservative Mode has been programmed in the HMI Control Panel. The HMI Control Panel power up
happens at user defined time intervals to document temperature reading on the CargoWatch Sensors.
After the temperature readings are taken, the Conservative Mode power down will turn the HMI Control
Panel off.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 331
Section 7 - Service Information

Base Controller Software Revisions

The Base Controller software family for single temperature applications is D0xx/DAxx. The current single temperature
SR-3 Base Controller software is available on Info Central (Info Central Home > Software Updates > Microprocessors >
SR3 > Single-Temp).
I m p o r t a n t : When necessary to flashload new software to a Base Controller, use the most recent revision available.
I m p o r t a n t : Unless otherwise noted, software upgrades made to units with previous software revisions are not covered
by a warranty labor allowance. The upgrades are made at the discretion of dealers and with the agreement
of the unit owner or operator.
Table 79. Software Revision D000
Dates Features Interchange With:

Production SLX S/T Units from None

• ESA SLX Production release
September 2010 to March 2011
• SR-2 Feature Set
• Supports Damper Gear Motor
• Does not support USB Port

Table 80. Software Revision D005

Dates Features Interchange With:

Production SB S/T Units from None

• NAD Production release
February 2011 to March 2011
• SR-2 Feature Set
• Does not support Damper Gear Motor
• Supports USB Port

Table 81. Software Revision D006

Dates Features Interchange With:

Units with Fresh Air Exchange only Use only for units equipped with
• All D005 and D007 features
starting June 2011 the Fresh Air Exchange feature
• Supports Fresh Air Exchange feature

Table 82. Software Revision D007

Dates Features Interchange With:

Production SB and SLX S/T Units Replaced D005 by Campaign

• All D000 and D005 features
from March 2011 to Current CB528 in all NAD SB Units
• Corrected nuisance refrigeration Alarm Code 21 Cooling Cycle
Check and Alarm Code 26 Check Refrigeration Capacity on SR-
3 units equipped with ETV
• Refer to Service Bulletin SB 872 for details

Table 83. Software Revision D010

Dates Features Interchange With:

Released 2nd Quarter 2011 All previous

• Radio Expansion Board Support
• Configurable HMI Control Panel Soft Keys for SR-3 Single Temp
Applications
• Engine Starter Control Improvements

Table 84. Software Revision D020

Dates Features Interchange With:

Released 3rd Quarter 2011 All previous

• Same feature set as that supported by D010, no need to
upgrade software to D020
• Refer to Service Bulletin SB 894 for details

332 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 7 - Service Information

Table 85. Software Revision D026

Dates Features Interchange With:

Released 2nd Quarter 2012 All previous

• All D006 and D020 features
• Supports an option for a door opening to force high speed
lockout
• Supports an option to enable or disable the door open timeout
alarm (Alarm Code 108)
• Supports an adjustable water temperature setting for engine
start in sleep mode
• Functional enhancements made to Alarm Code 21, Alarm Code
22, Alarm Code 89

Table 86. Software Revision D030

Dates Features Interchange With:

Released 2nd Quarter 2012 All previous

• All D020 features
• Supports Radio Expansion Boards with WiFi capability
• Functional enhancements made to Alarm Code 89
• Supports Maximum Null Time Limit and Minimum Off Time
Limit in standard Cycle-Sentry
• Refer to Service Bulletin SB 917 for details

Table 87. Software Revision D040

Dates Features Interchange With:

Released 4th Quarter 2012 All previous

• Supports Flash Load Over The Air (FLOTA)
• Preheat does not turn on for Engine Start with engine
temperatures above 90 F
• Merge D006/D026 Rail features into D040
• Temperature Range Control
• High Speed Modulation Refinements
• Supports Maximum Null Time and Minimum Off Time Limit in
standard Cycle-Sentry
• Refer to Service Bulletin SB 970 for details

Table 88. Software Revision D060

Dates Features Interchange With:

Released 4th Quarter 2013 All previous

• Alarm Code 42 enhancements
• Cycle-Sentry Minimum Run Time Setting
• Miscellaneous enhancements
• Refer to Service Bulletin SB 969 for details

Table 89. Software Revision D070

Dates Features Interchange With:

Released 4th Quarter 2014 All previous

• Same feature set as that supported by D060, no need to
upgrade software to D070
• Refer to Service Bulletin SB 1009 for details

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 333
Section 7 - Service Information

Table 90. Software Revision D080

Dates Features Interchange With:

Released 2nd Quarter 2015 All previous

• Same feature set as that supported by D060 and D070, no
need to upgrade software to D080
• Refer to Service Bulletin SB 1049 for details

Table 91. Software Revision D090

Dates Features Interchange With:

Released end of 2nd Quarter 2016 All previous

• Enhanced functionality of Fuel Saver II feature
• Miscellaneous enhancements
• Refer to Service Bulletin SB 1085 for details

Table 92. Software Revision D091

Dates Features Interchange With:

Released end of 3rd Quarter 2016 All previous

• Alarm Code 45 enhancements
• Miscellaneous enhancements
• Refer to Service Bulletin SB 1105 for details

Table 93. Software Revision DA00

Dates Features Interchange With:

Released 1st Quarter 2017 All previous

• Added SLXi units
• Added Telematics Status in Maintenance Menu
• Additions to Cycle Sentry Setup
• Added Null Restart Temperature fresh and frozen features
• Refer to Service Bulletin SB 1115 for details

Table 94. Software Revision DA05

Dates Features Interchange With:

Released 2nd Quarter 2017 All previous

• Added SLXi-DRC
• Refer to Service Bulletin SB 1140 for details

Table 95. Software Revision DA10

Dates Features Interchange With:

Released 4th Quarter 2017 All previous

• Added SLXi-Hybrid to Guarded Access > Unit Configuration
menu
• Telematics Staus Menu updates
• Refer to Service Bulletin SB 1167 for details

Table 96. Software Revision DA12

Dates Features Interchange With:

Released 1st Quarter 2018 All previous

• Limited Clutch Slip Alarm Clear feature added to Programmable
Features
• Refer to Service Bulletin SB 1176 for details

334 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 7 - Service Information

Table 97. Software Revision DA15

Dates Features Interchange With:

Released 4th Quarter 2018 All previous

• SLXi Hybrid start sequence improvement
• New engine type TK486VMGS5 (NRMM) will now be viewable in
the Unit Configuration Menu (SLXi unit models only)
• Refer to Service Bulletin SB 1206 for details

Table 98. Software Revision DA20

Dates Features Interchange With:

Released 4th Quarter 2018 All previous

• Alarm Code 48 (check belt or clutch) for 30 models
• Damper blade bounce and nuisance Alarm Code 30 (defrost
damper stuck closed)
• Alarm Code 31 (check oil pressure switch) software
improvements
• NRMM Speed Calibration added to Maintenance Menu
• Solution to CargoWatch logging with TouchPrint printer in
countdown mode
• Additional Q & R improvements
• Refer to Service Bulletin SB 1218 for details

Table 99. Software Revision DA25

Dates Features Interchange With:

Released 2nd Quarter 2020 All previous

• New SLXi Local unit added
• Improvements to engine speed load control during High Speed
• Control algorithm for float type fuel level sensors improved
accuracy
• ServiceWatchTM logging interval remains set to one minute
even after a cold start
• New programmable feature Pharma Defrost added
• PMAX setting for CS modulation improvement
• Improved NRMM fault management
• Refer to Service Bulletin SB 1272 or SB798 for details

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 335
Section 7 - Service Information

HMI Control Panel Software Revisions

The HMI Control Panel software family for single temperature and multi-temperature applications is 65xx/75xx/7Bxx,
66xx/76xx/7Cxx, 67xx/77xx/7Dxx, and 68xx/7Exx. The four versions of software are identical other than the languages
supported. The current SR-3 HMI Control Panel software is available on Info Central (Info Central Home > Software
Updates > Microprocessors > HMI).
I m p o r t a n t : When necessary to flashload new software to an HMI Control Panel, use the most recent revision available.
I m p o r t a n t : Unless otherwise noted, software upgrades made to units with previous software revisions are not covered
by a warranty labor allowance. The upgrades are made at the discretion of dealers and with the agreement
of the unit owner or operator.
Table 100. Software Revision 6550-6650-6750-6850
Dates Features Interchange With:

Production SLX Units from None

• Production release
September 2010 To Current

Table 101. Software Revision 6560-6660-6760-6860

Dates Features Interchange With:

Production SB Units from March None

• Production release
2011 To Current
• Supports USB Communications Port

Table 102. Software Revision 6561-6661-6761-6861

Dates Features Interchange With:

Units with Fresh Air Exchange only Use only for units equipped with
• Supports Fresh Air Exchange feature
starting June 2011 the Fresh Air Exchange feature
• Refer to Service Bulletin TT577 for details

Table 103. Software Revision 7570

Dates Features Interchange With:

Released 2nd Quarter 2011 All previous

• Supports SR-3 HMI-3 8 MB Control Panel
• Supports Radio Expansion Board
• Provides Configurable HMI Control Panel Soft Keys for SR-3
Single Temp
• Refer to Service Bulletin SB 896 for details

Table 104. Software Revision 7576

Dates Features Interchange With:

Released 2nd Quarter 2012 All previous

• Ability to set the ServiceWatch logging intervals with the HMI

Table 105. Software Revision 7580

Dates Features Interchange With:

Released 2nd Quarter 2012 All previous

• Ability to configure the controller to allow the fuel level sensor
to be connected to the REB
• Ability to configure the controller to allow the door switch to be
connected to the REB
• Ability to set the ServiceWatch logging intervals with the HMI
• Ability to select an Automatic SOT at Midnight
• Refer to Service Bulletin SB 917 for details

336 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 7 - Service Information

Table 106. Software Revision 7590

Dates Features Interchange With:

Released 4th Quarter 2012 All previous

• Supports Temperature Range Control
• Supports Maximum Null Time and Minimum Off Time Limit in
standard Cycle-Sentry
• Refer to Service Bulletin SB 970 for details

Table 107. Software Revision 7595

Dates Features Interchange With:

Released 4th Quarter 2012 All previous

• Supports Flash Load Over The Air (FLOTA)
• Preheat does not turn on for Engine Start with engine
temperatures above 90 F.
• Merge D006/D026 Rail features into D040.
• Temperature Range Control
• High Speed Modulation Refinements
• Supports Maximum Null Time and Minimum Off Time Limit in
standard Cycle-Sentry

Table 108. Software Revision 75B0

Dates Features Interchange With:

Released 4th Quarter 2013 All previous

• Cycle-Sentry Minimum Run Time Setting
• Miscellaneous enhancements
• Refer to Service Bulletin SB 969 for details

Table 109. Software Revision 7xC0

Dates Features Interchange With:

Released 4th Quarter 2014 All previous

• Supports Keypad Lock PIN
• New feature High Ambient Discharge Pressure Control
• Refer to Service Bulletin SB 1022 for details

Table 110. Software Revision 7xC1

Dates Features Interchange With:

Released 4th Quarter 2015 All previous

• New feature Discharge Pressure Setpoint
• Refer to Service Bulletin SB 1050 for details

Table 111. Software Revision 7xC2

Dates Features Interchange With:

Released end of 3rd Quarter 2016 All previous

• Added Check Battery Condition Alarm in Guarded Access
• Added unit type for SLXi Whisper Pro Spectrum and SLXi
Spectrum
• New feature Refrigerant Type (SLX/SLXi)
• New feature Unit Serial Number (SLXi)
• New feature Null Restart Temperature (SLXi)
• New feature Decimal Degree Setpoint (SLXi)
• Refer to Service Bulletin SB 1107 for details

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 337
Section 7 - Service Information

Table 112. Software Revision 7x00

Dates Features Interchange With:

Released 1st Quarter 2017 All previous

• Added Telematics Status in Maintenance Menu
• Additions to Cycle Sentry Setup
• Refer to Service Bulletin SB 1107 and SB 1115 for details

Table 113. Software Revision 7x05

Dates Features Interchange With:

Released 1st Quarter 2017 All previous

• Faster boot up time
• HMI Software Revision language package
• Refer to Service Bulletin SB 1134 for details

Table 114. Software Revision 7x10

Dates Features Interchange With:

Released 4th Quarter 2017 All previous

• HMI Reset issue resloved
• Sleep Mode After Pretrip issue resolved
• ServiceWatch Logging intervals updated
• Refer to Service Bulletin SB 1167 for details

Table 115. Software Revision 7x12

Dates Features Interchange With:

Released 1st Quarter 2018 All previous

• Limited Clutch Slip Alarm Clear feature added to Programmable
Features
• Refer to Service Bulletin SB 1176 for details

Table 116. Software Revision 7x15

Dates Features Interchange With:

Released 4th Quarter 2018 All previous

• New engine type TK486VMGS5 (NRMM) will now be viewable in
the Unit Configuration Menu (SLXi unit models only)
• Refer to Service Bulletin SB 1206 for details

Table 117. Software Revision 7x20

Dates Features Interchange With:

Released 4th Quarter 2018 All previous

• NRMM Speed Calibration added to Maintenance Menu
• Recoverable HMI flashload capability via USB added
• Refer to Service Bulletin SB 1218 for details

338 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Section 7 - Service Information

Table 118. Software Revision 7x25

Dates Features Interchange With:

Released 2nd Quarter 2020 All previous

• New SLXi Local unit added
• Improvements to engine speed load control during High Speed
• Control algorithm for float type fuel level sensors improved
accuracy
• ServiceWatchTM logging interval remains set to one minute
even after a cold start
• New programmable feature Pharma Defrost added
• PMAX setting for CS modulation improvement
• Improved NRMM fault management
• Refer to Service Bulletin SB 1272 or SB798 for details

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 339
Section 8 - Diagrams
Diagram Index
The following table lists the SR-3 control system schematic and wiring diagrams. The diagrams are available in the
applicable Maintenance Manual, Diagrams Manual (TK 56504 or TK 56807), Asset Library, or InfoCentral.

Drawing No. Title

1E35057 SLX Schematic Diagram

1E35058 SLX Wiring Diagram

3E31534 SLXi Schematic Diagram

2E98198 SLXi Wiring Diagram

340 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Notes

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 341
Notes

342 TK 56487-2-OD-EN
 Notes

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 343
Thermo King – by Trane Technologies (NYSE: TT), a global climate innovator – is a worldwide leader in sustainable
transport temperature control solutions. Thermo King has been providing transport temperature control solutions
for a variety of applications, including trailers, truck bodies, buses, air, shipboard containers and railway cars since
1938. For more information, visit www.thermoking.com or www.tranetechnologies.com.

Thermo King has a policy of continuous product and product data improvements and reserves the right to change design and specifications
without notice. We are committed to using environmentally conscious print practices.

TK 56487-2-OD-EN 01 Jul 2020

Supersedes TK 56487-2-OD-EN (January 2019) ©2020 Trane Technologies